Handleiding Loewe Bild 3 (pagina 219 van 227) (Engels)

679325

219

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/227

Pagina verder

Loewe bild

bild 9

bild 7

bild 5

bild 4

bild 3

bild 2

bild 1

User handbook

36960023

Loewe bild

User handbook

Imprint

Loewe Technologies GmbH

Industriestraße 11

D-96317 Kronach

www.loewe.tv

Editorial date 11/18-4.0 PS, TB, SB

ID: 5.0.23.0

The screen graphics used are only exemplary. Depending on the device

type, the available hardware/software components may be different.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice

and does not constitute any obligation on the part of Loewe Technolo-

gies GmbH.

All rights including translation, technical modifications and errors

reserved



Imprint

hnolo

ies

mbH

tra

ronac

.tv

itoria

ate

, TB,

Loewe Technolo

ies

mbH, Krona

grap

ics use

are on

y exemp

ary.

epen

ing on t

evice

vailable hardware/software components ma

be different.

ation in this document is sub

ect to cha

e without notice

ot constitute an

obli

tion on the

rt of Loewe Technolo

ll rights

reserve

including translation, technical modifications and errors

Loewe bild

User handbook



Table of contents

Imprint ...........................................................................................2

Welcome ........................................................................................ 5

About this user handbook ........................................................................... 5

Safety/Warning ............................................................................ 6

Technical information ..................................................................8

Remote control button mapping ..............................................10

Operating controls on the TV set ..............................................11

Function of the connections ..................................................... 12

Preparing the TV set .................................................................. 13

Installing the TV set .....................................................................................13

Set covers .....................................................................................................13

Cable fixing ...................................................................................................13

Connecting the TV set ................................................................................14

Switching the TV set ON/OFF ...................................................................16

General information on menu operation ..................................17

On-screen displays .................................................................... 20

Explanation of keys .....................................................................................20

Explanation of symbols .............................................................................20

Automatic menu info .................................................................................20

Permanent clock display ...........................................................................20

Initial installation ....................................................................... 21

Initial installation wizard ..............................................................................21

TV set as a monitor ....................................................................................33

Home view .................................................................................. 34

Home view - EPG search ..........................................................................34

Home view - Favourites .............................................................................35

TV ................................................................................................ 36

Setting the volume .....................................................................................36

Select channel.............................................................................................36

Status display/Info key ..............................................................................38

Menu options ..............................................................................................39

Electronic Programme Guide – EPG........................................................40

Freeview Play ...............................................................................................44

Teletext .........................................................................................................46

HbbTV / MediaText ....................................................................................48

Picture in Picture (PIP) ...............................................................................49

Rotating the TV set .....................................................................................50

Vogels Motion Mount ..................................................................................51

Recordings ..................................................................................53

Digital Recorder ..........................................................................................53

TV viewing with time shift .......................................................................53

Archive recording .....................................................................................54

Multi recording .........................................................................................55

DR+ archive ..............................................................................................56

Streaming .........................................................................................61

Follow me function ...................................................................................61

Multiroom ....................................................................................................62

Timer ............................................................................................................63

Sources ...................................................................................... 66

Video ............................................................................................................68

Video playback ............................................................................................68

Additional functions for DR+ archive playback .......................................71

Audio ............................................................................................................ 74

Audio playback ........................................................................................... 74

Photo ............................................................................................................ 76

Photo playback ...........................................................................................76

Apps ............................................................................................. 78

App Gallery ..................................................................................................78

Browser ........................................................................................................80

DVB radio ......................................................................................................81

Internet radio ...............................................................................................82

Screen Mirroring .........................................................................................83

System settings ........................................................................ 84

Picture ..........................................................................................................85

Sound ........................................................................................................... 89

Surround modus .....................................................................................90

Mimi Defined

.........................................................................................91

Channels ...................................................................................................... 94

Automatic scan TV+Radio .....................................................................95

Manual Scan TV / Radio .........................................................................96

Channel lists TV / Radio .........................................................................98

Compose / edit Personal list ..................................................................99

Update channel list automatically .......................................................100

Transfer all channel lists ........................................................................100

Control ........................................................................................................101

Language ................................................................................................ 102

EPG .......................................................................................................... 102

Parental lock ...........................................................................................103

Energy efficiency .................................................................................... 104

Quick start mode ...................................................................................104

Software update.....................................................................................105

On-screen displays .................................................................................110

Time and date .........................................................................................110

DVB settings .............................................................................................111

PIP ..............................................................................................................111

..........................................................................................................112

Standard Teletext ....................................................................................113

HbbTV ......................................................................................................114

Asterisk key function ..............................................................................114

Rotate TV .................................................................................................115

Display kinematics ..................................................................................116

Hard disks ................................................................................................117

Export log file ...........................................................................................118

Multimedia/Network ................................................................................119

Network settings ....................................................................................120

Multimedia settings ............................................................................... 123

Home Automation ................................................................................. 123

Renderer ................................................................................................. 123

Mobile Recording ................................................................................... 124

Bluetooth ................................................................................................ 125

Amazon Alexa login ............................................................................... 127

.............................................

bout this user handboo

afet

/Warnin

..............................

Technical in

ormation....................

emote contro

utton ma

eratin

controls on the TV se

.........

reparing t

set ......................

nsta

set

...............................

able fixin

Connectin

the TV se

witching the TV set

General information on menu o

n-screen displa

.........................

Explanation of k

................................

Explanation of s

mbol

........................

c menu

ermanent c

isp

nitia

ati

...........................

nitia

insta

ation wizar

........................

set as a monito

...............................

ome vie

.......................................

Home view - EP

.....................

ome view -

avourites

........................

.....................................................

ettin

the volum

Select channel

........................................

Status displa

/Info ke

enu optio

.........................................

Electronic Pro

ramme

uide – EP

...

reeview

..........................................

Tele

....................................................

HbbTV / Medi

Te x

..............................

Picture in Picture

(

..........................

otating t

................................

otion

oun

............................

ecor

ing

ita

ecor

.....................................

V viewing with time shift

..................

rchive recordin

Multi recordin

DR+ archiv

.........................................

treamin

...................................

Mul

tir

oom

...............................................

mer

Loewe bild

User handbook



Table of contents

Connections .............................................................................................. 128

Sound components ..............................................................................129

Antenna DVB .......................................................................................... 134

AV connection settings .........................................................................134

Digital Link ............................................................................................... 135

HDMI ........................................................................................................ 135

Extras ......................................................................................................... 136

DR+ Streaming ......................................................................................136

Integrated features ................................................................................ 137

Reset to factory settings ....................................................................... 137

Dealer mode ...........................................................................................138

Legal matters.......................................................................................... 138

Conditional Access module (CA module) ..........................................139

External devices ....................................................................... 141

Devices to the HDMI connections ...........................................................141

Digital Link HD ........................................................................................... 142

Devices on AV ............................................................................................ 143

Connecting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT) ................................... 145

Connecting the speaker system (DAL) ................................................. 145

Connecting active loudspeakers ............................................................ 146

Connecting the HiFi/AV amplifier ........................................................... 146

Audio playback from external devices ....................................................147

IR-Link .........................................................................................................147

Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12) ..............................................................147

Setting the remote control ......................................................................148

Teaching the remote control ..................................................149

Loewe app ..................................................................................151

Technical data ..........................................................................155

bild 9 .................................................................................................155

Connections rear side of the device (bild 9.65/bild 9.55) .................. 155

Technical data (bild 9.65/bild 9.55) ....................................................... 156

Equipment features (bild 9.65/bild 9.55).............................................. 157

bild 7 .................................................................................................158

Connections rear side of the device (bild 7.77/bild 7.65/bild 7.55) .... 158

Technical data (bild 7.77/bild 7.65/bild 7.55)......................................... 159

Equipment features (bild 7.77/bild 7.65/bild 7.55) ...............................160

bild 5 oled ........................................................................................ 161

Connections rear side of the device (bild 5.65 oled/bild 5.55 oled) ..161

Technical data (bild 5.65 oled/bild 5.55 oled) ...................................... 162

Equipment features (bild 5.65 oled/bild 5.55 oled) ............................. 163

bild 5 .................................................................................................164

Connections rear side of the device (bild 5.55/bild 5.48/bild 5.40) . 164

Connections rear side of the device (bild 5.32 dr+/bild 5.32) ........... 165

Technical data (bild 5.55/bild 5.48/bild 5.40/bild 5.32) .....................166

Equipment features (bild 5.55/bild 5.48/bild 5.40/bild 5.32) ........... 167

bild 4 .................................................................................................168

Connections rear side of the device (bild 4.55) ...................................168

Technical data (bild 4.55) ........................................................................ 169

Equipment features (bild 4.55) ............................................................... 170

System settings (continuation) .............................................128 bild 3 (2017) .....................................................................................171

Connections rear side of the device (bild 3.65 oled/bild 3.55 oled) ..171

Connections rear side of the device (bild 3.49/bild 3.43) ...................172

Technical data (bild 3.65 oled/bild 3.55 oled/bild 3.49/bild 3.43) .....173

Equipment features (bild 3.65 oled/bild 3.55 oled) .............................174

Equipment features (bild 3.49/bild 3.43) ...............................................175

bild 3 ................................................................................................. 176

Connections rear side of the device (bild 3.55/bild 3.48/bild 3.40) ..176

Technical data (bild 3.55/bild 3.48/bild 3.40/bild 3.40 FHD) .............177

Equipment features (bild 3.55 dal/bild 3.48 dal/bild 3.40 dal) ..........178

Equipment features (bild 3.55/bild 3.48/bild 3.40/bild 3.40 FHD) .. 179

bild 3 .................................................................................................180

Position and function of the connections (bild 2.55 oled) ..................180

Position and function of the connections (

bild 2.49 / bild 2.43

) ...........181

Technical data (bild 2.55 oled/bild 2.49/bild 2.43) ............................. 182

Equipment features (bild 2.55 oled/bild 2.49/bild 2.43) .................... 183

bild 1 ..................................................................................................184

Connections rear side of the device (bild 1.65/55) .............................. 184

Connections rear side of the device (bild 1.40/32) .............................. 185

Technical data (bild 1.65/bild 1.55/bild 1.40/bild 1.32) .......................186

Equipment features (bild 1.65/bild 1.55/bild 1.40/bild 1.32).............. 187

bild (across sets) ............................................................................188

Signals via HDMI/AV (PC IN) ..................................................................188

Signal input groups ...................................................................................191

Accessories ............................................................................... 192

Upgrade kits / conversion kits / cables ................................................ 192

Mounting options (bild 9.65/bild 9.55) ................................................. 193

Mounting options (bild 7.77/bild 7.65/bild 7.55) ...................................194

Mounting options (bild 5.65 oled/bild 5.55 oled) ................................ 195

Mounting options (bild 5.55/bild 5.48/bild 5.40/bild 5.32) ............... 196

Mounting options (bild 4.55) .................................................................. 197

Mounting options (bild 3.65 oled/bild 3.55 oled/bild 3.49/bild 3.43) ....

198

Mounting options (bild 3.55/bild 3.48/bild 3.40) ................................ 199

Mounting options (bild 2.55 oled/bild 2.49/bild 2.43).......................200

Mounting options (bild 1.65/bild 1.55/bild 1.40/bild 1.32) .................201

VESA standard ......................................................................................... 202

Environmental ......................................................................... 203

Disposal .................................................................................... 203

Licences ................................................................................... 203

Troubleshooting ...................................................................... 205

CA module error codes ........................................................................... 212

Glossary .................................................................................... 213

EC Declaration of Conformity................................................. 217

Index ..........................................................................................218

Service ...................................................................................... 222

Code page ................................................................................ 223

Loewe bild

User handbook



Welcome

Thank you,

for choosing a Loewe product and having placed your trust in us.

With Loewe you have not simply decided on a modern and technically

innovative TV set, but for timeless design, sharp picture quality, brilliant

sound for movies and music as well as intuitive operation with the

Loewe remote control unit, smart phone or tablet. In short, Loewe is

perfect for home entertainment.

We look forward to welcome you as our customer and hope that you

enjoy your Premium Home Entertainment made by Loewe.

Many features, one result:

perfect Home Entertainment.

Just more entertainment.

The Loewe os user interface is intuitive and graphically

optimised. This is how you quickly find your desired content

– from TV set to online.

See chapter: Home view.

Perfectly networked.

Thanks to its numerous connections, your Loewe TV

becomes your entertainment centre. Connect it to the

Internet, DVD/Blu-ray player, external speakers, etc.

Hard disk for your TV archive.

Record the TV programme or pause it and continue watching

it at a later date.

Depending on the set type, on an externally connected USB

hard drive or the hard drive installed in the TV set

With DR+ (Digital Recording), all this is no problem for your

Loewe TV set.

See chapter: Digital Recorder.

Your contact person.

We are happy to help you with any questions regarding your

TV set and other Loewe products.

In the user handbook refer to Service.

Customer

Care

Center

About this user handbook

For best results regarding safety and the longevity of the set, we

recommend you read the chapter Safety/Warning before switching

the TV set on for the first time.

This user handbook can be used for all current Loewe bild TV sets. The

equipment and function scope varies according to set type.

The Technical data chapter is structured according to set lines and

gives you information about the features of your TV set.

For differences in the functional descriptions, refer to the features in

the Technical data chapter.

The chapter glossary gives explanations of certain terms used in the

TV set and the user handbook.

Paragraphs which begin with the symbol

indicate important

instructions, tips or conditions for the following settings.

Terms which you will find in the menus or printed on the remote control

or TV set are written in bold type.

The necessary control elements are shown in the descriptions to the

left of the text containing the instructions for action.

Depending on the connected accessory equipment the menus in the

TV set can differ from those described here. The screen graphic dis-

played is only an example. Depending on the device type, the available

hardware/software components may be different.

All the channel names, programme contents, the illustrated photos,

titles, albums and album covers in this user handbook are examples.

In addition to the remote control, a PC keyboard can be connected to

one of the USB ports on your TV and then used to control your TV set.

In the user handbook, this symbol indicates places in

which the use of a keyboard is particularly advantageous.

With the Loewe app, you can also comfortably enter addresses or

search terms. Simply mark the input field for this, the Loewe app

displays automatically a keyboard symbol. Open Loewe app keyboard,

enter and confirm.

The user handbook is updated at irregular intervals. We recommend an

occasional examination on the Support Portal of the Loewe homepage.

General information on the operation of the

TV set

For further information on the user interface and the general operation

of your TV set see chapter General information on the operation.

Important information

Loewe does not accept any liability for the nature and content of

receivable Internet services. This also applies to the Loewe MediaNet

portal. With its devices, Loewe provides the technical platform that

fundamentally enables such material to be received. Loewe cannot

make any guarantees regarding changes in scope and content,

particularly with regard to the future and after going to press. The

receivable online services are not included in the delivery and can vary

depending on the product and country.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook



Safety/Warning

For your safety, and to avoid unnecessary damage to your unit, please

read and follow the safety instructions below.

Key

This symbol indicates risks caused by high voltages.

This symbol indicates dangers caused by the development

of fire.

This symbol should alert the user to other, more specific risks.

This symbol indicates dangers caused by sharp edges.

Do not remove set rear panel

Warning: When opening or removing the rear panel, there is the dan-

ger of electric shock and the risk of serious injury from high voltages.

Never open the rear panel yourself. Leave repairs and servicing work

on your TV set to qualified, authorised television technicians.

Please contact your dealer or our customer service.

Intended use and environmental conditions

This TV set is intended exclusively for the reception and

playback of picture and sound signals.

The TV set is designed for dry rooms (living rooms and office

spaces). It must not be operated in spaces with high humidity

(for example, near or in a bath or sauna).

We point out that our TV sets can react sensitively to dust and

soot particles in the ambient air.

Excessive amounts of these can lead to damage to the set, up

to loss of function.

Ensure a clean environment, so that your set will not be

damaged.

High humidity and dust concentrations lead to power leaks in

the set. This can lead to danger of injury and damage to the set

by electric tensions or a fire.

If the set is used outdoors, make sure therefore that it is

protected against moisture (rain, dripping or splashing water

or condensation).

If you’ve brought the set from the cold into a warm environment,

leave it off for around an hour due to the formation of

condensation.

Do not place objects filled with liquid on the

set. Protect the set from dripping and

splashing water.

Candles and other open flames must be

kept away from the set at all times, to pre-

vent the spread of fire.

Transport

Improper handling during transportation can lead to damage

to the display and risks of injury.

The screen consists of glass or plastic and can break if handled

improperly.

Only transport the set in a vertical position.

No pressure should be applied to the glass or the plastic during

transport.

For TV sets with OLED screen:

Only handle the TV set at the display corners. The correct

handling is shown in operating instructions 1, which are

enclosed with the TV set.

Do not place it on the lower edge so as to reduce the danger of

damage and contamination.

For TV sets with Loewe Eye:

Make sure that the Loewe Eye is not damaged when

transporting / handling the TV set.

The TV sets with OLED screen of the set product lines bild 3,

bild 4 and bild 5 have a different packaging concept from bild

7 and bild 9.

With these sets you can, as a protective box is located in front

of the display, after unpacking the device, also place this on this

protective box, also on the front side.

The TV sets of the device product lines bild 9 and bild 7 must

not be placed on the front side (display surface).

For TV sets with LCD screen:

Grasp the set by the edges of the housing at the bottom and at

the top.

Do not place it on the lower edge so as to reduce the danger of

damage and contamination.

For TV sets with Loewe Eye:

Make sure that the Loewe Eye is not damaged when

transporting / handling the TV set.

If the set needs to be stored during packing / unpacking, place

the TV set with the entire surface of the front side on a soft

underlay. Use as an underlay, for example a blanket or fleece

from the packaging material.

In the event of damage to the LCD screen and any leaking liquid

crystal, be sure to use rubber gloves to remove the set.

In case of skin contact with the fluid, clean immediately with

plenty of water.

Mains cable/power supply

Incorrect voltages can damage the set.

This set may only be connected to a mains power supply with

the voltage and frequency indicated on the rating plate using

the existing

/ enclosed mains cable.

The mains power plug of the TV set must be easily accessible

so that the set can be disconnected from the mains at any time.

When pulling the mains power plug out, do not pull the cable

but the plug housing. The cables in the mains power plug could

be damaged and cause a short circuit when plugged in again.

A mains power cable with a damaged insulation can lead to

electric shock and presents a fire hazard. Never use a damaged

mains cable.

Lay the mains cables so that they cannot be damaged. Do not

tread on the mains cable.

The mains cable must not be kinked or laid over sharp edges.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

WARNUNG

STROMSCHLAGGEFAHR –

NICHT ÖFFNEN

Loewe bild

User handbook



Safety/Warning

Air circulation and high temperatures

Like any electronic device, your TV set requires air for cooling.

If air circulation is impeded, it may result in a fire.

The ventilation slots on the rear panel of

the set must therefore remain free.

Please do not cover the set.

Wall mounting: Leave at least 10 cm of

space all around the set at the side,

above and below.

Table / stand foot: Leave at least 10 cm

clear space around the set at the side

and at the top.

Foreign bodies

Foreign bodies inside of the set can lead to short circuits and

fires.

Danger of injury and damage exists

Therefore avoid metal parts, needles, paper clips, liquids, wax

or similar passing through the ventilation slits of the rear

panel into the interior of the set.

Should something get into the interior of the appliance, im-

mediately pull out the mains power plug of the set and inform

the customer service department for checking.

Installation

Opting for an incorrect or wrongly mounted installation can

lead to danger of accidents Rolling or falling sets can cause

injuries or damage.

Loewe TV sets are specified for Loewe accessories. We strongly

recommend the use of original Loewe installation options.

Do not use any installation options that are not approved for

your TV set!

Note the instructions regarding the mounting for the different

possible installation options! A corresponding documentation

is included with every Loewe product.

Check before the installation of the set, whether the final loca-

tion with regard to the surface (pressure sensitivity) and stabil-

ity (static) is designed for the load from the set! This applies in

particular to high-gloss lacquered surfaces and surfaces made

of real wood, real wood veneer and plastic surfaces.

Only place the TV set on a levelled, stable, horizontal base with

table or stand foot! The set should especially not protrude at

the front when installing in or on furniture.

Not placing the television set on cloth or other materials that

may be located between television set and supporting furniture.

Educating children about dangers of climbing on furniture to

reach the television set or its controls.

The usual usage position of the TV set should be followed. The

TV set can only be operated horizontally upright

. The

inclination can amount to a maximum of 10 degrees for wall

mounting

. The TV set must never be operated in portrait

orientation,

, horizontal

or overhead on the ceiling

Position the set so that it is not exposed to direct sunlight and

additional heating from radiators!

Do not place the TV in a location where vibrations can arise!

This can lead to damage.

In the case of installation options for third-party manufacturers

with a motor drive, it is to be ensured that the adjustment of the

TV set does not occur manually. It is generally not advisable to

use the installation options of other manufacturers with locking

devices in certain positions.

When using accessories from third-party manufacturers, it is

to be ensured that the TV set is easily adjusted for the respec-

tive installation option.

When adjusting the TV set, ensure that

the pressure applied to the set frame

is not too great. Especially in large

format displays, there is the danger

of damaging the display.

For TV sets with OLED:

OLED technology allows for a design with an extremely thin dis-

play. When you have mounted your TV set on a non-motorized

installation option, avoid over excessive force when rotating

the TV set.

For TV sets with VESA mounting points:

The mounting of a TV set on a On a holder according to the

VESA standard requires mandatory use of the VESA adapter

bolts. Otherwise, damage to the TV may result.

The Vesa adapter bolts must be attached to the TV set with a

torque of circa 4 Nm. You can obtain these from your Loewe

dealer (you can find further information in chapter Miscellane-

ous, section VESA standard).

Make sure that after unpacking and setting up the TV set the

packaging material (TV box, Styrofoam shells and protective

fleece) does not fall carelessly into the hands of children.

Please also note the disposal instructions for packaging and

carton (see chapter Environment / Legal information, sec-

tion Disposal).

±10°

A B

Loewe bild

User handbook

Supervision

Do not let unsupervised children handle the TV set nor let them

play immediately around the TV set!

The set could be knocked over, moved or pulled down from the

stand surface and injure people.

Do not leave the TV set when switched on unattended!

Volume

Loud music can lead to hearing damage. Avoid extreme sound

volume, especially over extended periods of time and when

using headphones!

Thunderstorms

During thunderstorms, pull out the mains power plug and all

connected antenna cables from the TV set!

If you have connected a network cable to the LAN port, remove

this as well!

Over-voltages due to lightning strike can damage the set both

via the antenna system and via the mains power supply.

Even in the case of prolonged absence, the mains power plug

and all connected antenna cables should be disconnected from

the TV set.

Cleaning and care/chemicals

Before cleaning, switch the TV set off using the mains power

switch!

Damages caused by chemicals can lead to adverse effects and

development of fire.

Never expose the set or accessories to aggressive (for example,

corrosive) chemicals such as alkalis or acids!

Only clean the TV set, the front screen and the remote control

with a damp, soft, clean and colour neutral cloth, without any

aggressive or scouring cleaning agents!

For TV sets with textile-covered speaker panel:

Hoover the surface regularly with a soft brush attachment!

On stains or dirt, moisten a soft, colour neutral cloth with de-

tergent solution or commercially available stain remove and

rub the stain gently away! You can also treat the stain directly

with a commercial dry stain remover spray (hoover up the

dust).

Do not moisten the covering fabric directly with detergent solu-

tion or stain remover (risk of stain circle formation)! Do not use

solvents to clean the fabric!

Note the usage instructions of the manufacturer when using

stain remover!

When cleaning loudspeaker panels which have been exposed

to nicotine, there is an increased risk of stain circle formation.

TV sets with 3D function

Read the following safety instructions before using the 3D

function of your TV set.

Please use the Loewe 3D TV sets only with the Loewe 3D

glasses which can be purchased as an accessory from your

Loewe dealer.

People with a visual disorder may not be able to perceive 3D

effects or may only be able to perceive them to a limited extent.

People who are sensitive to flickering images (e.g. those with

epilepsy) should only use the 3D function after having consulted

their doctor.

It might take some time for you to get used to the 3D glasses

and before you can perceive the 3D effects properly.

Stop using the 3D function immediately if you experience

any feelings of nausea, dizziness or malaise when viewing 3D

content.

Supervise children whilst they are viewing 3D content, as they

can be particularly sensitive to it.

Allow more time for a break after having watched 3D movies,

so that you are able to relax. Failure to do so could result in

headaches, fatigue, dizziness or malaise.

Position yourself comfortably in front of the 3D TV set and en-

sure that you are seated firmly. By doing this, you will avoid any

injuries that may occur due to reacting to extreme 3D content.

Technical information

Instructions on the built-in / connected hard drive

Switching off the TV set with the mains switch during operation or

an inadvertent disruption to the power supply (e.g., power failure)

can cause damage to the hard disk file system and hence loss of the

recorded broadcasts.

Never ever disconnect the USB storage device from the TV set during

a copy process. Before switching off the set with the mains switch, we

recommend you to switch it to standby mode.

If, contrary to expectation, you are still experiencing problems with the

operation of the hard drive, you can first carry out a test. In addition,

a formatting of the hard disk can be remedy. In the process, however,

all content on the hard disk is deleted. You can find the corresponding

menu items under System settings ט Control ט more...טHard

disks.

Loewe are not liable for the loss of data on the integrated hard disk

of your TV set. To avoid data loss, we recommend copying important

recordings to an external storage medium.



Safety/Warning

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

Notes on the LCD / OLED screen

The TV set with LCD screen or OLED screen purchased by you meets

the highest quality standards and has been checked for pixel errors.

Despite of thorough care when manufacturing the display, it cannot

be 100% guaranteed that no subpixel defects will occur due to techni-

cal reasons.

Please understand that these types of effects, as long as they are

within the limits specified in the standard, cannot be considered as a

device defect in terms of the guarantee.

For TV sets with LCD:

Avoid displaying static images over a longer period. Image persistence

errors may arise.

For TV sets with OLED:

Organic Light Emitting Diodes are an image technology based on

self-luminous pixels that offer clear benefits in terms of image quality

and performance.

Under certain conditions, persistent, one-sided loads on the OLED

material can result in persistence image faults which are irreversible.

Residual image issues can arise by using static image content over a

longer period, such as static images, subtitles or ticker displays, loop-

ing dia-shows or video sequences, static displays serving as presenta-

tion monitors or with video games, black bars in some screen formats.

These residual image issues are not defects within the meaning of

the warranty.

To minimise such issues, Loewe has developed a special algorithm

for detecting image content.

If static images are displayed for too long, the TV set automatically

switches to a screen-friendly contrast mode. After a new user opera-

tion, the device immediately returns to its normal state. In addition,

menu insertions are gradually reduced or displayed transparently

after one minute.

Under normal viewing conditions, such residual image issues do not

arise.

Notes on Kinematics

The Loewe TV sets types bild 9 and bild 7 are equipped with a kinemat-

ics that moves the TV set upwards or downwards when switching it on

and off, whereby the speaker cover is visible or is hidden.

Please make sure that there is no externally applied force opposing the

movement. You have the option to fix the position of the kinematics

from the menu, or disable the function.

You can find further information in the chapter System settings,

section Control – Display kinematics.

Software update

It is possible to update the software on your Loewe TV set.

In the software update (package update) all the software releases in

the TV set are scanned and updated as required.

You can find further information in the chapter System settings,

section Control – Software update.



Safety/Warning

Information about OLED calibration

Only for set types with OLED display

To maintain the high quality of picture display permanently, your Loewe

TV set calibrates itself automatically at regular intervals. In this way,

excess TFT capacitors are discharged and so-called image sticking

effects / „ghost images“ are eliminated.

When switching off the TV set from the remote control, where neces-

sary, the calibration process is started and lasts for a maximum of

thirty minutes.

During this period, the power supply to the TV set must not be inter-

rupted.

After the calibration is complete, the TV set switches to Standby mode.

Calibration does not take place during normal TV operation and so will

not have any negative impact on usage of the TV set.

If calibration is terminated by switching the set back on prematurely,

the TV-set will attempt to perform a recalibration again the next time

the TV is switched off.

You still have the possibility to start a refresh procedure manually by

means of the user menu of your Loewe TV set.

Call OLED calibration

HOME: Call Home view.

 Select System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Select Picture,

 go to next column.

 Select more ...,

 call other settings.

Select OLED calibration,

OKCall.

A calibration of the OLEDs is required every 1500 hours. This also starts

automatically when the TV set is switched off using the remote control.

Calibration lasts one hour maximum. If calibration was not finished

properly, an on-screen image will indicate this.

After the calibration is complete, the TV set switches to Standby mode.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook



Remote control

The assignment of these keys can be changed. The description refers to the standard setting. The factory setting of the keys can vary depending on the firmware version of the

remote control.

Depending on the settings HbbTV mode on/off, start behaviour of HbbTV channel (System Settings

ט

Control

ט

more ...

HbbTV)

Depending on the set type, on an externally connected USB hard drive or the hard drive installed in the TV set (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set)

Remote control button mapping

Depending on the selected operating mode (TV/Video/Audio/Photo/Apps) and function (e.g. DR+, EPG, PIP, Teletext, HbbTV, etc.), the key assignment

may differ from the assignment described here (see the corresponding chapter).

Sound mute/on.

LED display for currently operated device.

Call the TV mode.

Reassign remote control to Set-Top-Box

(presetting: Apple TV).

Pressing briefly

: Open the DR+ archive.

ressing longer

: Call timer.

Pressing briefly

: Add current object to Home favourites.

ressing longer

: Open App Gallery. (standard assignment)

EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) on/off.

Teletext/MediaText

on/off.

Pressing briefly

: Call menu options for the active operating mode.

ressing longer

: Call System settings.

V+/V- increase/reduce volume.

Pressing briefly

Call channel list.

Pressing longer

: Call

expanded channel list.

In the menu: confirm/call up.

Green coloured key: screen on/off in Audio/Radio mode.

Red coloured key: call preferred value-added network service, if available

(

Pressing briefly: skip backwards.

Pressing longer: winding backwards.

Pressing briefly: direct recording (with determination of recording duration)

(

Pressing longer: One Touch Recording

(

Pause / Start/pause the timeshift television

(

Stop / End timeshift (return to live image)

(

Pressing briefly: skip forwards.

Pressing longer: winding forwards.

Play / Start/continue timeshift television

(

Blue coloured key: call channel menu options

(selection of language/sound, subtitles or channel/video track).

Pressing briefly: Yellow coloured key: call history.

Pressing longer: Yellow coloured key: call last channel.



Navigation on the user interface, select objects.

In the menu / lists: select/set.

P+/P– next/previous channel.

Pressing briefly: step / level back.

Pressing long: close all displays.

Press briefly during an on-screen display: info display. Info text appropriate to the content

that can assist you further, should you have any questions about your TV set.

Press briefly, without on-screen display: access status display. With status display open

and repeatedly pressing the key call the detailed information on the broadcast.

Press longer: show Explanation of keys.

PIP (picture in picture) on/off.

Call up the Home view.

Select channels with numeric buttons directly.

In the menu: enter numbers or letters

Call Sources.

Reassign remote control to video device

(presetting: BluTech Vision 3D).

Call radio mode (standard assignment)

Switches the TV set on (mains switch must be turned on) or switches to standby mode.

Press briefly while TV set is switched on: TV set and all CEC-enabled devices connected to

the HDMI ports will be switched off to standby (System Standby).

Loewe bild

User handbook

Display:

white: TV set in standby.

Depending on the ambient brightness, the

white LED display is dimmed and lights

up with a different degree of brightness

(OPC)

(1

If the TV set is in quick start mode, the

white LED display is not dimmable and

starts with full brightness.

white, intermittent:

TV set starts.

green: TV set switched on.

red: timer recording active.

blue:

TV set in standby and background operation active (EPG

data updating, software update or streaming server

function

, OLED calibration

IR receiver:

Infrared receiver for receiving the remote control commands.

Key M / joystick direction M:

TV set in standby mode: switch on TV set with the last selected

mode (TV/Radio).

TV set switched on: call direct control on TV set.

Direct control on TV set: up .

Key R / joystick direction R:

TV set in standby mode: switch on TV set with the last selected

mode (TV/Radio).

TV set switched on: toggle TV mode and radio mode.

Direct control on TV set: down .

Key V+ /joystick direction +:

TV set in standby mode: switch on TV set with the last selected

mode (TV/Radio).

TV set switched on: Increase volume.

Direct control on TV set: to the right .

Key V– /joystick direction – :

TV set in standby mode: switch on TV set with the last selected

mode (TV/Radio).

TV set switched on: Reduce volume.

Direct control on TV set: to the left .

Key P +:

TV set switched on: Programmme + (next channel).

Key P –:

TV set switched on: Programme – (previous channel).

On/Off button / Press joystick:

Switching on in standby mode

Switching off to the standby mode



Operating controls on the TV set

Mains switch:

Always return the TV set to Standby mode before switching it off

with the main switch.

The position of the mains supply switch for your TV set can be

found in the chapter Technical data.

Infrared transmitter:

When showing 3D content

, the 3D glasses Loewe Active

Glasses 3D are controlled via the infrared sensor.

Availability and position varies according to device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

V+

V-

P+

P-

Loewe bild

User handbook



Function of the connections

The position, availability and number of connections on your TV set vary depending on the set type.

Detailed information on the position and function of the connections for your TV set type can be found in the chapter Technical data.

Connection: Labelling: Function:

AC IN

Mains connection

LAN

Network connection

HDMI 1 ARC

HDMI input 1 (with Audio Return Channel)

HDMI 2

HDMI input 2

HDMI 3

HDMI input 3

HDMI 4

HDMI input 4

ANT TV

Antenna/cable analogue / DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C

ANT SAT 1

Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1) DVB-S/S2

ANT SAT 2

Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 2) DVB-S/S2

SPDIF OUT

Audio output (digital)

USB 3.0

USB connection

USB

USB connection

HEADPHONE

Headphone connection

AUDIO OUT

Audio output (analogue) L/R

RS-232C

Serial interface

Micro AV socket

MOTOR UNIT

Rotating stand control

DIGITAL AUDIO LINK

Surround audio outputs (digital)

COMMON INTERFACE

CI slot

Slot for Kensington lock

Loewe bild

User handbook

Installing the TV set

Mounting options / Installation notes

Your Loewe dealer can also assist you in finding other mounting

options. Look for the corresponding directions in the installation

instruction.

Choose a place for installing your TV set where no bright light or

sunlight shines directly onto the screen. This could cause reflections

which impair the picture.

3 times the screen diagonal can be taken as a guide value for the

viewing distance (e.g., for a 55-inch set approx. 4.2 m for SD signal).

The viewing distance can be reduced with an HD/UHD signal.

Set covers

Covers for rear and side connections

In order to remove the rear side cable covers pull them simply from

the device.

To fit the cover, insert the lugs at the top edge of the cover into the

corresponding cut-outs in the rear panel and push up the cover until

it snaps in.

The side cover of the TV set can also be completely removed. For this,

open it as far as it will go and gently pull on the open cover.

The cover detaches from the holder and gives free access to the con-

nection area. To insert the cover, simply push it back onto the holders.

A cable bushing connects the lateral and posterior terminal region. In

this way you can pass the cables of the lateral connections through

and lay them out together with the rear connecting cables.



Preparing the TV set

Cable fixing

Using the Velcro cable tie supplied, you can fix the rear cables.

When the TV set is mounted on the Table Stand, the connection cables

are fixed to the Table Stand (see figure).

When using a wall bracket (Wall Mount is available as an accessory

from your specialist dealer), the connection cables are fixed to the

two recesses on the rear of the set (see figure).

If the set type

is equipped

with a removable cable holder, you

can additionally fix the rear connection cables to the rear wall of the

housing.

Table Stand

Wall Mount

A A

Availability different according to set type.

Loewe bild

User handbook

Connecting the TV set

Connecting to the mains supply

Remove the cover for the connections.

Connect the TV set to a 220-240V mains socket:

With built in mains cable: Connect the mains supply plug of the mains

supply cable attached to the TV to a power outlet.

With external mains cable: First plug the smaller plug (small set plug)

of the mains supply cable into the mains supply connector (AC IN)

of the TV set and then connect the larger plug (Euro plug) to a mains

supply socket.

Connecting antennas

Cable (analogue)/DVB-C/DVB-T antenna:

Plug the cable of antenna, cable TV system or room antenna into the

ANT TV socket.

If you want to use analogue cables/DVB-C connection and a DVB-T

antenna together, use an external antenna switch (available from

your dealer).

Satellite antenna DVB-S:

Depending on the used satellite system, connect a connecting cable

from the multi-switch or directly from the LNC to the ANT SAT1 and

ANT SAT2 sockets of the TV set respectively.

When connecting the TV set to a single cable community antenna,

connect the ANT SAT1 and ANT SAT2 sockets directly to the

appropriate SAT antenna socket.

AC IN

ANT

SAT1

ANT

SAT2

R TV

Cable

analogue /

DVB-C

DVB-T DVB-S

When connecting the TV set to a DiSEqC single cable community

antenna (in accordance with EN 50494), connect the ANT SAT1

socket directly to the appropriate SAT antenna socket.

For a DiSEqC single-cable shared system, you only need in principal

only one antenna cable. The further sub-division of the signal to

the two reception pathways is transferred by the satellite tuner of

the TV set.

If you want to use two transmission channels of the DiSEqC single-

cable shared system (for example, for different channels main

picture / PIP picture), both channels are received on a SAT antenna

cable.

In the antenna configuration one antenna cable must be provided.

It is possible to reuse an existing SAT cabling with two connection

cables on a DiSEqC single-cable shared system. However, the

system components used (sockets, distributors, etc.) must be

designed for DiSEqC operation.

If you want to use two channels of the DiSEqC single-cable shared

system (for example, for a different channels main picture / PIP

picture), then one channel will be received per SAT antenna cable.

In the antenna configuration, two antenna cables and the number

of used channels thus also must be set to “two“ .

Ask your dealer in this regard.

Connecting the TV set to the Home network

You may link your TV set to the home network by a wired connection

(Ethernet, Powerline adapters separately available) or by a wireless

radio connection (WLAN). For wireless connections, the TV set has

an internal WLAN antenna.

In order to play back data from your home network your Loewe TV

supports the UPnP AV standard.

You call the network wizard to configure the network adaptor (System

settingsטMultimedia/NetworkטNetwork settingsטNet-

working).

Under no circumstances may the TV set be wired and at the same

time connected by a wireless connection to the same network, e.g.

router. This may cause severe operational faults!

Example for a wired connection

Connect the LAN socket of your TV set to the LAN switch/router of

your home network with a network cable (available from your dealer).

DSL

LAN

LAN switch/router

TV set



Preparing the TV set

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook



Preparing the TV set

Example for a wireless connection

You can connect the TV set to your home network by a wireless radio

connection via the WLAN antenna inside the set.

Shadow effects of various materials, such as reinforced concrete,

metal surfaces, etc., attenuate the WIFI signal sometimes

significantly or completely.

Help for configuration problems

Loewe cannot provide any support for PC hardware and software or

network components owing to the diverse configuration options with

home networks.

Please contact the administrator of your home network and/or specialist

dealer for support when setting up and for maintenance of network

connections, storage media, media server software and network devices

such as routers.

DSL

WLAN router

TV set

Preparing the remote control unit

Removing the battery protection

The remote control is supplied with batteries. To make them ready for

use, remove the plastic flag out as shown below.

Inserting or replacing batteries

Press on the embossed arrow whilst pushing the battery cover down.

Only use leak-proof micro-cells of the LR 03 (AAA) Alkali-Manganese

type. Do not use different types of batteries and old and new batteries

together.

Make sure that the batteries do not get into the hands of children.

The batteries used must not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunlight, fire or similar!

The position of the batteries is indicated in the battery compartment

(in opposite directions). Pay attention to the correct polarity of +

and – when inserting the batteries.

Do not be guided by the battery

contacts (springs), but by the illustration at the bottom of the battery

compartment.

If the batteries are too weak after longer use, the TV set prompts you to

change the batteries. Dispose of used batteries in an environmentally

friendly way (see chapter Environment/Legal information).

Push the cover back on from below after having inserted the batteries.

Adjusting the remote control unit for operating the TV set

Press the TV key.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Switching the TV set ON/OFF

Switching TV set to the standby mode

Put the mains supply switch into Pos I .

The LED display lights up white for a short time. The set now finds

itself in the standby mode.

Meaning of the LED colours:

white: TV set in standby.

Depending on the ambient brightness, the

white LED display is dimmed and lights

up with a different degree of brightness

(OPC)

(1

If the TV set is in quick start mode, the

white LED display is not dimmable and

starts with full brightness.

white, intermittent:

TV set starts.

green: TV set switched on.

red: timer recording active.

blue:

TV set in standby and background opera-

tion active (EPG data updating, software

update or streaming server function

OLED Calibration

After switching on the TV set, it takes a few seconds for further oper-

ating commands to be processed (Exception: Quick start mode, see

chapter System settings, section Control – Quick start mode).

Your TV set is ready for operation once the LED display lights green.

Switching the TV set on by means of the remote control

Press the on/off key.

Or:

Press the TV key.

The previously watched channel will be called.

Or:

Press numerical keys 1-9.

The corresponding channel will be called.

After switching on the TV set, it takes a few seconds for further oper-

ating commands to be processed (Exception: Quick start mode, see

chapter System settings, section Control – Quick start mode).

Your TV set is ready for operation once the LED display lights green.

Switching the set off with the remote control (Standby)

Press the on/off key.

Switch TV set and all CEC-capable devices connected

to the HDMI interfaces OFF to Standby mode.

Before switching off the set with the mains switch,

we recommend you to switch it to standby mode.

Quick start mode

If you choose to activate the quick start mode, you will see the TV

screen immediately after each switching on of the TV set and without

any waiting time. You can specify the times at which your device will

be in the Quick Start Mode (see chapter System settings, section

Control – Quick start mode).

In this case, please note the higher power consumption (see chapter

Technical data) and thus a higher annual energy consumption.

Default setting for the Quick Start Mode: off

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

General information on menu operation

The most important keys for navigation will be explained in general.

The numbers in the text refer to the figure showing the remote control

in chapter Remote control.

The arrow keys

help you to navigate in the menus and lists of the

TV set and for selecting menu items. They are arranged in the middle

of the remote control in a circle around the OK key

. Later in this

user handbook they will be represented as follows:

 Select the desired item.

The OK key

is used to confirm a selection, for calling the highlighted

menu item and for opening the channel list. In this user handbook, an

instruction for this key looks like the following:

OKconfirm.

Using the numerical keys of your remote control

you enter

programme channels and teletext pages directly. With key

you

open the source menu. In this user handbook, entering numbers with

numerical keys is shown as follows:

Entering programme channel directly.

The numerical keys are also used to enter text (see chapter General

information on menu operation,section Entry of characters by

remote control).

The Home view is the central overview page for all of your TV set‘s

operating modes. You reach Home view with the HOME key

HOME: Call Home view.

A short key stroke on the BACK

key takes you back one level in a

menu. A longer pressing of the BACK key closes all opened windows.

An example for the BACK key in this user manual:

BACK: Stop text entry and exit entry box.

With the keys 

and 

, you can jump back and forth in the

various wizards (for example, initial start up, etc.).

Call up next step.

Call up previous step.

Pressing longer on the INFO key

displays an explanation of the

most important key functions of the current operating mode (e.g. TV

mode, teletext, PIP, etc.).

Structure of the Menu screen

Basically, the structure of the different menu screens is similar,

depending on the fact if a wizard, rendering media content or a setup

menu are concerned. The structure is explained by means of three

different illustrations.

Screen structure: Wizard

(A) Title bar with name of the wizard and the current operating step.

(B) Selected items, whose number can be different according to the

operating step.

Screen structure: Rendering of media content (example:

Audio player)

(A) Cover display (if available).

(B) Time line.



General information on menu operation

Loewe bild

User handbook



General information on menu operation

Screen structure: Setup (example: picture)

(A) Selected function in the Home overview (here: system settings)

(B) Home Menu System settings, with selected menu item Picture.

(D) Help text for the selected menu item Picture > Contrast.

Navigation: Selection of elements (example: On-screen displays)

Highlighting and thus selecting the symbols/elements or menu items

on the screen can be effected by the arrow keys on the remote control.

So you can see all the time where you are. As soon as there is a bar

above a symbol or text, this is a selected element.

(A) Selectable elements / menu items.

(B) The writing of the line in which the relevant selectable menu item

can be found is white.

to the menu item to be set.

The position of the marking is to see by a grey rectangle.

The newly selected menu item must be confirmed by selecting

OK. The previously active item’s text colour will change to grey;

the newly selected item will change to white.

A CB

Navigation: Wizards

If the menu item(s) (marked white) is/are already

correctly preset:

Go to next step.

Otherwise:

Mark menu point which should be changed.

OK confirm.

The font colour of the prior active point changes

to grey.

Go to next step.

Navigation: Element selection in lists using initials

Using the numerical keys of the remote control you can jump into list,

e.g., Internet radio channel lists.

If the list is sorted in alphabetical order, you jump to the entered letter.

For example, when pressing the key 7 three times you jump to the first

list element starting with letter R.

In case of numerical sorting, you can directly select the channels

with the numerical keys.

Loewe bild

User handbook



General information on menu operation

Entering characters with on-screen keyboard

For certain functions, entering letters or characters is required. An

on-screen keyboard appears for entering text.

 Select character/on-screen button,

OK Adopt character.

If a small symbol is displayed next to a letter,

further long letters can be selected by pressing

the OK button (2 seconds).

For the selection of special characters use the .-/

field.

To conclude the entry:

 Select Adopt,

OK confirm the selection.

With the Loewe app, you can also comfortably enter

addresses or search terms. Simply mark the input

field for this, the Loewe app displays automatically

a keyboard symbol. Open Loewe app keyboard,

enter and confirm.

Entry of characters by remote control

Alternatively to the on-screen keyboard you can also enter the desired

characters by means of the remote control (as with the keypad of a

mobile phone).

 Select text entry field.

Under the 1st letter of the name you will see a line

indicating the current input position.

Input position one character to the right (also for

blanks).

Input position one character to the left.

Input the letters one after another. When using the

remote control, press the numerical keys just as on

a mobile phone keypad (0-9) until the desired symbol

is displayed. The available letters are printed on the

individual numeric buttons.

You find the exact key assignment in the character

table in the right column.

To conclude the entry:

 Select Adopt,

OK confirm the selection.

Table of characters for entering text by means of the remote

control

Key Characters (uppercase - lowercase)

[space] 1

A B C 2 Ä Æ Ã Å Ā À Á Ć Ç Č - a b c 2 ä æ ã å ā â à á ć ç č

D E F 3 Ė Ë Ē Ę Ê È É - d e f 3 ė ë ē ę ê è é

G H I 4 Ï Ī Į Î Ì Í - g h i 4 ï ī į î î ì í

J K L 5 - j k l 5

M N O 6 Ö O E Õ Ō Ô Ò Ó Ø - m n o 6 ń ñ ö o e õ ō ô ò ó ø

P Q R S 7 ß - p q r s 7 ß

T U V 8 Ü Ū Û Ù Ú - t u v 8 ü ū û ù ú

W X Y Z 9 - w x y z 9

. 0 - / _ : + , ; ? ! = & # % ~ @ $ * ’ ( ) ” § \ { } [ ] < > ´ ` ^ |

Menu options

The menu options, where available will open when clicked on. The list

of the menu options contains Settings and Additional Options.

Depending on when the menu options is selected (e.g. channel is dis-

played, channel list activated, DVB Radio is used, etc.), the selectable

menu items of the menu options may vary.

The menu items of the menu options are described in the respective

chapters.

An example of a menu options of the used channel list:

OK call channel list,

MENU: call menu options.

 Select menu option,

OK confirm the selection.

Loewe bild

User handbook



On-screen displays

Explanation of keys

An explanation of the main operating keys that can be used at the

moment, can be displayed.

The availability of the key explanation is dependent on the currently

active operating situation.

INFO press longer: show Explanation of keys.

INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys.

Explanation of symbols

A text box will temporarily be displayed for screen pages with remote

control symbols in the footnotes (for instance, teletext) as soon as

the symbol is selected

Automatic menu info

The automatic menu info provides an info text for the selected menu

item appropriate to the on-screen display that can assist you further

with the operation of your TV set.

An on-screen display is displayed.

The factory setting is that the info display is shown

automatically for each menu item. In this case you can

temporarily hide the info texts with the INFO key.

Permanent clock display

The clock display can be permanently shown. It is always visible as

long as no other display is made.

You can switch the permanent clock display on or off in Home view

under System SettingsטControlטmore ...ט On-screen displays.

Loewe bild

User handbook

Initial installation wizard

Initial installation after switching on for the first time

The Initial installation wizard starts automatically with an initial

installation. It may be called repeatedly again (see chapter System

settings,section Extras – Repeat initial installation).

If a parental lock is activated, the access code must be entered

before repeating initial installation (see chapter System settings,

section Control – Parental lock).

For information on navigation within the wizard refer to chapter

General information on menu operation.

First installation wizard routine

The selected settings affect the routine of the Initial installation wizard.

 Select desired Menu language.

OK Confirm selection.

Selecting the language of the user guidance is the

wizard’s first step. Then you simply follow the

instructions on your TV screen.

 Proceed to next step.

A licence agreement will be displayed.

 Select Confirm.

OK Confirm the licence agreement and proceed to

the next step.

 Select Energy efficiency.

OK Confirm selection.

Determine how energy efficient your TV set shall

be. The value for the contrast (and thus the

brightness of the background lighting) is adapted

and the automatic dimmer activated or

deactivated depending on the presetting.

The automatic shutdown is active in the mode

Home Mode and Premium mode.

language

Energy

efficiency

Home mode:

The emphasis for home use is on low energy

consumption. The automatic dimmer is activated.

Premium mode:

This mode optimises the settings to a brighter

environment at a higher energy consumption. The

automatic dimmer is activated.

The use of this energy efficiency setting must be

confirmed afterwards once again.

Shop mode:

The picture settings are aligned to operation in

the presentation room. The automatic dimmer is

deactivated. If the ambient brightness diminishes, the

energy consumption is not reduced.

The use of this energy efficiency setting must be

confirmed afterwards once again.

Not all image and sound settings will be stored in

the shop mode. These settings will be reset to the

factory default settings after re-starting.

The presetting can be changed later in the System

settings under Control ט Energy efficiency.

 Proceed to next step.

 Select Location of TV set (national defaults

are adopted).

OK Confirm selection.

For certain locations (e.g., Australia), there is finally

a selection screen where you can indicate in which

state/territory the device is being operated.

 Proceed to next step.

 Select the Operating mode.

OK Confirm selection.

Use the TV set as a TV set:

Continued with Connect antennas cable(s) (see

next page).

Use the TV set just as a monitor:

see chapter Initial installation, section TV set as a

monitor.

Energy

efficiency

(continued)

Location of

TV set

Operating

mode



Initial installation

Loewe bild

User handbook



Initial installation

Select option.

OK Confirm selection.

With the selection, specify whether you want to

configure the available network adaptor now.

Configure now: Make settings for network

adaptor and proxy server (see chapter System

settings,section Multimedia / Network –

Network settings).

Do not configure or configure later: Skip

network adaptor configuration.

 Proceed to next step.

Select antenna cable.

OK Connect/disconnect antenna cable.

Select the antenna cables that are connected to

your TV.

Ahead of each selected antenna, the symbol

appears.

Cable analog: analogue channels via cable

Terrestrial (DVB-T/T2): digital channels via antenna

Cable (DVB-C): digital channels via cable

Satellite (DVB-S/cable 1): digital channels via satellite

Satellite (DVB-S/cable 2): digital channels via satellite

IPTV: Streaming via network (In-

ternet)

SAT>IP:

digital channel via local net-

work

With the connection sockets ANT SAT 1 / ANT

SAT2

(1

, when the TV set is switched on, it is auto-

matically detected whether an antenna cable is con-

nected. The symbol appears in the menu dialogue

behind the respective antenna cable

IPTV / SAT>IP can only be selected if a network-

connection has been configured in a previous step.

 Proceed to next step.

Network

configuration

Connect

antennas

cable(s)

The rest of the initial installation wizard routine

depends on the selected antennas (Cable analogue,

DVB-T/T2, DVB-C, DVB-S/S2, IPTV, SAT>IP (ASTRA))

in step Connect antennas cable(s).

The different antennas/types of reception are

described in the following sections of initial installation.

Setting options for reception via Cable analog:

If you have not selected Cable analog in step Connect antenna

cable(s) in the initial installation, proceed to the next section Setting

options for reception via SAT>IP

The selection of a Colour standard is only required

when the Location of TV set Other country was

selected. Otherwise, the country-specific default

settings will be preset when selecting the Location

of TV set. This step will be skipped then

 Select appropriate colour standard.

OK Confirm selection.

 Proceed to next step.

TV/col.

standard

The ANT SAT 2 connection is only available for set types with dual-channel (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook



Initial installation

Setting options for reception via SAT>IP:

If you have not selected SAT>IP in step Connect antenna cable(s)

in the initial installation, proceed to the next section Setting options

for IPTV reception

Select server,

OK Select / deselect the server.

State from which servers you wish to receive your

channels.

Before each selected server, the symbol

appears.

The server converts the antenna television signals

from the reception system into IP signals and

provides them in an existing local IP network.

 Proceed to next step.

Server

selection

Setting options for reception via

IPTV

If you have not selected IPTV in step Connect antenna cable(s) in

the initial installation, proceed to the next section Setting options

for DVB-T reception.

If more than one receive network is available via IPTV,

you can select the network from which you want to

receive your channels.

Select network,

OK Confirm selection.

 Proceed to next step.

Network

selection

(IPTV)

Loewe bild

User handbook



Initial installation

Setting options for DVB-T reception:

If you have not selected Terrestrial (DVB-T) in step Connect

antenna cable(s) in the initial installation, proceed to the next section

Setting options for DVB-C reception.

If several networks are available via DVB-T, you can

decide which network you want to receive your

channels from.

Select network,

OK Confirm selection.

 Proceed to next step.

 Select and adapt settings for DVB-T reception.

OK Confirm selection.

Scrambled

channels

You can state whether coded channels are to be

searched for in the search/update.

Select yes to save all found scrambled channels.

However, these channels can only be received in

connection with a CA module and the appropriate

Smart Card.

The handling of the CA module is described in the

chapter System settings, section Extras – CA

module.

Logical

Channel

Number

In various countries, digital channels (DVB-T) are

transmitted with a preset channel number per chan-

nel, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).

If you select yes here, these default channel slots

will be used and the channels of the preferred signal

source will be sorted as per LCN. The channels in

the channel list can no longer be shifted.

Network

selection

Settings

Supply

voltage

DVB-T

antenna

Select supply voltage no (0V) / yes (5V).

If you use a DVB-T antenna that requires a supply

voltage (active antenna) and which is not already

supplied via a power adaptor, then select yes (5V)

for the antenna’s power supply.

How to align your DVB-T antenna is described in

chapter System settings, section Connections

– Antenna DVB.

 Proceed to next step.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Initial installation

Setting options for DVB-C reception:

If you have not selected Cable (DVB-C) in step Connect antenna

cable(s) in the initial installation, proceed to the next section Setting

options for DVB-S reception.

If several networks are available via DVB-C, you can

decide which network you want to receive your

channels from.

The normal DVB-C settings are derived from the

selection of the location or network and do not need

to be changed.

Exactly which of the following settings are present is

dependent on which network is selected.

 Select network.

OK Confirm selection.

 Proceed to next step.

 Select and adapt settings for DVB-C

reception.

OK Confirm selection.

Scrambled

channels

You can state whether coded channels are to be

searched for in the search/update.

Select yes to save all found scrambled channels.

However, these channels can only be received in

connection with a CA module and the appropriate

Smart Card.

The handling of the CA module is described in the

chapter System settings, section Extras – CA

module.

method

If you select Frequency search here, a search is

performed for all receivable channels.

With Network search, only the channels which

the networks supply are searched - either for

all receivable networks or only for the particular

network specified under Network ID.

Start

frequency

The DVB channels are only searched for in the

frequency range above the start frequency.

Network

selection

Settings

Network ID

If you select none here, DVB signals of all current

transmitter networks are searched automatically

(recommended for most cable networks).

If, on the other hand, you specify a certain network ID

(necessary in the cable networks of some countries),

only DVB signals of this broadcasting network are

searched for automatically.

Your cable provider has the information you need.

Logical

Channel

Number

In various countries, digital channels (DVB-C) are

transmitted with a preset channel number per chan-

nel, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).

If you select yes here, these default channel slots

will be used and the channels of the preferred signal

source will be sorted as per LCN. The channels in

the channel list can no longer be shifted.

 Proceed to next step.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Initial installation

Setting options for DVB-S reception:

If you have not selected Satellite (DVB-S/cable x) in step Connect

antenna cable(s) in the initial installation, proceed to the next section

Setting options for all types of reception.

If several networks are available via DVB-S, you can

decide which network you want to receive your

channels from.

 Select network.

OK Confirm selection.

 Proceed to next step.



Select Only one antenna cable or Two antenna

cables.

OK Confirm selection.

Select here whether you have one or two satellite

antenna cables available. If two satellite antenna

cables are available, please connect them to the

ANT SAT1 and ANT SAT2 sockets of the TV set.

If only one is available, please connect it to the

ANT SAT1 socket.

 Proceed to next step.

Network

selection

Number of

satellite

antenna

cables

 Selecting the satellite system.

OK Confirm selection.

Specify how you receive which satellite(s) (single

satellite or type of satellite system). Ask your

dealer in this regard.

The normal DVB-S settings are derived from the

selection of the location and do not need to be

changed in most cases.

Single

satellite

Reception of a single satellite via a connected LNC

(LNB).

2 satellites

on 22 kHz

switchbox

Reception of two different satellites with two LNCs

(LNBs) which are connected to the TV set by a 22

kHz switchbox.

2 satellites

on toneburst

switch

Reception of two different satellites with two LNCs

(LNBs) which are connected to the TV set by a

toneburst switch.

Max. 4

satellites

on DiSEqC

multiswitch

The TV set controls a DiSEqC multiswitch to which

up to four LNCs (LNBs) for different satellites are

connected.

DiSEqC

one cable

communal

system

Select setting if the TV set is connected to a DiSEqC

single-cable system (according to EN 50494). Several

Sat receivers can be connected to one Sat cable.

other

communal

installation

Select setting if the TV set is connected to a

single-cable system (without DiSEqC). Several

Sat receivers can be connected to one Sat cable.

Contrary to a DiSEqC one cable communal system

there are restrictions in the range of certain reception

frequencies in "common" single-cable community

systems.

 Proceed to next step.

The rest of the initial installation wizard routine

depends on the selected satellite system in step Select

satellite installation.

The different satellite systems are described in the

following sections of initial installation.

Select

satellite

installation

Loewe bild

User handbook



Initial installation

Setting options for the satellite system (single satellite):

 Select satellite,

OK Confirm selection.

 Proceed to next step.

 Select Dual band (low/high) or Single band.

OK Confirm selection.

Here you specify if you use a Dual Band (Universal)

LNB or a Single LNB.

 Proceed to next step.

 Set LNB frequencies.

OK Adopt settings.

The setting of the LNB frequency is only called

when you have used the setting Single band

in step Dual / single band.

Normally, you do not need to change the values

for high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of

your satellite system uses a different oscillator

frequency (important for the frequency display).

 Proceed to next step.

Proceed to section Setting options for DVB-S

reception (continued).

Select

single satellite

Dual/single

band

LNC

frequencies

Setting options for the satellite system (2 satellites on 22

kHz switchbox / 2 satellites on toneburst switch):

 Mark Satellite 1 / Satellite 2,

 select satellite.

OK Adopt settings.

 Proceed to next step.

Proceed to section Setting options for DVB-S

reception (continued).

Satellite

selection

Loewe bild

User handbook



Initial installation

Setting options for the satellite system

(max. 4 satellites on DiSEqC multiswitch):

 Select Automatic or Manual depending on

whether your DiSEqC system should be confi-

gured automatically or manually.

OK Accept settings.

 Proceed to next step.

For manual configuration, continue in the next column.

Search for available satellites occurs via automatic

configuration.

 Proceed to next step.

Or:

 Select Satellite selection to select the

satellites used from the list.

Proceed to section Setting options for all types of

reception.

Automatic

DiSEqC

multiswitch

configuration

Automatic

DiSEqC

multiswitch

configuration

 Select and adapt settings for the DiSEqC

multiswitch.

OK Adopt settings.

Repeat rate

The refresh rate determines how often a DiSEqC

command is output. A refresh is only necessary with

cascaded systems.

Control

voltage

The control voltage controls the switching of the

polarisation level (horizontal/vertical) in non-DiSEqC

capable components (e.g., control of single LNBs via

DiSEqC multiswitch).

22kHz signal

The 22 kHz signal controls the switching between

high and low band in the Band setting. The Position

setting controls the selection of the satellites in non-

DiSEqC capable components.

Toneburst

The Toneburst controls the selection of the satellites

in non-DiSEqC but Toneburst capable components

with the Position and Option settings.

 Proceed to next step.

 Mark Satellite 1 ... Satellite 4,

 Select satellite.

OK Adopt settings.

 Proceed to next step.

 Set LNB frequencies.

Normally, you do not need to change the values.

OK Adopt settings.

 Proceed to next step.

Proceed to section Setting options for DVB-S

reception (continued).

Settings

DiSEqC

multiple

switch

Satellite

selection

Loewe bild

User handbook



Initial installation

Setting options for the satellite system

(DiSEqC one cable communal system):

 Select One channel or Two channels.

OK Confirm selection.

Here you specify if you use one or two transmission

channels in your one cable communal system.

In case of two channels - as far as they are

available in your system - different channels can

be simultaneously viewed on the main picture and

on PIP.

You get more information on your system from

your dealer.

 Proceed to next step.

Select DiSEqC single cable communal

installation.

OK Confirm selection.

 Proceed to next step.

 Select satellites from list,

OK Confirm selection.

 Proceed to next step.

Number of

system

channel used

DiSEqC

one cable

communal

installation

Satellite

selection

 Set LNB frequencies.

Normally, you do not need to change the

values unless the LNC (LNB) of your satellite

system uses a different oscillator frequency

(important for the frequency display).

OK Adopt settings.

 Proceed to next step.

 Select and adjust settings for the DiSEqC

single cable communal installation.

OK Adopt settings.

The manual registration must be made for both ANT

SAT jacks when either two DVB-S antenna cables or

two system channels are used.

Transmission

channel

Select the desired transmission channel.

Transmission

frequency

Select the corresponding transmission frequency.

PIN protection

If your system is designed for it, it is possible to

protect your used transmission data from use by

other subscribers with a PIN.

DiSEqC

envelope

mode

Should your DiSEqC system occasionally show

problems during channel switching, you can switch

on the DiSEqC envelope mode to test whether the

switching problems then will no longer occur.

Define/

change PIN

Here you can determine and change the PIN for

PIN protection. Only possible, when yes has been

selected for PIN protection.

 Proceed to next step.

Proceed to section Setting options for DVB-S

reception (continued).

LNB

frequencies

Manual

registration

(for socket

ANT SAT)

Loewe bild

User handbook



Initial installation

Setting options for the satellite system (other communal

installation):

 Select satellite.

OK Confirm selection.

 Proceed to next step.

 Select and adapt settings.

OK Confirm selection.

LNC

frequency

Normally, you do not need to change the values for

high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of your

satellite system uses a different oscillator frequency

(important for the frequency display).

Supply

voltage

If your set is connected to a single-cable system

without external voltage supply, you can connect

the antenna supply (13V or 18V / max. 500mA).

 Proceed to next step.

Proceed to section Setting options for all types of

reception.

Select

single satellite

LNB

frequencies,

Supply

voltage

Loewe bild

User handbook



Initial installation

Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued):

After you have made the previous settings, you should

receive picture and sound of the selected satellites

(only possible for Astra1 and HOTBIRD).

 Proceed to next step.

 Select and adapt settings.

OK Confirm selection.

If several satellites are received, the following settings

must be made for every satellite. The type of settings

available may differ depending on the selected satellite

or network.

Scrambled

channels

You can state whether coded channels are to be

searched for in the search/update.

Select yes to save all found scrambled channels.

However, these channels can only be received in

connection with a CA module and the appropriate

Smart Card.

Handling of the CA module is described in chapter

System settings, section Extras – CA module.

method

If you select Frequency search here, a search is

performed for all receivable channels. With Network

search, from all receivable networks all the channels

are searched which are supplied by these networks.

Depending on the selected network, this step

might possibly be skipped.

Logical

Channel

Number

In various countries, digital channels (DVB-S) are

transmitted with a preset channel number per chan-

nel, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).

If you select yes here, these default channel slots

will be used and the channels of the preferred signal

source will be sorted as per LCN. The channels in

the channel list can no longer be shifted.

 Proceed to next step.

Proceed to section Setting options for all types of

reception.

Test reception

Settings

Loewe bild

User handbook



Initial installation

Setting options for all types of reception:

You will see a list of the selected settings. You can go

back step by step with the key  to make any changes

to the settings.

OK Start automatic search.

Now, the TV set searches for TV and radio channels.

It searches successively for channels from the selected

signal sources. The progress of search is shown by a

progress bar.

In case of a repeated initial installation routine (via

Home view under System settings

Extras) all

stored channels will be first deleted here.

The number of TV and radio channels found is dis-

played.

 Proceed to next step.

Check

settings

Info

station search

 Select Age-related lock.

OK Confirm selection.

You can specify an age limit for your TV set here.

DVB broadcasts which have an appropriate age

identification are locked and can only be watched

after entering the access code.

In some countries, the yes/no option does not

exist for some channels, and a compulsory age

check must be entered.

 Proceed to next step.

The data capture for time and date is set to automatic

ex factory.

If time and date are automatically obtained via the

receive path, no entry is necessary.

For more information, see the chapter System

settings, section Control – Time and Date.

 Proceed to next step.

Age-related

lock

Time and

date

Loewe bild

User handbook

Select sound components.

OK Confirm selection.

This selection indicates which sound components

you want to use to hear your TV sound. Depending

on the selection, the sound component wizard

starts with which you can make further settings.

The sound component wizard is described in

chapter System settings, section Connections –

Sound components and can also be started at

any time beyond the initial installation.

 Proceed to next step.

Select option.

OK Confirm selection.

When selecting Information on new software

updates, your TV set checks at definite intervals

whether a newer software than the one installed in the

TV set is available in the Internet. A screen message

appears when a new software update is found.

 Exit wizard.

The initial installation wizard is complete.

Sound

playback

via ...

Inform about

new software

TV set as a monitor

You can also use your TV set just as a monitor, i.e. if you only use it with

a PC. The tuner in the TV set cannot be used in this mode.

 Select AV connection.

OK Confirm selection.

The selected AV connection is shown when

switching the TV on.

 Proceed to next step.

Initial setup continues with the Time and date setup.



Initial installation

Loewe bild

User handbook

Home view

The Home view is the central overview page of your TV set.

Via the selection list on the left, you can select the menu items: Home,

TV, Recordings, Sources, and Apps . Via System settings

you

have access to more functions and you can configure your TV set.

The right section of the display shows, depending on the selected

menu item, the current channel list, favourites (also see right column)

and the available sources and/or apps.

Depending on the device configuration, network connection, media/

media servers available and the connected devices, the number of

selectable items may vary.

Call Home view

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Select menu item / Favourite,

OK call.

Description of the individual menu items:

Home Under the item Home all favourites of the different

sections are summarized.

TV Via the Menuitem TV you can change the TV mode

in the event that another operating mode (e.g. radio,

etc.) is selected. In the right half of the screen, you

can access the channel of the currently selected

channel list.

See chapter TV for further information.

Recordings

Via the menu item Recordings you have access to

DR+ archive (local/DR+ streaming where available)

videos and connected USB storage media. The timer

(timer overview and timer services) is likewise acces-

sible via the menu item Recordings.

See chapter Recordings for further information.

Sources Via the item Sources in the Home view, you can

change to sources in order to play back something

from them. You can access devices that are locally

connected to the TV set (e.g. to AV, HDMI, USB) as

well as devices available via the home network.

See chapter Sources for further information.

Apps Via the menu item Apps you can find multimedia

content on the Internet (App Gallery), Internet and

DVB radio and a full-featured browser.

See chapter Apps for further information.

System

settings

In menu item System settings you find the con-

figuration menu of the TV set e.g., with settings for

picture, sound, connections or sound components.

In the right half of the screen, you can access the

most important points.

See chapter System settings for further informa-

tion.

Home view - EPG search

You can use the magnifying glass icon at the top of the Home view

or the Search function in the menu options to search the EPG for

keywords (according to whether TV or Radio EPG mode is selected).

For more information, please refer to the chapter TV, section Elec-

tronic Program Guide - EPG search.

The EPG search function is only available after once-off pairing

of the TV set with the Loewe app. Next, confirm the activation in

the screen dialogue.



Home view

Loewe bild

User handbook



Home view

Home view - Favourites

Under the menu items Home and Apps you will find your Favourites

on the right-hand side.

By selecting the individual menu items, your Favourites will be filtered

accordingly. When selecting Home the Favourites of both menu items

will be displayed together.

After an initial installation, some favourites will already be

automatically created depending on the installation site of the TV

set and of existing Internet links (e.g. TV channels, online links).

Creating favourites

In the operating modes of the TV set you can define the current

object (e.g. channel, music title, teletext page, website, photo, etc.)

as favourite.

Create favourite.

The active object is added as a favourite and placed at

the bottom of the Home view under the menu items

Home or Apps.

In the instance that there are more favourites than

can fit onto one screen page, they will be displayed

via a scroll list.

P+/P– Scrolling through the individual pages.

Editing favourites

You can edit the existing favourites in Home view. Change the

sequence of your favourites as you wish or delete favourites you do

not need any more.

Moving favourites

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Select the favourite to be changed.

MENU: call menu options.

Select Move.

OK call.

 Move favourite to new position.

BACK: Finish procedure.

Delete Favourites (individual)

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Select the favourite to be changed.

MENU: call menu options.

Select Delete.

OK call.

Delete Favourites (multiple selection)

Edit Favourites menu options is retrieved.

Select Multi select.

OK call.

 Select favourite

OK highlight (highlighted item changes to blue),

where applicable apply to other favourites.

MENU: call menu options.

Select Delete.

OK call.

Loewe bild

User handbook

Via the menu item TV, which is selectable via the Home view, one

channel can be selected from the current channel list. By selecting a

channel you will arrive in the TV mode.

In the TV mode there are a number of functions, such as Teletext, PIP,

EPG available to you. Via the individual menu options you can select

additional options and settings surrounding the TV operation.

Setting the volume

Switching sound off/on

Sound off.

Sound on: Press key again or increase the volume

using V+.

Setting the volume

V+/V– Volume up/down.

The volume indicator will be displayed in the center of

the screen.

The volume control bar can be deactivated in the

menu System settings ט Control ט more ... ט

On-screen displays.

Select channel

Select channel with P+ / P–

When using Instant Channel Zapping, you can very quickly switch to other

channels. The instant channel zapping

technology uses the second tuner

in the background in order to pre-select the next channels. Due to this

pre-selection, you can now switch to this channel within a very short time.

While using the digital recorder DR+

(timeshift operation, archive

recording, multi recording) or in PIP mode, Instant Channel Zapping

is not available. Switching is done at „normal“ speed.

For encrypted channels Instant Channel Zapping is only possible to

a limited extent.

P+/P– Channel up/down.

The number and the name of the channel along with the

title of the programme and that of the next programme

will be briefly shown. Also, the status display with time/

date and programme-dependent symbols appears.

The symbols of the status display are described in

chapter TV, section Status display.

Select channel using the numerical keys

If you select an unoccupied channel position, the next available

channel is selected.

1-digit channels

Press the numerical key a little bit longer: The channel

will change immediately or press the numerical key

briefly, the channel changes after 2 seconds (changes

immediately if up to 9 channels are stored).

2-digit and 3-digit channels

Press first (and second) numerical key briefly. Keep the

last numerical key depressed a little bit longer: The

channel will change immediately or: press all the numer-

ical keys briefly, the channel changes two seconds after

the last number has been entered (with up to 99 or 999

saved channels it will change immediately).

4-digit channels

Press all four numerical keys briefly, the channel

changes immediately.

long

short short long

all short

Selecting a channel out of the channel list

In normal TV mode, without other displays:

OK Call channel list.

 Mark channels.

OK The marked channel will be called.

Changing the channel list

In normal TV mode, without other displays:

OK Call channel list,

MENU: Call menu options.

Mark channel list selection.

OK Call.

 Mark desired channel list.

OK Call.

The channel list is amended according to selection.

BACK: a long press: Close overlay.

Explanations of the channel lists:

The number and the names of the possible channel lists depend

on the available signal sources (antennas, TV reception networks,

etc.).

ASTRA LCN

Analogue

DVB-C

DVB-T

Only channels from the selected source / reception

network are indicated in the channel list.

Personal list

Only channels of the selected personal list are indicated

in the channel list. The name of the list may be changed.

AV list

Exclusively AV inputs are shown in the channel list.

Manage list

Call up the channel list editing menu (System

settings ט Channels ט Channel lists TV).



Volume / channels

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook



Channel

Selecting channels by means of the expanded channel list

In normal TV mode, without other displays:

OK Press long to call expanded channel list,.

 Mark channels.

OK The marked channel will be called.

Or:

For numerical sorting: Enter the channel number. The

marker will jump to the selected channel.

OK The marked channel will be called.

For alphabetical sorting: Enter the first letter. The first

channel for the specified letters is marked.

 Mark the channel.

OK The marked channel will be called.

Filter and sort options of the expanded channel list

Using the on-screen buttons on the bottom line of the expanded

channel list you can filter and sort the channel list by various options.

MENU: Switching between list and bottom line.

0..9

Numerical sorting of the channel list.

A..Z

Alphabetical sorting of the channel list.

Searching

This allows you to do targeted searches for channels.

The channel name is to be entered via the on-screen

keyboard. The entry is described in chapter General

information on the operation.

Channel list Select the list, the channels of which are to be dis-

played in the extended channel list (e.g., Analogue,

DVB-C, DVB-T, ASTRA LCN, Personal channel list,

AV list).

All channels Here you can filter the content of the channel list

according to various criteria. Shall All Channels,

only HD channels, channels that are Locked or

Scrambled or Unscrambled, CI+ Protected

channels be indicated.

Selecting channels by personal lists

You can save your preferred channels in personal lists (e.g., for several

users). Each personal list can contain up to 99 channels.

Personal list available (creating a new personal list

via Manage list ט New personal list).

In normal TV mode, without other displays.

OK Call channel list.

MENU: Call menu options.

Mark channel list selection.

OK Call.

 Mark the desired personal list,

OK Call.

The channel list is amended according to selection.

BACK: a long press: Close overlay.

OK Call personal list.

 Mark channels.

OK The marked channel will be called.

Explanation of the icons following the channel names:

Locked channel.

HDTV channel.

DVB-T channel (digital terrestrial via antenna).

DVB-C channel (digital via cable).

DVB-S channel (digital via satellite).

Scrambled channel.

History

Recently selected channels are saved in History.

In normal TV mode, without other displays:

Yellow button: call History.

 Select entry,

OK call.

The last channel can also be accessed directly:

Yellow button press longer: Call last channel.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Status display/Info key

In normal TV mode, without other displays.

INFO: Show status display.

Below you see the number and the name of the chan-

nel and (if available) the title of the current programme.

The bar (if available) indicates the progress of the

current programme. If information about the current

programme is available, this can be called by pressing

the INFO key again.

The field at the top shows various additional pieces of

information, if available, which are represented by

symbols.

A window with button descriptions is displayed in the

bottom right corner. The automatic display of the

Explanation of keys with status display can be switched

off via System settings ט Control ט more ... ט

On-screen displays טKey explanation.

By pressing the INFO key longer the Explanation of

keys can be displayed regardless of the status display

(see also chapter On-screen displays, section

Explanation of keys).

The status display is shown automatically every time

you change channels.

The status display is hidden automatically at the end

of the display time.

If you want to hide the status display manually before

the display time ends, you can do this with the BACK

key.

Explanations of the symbols in the status display:

General symbols:

Language/sound selection available.

Subtitles available.

Channel selection for multi-channel providers.

HbbTV mode available from this channel.

TTX Teletext available on this channel.

Mimi Defined

: Individual sound personalisation

enabled.

General symbols (continued):

DVB-T channel (digital terrestrial via antenna).

DVB-C channel (digital via cable).

DVB-S channel (digital via satellite).

Coded station.

3D programme

HDTV programme.

UHD programme

HLG HLG programme

HDR 10 HDR 10 programme

Dolby Vision programme

Transmitted audio signal:

Mono

Mono audio transmission analogue.

Dual

channel

Dual channel sound transmission (Sound1/

Sound2) analogue.

1+1

Dual channel sound transmission (Sound1/

Sound2) digital.

Stereo sound transmission digital (PCM).

Dolby Audio

transmission.

MPEG

MPEG sound transmission.

Selected listening mode

܃

Playback of centre sound or mono (left/right).

܃

Playback of front sound (L/R stereo).

܃

Playback of front and centre sound.

܃

Playback of front and surround sound.

܃

Playback of front, surround and centre sound.

܃6RXQG

SURMHFWRU

Playback of sound via sound projector.

܃([WHUQDO

VSHDNHUV

Playback of sound via speakers connected to an

external amplifier.

If the number of speakers appears in brackets, the sound of miss-

ing speakers is transmitted by the existing speakers (virtually). The

Dolby Virtual speaker (VS mode) developed by Dolby is activated

for the virtual sound reproduction in sound mode (4) and (5). Here

you can choose between Dolby Virtual and Cinema Surround

. In

sound mode (3), proprietory settings of Loewe are used for the

virtual reproduction.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Only for set types Loewe bild 9, Loewe bild 7, Loewe bild 5 oled, Loewe bild 4.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Menu options

The menu options contain various selection and setting options.

Depending on the set type and equipment of the TV set (motorized

rotary foot, built-in hard drive or connected USB hard drive, Feature

Drive, etc.) and application (TV mode, EPG, Teletext, apps, Media

player, etc.), various menu options can be called up.

In the following, the individual menu options for the current channel

and for the selected channel list are briefly explained in TV mode.

Menu options for the current channel:

MENU: Call menu options.

 Select menu option,

OK call.

Menu items in the menu options for the current channel:

Channel list

selection

Exchanging the channel lists.

Recordings

Here you can call up a recording dialogue.

Detailed info

Calling additional information on the current pro-

gramme.

Search Search for any keyword in the EPG to find a program.

Favourite

Storing the current channel as a favourite.

Multiroom

playback

This function allows you to synchronise the play-

back on multiple Loewe TV devices that support

this function.

Language /

sound

Selecting other languages and audio formats (if

available).

Subtitles

Display programme subtitles (if available).

Picture

Make frequently used picture settings.

Sound

Adjusting all available audio settings.

Headphone

volume

Here you can regardless of the volume of the device

speakers, adjust the headphone volume.

Screen off

Here you can switch off the screen. You can turn

the screen on again with the arrow button on the

remote control.

Store

channel

Here you can save the current channel to a list that

is selected in the following step.

Expanded

channel list

Here, you can open the entire channel list in full screen

mode. You can filter it according to various criteria.

settings

You can apply all the settings on your TV set here.

Menu options for the selected channel list:

OK Call channel list,

MENU: Call menu options.

 Select menu option,

OK call.

Menu items in the menu option for the current channel list:

Channel list

selection

Exchanging the channel lists.

Recordings

Here you can call up a recording dialogue.

Detailed info

Calling additional information on the current pro-

gramme.

Search Search for any keyword in the EPG to find a program.

Favourite

Storing the current channel as a favourite.

Multiroom

playback

This function allows you to synchronise the play-

back on multiple Loewe TV devices that support

this function.

Language /

sound

Selecting other languages and audio formats (if

available).

Subtitles

Display programme subtitles (if available).

Picture

Make frequently used picture settings.

Sound

Adjusting all available audio settings.

Headphone

volume

Here you can regardless of the volume of the device

speakers, adjust the headphone volume.

Screen off

Here you can switch off the screen. You can turn

the screen on again with the arrow button on the

remote control.

Edit

channel list

Here you can change your current channel list (for

example, add channel, reorder channel, delete

channel).

Store

channel

Here you can save the current channel to a list that

is selected in the following step.

Expanded

channel list

Here, you can open the entire channel list in full screen

mode. You can filter it according to various criteria.

Sorting Here you can sort your current channel list

alphabetically or numerically.

settings

You can apply all the settings on your TV set here.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Electronic Programme Guide

Electronic Programme Guide – EPG

EPG stands for Electronic Programme Guide and provides you with

on-screen programme details. With the system, as with a printed

programme guide, you can learn about the current programme. In

addition programmes can be memorised and also recordings can be

programmed.

Starting and ending EPG

EPG: Switch EPG on / off.

EPG is only available for DVB channels.

Depending on the number of channels selected for

EPG, it may take some time until the programme

information is displayed.

In the left column is a list of the channel of the selected

source / channel list (for example DVB-S, DVB-C,

personal list etc.).

The right side shows the program overview. The

programs currently running are highlighted by lighter

fields. A white line marks the current time in the running

program.

The white box marks the selected program whose

program information is displayed at the top.

In the upper left corner, the live image of the currently

selected channel is displayed. When using Premium

EPG, the window for the live image will be displayed

on the right side.

EPG Operation

P+/P– Scrolling in the channel list page by page.

 Scrolling in the channel list.

 Scrolling through the programmes.

OK short: (highlighted TV programme is running):

EPG will be closed and the programme is

selected.

short:

(highlighted programme not yet started):

Detailed information on the selected

programme will be called.

long: Change preview image to the channel of the

highlighted programme.

short: Scroll a screen width forward / backward.

long: Scroll 24 hours forward / backward.

INFO: short: Call detailed information on the selected

programme (see next page).

long: show Explanation of keys.

REC: Schedule the recording of the highlighted

programme.

EPG menu options

EPG called

MENU: Call menu options.

 Select menu option

OK call.

Menu items in the EPG menu options:

Channel list

selection

Select channel list to be displayed in the EPG.

Recording Programme recording of the selected programme.

Detailed info

Bring up detailed information on the selected

programme.

View View selected TV programme (for programmes

currently running).

Memorise Make a note of selected TV programme (for

programmes that have not yet begun).

Date Jump to a desired date.

Entry of

channel/time

Jump directly to a time or channel.

Change view Change EPG view between standard and concise.

Adapting the EPG view

EPG called.

PIP: Change EPG view between standard and concise.

EPG view Standard:

EPG view Concise:

Loewe bild

User handbook



Electronic Programme Guide

Calling additional information about the programmes

EPG called.

INFO: Call up detailed information.

If there is more information on the selected programme,

it will be indicated here.

You will find further options for the displayed channel

in the menu options menu.

 Change to menu options.

or:

MENU: change between detailed information and

menu options.

 Select menu option.

OK call.

or:

BACK: Leave detailed information and go back to EPG.

Menu items in the EPG menu options:

Recording Schedule the recording of the selected broadcast

for a time.

View/

Memorise

Selected TV broadcast:

View for live broadcasts.

Memorise for broadcasts that have not yet started.

event

Information on the previous broadcast

Next Event

Information on the next broadcast

Timer Call up the timer list so as to programme further

recordings.

Change channel for live image

EPG called.

 Mark a currently running broadcast in the channel

list.

OK press long: switch to the selected program.

In the top left window, the current programme of

the selected channel is displayed now.

When using Premium EPG (see next page), the

window for the live image will be displayed on the

right side.

When leaving EPG the channel is displayed in the

preview thumbnail in the full picture.

Jumping to time or channel

The marking must be in the channel list.

Press the numerical key (0 through 9). The window

Select Time/Channel is shown.

 Select time or channel,

Enter numbers.

When entering a time, you always jump to the next

occurrence of the entered time (24-hour window).

If the time is already passed today, the time entered

will appear on the following day.

OK Activate jump.

Switching to the current broadcast

EPG called.

Mark current broadcast.

OK press briefly: switch to current broadcast.

The electronic programme guide will be closed.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Electronic Programme Guide

Recording a programme via EPG

You can programme timer recordings of TV programmes conveniently

using the EPG.

EPG called.

Select the desired broadcast.

RECORD key: Programme timer recording for the TV

programme.

Timer data dialogue is opened.

Check the timer data and update it if necessary (e.g.

directory, start, end, recording type).

See chapter Recordings,section Timer for explana-

tions of the setting options in the Timer data menu.

 Select Record channel,

OK adopt.

Or:

MENU: Call menu options

Select Recording,

OK adopt.

When a program is currently running, a recording is

started immediately.

For programs that have not yet started, a timer record-

ing is entered in the timer list.

In the EPG a recording symbol

is placed behind the

title of the programme.

Memorising a programme via the EPG

A programme that has not started yet can be memorised. For memo-

rised programmes, the TV set will ask at the beginning of a programme

if it should change the channel accordingly or switch on from the

stand-by mode if this is activated in the menu System settings

Control

EPG

TV on when memorised.

EPG called.

 Mark the desired programme.

OK Call up detailed information.

 Mark Memorise,

OK Memorise programme.

In the EPG, a memorise symbol is placed behind the title

of the programme

After a software update, it is likely that Memos of

programmes are deleted. After a software update,

please check your timer list

(see chapter Recordings,

section Timer).

Activate Premium EPG Services

In conjunction with the Loewe app, you have the option of accessing

an additional service that provides you with a preview image of the

relevant program from the Gracenote database.

A prerequisite for this is a current version of the Loewe app on a smart

device that is in the same network as your TV set. The TV must also

be connected to the internet.

When pairing app and TV, your set will announce the availability of

Premium EPG Services. Confirm the activation in the screen dialogue.

At the next call of the EPG function, the new preview images are avail-

able, depending on the respective channel.

The additional function can be deactivated at any time. Under System

settings ט Control ט EPG טExpanded info select for this no.

Configuring EPG

You can find the EPG settings in the chapter System settings,section

Control – EPG).

Loewe bild

User handbook

EPG search

The EPG search function is only available after once-off pairing

of the TV set with the Loewe app. Next, confirm the activation in

the screen dialogue.

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Select magnifying glass icon.

OK Call up search.

 Select the desired character,

OK apply the character.

Search suggestions are made from the second

character and adjusted for each additional

character entered. If wanted, these can be

selected directly.

The characters can also be entered from a USB

keyboard or the numeric buttons on the remote

control.

ABC/abc

Switch between upper and lower case.

=/#

Switch to special characters.

Switch the on-screen keyboard to English, German

or Russian.

Space

Enter space.

Delete characters to the left of the cursor.

Clear

Delete all characters.

Enter

Accept search term and start search.

Cancel entry. If search suggestions are already

displayed, the input window is closed and you jump

to previous search suggestions. If there are no search

suggestions, you are immediately returned to the

Home view.

Switch between on-screen keyboard (below) and

the displayed search terms (above).

Once the search term has been confirmed via the field

in the keypad or selected in the list, the search results

are displayed.

 Highlight desired program,

OK call up info text.

 Switch to menu options.

For explanations, refer to the chapter EPG, section Call-

ing additional information about the programmes.

Or:

 Select the desired program,

MENU: Call up menu options.

 Select menu options.

OK call up menu options.

Menu options in the EPG search:

Channel list

selection

Here you can select the list of channels to be included

in the search.

Only channels that are marked in the channel se-

lection for recording EPG data are included in the

selected list (see chapter System settings, section

Control – EPG).

mode

Here you can specify in which part of the EPG infor-

mation you want to search. The choices are Title

& Info, Only title and Only info. The number of

search results will vary depending on the search

mode you selected. If the search mode is changed,

this change remains in place until the next time the

TV is switched on.

The default setting after switching on the TV set

is Title & Info.

Recording The selected program is bookmarked for recording.

An entry is created in the Timer list. The program is

marked with the symbol

Memorise The selected program is bookmarked for viewing.

An entry is created in the Timer list. The program is

marked with the symbol

Timer If there are any entries in the Timer list, these are

displayed, otherwise the Timer services appear.



Electronic Programme Guide

Loewe bild

User handbook

Freeview Play

The Freeview Play service gives you access to programs that have already

been broadcast. In conjunction with the electronic program guide – the

EPG – you can immediately access the additional content from the rele-

vant channel’s media library.

You need to accept the Terms of Use the first time you use this service.

If you have accidentally rejected the Terms of Use and still want to make

use of this service, you can also accept them later.

There is an active connection to the Internet.

When you use the respective player for the first time, you must log in

to receive an activation code. Registering with the service providers is

free of charge for you.

If your TV set has been reset to factory settings, you will need to

re-activate the player.

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Select Freeview Play.

OK Call up the Terms of Use.

 Select Adopt,

OK confirm selection.

This changes the Home view. You now you have access to the media

libraries of several TV channels. The tile Freeview Explore now appears

(see next page/column).

Program archive:

In the program archive, you can watch programs again that have

already been broadcast.

The programs are stored for seven days.

EPG called up.

The Terms of Use must be accepted.

The Detail Info displays “OD Available” or “OD”.

 Select channel.

MENU: Call up menu options.

 Select Backwards EPG,

OK confirm.

Or:

MENU: Call up menu options.

 Select date,

OK confirm.

 Select date in the past,

OK confirm.

Or:

 Use the navigation key to move the selection

window to the left until the program archive

appearst.



Freeview Play

Loewe bild

User handbook

Notes on the program archive:

The channel currently selected is displayed in the channel list on the

right. This is marked with a white border.

The channel can only be changed when you are in this list.

If the border is greyed out, you are in the channel selection on the left.

If you want to change the channel, you must move the selection

window back to the channel list. The selected channel is again marked

with a white border.

Use the INFO button to open detailed information about the selected

program.

Press the OK/PLAY button to start playback of the program in the

Program Archive. The program starts after a short delay.

Freeview Explore:

The Freeview Explore function combines all the media libraries of the

active channels. For example, you can use Freeview Explore to search

for sports events, movies or documentaries that have already been

broadcast.

The Terms of Use must be accepted.

There is an active connection to the Internet.

HOME: Call up Home view.

Select Freeview Explore,

OK call up Freeview Explore.



Freeview Play

Loewe bild

User handbook



Teletext

Your TV set supports the two operating systems TOP text and FLOF.

Up to 2000 pages are stored in order to get quick access.

Starting and ending Teletext

TEXT: Call teletext.

The function of the TEXT key can be set under

System settings ט Control טmore ...טHbbTVט

Function of the TEXT key.

The factory default is Standard teletext first (see

also chapter System settings, section Control –

HbbTV).

TEXT: Switching between Standard Teletext and

MediaText.

If no MediaText is available  Teletext off.

Otherwise:

Pressing the BACK key ends Teletext.

Key functions for Standard Teletext operation

INFO press longer: Show Explanation of keys.

IINFO or BACK: Hide Explanation of keys.

0-9: Directly enter the page number.

0: Stop self changing pages.

9: Zoom in the page (press several times).

Page selection with the coloured keys

Red key: One page back or back to previous page

(depending on Teletext provider).

Green key: Advance one page.

Yellow key: To next topic.

Blue key: To next range of topics.

The coloured bars (with TOP text) or the coloured

writing (with FLOF text) in the last to bottom line show

you which colour button you need to use to select which

topic areas and topics.

Page selection with P+/P–

P+ call next Teletext page.

P– call previous Teletext page.

Additional page selection possibilities

First possibility:

INFO: Call overview page 100.

Second possibility:

Directly enter the page number.

Third possibility:

The page includes 3-digit page numbers.

Mark desired page number.

OK Call page.

Fourth possibility:

The page consists of several sub-pages, indicated by

the symbol

and the arrows in the bottom line.

 Go to bottom line.

 Mark

or ,

OK select previous / next sub-page.

The number of the current sub-page is shown

between the arrows.

Explanation of the symbols in the Teletext bottom line

Symbol

(icon)

Remote

control key

Description

– For Teletext pages with sub-pages:

Show previous sub-page.

– For Teletext pages with sub-pages:

Show next sub-page.

Hide TV picture (Teletext as full screen).

Insert TV picture (Split screen Teletext/

TV Picture).

– Activate Newsflash mode.

– Show hidden information on the Teletext

page.

– Hide information on the Teletext

page again.

Add current Teletext page to the favourites

in Home view.

Call menu options with Teletext settings.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Teletext

Newsflash

Some text pages, e.g., live tickers, will be permanently updated. In

order to keep track of changes and also to be able to watch the TV

programme at the same time you may hide the Teletext temporarily

and can still remain informed on updates of the page.

 Mark

Newsflash,

OK confirm.

The future behaviour of the News function depends

on the type of the Teletext page:

In case of Full screen Teletext pages the Teletext will

be hidden. In the bottom right corner, there will be a

symbol for the activated news function.

A screen message appears when the contents of the

page has changed.

Show updated page,

 Select yes or no.

OK Confirm selection.

In case of Teletext pages which cover only a part of the

Teletext page, e.g., News tickers, the respective part

will be faded in and permanently updated.

End News function

OK show Teletext again.

Or:

BACK: exit Teletext.

The Teletext page has

been updated. Would

you like to see it now?

yes no

Loewe bild

User handbook

Depending on the settings selected.



HbbTV / MediaText

HbbTV

(Hybrid broadcast broadband television) offers the user

comprehensive multimedia contents, e.g., media centres or additional

information on the current programme as far as they are provided by

the channel (Value-added service).

MediaText helps you to use the next generation of teletext/videotext

for HbbTV.

MediaText/HbbTV text can either be started directly or through an

HbbTV application.

Dependent on the selected TV channel, buttons on your remote

control can be locked via MediaText / HbbTV text.

The TV must be connected to the Internet to use HbbTV/MediaText.

A connection speed of at least 6,000 kbit/s (DSL 6000 or

equivalent) is recommended for smooth playback of videos.

Opening an HbbTV application

If an HbbTV application is available for the chosen channel after

changing channels, this will be loaded during the automatic start

process and a red key symbol will appear. When starting manually,

the application will be loaded not until you press the red key. The start

behaviour can be set under System settings ט Control ט more...ט

HbbTVטStart behaviour of HbbTV stations.

HbbTV is offered by the selected channel.

Connection to the Internet established.

HbbTV mode is set to on.

Red key: Load / display HbbTV application.

The appearance, key assignment and available

functions of the HbbTV applications are dependent on

the provider.

Under certain circumstances, the recording and

bookmarking functions of the applications may not be

supported.

Loewe do not guarantee the accessibility, functionality

or content of HbbTV applications.

Hide / Close HbbTV application

Red key: Fade out HbbTV application.

Press BACK for a long time: Close HbbTV application.

Opening HbbTV text directly

Depending on the programme provider, the direct

Call of MediaText may not be possible. MediaText

must then be opened by means of the HbbTV

application.

MediaText/HbbTV text is offered by the selected

channel.

Connection to the Internet established.

TEXT: Call up “standard” Teletext (see chapter TV,

section Teletext).

By pressing the TEXT key a second time the Media-

Text/HbbTV Text will be called up.

The function of the TEXT key can be set.

Navigation within the HbbTV Text and how the coloured

keys are assigned can vary depending on the provider.

Terminating the HbbTV Text

Press BACK for a long time: End HbbTV text.

HbbTV services for DVB radio

Various DVB radio channels also offer HbbTV text/media text. The

functionality is the same as in TV mode.

Loewe bild

User handbook



PIP

Picture in Picture (PIP)

The concurrent display of two different images is referred to as Picture

in Picture.

Restrictions with PIP operation:

In PIP mode, it is generally not possible to use analogue channels

and analogue sources (AV, PC IN etc.) for main/PIP picture.

Picture change and channel selection are restricted during record-

ing.

The PIP mode cannot be operated via the colour buttons while an

HbbTV application is active.

The iPIP menu item is not available for non-dual-channel devices

or when selecting an AV interface (HDMI, etc.).

The selection and combination options for the main display/PIP

display depends on the version of your set or on the number of

available tuners for the TV set and the image signal (SDTV / HDTV

/ UHD-TV) the set receives.

Simultaneous display of...

z (yes)/– (no)

a digitally broadcast channel (DVB-T/C/S) and

picture from a digital AV source (e.g. HDMI1)

a digitally broadcast channel DVB-T/C/S and a

channel over analogue cable television

–

a digitally broadcast channel over DVB-T/C and

a satellite broadcaster (DVB-S)

/ –

two channels over analogue cable television

–

two digitally broadcast channels (DVB-T/C/S)

/ –

a free-to-air and an encrypted digitally broad-

cast channel (DVB-T/C/S)

A CA module with corresponding smartcard

is required for decryption.

/ –

two encrypted channels

Two CA modules with corresponding smart-

cards are required for decryption.

/ –

an SDTV channel and an HDTV channel (DVB-

T/ C /S )

/ –

two HDTV channels (DVB-T/C/S)

/ –

a channel in the HEVC / H.265 standard and

any other channel.

–

two channels in the HEVC / H.265 standard.

–

PIP functionality Standard PIP/iPIP:

Standard PIP:

Within the scope of the display options, the channels for PIP and TV

display can be selected and interchanged at will.

A green frame around the PIP display indicates that the channel selec-

tion affects the PIP display. A white frame means that the operation

refers to the main display. If the frame is blue, Play channel is active

in the PIP display.

iPIP:

When the iPIP mode starts up, the channel shown in the TV display is

moved into the PIP display. You can now select any other channel for

the TV display. When exiting iPIP mode, the PIP display becomes the

TV display again and the PIP window is closed.

An orange frame around the PIP display indicates iPIP functionality.

Start and end iPIP mode

PIP: Move the current TV display to the PIP display.

You can choose other channels for the TV display

and still keep an eye on the PIP display. This allows

you to temporarily move advertising or parts of

programs to the PIP display.

PIP: Move the PIP display back to the TV display (PIP

off).

Start and end standard PIP mode

PIP: Show/hide PIP display.

Selecting the channel of the PIP picture

If the frame colour of the PIP picture is not green,

press the green key.

Select the channel as usual. (see also chapter TV,

section Select channel or chapter Sources).

On set types with Dual Channel (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

On set types without Dual Channel (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

For set types with Chassis SL4xx, two DVB-T2 HD channels are possible in the HEVC / H.265 standard with full HD resolution.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

Rotating the TV set

If you have a Loewe motorised rotary foot attached, you have the

option of automatically turning your TV set via remote control.

To connect a motorized rotary foot, you need the Motor unit con-

nection. This is found at the rear of your TV set.

Menu item Rotate TV will only be displayed when a motorised

stand is connected to the TV set.

The range of rotation and the switch-off position you can set under

System Settings ט Control ט more ... ט Rotate TV. For more

information, see chapter System Settings, section Control –

Rotate TV.

Rotating the TV set with Loewe motorised rotary foot

The TV set may be positioned within the set range of

rotation.

In normal TV mode, without other displays:

Rotate TV set to the desired position.

Or:

MENU: Call menu options.

 Select Rotate TV,

OK call.

Rotate TV set to the desired position.

BACK: exit Rotate TV.

Rotating the TV set



PIP / Rotating the TV set

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Select the channel for the main picture

If the frame colour of the PIP picture is not white,

press the green key.

Select the channel as usual. (see also chapter TV,

section Select channel or chapter Sources).

Coloured key functions

If the frame colour of the PIP picture is not green,

press the green key.

Yellow key: Swaps contents of TV picture and PIP

picture.

Blue key: Start/stop PIP scan in the PIP picture.

Change PIP position

PIP image is displayed.

 Move PIP image to one of the screen corners.

PIP Settings

PIP image is displayed.

MENU: Call up menu options.

 Select PIP,

OK call.

The size, position and mode of the PIP display can

also be changed in System settings under Control ט

more ... טPIP (see also the chapter System settings,

section Control – PIP).

Loewe bild

User handbook

Vogels Motion Mount

The motorised, adjustable Vogel‘s MotionMount wall mount system

makes it possible for you to change the position of your TV by remote

control, including changing the distance between the TV and the wall.

Not only can MotionMount be controlled via Vogel‘s own MotionMount

app, it can also conveniently be operated via the TV menu using the

Loewe assist remote control.

The wall bracket and the TV set communicate via Bluetooth.

Please check the instructions included with Vogel’s MotionMount

to determine if the weight of your TV is suitable for the wall mount

system. Mount the MotionMount as described in the original Vogel‘s

manual.

Loewe does not guarantee the availability and functioning of Vogel‘s

MotionMount. For support with the motorised wall mount system,

please contact Vogel‘s directly.

Mounting a Loewe TV set with VESA attachment points

to Vogel‘s

MotionMount requires the use of Loewe Vesa adapter bolts.

If Loewe Vesa adapter bolts are not used, the TV set may be dam-

aged.

Your dealer will supply you with the appropriate Vesa adapter bolts

for your TV set. The item numbers are listed in the chapter Acces-

sories.

To control Vogel‘s motorised adjustable MotionMount wall mount

system directly via your TV set, your TV

must have Bluetooth

functionality.

Connecting Vogel‘s MotionMount system to the TV

Vogel‘s MotionMount is correctly mounted and

ready for use.

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Select System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Select Multimedia / Network,

 go to next column.

Select Bluetooth,

OKcall.

The system automatically starts searching for Blue-

tooth devices in the vicinity for 2 min.

If Vogel‘s MotionMount is available, it will be displayed

in the list.

Mark Vogel‘s MotionMount,

OK select.

The TV set and Vogel‘s MotionMount are now

paired. No new pairing is required after switching

the TV on/off. It occurs automatically when the

turning functionality is called up.



Vogels Motion Mount

Adjusting Vogel‘s MotionMount manually

In normal TV operation, without further displays:

MENU: Call up menu options.

 Select Rotate TV,

OK access. Or:

Call up the Rotate TV menu directly.

The following message appears: Connection is being

established to wall mount. Please allow some

seconds ….

Once the connection is established, the Turn TV menu

appears.



Reduce/increase the distance between the wall/TV.

Turn the TV set left/right or swivel it.

While turning, the wall bracket may automatically

increase the distance between the TV set and the

wall to provide enough room to rotate the TV.

The TV can be rotated through the entire turning

range when the wall bracket is at maximum

distance from the wall.

If the wall mount is manually adjusted, this position

can also be saved via the position menu.

REC: Call up the position menu (see next page).

BACK: Exit Rotate TV.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

Moving Vogel‘s MotionMount to a defined position

Call up the Position menu.

Select Position,

OK call.

The Vogel‘s MotionMount moves to the saved

position.

Managing Vogel‘s MotionMount positions

Call up the Position menu.

The position Wall is fixed and cannot be changed

(renaming, deleting not possible).

Select Manage presets,

OK call.

Select Position,

OKcall. A check mark appears before the position.

 Select menu option,

OK call.

Menu options in the Positions preferences:

save If you previously selected New position as the

selected position and use the menu option Save,

a new position with the current position of the wall

mount will be inserted in the list.

rename You can rename the previously selected position

here.

delete You can delete the previously selected position

here.

Switching the TV on/off

When the TV is switched off, the Vogel‘s MotionMount moves from

any position to the wall position – i.e. in the centre, at the closest

position to the wall.

When the TV is switched on, the Vogel‘s MotionMount returns from

the wall position to the last position it was in before it was switched off.



Vogels Motion Mount

Loewe bild

User handbook



Recordings

Digital Recorder

TV viewing with time shift

A TV program or DVB radio program that you watch or listen to is

recorded in the background in the time shift buffer.

You can stop recording the program at any time and play it later with a

time delay (time shift operation). The maximum Time offset amounts

to three hours.

On time shift operation, the program is not stored in the long term.

If you change the channel (switch over program), the current recording

is discarded, the time shift buffer being emptied.

If you want to save programs for a longer period use the archive re-

cording (see next page).

The recording in the time shift buffer is automatically started on TV

sets with integrated hard drive

For TV sets without an integrated hard drive, the recording on the

externally connected USB hard drive only starts when the pause key

is pressed.

Recording of analogue channels is not possible.

Time-shifted operation is perhaps not possible or only to a limited

extent for programmes of channels working with CI Plus encryption

(see also chapter Sytem settings, section Extras – Common

Interface).

A seen and already finished program in the time shift buffer can be

transferred to the DR+ archive, provided no channel change has

taken place in the meantime.

The operation of time shift operation in DVB radio programs is

identical to the time shift operation in TV operation.

Interrupt watching (start timeshift television)

Press PAUSE key.

The pause icon is briefly displayed and TV picture

becomes a still picture. Time shift operation is started.

Continue (time shift viewing)

Press PLAY key.

The playback symbol will be shown briefly, now you will

see the TV program delayed in time from the moment

you had pressed the PAUSE key.

Time shift status display

In time shift operation, without further displays.

INFO: ShowTime shift status display.

In the lower area, you will see the number and name of

the channel, the beginning, the end and the title of the

current program as well as the title of the next program.

The grey progress bar indicates how far the time shift

buffer is filled with the content of the current program.

The white bar shows the current position in the time

shift buffer or how far the program has already been

viewed.

The time in the bar indicates the remaining time of the

current program.

For further options of time-shift watching see chapter

Sources, section Video playback.

Returning to live picture (end timeshift television)

Press STOP key.

You see the channel’s live picture again.

Switch to a different channel

If you switch to another station, the display appears on the TV set: End

timeshift and switch over. If you confirm this, the current recording

is discarded (time shift buffer is emptied).

The recording in the time shift buffer is automatically restarted on TV

sets with integrated hard drive

after a change of channels.

For TV sets without an integrated hard drive, recording on the exter-

nally connected USB hard drive only starts after pressing the Pause

key after a channel change.

When switching between encrypted and unencrypted contents of the

same channel the timeshift buffer is also cleared.

When doing this, the timeshift television is interrupted and you see

the live picture of the broadcast.

As a precaution, start archive recording of interesting broadcasts when

watching channels with changing coding.

Setting bookmarks

You can manually set bookmarks during time-shift TV watching. For

this, the time shift recording is converted into an archive recording.

Press Play button longer: Delete bookmark.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook



Recordings

Digital Recorder

Archive recording

Programs that you want to save permanently or view at a later time,

place in the digital recorderarchive (DR+ Archive).

On TV sets with integrated

hard drive, this is done on the internal

hard drive, on TV sets without an integrated hard drive on an externally

connected USB hard drive.

A recording can be made manually (instant recording / direct

recording) or as timer recording. The timer data can again be entered

manually or more comfortably, for example, via EPG.

If EPG or teletext data is available, the Digital Recorder stores the title

and additional information on each programme in the archive.

If additional languages are being transmitted for a DVB broadcast,

these will also be recorded. DVB subtitles can also be recorded.

You can watch another programme or playback a recorded TV

programme from the archive while recording a TV programme into

the archive. But you can also play back the programme that you are

just recording with time-shift.

With multi recording

two programmes can be recorded simultaneously

(see chapter Recordings, secion Digital Recorder – Multi

recording).

During the archive recording, the bar showing the recording progress

is red.

Recording of analogue channels is not possible.

Recordings of CI Plus encrypted programmes (e.g. RTL HD, Sat 1

HD, Pro 7 HD, etc.) are perhaps not possible or only to a limited

extent.

n order to use the full DR + functionality, two antenna cables, ANT-

SAT 1 and ANT-SAT 2 must be

connected or 2 channels must be

configured for a DiSEqC single-cable system.

Instant recording (One touch recording) / Direct recording

If the broadcast was watched right from its start, it will be saved from

the the beginning in the DR+ archive. Otherwise, recording begins

at the point from which viewing of the broadcast began.

One Touch Recording: The recording is started immediately with a

single keystroke.

Press REC key longer: The current programme is

recorded immediately.

Direct recording: The timer data is called up. If required, it can be

adapted and the recording subsequently started.

Press REC key briefly.

If desired, adjust timer data (e.g. directory, start, end,

recording type).

 Select Record channel,

OK adopt.

Watching other channels during archive recording

After you have started the recording, you can switch to another

channel.

The second channel can be watched in time-shift TV whilst a

recording is taking place (Time shift during archive recording).

On TV sets without Dual Channel

switching to another channel

is only possible if the second channel is located on the same tran-

sponder as the program you are recording.

Viewing another programme from the archive during archive

recording

After you have started the recording, you can also watch a programme

you have already recorded.

Open the DR+ archive.

Mark the recorded programme,

OK view programme.

The recording process is continued in the background.

Time shift viewing during archive recording

Whilst an archive recording is taking place you can play back the

programme that is being recorded or watch a programme on another

channel using time delay.

PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.

The recording is continued in the background.

PLAY key: Continue playback.

You will now see the time-shift archive recording.

INFO: Show Time shift status display.

For further options of time-shift watching see chapter

Sources, section Video playback.

STOP key: End time shift and return to the live picture

of the current archive recording.

Subsequent archive recording

You can also save an already viewed and finished broadcast in the

archive provided there has been no change of channel in between.

Skip or wind back to the desired broadcast and start the recording.

Setting bookmarks during archive recording

During a running archive recording you can create bookmarks (by press-

ing the PLAY key a little longer). You will see a message on the screen.

Bookmarks also serve as starting and end points of intervals.

Function of the coloured buttoned when archiving

Yellow key: Jump to the previous bookmark.

Blue key: Jump to the next bookmark.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook



Recordings

Digital Recorder

Subtitles

Subtitles (DVB subtitles) of a program can also be saved during

recording.

The recording of subtitles in DR+ continuous mode must be

activated in the settings.

It is not possible to record teletext or HbbTV subtitles.

Calling up the subtitles during a later playback is similar to calling

subtitles in TV mode.

Timer-controlled recording

Comfortably select your favourite programme for recording from the

EPG. The timer overview has room for 50 entries.

You will find further information on timer-recording in chapter

Recordings, section Timer.

Switching off the TV set during recording

You can switch off the TV to standby whilst recording. The recording

is continued in the standby mode.

Never switch the TV set off at the mains and do not pull the plug

of the TV set out of the socket. Otherwise the recording will be lost!

Stop recording early

You can end a current archive recording prematurely.

Press STOP key.

A message appears in the right upper corner of the

screen.

OK Stop recording.

The recording process is ended. The portion of the TV

broadcast recorded up to this point is saved on the

hard disk and can be played back via the DR+ archive.

If two archive recordings are active (multi record-

ing

(1

), the recording stops that started first.

You can also end a running recording by deleting the

corresponding Timer entry in the Timer overview

(see chapter Recordings, section Timer).

Multi recording

The Multi Recording function makes it possible to record two pro-

grammes at the same time and still watch a third one as well.

Generally speaking: each recording, each selected channel requires

one transponder stream. With dual channel devices, two separate

streams are available.

An ideal scenario is to record from two channels sharing one tran-

sponder, so that any third programme can be watched.

While simultaneously recording from two programmes that are on two

different transponders, only those channels are selectable for the third

programme, which are transmitted by one of the two transponders.

All channels that are on other transponders appear in the channel list

in dark grey and cannot be selected.

In order to use the full range of functions of multi-recording, two

antenna cables must be connected when using DVB-S or 2 chan-

nels must be configured for a DiSEqC single-cable system.

Recording of analogue channels is not possible.

Recordings of CI Plus encrypted programmes (e.g. RTL HD, Sat 1

HD, Pro 7 HD, etc.) are perhaps not possible or only to a limited ex-

tent. In order to use the full range of functions of the multi-recording,

two CA modules must be used.

The examples shown in the following table for channel combina-

tions are valid only for DVB-S. For DVB-T or DVB-C, other combina-

tions may apply.

The channel / recording combination that can be used, depends

on the respective channel group / transponder group. You get

the assignment from your network provider or the respective

broadcasting channels.

Examples of DVB-S recording combinations:

Broadcasting channel

combinations:

Possible:

Info

Recording Sat 1

Recording Pro 7

Watching any of the channels

Yes Transponder 1: Sat 1, Pro 7

Transponder 2: vacant for select-

ing any channel

Recording Sat 1

Recording RTL

Watching any of the channels

No Transponder 1: Sat 1

Transponder 2: RTL

You can not choose any chan-

nel, only one channel on one of

the transponders used e.g. Vox,

Pro7, RTL2.

Recording ARD HD

Recording ZDF HD

Watching arte HD

Yes Transponder 1: ARD, arte HD

Transponder 2: ZDF HD

Recording RTL

Recording RTL II

Watching ARD HD

Yes Transponder 1: RTL, RTL2

Transponder 2: ARD HD

Recording RTL

Watching ARD HD

Watching ZDF HD

No Transponder 1: RTL

Transponder 2: ARD HD

ZDF HD is on a different tran-

sponder, and therefore can not

be displayed.

Multi recording

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook



Recordings

Digital Recorder

DR+ archive

Via the DR+ archive, you can call up your recorded TV / radio programs

and start playback. In the DR+ archive you can create your own direc-

tories and sort your records accordingly.

Open the DR+ archive

Open DR+ archive.

If a DR+ archive is present on a connected storage

medium or the integrated fixed drive, this is displayed.



Select the desired DR+ archive if several available,

OK Display archive entries.

The archive’s name and/or storage medium, as

well as the free remaining capacity of the storage

medium are indicated in the title list.

The current marked archive entry is indicated by

a white selection frame.

Existing folders are identified by a folder

symbol.

PIP: Change DR+ Archive view between standard and

concise.

The progress bar under the title image (standard

view) or the complete archive entry (concise view)

shows how far the archive entry has already been

viewed.

Playing from the DR+ archive

Select the required archive entry (programme

or directory).

If directory selected:

OK Open directory,

Select the desired broadcast in the directory,

OK Start or continue playback of the selected

programme.

See chapter Sources, section Video playback

for further information.

During playback:

P+ call next programme.

P– call previous programme.

Directories are skipped in this case.

DR+ archive menu options

The menu options of the DR+ archive contains the individual function

for its archive entries.

The menu items available in the menu options depend on the

selected entry from archive (programme or directory).

 An archive entry has been selected.

MENU: Call menu options.

 Select desired menu option,

OK Confirm selection.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Recordings

Digital Recorder

Explanations of the DR + Archive menu options:

Detailed info Show detailed information on the marked archive

entry (see next column).

Favourite Add archive entry to Home favourites.

See chapter Home view for further information.

Multiroom

playback

This function allows you to synchronise the playback

on multiple Loewe TV devices that support this

function.

Rename

Changing title of the record or of directory.

Delete Delete archive entry from hard disk and recover disk

space.

Filter Select the desired filter (audio or video) and thus

hide the other files.

The filter is automatically reset after leaving the

archives.

Multi select Marking multiple archive entries is possible (see

next page).

Move

internal

Here, you can move recordings in the DR+ archive to

a directory and create new directories (see chapter

Recordings, section Digital Recorder – Moving

of archive entries).

Copy/move

external

Copy/move archive entries to an externally connected

USB storage device or to the hard disk of compatible

Loewe TV sets in the home network.

If no target medium is available, the menu item is

shown in dark grey.

Export

With Exporting,

you can move the archive entries

to externally connected USB storage media. Then

you can easily view the archive entries with another

playback device.

Delete

protection

Activate or deactivate protection against automatic

deletion by the Delete Manager.

Symbol for activated delete protection:

The menu item only appears if your TV set has an

internal hard drive.

Parental

lock

Protect recorded broadcast by a four digit PIN against

unauthorised playback.

Symbol for the set parental lock:

This menu item appears only when a PIN has

already been defined (see chapter System

settings, sectionControl – Parental lock).

Sorting Sort archive entries according to certain criteria,

ascending A-Z or descending Z-A) or according to

recording date (newest entries first).

Change view Change DR+ Archive view between standard and

concise.

Displaying detailed information on the recording

If detailed information exists on the recorded broadcast from the EPG,

you can deplay it.

The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.

INFO: Display detailed information for programme.

Or:

MENU: Call menu options.

 Mark Detailed info,

OK Display detailed information on the broadcast.

On the right next to the preview thumbnail you will see,

if present, the channel name, the title of the program,

the recording time as well as a short synopsis.

Under the preview thumbnail you will see the progress

bar which indicates how much of the programme has

already been viewed.

Changing the title of an archive recording or folder

Desired entry (programme or folder) is highlighted

in the DR+ archive.

MENU: Call menu options.

 Mark Rename,

OK Call.

 Select characters,

OK Move character to input line.

For further information on character input see chapter

General information on menu operation.

End input with Adopt. This saves the change

permanently.

Or:

BACK: Cancel renaming.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook



Recordings

Digital Recorder

Deleting recordings from the archive

The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.

STOP key: Call delete dialogue.

OK Confirm deletion.

The DR+ archive will be displayed again.

Or:

MENU: Call menu options.

Mark Delete,

OK call.

OK Confirm deletion.

The DR+ archive will be displayed again.

It may take some time to delete recordings from

external hard disks, depending on the length of the

programme and recording quality.

To delete a folder, all archive entries in the folder

need to be deleted.

Multi select

Multiple selection allows to mark several archive entries and then

perform a desired action via the menu options (e.g. export, delete).

The DR+ archive is opened, multiple selection was

called in the DR+ archive menu options.

Select archive entry,

Confirm selection (archive entry becomes blue).

Repeat as often as desired.

MENU: Call menu options.

 Select desired function (e.g. delete),

Confirm selection

The marked archive entries will be deleted.

Moving of archive entries (folder management)

In the DR+ archive, you can create new directories when using the

function move.

Into these directories you can move existing archive entries or do a

new recording directly there.

For this purpose you simply choose the desired directory in the record-

ing control (timer data).

You can determine the name of the new directory yourself. The DR+

archive root directory has the fixed designation main directory.

It is not possible to nest several directories into one another.

With multiple selection it is possible to move several archive entries

simultaneously to a folder.

Moving an archive entry to a new folder

The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.

MENU: Call menu options.

 Mark Move internal,

OK call.

 Select New folder,

OK call.

The on-screen keyboard will be displayed to enter the

folder names.

 Select character,

OK Move character to input line.

For further information on character input see

chapter General information on menu operation.

If the name of the folder is completely entered,

complete with Adopt.

The new folder is created in the DR+ archive and the

selected archive entry is moved into the folder.

Moving an archive entry into an existing folder

Archive entry to be moved to a folder is highlighted

in the DR+ archive.

MENU: Call menu options.

 Mark Move internal,

OK call.

 Select Ta rge t (folder name) if several are

available,

OK adopt.

 Mark Execute,

OK adopt.

The selected archive entry is moved to the

selected folder.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook



Recordings

Digital Recorder

Copy/move external of archive entries

You can copy/move archive entries to an externally connected USB

storage device or to the hard disk of compatible Loewe TV sets in the

home network.

If no target medium is available, the menu item is

shown in dark grey.

Copying/moving recordings, which originate from a

CI Plus encrypted channel, is perhaps not possible

or only to a limited extent.

The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.

MENU: Call menu options.

 Mark Copy/move external,

OK call.

Select Target if several are available,

OK adopt.

Select Copy or Move.

OK Start the procedure.

After a successful moving, the recording is automati-

cally deleted from the source.

Copying to an external hard disk takes place in the

background and at a significantly higher speed. You

see a screen message, when copying has finished.

The status of copying assignments in progress/

pending can be seen in the timer list.

The TV set must not be switched off with the mains

switch during the copying process!

Export archive entries

With the export function, you can move the archive entries to externally

connected USB storage media. Then you can easily view and save the

archive entries with a computer.

If no target medium is available, the menu item is

shown in dark grey.

Exporting recordings, which originate from a CI Plus

encrypted channel, is perhaps not possible or only

to a limited extent.

The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.

MENU: Call menu options.

 Mark Export,

OK call.

Select Target if several are available,

OK adopt.

 Select Export.

OK Start the procedure.

Copying to an external hard disk takes place in the

background and at a significantly higher speed. You

see a screen message, when copying has finished.

The status of copying assignments in progress/

pending can be seen in the timer list.

The TV set must not be switched off with the mains

switch during the copying process!

HD archive entries (H264) are exported as „.mkv“

files.

Export archive entries (MPEG2) are exported as

“.mpg” files.

Export radio archive entries are exported as “.mpg”

files. The TV screen remains dark when playing back

the mpg file.

For UHD archive entries, the export is restricted

depending on the transport stream of the program

or in some cases not possible.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Recordings

Digital Recorder

Setting/cancelling delete protection

The menu item only appears if your TV set has an internal hard

drive.

You can provide films with a delete protection to prevent an automatic

deletion by the delete manager.

The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.

MENU: Call menu options.

 Mark Delete protection,

OK Call.

 Mark yes / no,

OK Adoptsettings.

Delete manager

The menu item only appears if your TV set has an internal hard

drive.

The Delete Manager always makes sure there is enough memory

space on the hard disk for new recordings.

If the capacity on the hard disk is nearly fully exhausted, the oldest

recording(s) are automatically deleted in order to create space on

the hard disc.

Recordings which have been protected with a delete protection are

not deleted by the Delete Manager. However, you can still delete these

recordings manually.

To avoid data loss, we recommend copying important recordings to

an external USB hard disk (see Export of archive entries).

Loewe are not liable for data loss from the Digital Recorder’s hard

disk.

Locking/unlocking a movie (Parental lock)

You can lock movies that your children are not permitted to view, for

instance. Playback is then only possible after entering a PIN.

In order to activate the Parental lock, a code num-

ber (PIN) must have been defined beforehand

(see chapter System settings, section Control

– Parentol lock).

The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.

MENU: Call menu options.

 Mark Parental lock,

OK Call.

 Select yes / no,

OKAdopt.

The titles of locked films in the DR+ archive will be

replaced by asterisks * when a parental lock is active

and thus cannot be read anymore. The detailed

information for the recording cannot be called up.

The cover of the recording will be replaced by a

picture of a lock. In addition, the entry will be labelled

with the symbol

Viewing a locked movie

The desired locked entry in the DR+ archive is

marked.

When the access code of the parental lock has not

been entered yet:

OK call entry of PIN.

Enter your PIN.

After the access code has been entered, the lock

of the archive entries will be temporarily released.

OK View film.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook



Recordings

Digital Recorder

Streaming

Using the DR+ streaming function, you can view films via your home

network from the DR archives of other Loewe TVs that have been set

up for this function, as long as these units make their DR archives

accessible.

Also, you can make the DR archive of your TV set available to any other

TV sets and UPnP clients equipped with this feature. They will then be

able to access the archive via your home network.

To use DR

streaming, at least two Loewe TV sets are required, of

these, at least one TV set with integrated hard disk (with Chassis

SL1xx, SL2xx, SL3xx, SL4xx as DR+ Streaming Server).

The TV sets also need to be connected via a network (wireless

connection via Wi-Fi or cable connection via Ethernet, PowerLine).

Archive entries can only be provided or released in the network by

TV sets with integrated hard disks (DR

)

In case of these TV sets which are used as DR+ Streaming Servers,

the DR+ archive must be made available for other TV sets:

System settings ט Control ט more ... ט DR+ ט DR+ Streaming

ט Share DR+ archive with other devices ט yes.

Archive entries released in the network can be replayed by all TV

sets with chassis SL1xx, SL2xx, SL3xx, SL4xx and Chassis MB180.

In case of these TV sets used as DR+ Streaming Clients, access to

other DR+ archives must be enabled:

System Settings ט Control ט more ... ט DR+ ט DR+ Streaming

ט Also use other archives ט yes.

Functions requiring write access to a device that enables the

recording to be viewed are not available when viewing a DR+ archive

entry over the network.

Such functions are, for example, child protection, delete protection,

renaming, deleting entry or bookmark, setting bookmark, deleting

or hiding parts of the recording.

Playback of DR+ archive entry via the network

Open the DR+ archive.

 Select desired archive of the corresponding

device,

OK Display archive entries.

 Select the required archive entry,

OK Play archive entry.

See chapter Sources, section Video playback

for further information.

Follow me function

The Follow me function enables you to interrupt a current programme

in a TV set (main device) with integrated hard disk and to continue view-

ing it with a TV (secondary device) set from the point of interruption.

To use Follow me function, at least two Loewe TV sets are required,

of these, at least one TV set with integrated hard disk (with Chassis

SL1xx, SL2xx, SL3xx, SL4xx).

The TV sets also need to be connected via a network (wireless

connection via WLAN or cable connection via Ethernet, PowerLine).

On the main TV set, the function must be enabled:

System settings ט Control ט more ... ט DR+ ט DR+ Streaming

ט Share DR+ archive with other devices ט yes.

On the target TV set (secondary device), the function must be

enabled:

System Settings ט Control ט more ... ט DR+ ט DR+ Streaming

ט Also use other archives ט yes.

Start Follow me function on main device

Press PAUSE key.

The TV image becomes a freeze frame.

MENU: Call menu options.

 Activate Follow me,

OKAdopt.

You will see a message on the screen.

The archive recording starts in approximately 20

seconds without an entry. The TV set switches itself

off after starting the recording. The broadcast is

adopted into the DR archive.

The recording TV set will make the broadcast available

to the network from now.

You can indicate the beginning of a Follow me

recording at the target TV sets in your network by

a screen display.

Continue viewing the programme at the second device

Call on the TV set, where you want to view the broadcast, the DR+

archive of the recording TV set.

Open the DR+ archive.

 Select archive of the recording TV set (main

device),

 Display archive entries.

 Select Follow me recording,

OK View recording.

Loewe bild

User handbook

Multiroom

Using the Multiroom function, you can transmit content over the net-

work from a TV (Master TV) simultaneously to up to two other Loewe

TV sets, which are in different rooms.

The content may be live TV, DR + recordings, DVB radio, internet radio

or music files.

With the wake on WLAN/LAN function the master TV set can switch

on the selected TV sets before the playback starts.

To use Multiroom TV, at least two devices with SL3xx/SL4xx chassis

must exist. For the device type Reference, the multiroom function

is available ex factory; all other types of devices must be equipped

with the feature upgrade stick SL3xx/SL4xx.

All TV sets must be connected to the home network. It is recom-

mended to use a wired connection (LAN). In case of a wireless

connection (WiFi), technical limitations (e.g. liability to interferences,

bandwidth limitations) can cause disruptions in the playback right

up to a complete breakdown of the playback.

To switch on the devices with the wake on WLAN/LAN function,

the function must be enabled. Adjustable in the System settings

under Multimedia / Network טNetwork settings טWake on

LAN/WiFi.

In order to provide DR+ recordings via the Multiroom function in the

network, your TV set must possess an internal hard drive.

Multiroom playback

Choose your desired content, for example, a TV or DVB radio program

or a DR+ recording from the internal DR+ archive.

The TV set on which the content is selected, is for this time the Master

TV.

Example for Multiroom playback from the current TV programme:

MENU: Call menu options.

 Select Multiroom playback ,

OK call.

With Multiroom TV Streaming, only channels that

transmit unencrypted TV content can be used.

Multiroom

 Select set(s) on which the content is to be

displayed (maximum 2 sets or 4 sets in

Multiroom audio playback).

OK confirm selection. Behind the selected devices, a

check mark ۪ is set.

 Select Confirm,

OK confirm selection.

The current TV programme is simultaneously

replayed on the selected

devices.

The Multiroom playback of a DR+ recording from

the internal DR+ archive or a running DVB radio

program follows the same pattern as described

above using Multiroom TV streaming as an example.

In multiroom streaming, there are limitations in

the playback controls, for example (pause and

winding are not available).

Ending the Multiroom playback

If you select a different content on an individual Multiroom TV, the

Multiroom playback on this TV set is terminated

Adapting the TV set names

The default name of your TV set in the network is Loewe bild X.XX

(X: device name ex factory, XX is the screen size).

The device name can be set in the System Settings under

Multimedia / Network ט Network settings ט Host name

Multiroom Bluetooth Music Player

For the functionality of the Multiroom Bluetooth Music Player, please

refer to the corresponding section (see chapter System settings,

section Multimedia/Network – Bluetooth).



Recordings

Multiroom

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Time delay of 100ms.

Loewe bild

User handbook

Timer

In the timer menu you will find the Timer List and the Timer Services.

All programmed recordings, earmarked programmes and copy jobs

are listed in the timer list.

The timer services menu offers you convenient alarm services see

chapter Recordings, section Timer – Timer Services).

Calling the timer menu

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Select Recordings,

 select Timer,

OK call.

Or:

press longer: call the timer menu.

Select Timer list.

Select Manual recording,

OK Timer data are retrieved (see right column).

When you have programmed timer recordings, the

TV set can only be switched off to the standby mode.

Never switch the TV set off at the mains and do

not pull out the plug of the TV set out of the socket.

Otherwise no timer recordings can be made.

When a software update occurs it may happen

that timer entries and memorised programmes

are deleted. After such a software update, check

your timer list.

Explanation of the symbols in the timer list:

Recording

Recording in progress

Marked programme

Repeated recording (daily, weekly or Mon-Fri)

Serial recording

Entering the Timer data

The setting options for the timer data differ depending on the way (EPG

or manual recording) the recording has been programmed.

 Update timer data, if required, or press

OK for confirmation.

Please also read the instructions in chapter System

settings, section Extras – CA module concerning

the recording of encoded programmes.

Explanations of the setting options in the menu Timer data –

Standard settings

Folder

If available, select the directory into which the

recording will be directly saved.

The DR+ archive root directory has the fixed

designation Main folder.

Default setting: Main folder.

Channel

Channel for which the recording is carried out.

Date

Day of recording.

Beginning

Starting time of the recording.

End

End time of the recording.

Recording

type

Programmes can be recorded in different ways:

Once only: The programme will be recorded at the

specified time.

Mon-Fri: The programme will always be recorded

from Monday to Friday at the specified time.

Daily: The programme will be recorded every day at

the specified time.

Weekly: The programme will be recorded every week

at the specified time.

Serial

: A programme running regularly, but with dif-

ferent start times, can be conveniently programmed.

In this case, the TV set is checking ervery day at the

specified time, whether the programme is available

in the EPG data. If so, the program is recorded, if not,

the next review will be made the following day.



Recordings

Timer

Only available if EPG data exists.

Loewe bild

User handbook

Explanations of the setting options in the menu Timer data –

Additional options

Lock

recording

Only allow later playback of this recording after

entering the PIN number (Parental lock).

If a PIN still has not been entered under System

settings ט Control ט Parental lock, the

Parental lock will at first be activated. See

chapter System settings, section Control –

Parental lock for further information.

Delete

protection

Safeguard the recording from being deleted auto-

matically by using the delete manager.

Auto time

control

Your TV set can use the automatic time control

(Accurate Recording) for recording a programme.

The automatic time control takes control of the

corresponding monitoring of the start and end time

for DVB channels. The recording is started at the

beginning of the broadcast and switched off at the

end, even if the start and/or end time have been

changed by the programme provider.

The automatic time control is not supported by

all channels.

If yes is selected and automatic time control is

not supported by the recorded channel then no

recording is made.

If the programme information (Event-ID) should

not be available any more for the recording of a

programmed broadcast. e.g., due to a programme

change or because the Event-ID has been changed

by the channel, the programme cannot be recor-

ded. The broadcasters alone are responsible for

the transfer of this data for using automatic time

control. The availability of the appropriate data

cannot be guaranteed by Loewe.

Recording

subtitles

Select whether broadcast subtitles are to be recor-

ded too.

In case of a direct recording the presetting is

taken from System settingsט Control טmore

... טDR+טRecording subtitles.

Favourite

When selecting yes the recording will be added to

the Home favourites.

Record conflict

Despite the possibility of multi recording, it can happen when

programming a new recording that there will be an overlapping with

already stored timer recordings. In this case, the recording conflict

dialogue will open.

Here you can determine which of the recordings you want to be

executed, and you must eventually specify which of the programmes

shall be fully recorded and which are cut.

 Select recording,

OK change status.

The symbol before the recording shows you what

happens to the recording.

If the status for each recording is ok:

 Mark store recordings,

OK call.

The timer data of the recordings will be adjusted

accordingly.

Explanation of the symbols in the conflict manager:

TV programme is completely recorded.

Recording is cut off (at the beginning and/or end). Pay

attention to the start and end time of the recording.

The recording is deleted.

Delete/change programmed timer instruction

Use this function in the timer list if you want to delete recordings

already programmed, to end a running timer recording or to change

a timer instruction.

The Timer list is displayed.

Mark desired timer instruction,

The text of a currently active timer instruction is

red. If you delete this timer instruction, the record-

ing is stopped.

OK Change marked timer instruction.

The timer instruction will be displayed.

Or:

STOP: Delete marked timer instruction.

OKConfirm delete.

Timer instruction will be deleted.



Recordings

Timer

only available if EPG data exists.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Recordings

Timer

Timer Services

This menu offers you convenient alarm services. Programmed alarms

are also active when the TV set has been switched off to standby.

If the TV set is switched on from the standby mode by alarm, a screen

message appears. If this is not confirmed within 5 minutes with the

OK key, the TV set switches automatically off again for safety reasons.

The TV set can also be switched off automatically at certain times. A

screen warning appears one minute before automatic switch off. The

automatic switch off can be interrupted by pressing any key.

Call Timer Services

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Select Recordings,

 select Timer,

OK call.

Or:

press longer: call the timer menu.

Select Timer Services.

Select the desired setting,

OK change.

OK adopt.

Explanations of the setting options:

Sleep timer

After expiration of the indicated time, the device

automatically turns into Standby mode.

Switch off

once

The set switches to the standby mode automatically

at the specified time.

If a time is specified which has already passed on

the same day, the set switches off at this time the

next day.

Switch off

daily

The set switches to the standby mode automatically

every day at the specified time.

One time

alarm

The set alerts you once today at the specified time.

If a time was specified which has already passed on

the same day, the alarm is saved for the next day.

Wake up

Mon-Fri

The set regularly alerts you from Monday to Friday

at the set time.

Wake up Sat

Wake up Sun

The TV set alerts on Saturdays or Sundays regularly

at the specified time.

Wake up with

Indicate whether the TV set should enter the TV or

radio mode from stand-by during an alarm. The

channel, which was last active, is activated.

Wake up

signal

volume

Enter the volume at which the alarm sounding

should take place.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Sources

You will receive access to all devices connected to the TV set locally

via the Sources point in the Home view (e.g. to AV, HDMI, USB), as

well as all available devices on the home network in order to playback

multimedia content on the TV set.

Selecting the content source

In normal TV mode, without other displays.

Open Sources.

Or:

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Call Sources

 Select source,

OK call.

If you have selected, for example, an HDMI connection,

it will change over to the respective connection. The

TV set is ready to present the content of the source.

Where the selected source delivers a signal, this should

now be visible.

When selecting a connected USB hard disk or a media

server, you must select another playable file in the file

structure.

The structure and the presentation of the files/fold-

ers are dependent on the selected source.

 If applicable, select the desired folder,

OK then open the folder.

If required, repeat.

Select the desired file,

OK start playback of the selected file.

Possible sources

The media sources displayed depend on your devices.

HDMI

Source on HDMI connection of the TV set.

Depending on the content being played back from

the external source, see chapter Sources, section

Video-, Audio- and Photo playback.

For the connection and the configuration of external

devices, see the section External devices, section

Devices to the HDMI connections.

PC IN

Source on the AV connection (with VGA adapter)

of the TV set.

Depending on the content being played back from

the external source, see chapter Sources, section

Video-, Audio- and Photo playback.

For the connection and the configuration of external

devices, see the section External devices, section

Devices on AV.

AVS

Source on the AV connection (with scart adapter)

of the TV set.

Depending on the content being played back from

the external source, see chapter Sources, section

Video-, Audio- and Photo playback.

For the connection and the configuration of external

devices, see the section External devices, section

Devices on AV.

VIDEO

Source on the ANT TV connection of the TV set.

When selecting VIDEO, you switch to the signal

source Cable analogue, channel E36. The TV set

can display the signal from an external source via

the antenna input TV ANT.

USB

Source (e.g. USB hard disk, USB stick) to an USB

connection of the TV set.

The exact description is dependent on the respective

storage medium.

Depending on the content being played back from

the external source, see chapter Sources, section

Video-, Audio- and Photo playback.

Please also refer to the chapter System settings,

section Control - Software update for the USB

sticks!

Network

Source (e.g. media server, NAS), which is available

via the Home network.

Depending on the content being played back from

the external source, see chapter Sources, section

Video-, Audio- and Photo playback.

The exact description is dependent on the respective

storage medium.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Sources

Explanation of the source menu options

A source has been selected.

The menu items available in the menu options depend on the

currently marked object (data source, directory, file).

MENU: Call menu options.

 Select desired menu option,

OK Confirm selection.

Favourite Add marked media file to the Favourites in Home

view.

Sorting Sort media files in the opened directory in alphabetical

(ascending A-Z or descending Z-A) order, file size or

date (newest entries first).

Filter Select the desired filter (Audio-Titles, Audio-Artists,

Audio-Album, Photo or Video) and thus hide the

other files.

The filter is automatically reset after leaving the

archives.

Log off The current selected USB source can be safely

logged off from the TV set via this menu option before

disconnecting it.

Exchange thumbnail of the HDMI input

A separate thumbnail can be defined for each HDMI input in the source

selection. A selection of different thumbnails (for instance, Blu-Ray

players, game consoles and set top boxes) are available.

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Call Sources,

 Select HDMI entry.

MENU: Call menu options.

 Select Change thumbnail,

OK call.

 Select desired thumbnail,

OK Confirm selection.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Sources

Video

Video playback

The description of the following functions applies to the playback of

videos from the DR+ archive as well as for videos from USB storage

media or from media servers in the home network.

For playback of DR+ archive entries you have additional playback

and editing capabilities. The explanation of these functions you

find in chapter Sources, section Additional functions for DR+

archive playback.

Video menu options

The menu options provide you with further options for the current

playback.

A video is being played back. Selection of the video via the menu

item Sources (see chapter Sources) or, where available, the DR+

Archive via the menu item Recordings (see chapter Recordings,

section Digital Recorder).

MENU: Call up menu options.

BACK: Hide menu options again.

Explanation of the menu options for video playback

The number of available items in the menu options depends on the

video and video source selected (DR + Archive, USB and Home

Network).

Remote

operation key

Menu option

Call up menu options with video settings

Call up detailed information on current playback.

Key INFO: Display detailed information if status

display appears, otherwise call status display.

Call up lists view (select video)

long

Set bookmark.

Only with DR + archive playback.

JumpTo previous bookmark .

Only with DR + archive playback.

JumpTo next bookmark .

Only with DR + archive playback.

long

Delete bookmark

←

→

Only with DR + archive playback. The function

is only available if a bookmark set manually

is within five seconds of the current playback

position (only valid for deleting with the remote

control key).

Remote

operation key

Menu option

– Go to. Use this menu item to jump to a specific

point in time during playback.

– Start Follow me recording.

With the Follow me function, you can interrupt

a program in progress and resume playback on

another Loewe TV set at the point of interruption.

Only during time-shifted playback (time shift

operation).

– Hide. Use this menu item to hide parts in archived

recordings.

Nur bei DR+ Archiv-Wiedergabe.

Nur im Pause-Modus anwählbar.

– Delete to start. Use this menu item to delete the

section of an archived recording from the current

position to the start of the recording.

Only with DR + archive playback.

Only selectable in pause mode.

– Delete to end. Use this menu item to delete the

section of an archived recording from the current

position to the end of the recording.

Only with DR + archive playback.

Only selectable in pause mode.

– Take over as track image. Apply current standard

image as track image in the DR + archive.

Only with DR + archive playback.

Only selectable in pause mode.

– Activate / again deactivate Repeat of the currently

played directory or archive entry.

Only with DR + archive playback.

Favourite. Add the currently played video to fa-

vourites in Home view.

– The Multi-room playback item starts the syn-

chronous playback of the currently playing video

on several Loewe TV sets that support this function.

– Language/sound. You can select other film lan-

guages and other sound formats here.

– The Sub-title menu point is shown, if the recording

contains subtitles.

Only with DR + archive playback.

Subtitles are recorded (see chapter Recordings,

section Timer – Entering the timer data).

–

Image. The Image menu item contains the most

important settings for adjusting the video playback.

Further information see chapter System settings,

section Picture.

–

Sound. The menu item sound contains the most

important settings for adjusting the sound repro-

duction.

Further information see chapter System settings,

section Sound.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Sources

Video

Remote

operation key

Menu option

–

The Headphone volume is adjustable indepen-

dently of the set volume of the set loudspeakers.

–

With Image off , you can switch off the screen of

your TV set. The navigation keys further activate the

screen. V+/V- does not activate the screen.

Only with DR + archive playback.

–

With Further settings ,access the system settings

of your TV set.

Further information, see chapter System set-

tings.

Explanation of keys

INFO (press longer): show Explanation of keys.

INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys

Pause playback (freeze picture)

PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.

PLAY key: Continue playback.

Jump

By briefly pressing the  or  keys you can skip forwards and back-

wards in the movie.

The jump distance can be set in the System settings under Control

ט more ... טDR+ ט Jump distance (see also chapter System set-

tings, section Control – DR+).

Skip forwards.

Skip backwards.

Skipping with Smart jump

The Smart jump function ensures that the jump width is halved each

time the jump direction is changed or doubled after three jumps in

the same direction (max. 8 minutes). This way you can quickly find a

certain spot of the recording.

The settings for Smart Jump you find in the System settings under

Control ט more ... טDR+ ט Smart Jump (see also chapter System

settings, section Control – DR+).

You are looking for a particular scene in a running

programme:

Depending on your needs, press the key  (back-

wards) or  (forwards) briefly several times, to roughly

jump to the area of the programme you are looking for.

If you skipped the desired scene of the programme,

jump in the opposite direction. This jump is executed

in halfs of the jump distance.

If you skipped the desired scene of the programme

again, jump again in the opposite direction. In the

process, the jump distance is cut in half again.

By halving the jump distance again when changing

direction you can gradually approach the desired

location.

Jumping by entering a time

You canenter a time to jump to any position in the video.

MENU: Call up the menu options.

 Select Go to...,

OK Call.

Use the number keys to enter the time.

OK to jump.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Sources

Video

Wind

To search for desired scenes in movies you can fast forward and rewind

at three different speeds. Sound is not audible during winding.

 or  press a little bit longer.

By each brief pressing of  or  the speed will increase

until you switch back to the first speed.

The different winding speeds are represented by the

symbols shown below.

In case of time-shift viewing, playback is automatically

activated when the end of the recording is reached.

You are then about 10 seconds behind the live

picture or when rewinding at the beginning of the

time shift recording.

In case of Fast forward of archive entries, playback

will finish at the end of the recording. The DR+

archive is displayed again.

PLAY key: Continue playback.

In the case of Internet videos, please wait until these

are buffered in the memory. This can take a few

seconds, depending on the bit rate of the film and

Internet speed.

Repeat

Videos can be repeated, i.e., replayed in an endless loop.

Repeated playback of DR+ archive entries

MENU: Call up menu options.

 Mark Repeat,

OK confirm.

 Mark Title,

OK confirm.

The current archive entry will be replayed repeatedly.

The repetition setting remains active for this archive

entry even when the playback is finished.

To deactivate playback again:

MENU: Call up menu options.

 Mark Repeat,

OK confirm.

 Mark off,

OK confirm.

Select language/sound

Videos, especially those recorded from TV broadcasts, can contain

several sound tracks.

Select sound track/language:

MENU: Call up menu options.

 Mark Language/sound,

OK call Language/Sound selection.

 mark desired sound or desired language,

OK select sound track.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Sources

Video

Changing the picture format

Function is not available for all videos.

MENU: Call up menu options.

 Mark Change Picture format,

OK set picture format.

You can choose between small or full image settings.

Small image setting shows the video close to the

original resolution. The video status bar is permanently

shown below the image.

The full image setting enlarges the image to fit the

entire screen. The status bar can be set to visible or

hidden.

Additional functions for DR+ archive playback

When playing back recorded channels from the internal DR+ archive

on an of the DR+ archive of an attached USB hard drive, there are

additional editing and playback functions.

Setting bookmarks

To retrieve interesting scenes in a movie later, you can manually set the

bookmarks. In addition, there are also automatically set bookmarks

for the start/end of a programme.

In programmes sent in Dolby Digital 5.1 format, the commercials are

detected and automatically bookmarked at the beginning and end of

the advertising block.

In case of a running time-shift recording (timeshift television), this will

be converted into an archive recording when a blank is set.

PLAY key (press longer): Set bookmark.

You will see a screen message at the top right edge

of the TV set.

The bookmarks set automatically appear as black

or white marking in the time line. The bookmarks set

manually appears as white marking via the time line.

Jumping to Bookmarks

MENU: Call up menu options.

Mark To next bookmark,

OK Jump to next bookmark.

 Mark To preceding bookmark,

OK Jump to next bookmark.

Or:

Blue key: Skip to next bookmark.

Yellow key: Skip to previous bookmark.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Sources

Video

Deleting individual bookmarks

Jump to the manually set bookmark to be deleted.

Press PLAY key for a little bit longer: Delete bookmark.

Deleting the Bookmark during playback

You can delete your manually set bookmarks during the playback of

the DR+ Archive entry.

The bookmarks set automatically appear as black or white marking

in the time line. The bookmarks set manually appears as white

marking via the time line.

MENU: Call up menu options.

 Mark Delete bookmark

←

OK the manually set bookmark left from the current

position is deleted.

Or:

MENU: Call up menu options.

 Mark Delete bookmark

→

OK the manually set bookmark left from the current

position is deleted.

Interval functions

Intervals between manually or automatically set bookmarks (intervals)

can be hidden for future playback. This can be useful for example To

hide advertising blocks in an archive entry.

The interval functions can also be used to delete unwanted passages

at the beginning or end of your recorded broadcasts.

Hiding the interval

An archive entry is played back.

Control the required interval by jumping or spooling.

PAUSE: Pause playback.

MENU: Call up the menu options.

Select Hide,

OK to hide the current interval.

This interval will be skipped when the archive entry is

played back in future.

Displaying a hidden interval

If a hidden interval is skipped when playing a DR+ archive entry, a

message appears on screen.

In the

System settings ט Control ט more ...ט

DR+ טNotify hidden sections make sure a yes

is set

 In the screen prompt, choose yes,

OK to confirm.

The hidden interval will be shown again in future play-

back.

Deleting intervals

You can delete intervals by deleting the bookmark at the beginning

or end of the interval.

Loewe bild

User handbook

Deleting part of a recording

Playback an archive entry.

Press the PAUSE button from which point you want

to delete the recording to the end or the beginning.

MENU: Call up the menu options.

 Select Delete to start or Delete to end,

OK Confirm with.

 Select Ye s

OK Delete part of a recording.

Determine cover picture

The covers for the display of the entry in the DR+ archive can be freely

determined by you during an archive replay:

Jump / wind to the desired position in the recording.

PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.

MENU: Call up menu options.

 Mark Adopt as cover picture,

OK confirm.

You will see a message on the screen. The image will

be displayed next to the broadcast in the DR archive

in future.

PLAY key: Resume play.

Subtitles

When recording a programme, any existing subtitles can be recorded

as well and displayed when playing back.

An archive entry is replayed.

Subtitles were recorded too (see chapter TV, section

Recordings – Entering the Timer data).

MENU: Call up menu options.

 Mark Subtitles,

OK call up available subtitles.

 Mark the desired subtitles,

OK show/hide subtitles.



Sources

Video

Loewe bild

User handbook



Sources

Audio

Audio playback

Explanation of the menu options for audio playback

An audio file is being played back. Selection of the audio file via the

menu item Sources (see chapter Sources).

MENU: Call up menu options.

BACK: Hide menu options again.

Remote

operation key

Menu option

Call up menu options for audio playback.

Call up file view (select music title / channel).

Display EPG detailed information on current

program.

Only for DVB radio.

Call up detailed information on played back

music title.

Only when playing tracks via USB / home

network.

Favourite. Add currently played channel / music

track to favourites in the Home view.

Screen off. Switch off screen of the TV set

– Switch on/off Shuffle replay of the tracks of the

current folder.

Only when playing tracks via USB / home

network.

– Switch on/off Repeat, (endless reply) all tracks of

the current folder / directory or the current track.

Only when playing tracks via USB / home

network.

– The Multiroom playback item starts the

synchronous playback of the currently playing

video on several Loewe TV sets that support this

function.

–

Sound. The menu item sound contains the most

important settings for adjusting the sound repro-

duction.

Further information see chapter System set-

tings, section Sound.

Remote

operation key

Menu option

–

The Headphone volume is adjustable indepen-

dently of the set volume of the set loudspeakers.

–

With Other settings ,access the system settings

of your TV set.

Further information, see chapter System set-

tings.

Explanation of keys

INFO (press longer): show Explanation of keys.

INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys.

Pause playback

PAUSE key: Stop current playback.

PLAY key: Continue playback.

Wind

You can fast forward music titles at four different speeds. Sound is not

audible during winding.

Press  a little bit longer.

With each brief pressing of  the speed will increase

until you switch back to the first speed.

Available speeds: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x.

PLAY key: Continue playback.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Sources

Audio

Select another title / play current title from start

BACK: Call music selection.

Select Music Titles as described in the chapter Sources.

Or:

Press P+ or briefly:

Play next title of current album / directory.

Press P– or briefly:

Play current title from start.

Press P– or briefly again:

Play previous title of the current album / directory.

Or:

 Scroll in music titles.

Playback of the selected track starts automatically

after approx. 2 seconds.

Repeat

Music titles can be repeated, i.e., replayed in an endless loop.

MENU: Call up menu options.

 Mark Repeat,

OK Call up repeat.

 Mark Title,

OK Turn on repeat of the single music track.

The repeat setting remains until it will be deactivated

or another music title is replayed.

Or:

Mark All ,

OK Turn on repeat of all music tracks in the current

folder/directory.

The repeat setting remains until it will be deactivated

or another directory in the overview is selected.

Repeat Title and repeat All cannot be activated at

the same time.

The setting one of the two functions deactivates the

other.

Repeat and Shuffle (see right column) cannot be

activated at the same time. Activating a repeat

operation deactivates shuffle.

Shuffle playback

The music titles of your current medium are replayed in random order.

MENU: Call up menu options.

 Mark Shuffle playback,

OK Switch shuffle playback of the titles in current

album / directory ON/OFF.

Repeat and Shuffle (see left column) cannot be

activated at the same time. Activating the shuffle

playback deactivates repeat.

Switching the screen ON/OFF

Green key: Switch screen OFF.

Or.

MENU: Call up menu options:

 Mark Screen off,

OK Switch screen off.

Switching off the screen reduces the power

consumption of the TV set.

Switch on the screen with the remote control:

Press green key.

Ending playback

STOP key: End playback and return to music selec-

tion.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Sources

Photo

Photo playback

Explanation of menu options when displaying photos

A photo is being displayed. Selection of the photo via the menu item

Sources (see chapter Sources).

MENU: Call up menu options.

BACK: Hide menu options again.

Remote

operation key

Menu option

Call up menu options for photo playback.

Call up file view (select photograph).

short

Display previous photograph.

short

Display next photograph.

Favourite. Add the currently displayed

photograph to favourites in Home view.

Start slide show.

Pause slide show which is running.

–

Rotate photo by 90 degrees to the left. (Rotate

left)

–

Rotate photo by 90 degrees to the right. (Rotate

right)

– With the Photo menu item, you can make fre-

quently used picture settings.

–

Picture. The menu item image contains the

most important settings for adjusting the image

reproduction.

Further information see chapter System set-

tings, in section Picture.

–

Pause background music.

The menu item only appears when playing

music tracks in the background.

Remote

operation key

Menu option

–

Sound. The menu item sound contains the

most important settings for adjusting the sound

reproduction.

Further information see System settings chap-

ter, section on Sound.

–

The Headphone volume is adjustable indepen-

dently of the set volume of the set loudspeakers.

Use Detailed info to display the file size, the

recording date and the file name of the image.

–

With Other settings, access the system settings

of your TV set.

Further information, see chapter System set-

tings.

Explanation of keys

INFO (press longer): show Explanation of keys.

INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys.

Full-screen mode

A photo is highlighted in the selection (Folder view).

OK View photo in full-screen mode.

Show previous / next photo.

Rotating the photo

MENU: Call up menu options.

 MarkRotate left or Rotate right.

OK Rotate photo by 90 degrees to the left/right.

Loewe bild

User handbook

Slide show

MENU: Call up menu options.

 Mark Start slideshow,

OK start slide show.

Or:

PLAY key: Start slide show.

PAUSE key: Pause slide show.

PLAY key: Continue paused slide show.

Photo in full-screen mode / exit slide show

STOP key: Full-screen mode / end slide show and

return to photo selection.



Sources

Photo

Loewe bild

User handbook

Apps

Here you have access to multimedia content on the Internet (App

Gallery), a full-fledged web browser and other apps.

Calling the Web selection

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Select Apps.

 Select favourite (if any) or source,

OK call.

Possible Web sources

App Gallery

Under the menu item App Gallery you will find a

continually expanding platform for interactive TV

applications from the Internet (see next column).

All applications are optimised for use on the TV.

Browser

Call Web browser of the TV set.

For further information see chapter Apps, section

Browser.

DVB radio

The TV set can receive digital radio channels via DVB.

For more information, see chapter Apps, section

DVB radio.

Internet radio

The TV can receive digital radio channels over

Internet.

For more information, see chapter Apps, section

Internet radio.

Screen

mirroring

Here you can mirror the content of your Android

mobile device (Smartphone, tablet) on the TV set.

Further information, see chapter Apps, section

Screen mirroring.

Mimi

Defined

You can see a quick introduction on setting up this

feature under the

Mimi Defined

tile

For further information, please refer to the chapter

System settings, section Sound - Mimi Defined

Apps

Numerous apps for video, audio or images portals

such as YouTube, Amazon Video, Netflix, Tidal, Deezer,

or Lumas etc.

App Gallery

Call App Gallery

To use the full functionality of App Gallery, the TV

set must be connected to the Internet.

HOME: Call Home view.

 Select Apps.

  Select App Gallery,

OK call.

he upper portion of the App Gallery home screen

contains new online content.

The lower portion of the App Gallery home screen

contains Recommendations given by Loewe.

The given content may change from time to time

without prior notice.

 Select Home,

OK go to the right to choose the online content.

 Mark the desired online content,

OK Display/play content.

The navigation within the various applications

depends on the provider.

Functions in the App Gallery home screen

Home

Displays the App Gallery home screen with a choice of

new online content and recommendations.

Browse

Under Browse you can list and call the online content

by subjects.

Settings In the Settings for App Gallery you can select

countries, for example, to take advantage of various

services.

Imprint Providing the legally required information on the

parties responsible for the content.

Exit App Gallery

HOME: Call Home view and select another function.

App Galerie - Home



Apps

App Gallery

Mimi Defined

can be activated later on compatible device types with chassis generation SL4xx using an activation code. This can be purchased from specialist dealers

or in the Loewe online shop. Further information can be obtained from your specialist dealer or in the Loewe online shop.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Apps

App Gallery

App Gallery – Browse

Under the item Browse, you browse the full range of applications by

topic.

App Gallery-Browse is called.

Filtering applications

 Select the genre / topic,

OK call applications of the genre.

 Select desired application,

OK open application

Change filter

 Go to column with genres / topics.

Select another genre / topic,

OK call applications of the selected genre.

Exit Browse

BACK: Return to the App Gallery home screen.

Or:

 Go to column with genres / topics.

 Select Back,

OK return to the App Gallery home screen.

Define application as favourite

 Mark the desired application.

Add the marked application to the Home favourites.

The favourite is added to view Home of web favourites

and queued at the end.

App Gallery – Settings

Here, you can find setting options for App Gallery.

App Gallery settings are called.

 Select the desired setting,

OK call.

Country

Selection

Select countries from which you want to get

information on services (see below).

Imprint

Providing the legally required information on the

parties responsible for the content.

Country Selection

 Mark country,

OK select / deselect country.

Various services (applications, etc.) from countries

that are marked with a tick

are offered in App

Gallery.

Exit Settings

BACK: Return to the App Gallery home screen.

Or:

 Go to column with settings.

 Select Back,

OK return to the App Gallery home screen.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Apps

Browser

You can access Internet sites directly using the integrated Opera

browser. The web browser can also be used without an Internet

connection. Thus you can access local devices which provide a web

interface (e.g., router, home control, home network server).

Calling the Web browser

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Select Apps,

 Select Browser,

OK call.

Start page will be opened.

INFO: display browser status.

Explanation of the symbols in the browser status

Update the displayed Internet site. (Reload site)

Select as start page.

100% Change zoom factor of the displayed site / browser.

Add displayed Web site as favourite to Home screen.

Navigation on Web sites

P+/P– Scroll page vertically.

 /  Scroll page horizontally.

 Select link or text entry field with mouse

cursor faded in,

OK o. TEXT open link or confirm text input.

For the entry of text, press a numerical key (0-9)

repeatedly as with a mobile phone until the desired

character appears. The available letters are printed on

the individual numerical keys.

Yellow key: Delete character.

BACK: Stop text entry and exit entry box.

Entering a URL (Internet address)

Browser status is displayed.

 Mark the URL (Internet address) of the

indicated Internet site,

OK Open address entry box.

 Select required character,

OK Accept character.

If a small symbol is displayed next to a letter, with

a long press on the OK button (2 seconds),

further letters can be selected.

Delete character to the left of the cursor.

-/#

The selection switches to special characters.

ABC/abc

Switch between upper/lower case.

Switch key assignment of the on-screen keyboard

between English, German or Russian.

Space

Enter blank space.

Clear Delete all characters.

Cancel input. The entry box will be closed and the

previous Internet site will be displayed again.

Enter

Accept address and open new Internet site.

The characters may also be entered by the USB

keyboard or the numerical keys of the remote control

(see left column).

Use of an external mouse

It is possible to connect an external USB mouse to a free USB interface

of the TV set.

This allows you to move the mouse pointer comfortably over the TV

screen.

Loewe does not warrant the functionality of any USB input devices

on the market.

Exit Browser

Web site is displayed. Browser status is hidden

HOME: Call Home view and select another function.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Apps

DVB radio

The TV set can receive digital radio channels via DVB.

The AUDIO key has been preset to radio mode in the factory.

Switching Radio mode on

AUDIO key on the remote control.

Or:

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Select Apps.

 Select DVB radio,

OK call.

For the first use of DVB-Radio the first channel in the

radio channel list is called, otherwise the channel last

used.

If the HbbTV mode is active

(see Chapter System

settings, Control - HbbTV)

,section, certain radio

stations display a station logo instead of the symbol

shown above.

Channel switching

The radio mode is switched on and a radio channel

has been selected (see above).

P+/P– Channel up/down.

The number and the channel name are displayed

briefly. Also, the status display with time/date and

programme-dependent symbols appears.

Or:

Enter the channel directly using the numerical keys.

Or:

OK call channel list.

Select channel,

OK call.

2 ANTENNE BAYERN

Explanation of keys

INFO (press longer): show Explanation of keys.

INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys.

DVB radio menu options

MENU: Call menu options.

Or:

OK Call channel list,

 call menu options.

 Select menu option,

OK call.

See chapter TV, section Menu options for further

information.

HbbTV services for DVB radio

Various DVB radio channels also offer HbbTV text/media text. The

functionality is the same as in TV mode. (see chapter TV, section

HbbTV / MediaText).

Switching the screen on/off

Green key: Switch screen OFF.

Switching off the screen reduces the power

consumption of the TV set.

Switch on the screen with the remote control:

Press green key.

Archive recording in the DVB radio operation

In DVB radio mode, just like in TV mode, it is possible to record DVB

radio channels on a built-in hard drive or connected USB hard drive.

The procedure for recording a DVB radio channel is identical to recor-

ding a TV channel (see chapter Recordings, section Digital Recorder

– Archive recording).

Time shift in the DVB radio operation

The operation of time shift operation in DVB radio programs is identi-

cal to the time shift operation in TV mode (see chapter Recordings,

section Digital Recorder – TV viewing with time shift).

Exit radio mode

TV key: TV mode is called.

Or:

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Select another operating mode,

OK call.

Loewe bild

User handbook



Apps

Internet radio

The TV set can receive digital radio channels via the Internet.

The names of the directories and channels in the Internet radio mode

are given by the provider vTuner. Changing the order of channels or

renaming them is not possible here.

Internet radio is only accessible if a connection to the Internet has

been established.

Switching Radio mode on

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Select Apps.

 Select Internet radio,

OK call.

You see the radio channel list.

 Mark desired directory,

OK open directory. Repeat procedure if necessary.

Select channel,

OK call.

For further information on the control of the In-

ternet radio see chapter Sources, section Audio

playback.

Channel switching

BACK: call channel list.

Select channels as described above. Or:

P+/P– Scroll through the current Internet radio

directory to look for channels. Or:

Keys 2-9: Input the first letter. The channel list will jump

to the first channel of the corresponding letter.

Explanation of keys

INFO (press longer): show Explanation of keys.

INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys.

Internet radio menu options

MENU: Call menu options.

 Select menu option,

OK call.

See chapter TV, section Menu options for further

information.

Search for artists

By means of the search for artists, you can quickly and easily see all

radio channels that just play music by this artist. The result list is sorted

for now and most played.

Internet radio channel list is opened.

 Select Artist Search,

OK call.

 Select New search,

OK on-screen keyboard is opened.

 Enter name of the band or singer using the

keyboard (see also chapter General

information on the operation, section

Entering characters with on-screen

keyboard),

OK adopt, search is started.

 Select channel,

OK call.

Channel search

You can search an Internet radio channel directly by name using the

menu item Channel search. The procedure is similar to the Artist

Search described above.

Switching the screen on/off

Green key: Switch screen OFF.

Switching off the screen reduces the power

consumption of the TV set.

Switch on the screen with the remote control:

Press green key.

Exit radio mode

TV key: TV mode is called.

Or:

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Select another operating mode,

OK call.

Loewe bild

User handbook

Screen Mirroring

With screen mirroring, you can mirror the content of your Android

mobile device (Smartphone, tablet) on the TV set.

The Android mobile device must support screen mirroring. Depen-

ding on the manufacturer, the designation for this feature may vary.

The Loewe TV and Android mobile devices must be on the same

network.

Call Screen Mirroring

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Select Apps,

 Select Screen Mirroring,

OK call.

The TV set waits for the connection with the mobile

device.

Open the settings on your mobile device.

Search in the settings for the Screen mirroring func-

tion and select this. Depending on the manufacturer,

the designation for this feature may vary.

The mobile device searches for available devices and

lists them.

Select the found TV set on the mobile device.

TV and mobile device are connected.

The display content of the mobile device is mirrored

on the TV set.



Apps

Screen Mirroring

Loewe bild

User handbook



System settings

Under the menu item System settings in the Home menu you

find all settings and adaptabilities of your TV set.

Availability varies according to device type (see chapter Technical

data - equipment features for your TV set).

Calling System settings

HOME: Call Home view.

 Select System settings ,

You can find the selection of the most used functions

on the right side.

 Select settings,

OK call.

Or:

Press MENU key longer: call System settings.

Explanations of the setting options:

Picture

Here you do the settings referring to the

representation of the picture signal on your TV set.

Menu items Picture:

Picture adjustment, Contrast, Brightness, Colour

intensity, Image+ Active, Picture format, Automatic

aspect ratio.

Menu items Picture טmore ...:

, Colour temperature, Sharpness, Move picture

up/down, Auto dimming, Film quality improvement

(DMM), Digital Noise Control (DNC), Skin tone,

Gamma brightness correction, OLED calibration

Deblocking filter.

For more information refer to chapter System

settings, section Picture.

Sound

Under this menu item you find the settings for sound

playback.

Menu items Sound:

Mimi Defined

,Sound via

, Sound mode

, Sound

adjustment, Loudness, Surround mode

, Sound

picture synchronisation, Volume adjustment.

Menu items Sound טmore ...:

Auto volume, AV output signal, Maximum volume,

Maximum switch on volume, Balance, Auto speech

detection, Dynamic SPDIF sync.

The available menu items may vary and depend

on the connected audio component.

For more information refer to chapter System

settings, section Sound.

Channels

Move and delete TV and radio channels. In addition

to that you can automatically and manually update

the complete channel list. Your channels can also

be arranged and optionally sorted in personal lists.

Menu items Channels:

Automatic scan TV+Radio, Manuell scan (incl.

antenna status), Channel lists TV, Channel lists

Radio, Update channel list automatically, Transfer

all channel lists.

For more information refer to chapter System

settings, section Channels.

Control

In this menu you find settings for additional functions

of your TV set like EPG, picture in picture (PIP), digital

recorder (DR+) as well as interfunctional settings

like time and date, parental lock or software update.

Menu items Control:

Language, Parental lock, EPG, Energy efficiency,

Quick start mode, Software update.

Menu items Control טmore ...:

On-screen displays, Time and date, DVB settings,

PIP, DR+, Standard Teletext, HbbTV, Rotate TV

Display kinematics

, Hard disks, Export log file,

Asterisk key function.

For more information refer to chapter System

settings, section Control.

Multimedia /

Network

By means of the Multimedia / Network menu you

configure your network adaptor and network access.

By means of the menu item renderer you can allow

external devices to access your TV set (renderer) via

app to render (play back) contents there.

Menu items Multimedia / Network:

Network settings, Multimedia settings, Home Au-

tomation, Renderer, Mobile Recording, Bluetooth

(1

TIDAL login, Streaming server standby

Amazon

Alexa Login.

For more information refer to chapter System

settings, section Multimedia / Network.

Connections

Use this menu to configure the TV set for operation

with external devices.

The sound component wizard leads you comfortably

through the configuration of your used audio

equipment such as speaker systems or HiFi/AV

amplifiers.

For more information, refer to the instruction

manuals of the equipment used.

Menu items Connections:

Sound components, Antenna DVB, AV connecting

settings, Digital Link, HDMI.

For more information refer to chapter System

settings, section Connections.

Extras Under this menu item you can display the features

of your TV set, repeat the initial startup or reset the

device to the factory settings.

Menu items Extras:

Integrated features, Repeat initial installation, Reset

to factory settings, Dealer Mode, Legal matters.

For more information refer to chapter System

settings, section Extras.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features

chapter for your TV set).

Only for set types with OLED technology.

The menu item Sound via appears only if Speaker System or HiFi / AV Amplifier is

selected in the sound component wizard.

Only for set types with built-in DAL connection.

Menu item only appears if a motorized rotary foot is connected to the TV set.

Only for set types Loewe bild 9 and Loewe bild 7.

Only for set types with built-in hard drives.

Only for set types Loewe bild 9, Loewe bild 7, Loewe bild 5 oled and Loewe bild 4.

Mimi Defined

can be activated later on compatible device types with chassis generation

SL4xx using an activation code.

Loewe bild

User handbook



System settings

Picture

Here you do the settings referring to the representation of the picture

signal on your TV set.

Calling picture settings

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Picture,

 go to next column.

Select desired picture function,

 proceed to next column.

Explanations of the picture settings:

Picture

adjustment

You can switch between several fixed picture

adjustment modes and the personal picture values

that you have set here.

See chapter System settings, section Picture –

Picture adjustment for further information.

Contrast

The contrast setting depends on the brightness of

the room. The brighter the surroundings the higher

the contrast should be set.

The power consumption of the TV set depends

directly on the value set here.

Brightness

Set the brightness so that the black areas of the

picture only just appear black.

Colour

intensity

Set the colour intensity to suit your personal taste.

The colours should appear natural.

You can pinpoint this by the colour of peoples‘ faces

for example.

Image

Active

Image+ Active is a special picture improvement

developed by LOEWE which provides a detailed and

contrasting, sharper, natural and true colored picture

which is rich in detail and contrast.

Picture

format

Select the format so that the screen is used to the

fullest possible extent without affecting the natural

proportions.

See chapter System settings, section Picture –

Selecting the picture format for further information.

Menu item is only available if

Automatic aspect

ratio

–

off

is selected

Automatic

aspect ratio

When automatic aspect ratio is switched on, the TV

set recognizes the aspect ratio for Cinemascope or

wide-screen movies and adjusts itself accordingly.

more ...

call with OK.

Do the settings for your TV set‘s 3D display (see

next page).

Colour

temperature

Here, you can give the TV picture a warmer or colder

hue according to your personal taste.

Sharpness

Here you can adjust picture sharpness to obtain the

best definition.

Move picture

up/down

In various picture formats, font or graphic insertions

are not or only partially visible at the bottom or at

the top.

You can move the picture up or down with the up/

down menu control keys to make the displays visible.

Menu item only available in the picture formats

panorama or zoom.

Auto

dimming

Two automatic dimming functions are available here

which enable you to adapt the TV picture to the room

brightness, improve the visual contrast and reduce

the power consumption of your TV.

Depending on video (VBD+)

The display lighting is reduced depending on the

current video content and the video signal is si-

multaneously amplified in order to get an improved

contrast of your TV picture (Video compensated

Backlight Dimming – VBD).

Depending on the environment (OPC)

The contrast of your TV picture is automatically

reduced vs. decreasing room brightness (Optical

Power Control – OPC).

Due to a reduction in the luminance in 3D mode

for technical reasons, this function is deactivated

when showing 3D content.

Film quality

improvement

(DMM)

DMM reduces jolt in rapid picture object movements

and rolling text displays. This applies especially for

movies.

Digital Noise

Control (DNC)

With active DNC (Digital Noise Control) you can

eliminate or reduce picture noise.

Skin tone Adjust the skin tone so that the most natural facial

skin colour is achieved.

Gamma

brightness

correction

If image seems over- or underexposed, you can

adjust it here accordingly.

OLED

calibration

Herewith you start an OLED calibration to ensure an

consistently high picture quality.

OLED

protection

The displayed image content is continuously analysed

by an algorithm which partly fades out static areas of

the image (e.g. broadcaster logo, etc).

This is done to

prevent any potential issues.

Deblocking

filter

To minimise the visible interference to the picture

caused by modern compression methods for images

and image sequences (formation of small blocks),

a so-called deblocking filter can be activated which

counteracts this interference.

PC IN

display

For some PC image formats, horizontal as well as

vertical position and the phase position of the image

can be corrected.

For more information, see chapter System set-

tings, section Picture – Selecting the picture

format.

Menu item only available if there is a valid PC signal

via the VGA adapter at the AV connection.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Only for set types with OLED technology.

Loewe bild

User handbook



System settings

Picture

3D function

You can use the 3D functionality of your TV set to display 3D material

transmitted by a channel or from an external player that is connected.

To make full use of 3D functionality, you need Loewe 3D glasses (see

chapter Accessories). Please read the operating instructions included

with the 3D glasses.

3D mode

For 3D content that is being played back from an external HDMI

player, the 3D display format is normally recognised correctly when

the factory setting 3D mode טAutomatic is selected. You may need

to set the 3D mode manually to view 3D content from broadcasters.

Owing to a reduction in the luminance in 3D mode for technical

reasons,

Auto-dimming - Room

and

Auto-Dimming- Video

(VBD+)

are deactivated when 3D contents is displayed.

If the TV set is operated with the remote control during a 3D

playback, flicker effects can occur in the 3D glasses when doing this.

Calling 3D mode

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Picture,

 go to next column.

 Mark more...,

 go to next column.

 Mark 3D,

 go to next column.

 Select 3D mode.

Explanations concerning the 3D mode

Automatic

If the TV is set to this setting (factory setting), then

the TV set automatically switches over to the correct

3D mode, if this is possible and supported by the

broadcaster.

Only change the setting if the 3D content is not

displayed correctly.

side by side

To display 3D content in side by side format. When

viewing 3D content with this setting, two almost

identical images are displayed next to each other

and put together correctly by the TV set.

The 3D mode is Automatic reset the next time you

switch on the TV set.

top/bottom

To display 3D content in top/bottom format. When

viewing 3D content with this option, two almost

identical images are displayed one above the other

and put together correctly by the TV set.

The 3D mode is Automatic reset the next time you

switch on the TV set.

Picture format / 3D mode

If 3D contents are recognised by the TV device, the picture format

cannot be subsequently changed. The picture format when in 3D

operation is always 16:9 PC.

Instruction / Symbol

If 3D content is detected by the TV set, a corresponding message

appears. The instruction text will disappear after the display time

has elapsed.

In the status display, 3D content is indicated by an icon.

The following images will

be displayed in 3D mode.

For this part, put the 3D

glasses on and then

switch them on. Viewing

3D images for extended

periods of time can tire

out the eyes and/or cause

feelings of dizziness.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook



System settings

Picture

Picture adjustment

By the selection of one of the pre-set picture adjustment variants, the

image settings for the immediately active signal input groups are set

to predefined values.

You can use Personal Mode to specify individual settings for contrast,

colour intensity, colour temperature, sharpness and digital noise

suppression. Here you can enter your own specifications for each

signal input group.

You find a listing of the various signal input groups in chapter Technical

Data, section Signal input groups.

Calling picture adjustment

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Picture,

 go to next column.

 Mark Picture adjustment,

 go to next column.

 Select mode,

OK adopt selected mode.

On the selection of one of the three pre-set picture

adjustment variants, it is also necessary to specify

whether the mode should be set for the current

signal source, for example Only for HD Digital or

for the entire TV.

Explanations for the picture adjustment variants:

If a change is made in the selected mode in image adjustment (e.g.

Contrast, Brightness, Definition, etc.) when carrying out the image

adjustment you are always in Personal mode. The selected energy

efficiency mode is unaffected.

Home Mode

The emphasis for the picture settings is here on low

energy consumption for home use. In this case, the

TV set switches automatically off after 4 hours of

unattended time.

In this mode, the TV set switches off automatically

for the sake of saving energy, after it has been out of

operation for 4 hours.

Premium

Mode

The picture settings in Premium Mode are optimised

for a brighter environment at the cost of higher

energy consumption.

In this mode, the TV set switches off automatically

for the sake of saving energy, after it has been out of

operation for 4 hours.

Shop Mode

The picture settings in Shop Mode are adjusted to

operation in the presentation room.

The automatic dimming is deactivated.

Any changes made (e.g to contrast, etc.) are reset to

the defaults after 30 minutes.

Cinema

Mode

The cinema mode is optimised for video and photo

playback.

Personal

Mode

Here, you can recall your last personal picture

settings.

In this mode, the TV set switches off automatically

for the sake of saving energy, after it has been out of

operation for 4 hours.

Depending on set type

different HDR-Standards (Dolby Vision, HDR

10, HLG) are supported. There are further picture adjustment variants

depending on the image material presented

Dolby Vision-Content:

DOLBY

VISION

Bright

Picture settings for a brighter environment defined

by DOLBY.

DOLBY

VISION

Dark

Picture settings for a dark environment (home the-

atre) defined by DOLBY.

Premium HDR

Picture settings defined by DOLBY, which, however,

use additionally Loewe algorithms for motion

compensation or the automatic adjustment to the

ambient light.

HDR10 Content:

HDR10

Bright

The picture settings are optimized for playback in a

brighter environment.

HDR10 Dark

The picture settings are optimized for playback in a

dark environment (home theatre).

The picture settings in the premium mode are opti-

mized for a brighter environment with higher energy

consumption.

HDR10

Premium

Image settings that use additional algorithms for

motion compensation or automatic adjustment to

the ambient light.

HLG-Content:

HDR10

Bright

The picture settings are optimized for playback in a

brighter environment.

HDR10 Dark

The picture settings are optimized for playback in a

dark environment (home theatre).

The picture settings in the premium mode are opti-

mized for a brighter environment with higher energy

consumption.

HDR10

Premium

Image settings that use additional algorithms for

motion compensation or automatic adjustment to

the ambient light.

HDR compatibility different according to device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook



System settings

Picture

Selecting the picture format

The setting options depend on the transmitted picture content.

Menu item is only available if Automatic aspect ratio – off is selected.

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Picture,

 go to next column.

 Mark Picture format,

 go to next column.

 Select format,

OK adopt selected format.

Explanations of the picture formats for HD signals:

4:3 TV

16:9 TV

Proportionally correct display of 4:3 or 16:9

broadcasts. You select this mode when the signal is

not supplied by a PC (normal case). A small part of

the picture is truncated. This may be necessary to

hide possible interference at the edge of the picture,

which arises from the signal supplied.

4:3 PC

16:9 PC

Proportionally correct display of 4:3 or 16:9

broadcasts without loss of information.

You select this mode when the signal is supplied

by a PC.

4:3 Zoom

16:9 Zoom

Proportionally correct display. Maximum picture

magnification. Displayed text may get lost.

Explanations of the picture formats for SD signals:

16:9 Proportionally correct display of 16:9 broadcasts.

4:3 Proportionally correct display of 4:3 broadcasts.

Panorama 1 Proportionally correct display of 4:3 broadcasts on

the 16:9 screen. Channel logo and subtitles remain

visible.

Panorama 2 Format filling display (factory default) of 4:3 broad-

casts on the 16:9 screen. Channel logo and subtitles

remain visible.

Zoom Proportionally correct display. Maximum picture

magnification. Displayed text may get lost.

PALplus Is a 4:3-compatible 16:9 picture broadcast supplied

by the channel which is detected automatically.

Loewe bild

User handbook



System settings

Sound

Calling the sound settings

The selectable menu items depend on the selected channel and

the connected sound components.

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Sound,

 go to next column.

Select sound function,

 proceed to next column.

Explanations of the sound settings:

Mimi

Defined

WithMimi Defined

you can adapt the sound of your

Loewe TV set

to your listening profile.

For further information, please refer to the chapter

System settings, section Sound – Mimi Defined

)

Sound

mode

(1

Depending on the supplied audio signal of your TV

programme or audio source (DVD, Blu-ray, etc.)

you can select the speakers you want to listen here.

The subwoofer is always active if connected

(exception: listening mode is set to ܃).

If more audio channels are supplied than the

connected speakers are able to reproduce, the

missing speakers can be added virtually (this case

is represented respectively by brackets).

In the „optimal“ position, always the best quality

sound is output with the ideal number of speakers

for the currently played audio signal.

Optimum

܃

܃

܃

܃

܃

HiFi/AV

amplifier

The momentarily reproduced audio signal is output

with the ideal number of speakers.

Play centre sound or mono (left/right).

Play front sound (L/R stereo).

Play front and centre sound.

Play front and surround sound.

Play front, surround and centre sound.

Play via an external HiFi amplifier. Selection is only

possible if an amplifier has been selected in the

sound components wizard.

Explanations of the sound settings (continued):

Dolby PLII

mode

(1

Here you can select/adapt preset sound

characteristics (movie, music, matrix) in case of

Dolby Pro Logic II coded broadcasts.

The movie mode is „movie focused“, that is, the

centre sound is dominant, as we are used to it in

a movie.

In music mode, you can set 3 parameters:

Width: center sound is mixed with left/right.

Change in dimension: rear and centre are mixed

with left/right.

Panorama: distance between the speakers is

increased artificially.

In matrix mode, the front speakers are „mirrored“

to the rear speakers. Front left is mixed with left rear,

right front with right rear and the centre sound is

distributed to all channels.

The menu item appears when a multi-channel

system (speaker system) is connected and

loudspeakers are simulated (e.g. DVB signal with

2.0 sound, listening mode to 5).

Sound via

Playback over the TV speakers or an external hi-fi

amplifier.

The menu item Sound over appears only if a

different system has been selected in the sound

component wizard (see c

hapter System settings,

section Connections – Sound components

Sound

adjustment

Here, you can adapt preset sound characteristics

of the respective broadcast. Selectable are, e.g.,

Speech, Classical, Pop, Custom music and Film

soundtracks. For personal music and film sound you

can do the settings for pitch and bass sound (high

and low frequencies).

Loudness

Proper boost of bass and treble tones at low volume.

Surround-

Modus

Here you can choose between different surround

sound simulations (see next page).

Sound

picture

synchronisa-

tion

If the sound and picture are not precisely in sync,

you may correct this here. Move the mark on the

bar downwards, slowing down the sound compared

with the picture. Move the mark upwards, speeding

it up compared with the picture. Time adjustment

of the sound occurs in steps of 10 ms in each case.

only available for DVB channels.

Volume

adjustment

The volume can differ according to the individual

channels. If the sound is too loud or too quiet in rela-

tion to other channels, adjust the volume.

more ...

call with OK (see next page).

Only for set types with built-in DAL connection.

Only for set types Loewe bild 9, Loewe bild 7, Loewe bild 5 oled and Loewe bild 4.

Mimi Defined

can be activated later on compatible device types with chassis generation SL4xx using an activation code. This can be purchased from specialist dealers

or in the Loewe online shop. Further information can be obtained from your specialist dealer or in the Loewe online shop.

Loewe bild

User handbook



System settings

Sound

Explanations of the sound settings (continued):

more ...

Loudspeaker/

Headphone

sound

Selection options for Mono/ Stereo or Sound 1 or

Sound 2 for bilingual programmes, separately for

the loudspeakers and the headphones.

The menu item appears only for analogue channels.

Auto volume

The volume may vary when receiving channels with

different standards, when switching from channel to

channel or during commercials.

You can reduce these differences in volume by

selecting auto volume on. For music and live broad-

casts you get a better sound spectrum with auto

volume off.

Maximum

volume

You can limit the volume adjustment of the loud-

speakers. This prevents selecting a volume which

is too loud.

Maximum

switch on

volume

Set the sound level to be heard after switching on the

TV set with the mains switch or after a power failure.

When switching on the TV set in standby mode, the

volume last used is retained unless it was above this

switch-on level. Otherwise it is limited by this.

Balance

Set stereo balance so that the volume impression is

identical on the left and right.

Dynamic

SPDIF sync

Audio synchronization with external devices is

achieved by dynamically adjusting the SPDIF fre-

quency.

Some AVRs (Audio/video receivers) do not tolerate

any adjustment of the frequency of +/- 1000ppm

and show sound drop-outs or no sound at all.

Only in this case, please select here off.

Surround modus

In the Surround mode menu point, two special virtualiser modes are

found that offer the possibility to simulate virtual surround sound via

the built-in TV loudspeakers.

Selecting the Surround mode

The choice is available for sound component - TV speakers. All other

audio components do not support this mode.

Adjustable in the System settings under Connections טSound

components.

The selection of surround modes is available when sound mode 

܃or܃ is used.

Adjustable in the System settings under Sound טSound mode

or in the current TV programme via the menu options (see chapter

TV, section Menu options).

HOME: Call Home view.

 Select System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Select Sound,

 go to next column.

Select Surround Mode,

OKcall.

Select the desired mode.

Explanation of the setting options:

Cinema

Surround

For the Cinema Surround mode an advanced

Virtualizer technology is used that is developed by

Loewe. This one improves speech intelligibility while

simultaneously widening the 3D sound.

Default setting ex factory.

Dolby Virtual

Dolby Virtual simulates the hearing impression of

a 5.1 surround sound system via the built-in TV

speakers.

Only for set types Loewe bild 9, Loewe bild 7, Loewe bild 5 oled and Loewe bild 4.

Loewe bild

User handbook

Mimi Defined

Every user’s perception of sound is individual and changes in certain

frequency ranges with age.

With Mimi Defined

you can adjust the sound of your Loewe TV set

to your personal, age-specific hearing in three simple steps.

First, you create a personal profile or choose a setting for a whole

group of listeners. Depending on the age or age group, an algorithm

then determines the ideal frequency response curve for the best

listening experience.

Mimi Defined

is the result of state-of-the-art hearing research and

has been developed and validated in cooperation with Charité - Uni-

versitätsmedizin Berlin, the largest university hospital in Europe.

Mimi Defined

is currently only available for TV sets with chassis

generation SL4xx and software from version V5.x.

Mimi Defined

can be activated retroactively with compatible de-

vice types with chassis generation SL4xx using an activation code.

This can be purchased through the specialised trade or in the Loewe

online shop. Further information can be obtained from your special-

ist dealer or in the Loewe online shop.

The activation code is entered under the menu item Activate pack-

age (see chapter System settings, section Extras – Integrated

features).

According to your settings, Mimi Defined

also increases speech

intelligibility at sound setting 5.1. This may result in surround effects

not always sounding as originally intended.

Personalised sound settings may affect the effectiveness of Mimi

Defined

. You may need to reset your personal sound settings.

With input signals via HDMI, only Dolby signals are processed.

Calling up Mimi Defined

In normal TV operation, without further displays:

MENU: Call up Menu options.

 Select Sound,

OK call.

 Select Mimi Defined

OK call.

Select the desired menu option,

OKcall.

Notes on the settings options:

Profile

If audio profiles have been created, you can select

them here and switch between the individual or

group profiles that have been created.

Mimi

Defined

To enjoy the Mimi Defined

listening experience,

enable the feature by selecting the option on.

Intensity

The intensity with which Mimi Defined

optimises

the sound of the TV can be changed according to

personal preference.

New person

Here you can create a new hearing profile for one

person.

Further information, see column on the right

New group

Here you can create a new hearing profile for a group.

Turning on Mimi Defined

Menu options for Mimi Defined

are opened:

Select Mimi Defined

OK call.

Select on,

OK call.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).



System settings

Sound

Loewe bild

User handbook

Creating a profile for Mimi Defined

Menu options for Mimi Defined

are opened:

Select

New person

OKcall.

Select

Profile

OKcall.

 Select the desired character,

OK apply the character.

After entering the name of the profile:

 Select Enter,

OK adopt.

Select

Year of birth

OK call.

 Select the desired number,

OK adopt.

After entering the year of birth:

 Select Enter,

OK adopt, profile is created.

Alternatively, you can create a group profile for multiple

users of the same age group by selecting New group.

Again, a name can be assigned. For the age, select the

decade of birth that applies to the members of the

group.

Selecting a profile for Mimi Defined

Menu options for Mimi Defined

are opened:

Select

Profile

OKcall.

Select the desired Mimi Defined

profile,

OK adopt.

Deleting a profile for Mimi Defined

Menu options for Mimi Defined

are opened:

Select

Profile

OK call.

Select the Mimi Defined

profile to be deleted.

STOP: Delete profile.

Select

yes

OKconfirm.

Setting the intensity for Mimi Defined

Menu options for Mimi Defined

are opened:

Select

Intensity

OKcall.

Set the desired Mimi Defined

intensity.

The intensity with which Mimi Defined

optimises

the sound of the TV set can be changed according

to personal preference.

You can set the intensity on a scale of 0 to 100

percent. The change is immediately noticeable.

The intensity setting affects all listening profiles

that have been created.

Switching Mimi Defined

on/off with the star key

You can assign the Mimi Defined

function to the star key. This makes

it possible to turn Mimi Defined

on or off quickly.

For instructions on how to reassign the star key, please refer to the

chapter System settings, section Control - Asterisk key function.

Asterisk key reserved for Mimi Defined

press and hold: Call up Mimi Defined

TM.

menu.

Select

on or off

OKconfirm.



System settings

Sound

Loewe bild

User handbook

Calling up Mimi Defined

via System settings

HOME: Call Home view.

 Select System settings,

OK call up System settings.

 Select Sound,

 go to next column.

Select Mimi Defined

OK call.

Select the desired menu option,

OKcall.



System settings

Sound

Loewe bild

User handbook



System settings

Channels

Under the item Channels you find all settings concerned with chan-

nel search for TV and DVB radio as well as functions for creating and

editing the various channel lists.

Channel management is not possible as long as a programmed

timer recording is active.

If at least one channel is locked, the access code must be entered

prior to automatic search

The procedure for radio channels or Channel lists Radio is similar to

that for TV channels or Channel lists TV. Therefore, this procedure

is described only for TV channels.

Call Channels menu

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Channels,

 go to next column.

Select desired function,

 proceed to next column.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the Channels menu:

Automatic

scan

TV+Radio

Here you start the wizard that searches and stores

all TV and DVB radio channels (see chapter System

settings, section Channels – Automatic scan

TV+Radio).

Manual scan

(incl.

antenna

status)

Here, you can enter all the settings available for a

TV channel (see chapter System settings, section

Channels – Manual Scan TV / Radio).

Channel lists

Radio

Here you can move and delete TV channels/ DVB

radio channels in all lists.

You can put together your most frequently watched

programmes in one or more lists of personal

favourites (see chapter System settings, section

Channels – Channel lists TV / Radio).

Update

channel list

automatically

If the channel list is not up to date, it will be updated

automatically, provided the parameter Allow is

selected (see chapter System settings, section

Channels – Update channel list automatically).

Transfer all

channel

lists

Here you can export or import all channel lists of

this TV set

(

see chapter System settings, section

Channels – Transfer all channel lists

)

Loewe bild

User handbook

Automatic scan TV+Radio

For automatic scan TV+Radio, a search wizard will be started that

searches for new channels which are not yet stored.

You have to repeat the initial installation and automatically search for

new channels if you want to delete all the existing channels and

automatically search for new ones.

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Channels,

 go to next column.

Mark Automatic scan TV+Radio,

go to next column.

In the upper info text the current search settings will

now be displayed:

If you want to change these search settings:

 Select Change search settings,

OKwizard guides you through the search settings

(see column on the right).

If you agree with these settings:

 Select Start search/update,

OKstart scan.

BACK: Cancel current search/update.

Explanations of some search settings:

Signal source

Select here cable analogue, terrestrial (DVB-T /

T2), cable (DVB-C), satellite (DVB-S / S2) or IPTV

depending on the signal source you wish to use to

search for new channels.

Use the Antenna wizard to call the configuration of

the DVB-T and DVB-S antennas.

Calling up the DVB antenna configuration causes

the Change search settings dialogue to be quit.

You must call up the dialogue again after finishing

the configuration.

Cable

(analogue)

TV/colour

standard

With the selection of TV set location the conventional

TV standard/colour standard is the default.

It should only be changed if channels with other

standards are to be searched.

Explanations of some search settings (continued):

DVB-T/C/S

IPTV

Network

selection

If several networks are available, you can decide

which network you want to receive your channels

from.

DVB-T/C/S

IPTV

Settings

With the selection of set location the conventional

settings will be preset. Only change these defaults

if you are familiar with other parameters.

Scrambled channels:

(DVB-T/C/S)

You can state whether scrambled channels are to be

searched for in the search/update. If you select yes,

coded channels will also be searched for. However,

these channels can only be received in connection

with a CA module and the appropriate Smart Card.

Ask your dealer which Smart Card you need to

receive certain channels.

Search method: (DVB-T)

If you want to run the channel search independently

of the channel grid, select Frequency search for the

search method.

Search method: (DVB-C)

If you select Frequency search here, a search is

performed for all receivable channels. With Network

search, only the channels which the networks sup-

ply are searched - either for all receivable networks

or only for the particular network specified under

Network ID.

Network ID: (DVB-C)

If you select none here, DVB signals of all current

broadcasting networks are scanned automatically

(recommended for most cable networks).

If, on the other hand, you specify a certain network ID

(necessary in the cable networks of some countries),

only DVB signals of this broadcasting network are

searched for automatically. Your cable provider has

the information you need.

Search method: (DVB-S)

If you select Frequency search here, a search is

performed for all receivable channels. With Network

search, from all receivable networks all the channels

are searched which are supplied by these networks.

Accept Logical Channel Number: (DVB-T/C/S)

In various countries, digital channels (DVB-T/C/S)

are transmitted with a preset channel number per

channel, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).

If you select yes here, these default channel slots

will be used and the channels of the preferred signal

source will be sorted as per LCN. The channels in

the channel list can no longer be shifted.



System settings

Channels

Loewe bild

User handbook



System settings

Channels

Search for/update channels – handling of new and no longer

found channels

After the automatic search/update has been concluded, the number

of newly found TV and radio channels is shown.

 Call list of new TV channels found.

 Select channel.

OK Mark / unmark channel.

 Stores the marked TV channels.

Afterwards, a list of the channels which are saved but

which are temporarily not broadcasting or no longer

exist is displayed, if available.

The number of the memory location used is displayed

in front of the channel. Please select the channels you

really want to delete.

 Select channel.

OK Mark / unmark channel.

 Proceed. The marked TV channels will be deleted.

Subsequently the process of Newly found chan-

nels/Channels no longer found shall be carried

out in the same way for the radio channels.

Back: Close search assistant.

Manual Scan TV / Radio

Here, you can enter all the settings available for a channel. However,

this requires detailed knowledge.

The manual search of radio channels is similar to that of TV channels.

Therefore, the manual search for radio channel is not dealt with

separately.

Calling manual search

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Channels,

 go to next column.

Mark Manual Scan (incl. antenna status),

OKcall Manual Scan.

Select the menu item Signal source to decide in which

area you want to search for channels.

Depending on the selected source, various setting

possibilities will be available.

On the next page, the settings for analogue cable and

DVB-T/C/S sources are described separately.

Status bar for manual search

Status bars are displayed for manual search, which

show the reception quality of the individual channels

during the channel scan. The markers in all bars should

preferably be in the green area.

C/N: (Carrier/Noise) The bar shows the signal-to-

noise ratio. The value indicated in dB should be

preferably high.

Level: The bar shows the receiving level of the channel.

The value displayed in dBμV should be preferably high.

BER: (Bit Error Rate) The bar shows the bit error rate

of the channel. The value for BER should be as low as

possible.

Loewe bild

User handbook



System settings

Channels

Manual search for cable analogue (analogue cable reception):

Manual search is called.

Cable analogue has been selected as signal source.

 Mark and adjust settings,

OK confirm as the case may be.

 Mark Search,

OK start search.

If a channel has been found:

 Mark Store/Overwrite,

OK store channel.

Explanations on the search settings for cable analogue:

Signal source Selection of range in which you want to search for the

channel.

TV standard

If necessary, ask your dealer which standard to

select for specific channels or AV equipment.

Colour

standard

If necessary, ask your dealer which standard to

select for specific channels or AV equipment.

Channel

Direct input of channel.

Frequency

Direct input of channel frequency.

Range for entry: 044.75 MHz - 859.25 MHz.

Name

Here, the name of the found channel is displayed.

You can change the name of the channel.

Manual DVB-T/C/S search:

Manual search is called.

 Mark and adjust settings,

OK confirm as the case may be.

 Mark Search,

OK start search.

When a DVB transponder has been found:

 Mark the channel,

OK Channel will be ticked with

. If necessary,

repeat for several channels.

Channels that already exist in the channel overview

will be displayed with their channel number on the

left.

 Mark Store/Overwrite,

OK Channels marked with

will be stored.

Explanations of some search settings:

Signal

source

(DVB-T/C/S)

Selection of range in which you want to search for the

channel.

Channel

(DVB-T)

Direct input of channel.

Satellite

(DVB-S)

Here you can select the satellite where the channels

are to be searched for.

Band

(DVB-S)

Here you can select the frequency band in which

shall be searched.

Setting ranges: horiz/low 10694 - 11906 MHz

horiz/high 11544 - 12756 MHz

vert/low 10694 - 11906 MHz

vert/high 11544 - 12756 MHz

Frequency

(DVB-T/C/S)

DVB-T/C: Direct input of channel frequency.

DVB-S: Direct input of LNC frequency

Symbol rate

(DVB-S)

Here you can specify the symbol rate

Range: 1000-45000

Loewe bild

User handbook



System settings

Channels

Channel lists TV / Radio

Under the menu item Channel lists TV or Channel lists Radio you

can edit (delete block, move block, restore deleted channels, delete

list) various lists, e.g., DVB-T, ASTRA LCN, DVB-C, etc. You can also

create and edit new Personal lists.

The function of Channel lists Radio is similar to that of Channel

lists TV. Therefore, editing of Channel lists Radio will not be dealt

with separately.

Change channel list

If at least one channel is locked, the access code

must be entered before changing channels

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call system settings.

 Mark Channels,

 go to next column.

 Select Channel lists TV,

 go to next column.

 Mark desired channel list,

call list.

Here, you can delete and move channel blocks as well

as restore deleted channels.

The following section describes how to proceed if you

wish to Delete block, Move block,Restore channels

and Delete list.

Delete block

 Select Delete Block,

 move to list.

 Select beginning of block,

OK mark beginning of block.

 Select end of block,

OK mark end of block (selected channels are coloured

blue).

 Select Execute delete,

OK block will be deleted.

Or:

 select Cancel procedure,

OK cancel delete.

Move block / Change order

Channels with LCN cannot be reordered. In this case,

the function Move block is hidden.

 Select Move block,

 move to list.

 Select beginning of block,

OK mark beginning of block.

 Select end of block,

OK mark end of block (selected channels are coloured

blue).

 Select insert position,

OK Confirm insert position.

 Select Execute move,

OK block will be moved.

Or:

 select Cancel procedure,

OK cancel move.

Restore channels

 Select Restore channels,

 move to list.

 Select beginning of block,

OK mark beginning of block.

 Select end of block,

OK mark end of block (selected channels are coloured

blue).

 Select Restore channels,

OK channels will be added again to the channel list.

Or:

 select Cancel procedure,

OK cancel restore.

Delete list

 Select Delete list,

OK confirm delete list.

OK Confirm delete.

Loewe bild

User handbook



System settings

Channels

Compose / edit Personal list

Each personal list can contain up to 99 channels. You can compose the

personal lists to suit your convenience (e.g., topic lists). Other persons

using this TV set can create their own personal lists.

Creating and updating personal channel lists is not possible as long

as a programmed timer recording is active.

Create / edit New personal list

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Channels,

 go to next column.

 Mark Channel lists TV,

 go to next column.

 Mark New personal list,

OKNew personal list x will be created.

x stands for the number of the personal list.

The number depends on how many list were

already created.



Mark the channel in the channel list which is to be

added to the personal list.

OK adds the channel to the personal list.

The new channel will be added at the end of the

personal list. Proceed in the same way with addi-

tional channels.

 Call up additional options.

ASTRA LCN

DVB-T

DVB-C

Examples of channel lists. Select the channel list from

which you add channels to the personal list. In the

personal list you can store channels from different

sources.

Sorting The sorting procedure for the source channel list

may be changed between numerical and alphabeti-

cal.

BACK: Store and close channel list.

Adding channels to Personal list

The Personal list must be opened to add new chan-

nels to it.



Select Add/remove Channels in the menu

options.

How to add channels is described in the left column.

Deleting channels from the Personal list

The Personal list must be opened to delete channels

in it.

 Select Add/remove Channels in the menu

options,

OKactivate.

 go to personal list.



Mark the channel to be deleted in the personal

list,

OK activate. Function of the coloured keys in standard

PIP functionality.

BACK: Store and close channel list.

Move / reorder channels in the Personal list

The personal list must be opened to move channels

in it.

 Select Move channels in the menu options,

OKactivate.



Select channel to be moved in the Personal list,

OK mark (channel will be coloured blue).



Select insert position (insert position will be

marked with a blue line),

OK Execute move. Proceed in the same way with

additional channels.

BACK: Store and close channel list.

Renaming the Personal list

The Personal list to be renamed must be opened.

 Select Rename list in the menu options,

OKactivate.

Enter new name.

 Select Adopt.

OK New name for the personal list will be adopted.

Delete Personal list

The Personal list to be deleted must be opened.

Deleting of the list is irrevocable.

 Select Delete list in the menu options,

OKactivate.

Loewe bild

User handbook

100



System settings

Channels

Update channel list automatically

Some programme providers offer an automatic update of the chan-

nel lists (Dynamic Channel Management). You may Allow or Block

an automatic channel list update. If automatic updating is allowed,

a screen message about an available update appears whenever the

list is changed.

Allow/block updates

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Channels,

 go to next column.

Mark Update channel list automatically,

 go to next column.

 Select Allow or Block,

OK adopt.

If the channel list is not up to date, it will be

updated automatically, provided the option Allow

is selected.

Updating the channel list

A message appears whenever the TV is switched on if the network

provider changes their channel list.

In Update channel list automatically, Allow must

be selected.

 Select the desired procedure.

Because your network provider has changed its station list, it has to be adapted

on your TV set as well. Please specify when you wish to do this.

At once

After switch off to standby

Later

Update station list

Proceed with

At once

The channel list will be immediately updated. Normally

this occurs in the background without interfering

further with the TV‘s operation. In exceptional cases,

it is however possible that during this process an

automatic channel change may be necessary.

After switch

off to

standby

The channel list will be updated the next time the TV

set is switched off into standby mode.

Later

Updating the channel list will be postponed to a later

date. When the TV set is switched on and off, the

update message will appear again.

OK Confirm selection.

Transfer all channel lists

You can export all channel lists of your TV set to a USB storage device

or import channel lists.

Calling Transfer all channel lists

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Channels,

 go to next column.

Mark Transfer all channel lists,

OK call.

 Select a target if several USB storage media

are available.

 Mark Export or Import,

OK confirm selection.

When you import channel lists, all channel lists are

overwritten in this device.

Before you remove the USB storage again, you need

to safely disconnect it with ‚Unmount‘ from the TV

set to prevent data loss.

Loewe bild

User handbook

101



System settings

Control

In the chapter Control you find settings for the various operating modes

like PIP and DR+ as well as settings referring in an interfunctional way

to your TV set like, for example, time and date and on-screen displays.

Calling Control

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Select Control,

 go to next column.

Select desired menu item,

 go to next column.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the Control menu:

Language

Here you can define the menu language and for DVB

channels also the subtitle and audio language.

See chapter System settings, section Control –

Language for further information.

Parental

lock

With the parental lock you can bar access to all

channels immediately or daily for a certain period

of time. The channels can also be locked individu-

ally. Age-dependent locking of programs with an

appropriate age code is also possible.

See chapter System settings, section Control –

Parental lock for further information.

EPG

Here you can do all EPG settings.

See chapter System settings, section Control –

EPG for further information.

Energy

efficiency

Here you can determine how energy efficient your

TV set shall be.

See chapter System settings, section Control –

Energy efficiency for further information.

Quick start

mode

Here you can activate the quick start mode. The TV

set will turn on immediately and without waiting time.

See chapter System settings, section Control –

Quick start mode for further information.

Software

update

Here you can download new software from a USB

storage medium or from the Internet (as far as

requirements exist for this).

See chapter System settings, section Control –

Software update for further information.

more ...

After confirmation with the OK key you will be offered

additional not so frequently used sub items for the

current menu item.

On-screen

displays

Here you can make settings for the duration, position

and existence of special on-screen displays.

See chapter System settings, section Control –

On-screen displays for further information.

Time and

date

The time and date are normally obtained

automatically from the TV.

See chapter System settings, section Control –

Time and date for further information.

DVB settings

Here you can make settings which only refer to DVB

channels (subtitles and audio mode, DVB character

set).

See chapter System settings, section Control –

DVB settings for further information.

PIP

In this menu you can make all adjustments for the

picture-in-picture display.

See chapter System settings, section Control –

PIP for further information.

DR+

Here you can do all the settings for the digital re-

corder.

See chapter System settings, section Control –

DR+ for further information.

Standard

Teletext

Here you can do all Standard Teletext settings.

See chapter System settings, section Control –

Standard Teletext for further information.

HbbTV

Here you can do all settings for the HbbTV mode.

See chapter System settings, section Control –

HbbTV for further information.

Hard disks

Here you find tools to format or check the hard disks.

See chapter System settings, section Control –

Hard disks for further information.

Export log file

The log file available in the system is exported to a

USB storage device.

See chapter System settings, section Control –

Export log file.

key

function

Here you can assign another function to the Aster-

isk key. The selected function will then be called

directly when the key is pressed.

See chapter System settings, section Control –

Asterik key function for further information.

Loewe bild

User handbook

102



System settings

Control

Language

Specify the language for all menus in the TV set in the language menu.

The language for the DVB subtitles and the film language can be set

for DVB programmes.

Call language

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark Language,

 go to next column.

 Select desired setting and make changes.

OKAdopt settings.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the Language menu:

You can change the menu language here.

Subtitle

(DVB)

If subtitles are provided by the DVB channel, you can

set your desired language in advance here. If this is

included in the range of languages of the channel, it

will be shown automatically.

You can also specify an alternative language under

this menu item, in case your chosen language is not

offered by the channel.

Audio (DVB)

Specify your desired film language in advance here.

If this is included in the range of languages of the

channel, it will be shown automatically.

You can also specify an alternative language under

this menu item, in case your chosen language is not

offered by the channel.

EPG

Calling EPG settings

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark EPG,

 go to next column.

Explanation of the EPG setting options:

Channel

selection TV

Channel

selection

Radio

In the Channel selection you can determine for

which channel in the programme guide, information

is to be displayed. Programme information is only

displayed for channels with

in the EPG list. Using

the on-screen buttons in the bottom line you can

mark all channels or unmark the channels or select

channels from specific (e.g., personal) lists.

Further information on EPG channel selection you

find in chapter TV, section Electronic Programme

Guide – EPG wizard.

Due to the large number of receivable channels you

should restrict the channel selection. This reduces

the data entry time and increases the clarity in the

EPG.

Data

capture

Here you can switch the data entry for the electronic

programme guide (EPG) on and off.

If the data capture is switched on, your TV set tries to

update the database overnight (normally between 2

and 5 am) or, if required, two minutes after switching

to stand-by mode. The TV set must be on stand-by

for this and not switched off at the mains switch.

The indicator on the TV set lights blue during data

capture in stand-by mode.

The data are also updated while you are watching

the EPG channel.

TV on when

memorised

When yes is selected in the setting, the switched off

TV switches on automatically in standby mode at

the beginning of a memorised programme. A screen

message appears when switching on. If this is not

confirmed within 5 minutes with the OK key, the TV

switches automatically off again for safety reasons.

Clear data

base

This menu item allows you to remove all data from

EPG database. It will take some time to retrieve this

data again.

Loewe bild

User handbook

103



System settings

Control

Parental lock

You can select and set various security options to prevent

unauthorised use of the TV set and to protect your children from

unsuitable programmes.

Call Parental lock menu

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark Parental lock,

 go to next column.

Define a four digit access code (PIN) the first time you

open it. Note the access code (PIN) well.

The access code must not consist of the same four

digits.

 Mark Adopt,

OK activate.

The new PIN must be entered and confirmed again.

The Parental lock menu will be opened.

The four-digit access code (PIN) must be entered

when the parental lock is opened in future. For security

reasons, it appears encrypted (****) when entering.

Note for unlocking

As soon as the PIN has once been entered to unlock your TV set, all

currently set parental locks will be disabled temporarily. Besides of the

general locks described in this chapter, this is also valid for parental

lock of DR+ archive entries. Parental locks will only be re-enabled when

the TV set is switched off.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the Parental lock menu:

Lock all

channels

The TV set is locked immediately the menu is exited.

All programmes can then only be watched after

entering the access code.

The lock can be activated both Immediately and

for a Daily defined period.

The lock remains active until it is switched off in the

menu.

Lock single

channels

You can lock / unlock individual or all of the channels

in the channel list specifically.

The lock remains active until it is switched off in the

menu.

Age-related

lock

Some DVB channels also broadcast an age

classification. If the age set here is below the

broadcast age limit, the programme can only be

watched after entering the access code.

Change

access code

You can change your access code at any time. Enter

the new access code in place of the old one.

Deactivate

All set parental locks (locked channels, age-

dependent locks, locked films in the DR+ archive)

are cancelled. The current secret code is deleted.

When the parental lock is reactivated all the previous

parental locks are set again automatically.

Reset

All currently set parental locks are finally cancelled.

The access code is deleted.

Protection of minors for CI Plus programmes

Youth-protected broadcasts of programme providers with CI Plus

encoding possibly require you to enter the secret number (PIN) of

the CA module.

The Parental lock PIN of the CA module can be store in the TV set.

So that you only have to remember one PIN number, we recommend

that you select the PIN number of the TV set according to the CA

module PIN number.

Code number

The code number cancels all entered access codes. It can be used for

example if you have forgotten your PIN. In the supplied operating manual

you find a note on the access code number. Remove this one from the

operating manual and keep it in a safe place.

Loewe bild

User handbook

104



System settings

Control

Energy efficiency

Determine how energy efficient your TV set shall be. The value for

the contrast (and thus the brightness of the background lighting)

is adapted and the automatic dimmer

activated or deactivated

depending on the presetting.

Call Energy efficiency

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark Energy efficiency,

 go to next column.

 Select desired setting and make changes.

OKAdopt settings.

Explanations of the setting options in the energy efficiency

menu:

Home Mode

The emphasis for home use is on low energy

consumption. The automatic dimmer is activated.

The TV set switches off automatically for the sake

of saving energy, after it has been out of operation

for 4 hours.

Premium

Mode

This mode optimises the settings to a brighter

environment at a higher energy consumption. The

automatic dimmer is activated.

The TV set switches off automatically for the sake

of saving energy, after it has been out of operation

for 4 hours.

Shop Mode

The picture settings are aligned to operation in

the presentation room. The automatic dimmer is

deactivated. If the ambient brightness diminishes,

the energy consumption is not reduced.

Any changes made are reset to the defaults after

30 minutes.

4 h switch-

off timer

If you disable the timer, the TV set will no longer

automatically switch off after 4h without operation

to limit the increased energy consumption.

Quick start mode

If you choose to activate the quick start mode, you will see the TV

screen immediately after each switching on of the TV set and without

any waiting time. You can specify the times at which your device will

be in the Quick Start Mode.

In this case, please note the higher power consumption (see chapter

Technical data) and thus a higher annual energy consumption

Default setting for the Quick Start Mode: no

Call Quick start mode

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark Quick start mode,

 go to next column.

 Select desired setting and make changes.

You can individually change the suggested

times.

OKAdopt settings.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

105

Software update

It is possible to update the software on your Loewe TV set.

In the software update (package update) all the software releases in

the TV are scanned and updated as required.

Here you can download a new piece of software from different sources

(if existing).

Current software versions can be downloaded from the Loewe Internet

site (see below) and installed on your TV set using a USB stick.

If your TV set is connected to the Internet, the TV set can be updated

directly via the Internet (see chapter System settings, section

Control – Manual update via the Internet).

Updating the software is not possible as long as a programmed

timer recording is active.

When a software update occurs it may happen that timer entries and

memorised programmes are deleted. After such a software update,

check your timer list

(see chapter Recordings, section Timer –

Timer list).

Please be aware of the requirements of your USB stick in section

Technical data – Media.

Software download from the Loewe Internet site for update

via USB

Where available, you can download new software for your TV set from

our homepage.

To do this, visit our homepage at:

www.loewe.tv/int/support

You can select your product on the Support Homepage under the

point Software .

Then you can select and download under Select software the soft-

ware available for your TV set.

Unpack the downloaded file into the main directory of your USB stick.

Then carry out the software update as described below.

USB stick - requirements

USB sticks tested by Loewe and compatible in type and format can

be ordered from the Loewe dealer using the article no. 90456.900.

If you would like to use your own USB stick, please follow these tips/

conditions:

• Formatting in FAT32.

• Just one partition.

• Do not use encrypted USB sticks.

• Do not use USB sticks that simulate a CD ROM drive.

• There may be no hidden files on the device.

• For some types of device, the construc-

tion of the USB stick is significant.

Maximum dimensions in mm: 70x20x10.

• If in doubt, the USB stick should be formatted as “FAT32” without

“extended attributes”.

In order to avoid problems during the software update of the tv set

the USB stick in use should meet the requirements.



System settings

Control

Loewe bild

User handbook

106



System settings

Control

Software update via USB storage device

To do this, plug the USB stick with the downloaded software into a

free USB port of the TV set.

Calling Software update

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark Software update,

 go to next column.

 Mark Via USB,

 call Software update.

The version of the software package that is

currently installed will be displayed.

Proceed.

The TV set searches for a new software package

on the USB stick.

If a new software version is available after the search,

an on-screen message appears (see right hand

column).

If several different software packages are found on the

USB stick, the latest software package is always used.

If no new software package was found in the search:

End of wizard.

New software package found

Proceed starts loading of the new software.

Or:

End of wizard.

The update will then not be carried out.

Load new software package

The software is loaded in several steps. The total loading

and programming process can take up to approx. 50

minutes in total.

Please do not switch off your TV set with the mains

switch during the entire loading and programming

process.

After the update, the TV set is automatically powered

off and on again.

Depending on the software loaded, it is possible that

the device may not turn off automatically after the

update. Therefore, please supervise the update

process.

When the TV set is switched on again, a message is

displayed.

BACK:End of wizard.

60%

...

... Via USB

Note: The loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes

in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.

Note: The TV set will automatically restart after programming. You will then be

informed about the end of the programming in a dialogue.

Note: The loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes

in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.

Note: The TV set will automatically restart after programming. You will then be

informed about the end of the programming in a dialogue.

Updating software

The "V4.4.34.0" software is currently being programmed, please wait ...

The software was successfully updated.

Hint

Finish wizard with

Loewe bild

User handbook

107



System settings

Control

Manual update via the Internet

If an Internet connection is available, new software can be downloaded

directly and installed onto the TV set.

Calling Software update

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark Software update,

 go to next column.

 Mark Via Internet,

 go to next column.

You will see a message on the screen regarding

data protection.

If you are not in agreement with the relevant data being

passed on:

 Exit the update process.

The update will then not be carried out.

Otherwise: Confirm data protection message by press-

ing .

The version of the software package that is currently

installed will be displayed.

Proceed.

The TV set connects to the Internet and scans the

update server for new software.

If a new software version is available after the search, an

on-screen message appears (see right hand column).

If no new software package was found in the search:

BACK: End of wizard.

New software package found

Proceed starts loading of the new software.

Or:

End of wizard.

The update will then not be carried out.

Load new software package

Only the parts of the software package that are not up

to date will be automatically downloaded from the

Internet and updated.

Each part of the software is downloaded individually

from the Internet and is then programmed.

The total time required for all the software parts to be

downloaded from the Internet is dependent on the

speed of data transfer that is being used.

The total programming process can take up to 50

minutes in total.

Please do not switch off your TV set with the mains

switch during the entire loading and programming

process.

After the update, the TV set is automatically powered

off and on again.

Depending on the software loaded, it is possible that

the device may not turn off automatically after the

update. Therefore, please supervise the update

process.

When the TV set is switched on again, a message is

displayed.

BACK:End of wizard.

......

New software

A new software version was found.

New software: V4.4.34.0 (Current software: V4.4.31.0)

If you now wish to load the new software, press the button. Otherwise

close with the button.

Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the

data.

A new software version was found.

New software: V4.4.34.0 (Current software: V4.4.31.0)

If you now wish to load the new software, press the button. Otherwise

close with the button.

Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the

data.

Start update

 

60%

...

-NSD3GDKN@CHMF@MCOQNFQ@LLHMFOQNBDRRB@MS@JDTOSN@OOQNWLHMTSDR

in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.

Note: The TV set will automatically restart after programming. You will then be

informed about the end of the programming in a dialogue.

-NSD3GDKN@CHMF@MCOQNFQ@LLHMFOQNBDRRB@MS@JDTOSN@OOQNWLHMTSDR

in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.

Note: The TV set will automatically restart after programming. You will then be

informed about the end of the programming in a dialogue.

Updating software

The "V1.1.14.0" software is currently being programmed, please wait ...

Start update

Loewe bild

User handbook

108

Software update via Antenna

A software update via antenna is only available for channels of the

Freeview DVB-T platform in the UK and Ireland.

Calling Software update

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark Software update,

 go to next column.

 Mark Via Antenna,

 call Software update.

You will see a message on the screen regarding

data protection.

Proceed.

The TV set searches for a new software package.

If a new software version is available after the search, an

on-screen message appears (see below).

If no new software package was found in the search:

BACK: End of wizard.

New software package found

Proceed starts loading of the new software.

Or:

BACK: End of wizard.

The update will then not be carried out.

... Via antenna

Current software: 4.4.31.0

For loading a new software, it is mandatory to have the antenna cable attached

to the TV. Start search pressing the key .

SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - Current software

 

... Via antenna

New software

A new software version was found.

New software: V4.4.40.0 (Current software: V4.4.31.0)

If you now wish to load the new software, press the button. Otherwise

close with the button.

Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the

data.

A new software version was found.

New software: V4.4.40.0 (Current software: V4.4.31.0)

If you now wish to load the new software, press the button. Otherwise

close with the button.

Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the

data.

 

Load new software package

The software is downloaded in several steps. The total

downloading and programming process can take up to

approx. 50 minutes in total.

Please do not switch off your TV set with the mains

switch during the entire loading and programming

process.

After the update, the TV set is automatically powered

off and on again.

Depending on the software loaded, it is possible that

the device may not turn off automatically after the

update. Therefore, please supervise the update

process.

When the TV set is switched on again, a message is

displayed.

BACK:End of wizard.

60%

...

Note: The loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes

in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.

Note: The TV set will automatically restart after programming. You will then be

informed about the end of the programming in a dialogue.

Note: The loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes

in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.

Note: The TV set will automatically restart after programming. You will then be

informed about the end of the programming in a dialogue.

Updating software

The "V4.4.40.0" software is currently being programmed, please wait ...

Via antenna

The software was successfully updated.

Hint

Finish wizard with



System settings

Control

Loewe bild

User handbook

109

Automatic update via the internet

Your TV set checks at definite intervals whether a newer software than

the one installed in the TV set is available in the Internet. If this is the

case, you can find this out by a screen message.

In order to get informed about the new software, the TV set must

be connected to the Internet.

The Inform about new software item can also be switched on/

off at the end of initial installation.

Showing/Hiding information on new software

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark Software update,

 go to next column.

 Mark Via Internet,

 go to next column.

 Mark Inform about new software,

 go to next column.

 Select yes / no,

OK Adopt.



System settings

Control

New software package found

For the menu item Inform about new software, yes is selected

(see left column).

If the TV set has found a new software version during the check, you

will be informed about this via a screen message.

 Select the desired procedure.

Load the

software

now

After confirmation, the new TV software will be

loaded from the internet and then programmed.

Load the

software

when

switch off to

standby

The software will be loaded and programmed after

the TV set has been switched off into standby mode

for the next time. The display on the control panel

will light up blue during the update.

The TV set must not be switched off at the mains

before the downloading process is complete (control

panel display lights up white)!

Load the

software

later (at

most

three-fold

notification)

Loading the software will be postponed to a later date.

The new software message will be displayed the next

time the TV set is switched on.

If the loading process is postponed three times then

the message will only be shown again once the next

software version is available.

Do not

load this

software

version

The new software will not be loaded. The on-screen

message will only be shown again for the next soft-

ware version.

Confirm selection.

A new software version is now available and can be downloaded from the internet.

New software: V4.4.40.0 (Current software: V4.4.31.0)

Please specify how you would like to continue:

Load new software now

Load software when switching off to standby

Load software later (max. 3 times notification)

Do not load this software version

SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - New software

Adopt with

Loewe bild

User handbook

110



System settings

Control

On-screen displays

You can select different settings in this menu which affect the on-

screen displays.

Call On-screen displays

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark more ...,

 call other settings.

 Mark On-screen displays,

 go to next column.

 Select desired setting and make changes.

OKAdopt settings.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the On-screen displays

menu:

Display time Here you set the duration of the display, e.g. for the vol-

ume or the channel display when changing channels.

Volume

display

Here you set whether a volume change is also to be

indicated visibly on the screen.

Automatic

menu info

Herewith you activate/deactivate the info text

displays for the currently selected menu item.

Key

explanation

If yes is set, the assignment of special remote control

keys is indicated together with the TV status display.

Permanent

clock display

The time display can be permanently shown. It is

always visible as long as no other display is made.

Automatic

HDMI hint

If yes is set here, a message about the adapted func-

tion of the remote control is shown whenever you

switch over to an HDMI channel position to which a

Digital Link HD capable TV set is connected.

Upper info

display

This activates the upper additional on-screen display

in the status bar when switching stations on or off.

„No Signal"

notification

This allows you to suppress the ‘No signal’ message.

Switch off

curtain

Here you can specify whether there is a switch-off

curtain (0 = no curtain) and how long this one needs

for closing.

Radio screen

If on is set here, the screen remains permanently swit-

ched on in radio mode. When off after 30 seconds/1

minute/2 minute, the screen is switched off.

Time and date

The time and date are normally acquired automatically by the TV

set. If the data is missing or wrong, you can adjust it via the time and

date menu.

Call Time and date

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark more ...,

 call other settings.

 Mark Time and date,

 go to next column.

 Select desired setting and make changes.

OKAdopt settings.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the Time and date menu:

Data capture

If you need to set the time and date entries manually,

turn off the automatic setting here.

Time zone

The current time at the Greenwich Meridian 0 is to be

understood as world time. The time shift in relation to

this time must be given in hours (–11 to +13).

Changeover

summer time

/ winter time

If the summer time in your country is changed to

Daylight-saving time, select yes please.

Beginning of

daylight-

saving time

Enter the date on which the time is switched over to

summer time if it deviates from the automatically

calculated date. This menu item appears only if yes

was selected for Daylight-saving time.

Only possible when

changeover summer time/

winter time – yes

has been selected.

End

of daylight-

saving time

Enter the date on which the summer time ends if

it deviates from the automatically calculated date.

This menu item appears only if yes was selected for

Daylight-saving time.

nly possible when

changeover summer time/

winter time – yes

has been selected.

Time

Date

Enter the time (00:00 to 23:59) / date (day.month.

year) with the numerical keys of the remote control.

nly possible when

Data capture - off or when

time has not been automatically acquired.

Loewe bild

User handbook

111



System settings

Control

DVB settings

You can make general pre-settings for DVB channels.

Calling DVB settings

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark more ...,

 call other settings.

 Mark DVB settings,

 go to next column.

Explanation of the DVB setting options:

Subtitle

mode

Here you can preset whether a subtitle is always to

be displayed as soon as it is offered by the channel.

A special subtitle for impaired hearing can also be

selected.

Subtitles are not offered by all channels. Many chan-

nels only broadcast subtitles by teletext.

DVB

character

set

Select the DVB character set so that the title of the

broadcast of your favourite received channel or the

texts of your CA module are displayed correctly.

Audio

commentary

You can preset the system here to always play

a special soundtrack for the visually impaired

whenever one is available. This soundtrack uses an

audio commentary to describe the action taking

place on-screen.

PIP

Adjust size of the PIP image

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark more ...,

 call other settings.

Mark PIP,

 go to next column.

 Select desired setting and make changes.

OKAdopt settings.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the PIP Settings menu:

Size

You can choose if your second picture faded in

(picture in picture) shall be displayed small or large.

Position

Here you can set the position of the second inserted

picture (picture in picture).

You can position the second picture on the top

right, top left, bottom right and bottom left.

Functionality Here you can change the PIP functionality between

standard PIP and iPIP.

The iPIP menu item is not available for non-dual-

channel devices

or when selecting an AV inter-

face (HDMI, etc.).

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

112



System settings

Control

You can adapt the Digital Recorder to your requirements.

Call settings for the digital recorder

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark more ...,

 call other settings.

 Mark DR+,

 go to next column.

 Mark desired setting,

 go to next column.

 Make settings,

OK confirm setting.

Explanation of the DR+ setting options

Recording

You can set a pre-record and post-record time for

timer recordings made without auto time control.

This minimizes the risk that a part of the broadcast

is not recorded due to the broadcast starting earlier

and/or finishing later.

Factory setting: pre-record time: 1 min,

post-record time: 5 min.

Notify

hidden

sections

If an entry has been hidden in an archive recording,

you can get informed by a screen message when

skipping a hidden area.

Factory setting: yes.

Jump

distance

Set the standard jump distance (in minutes) used

for jumping forwards or backwards in the movie by

briefly pressing the  or  keys.

Factory setting: 2 min.

Smart jump

If the „Smart jump“ mode is activated you can

approach a desired place by pressing the  and 

buttons alternately and halving the jump width. After

every 3rd jump in the same direction the jump width

is doubled (up to a maximum of 8 minutes).

If off is set you always jump the same currently set

jump width (time) with the  and  buttons.

Factory setting: on

Serial

recording

tolerance

The serial recording tolerance is necessary to

avoid recording a serial more than once when it is

broadcast more than once a day.

It is only recorded when it begins within the

given time interval (start time +- series recording

tolerance).

Use the numeric button on the remote control to

enter the time (always two-digit for 01 to 60 min.).

Factory setting:

± 30 min.

Recording

subtitles

Select here whether subtitles are to be recorded for

DVB channels.

Factory setting: no

DR+

Streaming

With this, all the settings are activated to make all

the films on your DR+ archive available to other

LOEWE TVs using your home network

(or vice-

versa, e.g. allowing you to use the DR+ archive of

other LOEWE TVs).

See next page for further information.

For set location DK, FIN, N or S: yes.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

113



System settings

Control

Standard Teletext

In the Standard Teletext menu you can configure the Teletext.

Call Teletext settings

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark more ...,

 call other settings.

 Mark Standard Teletext,

 go to next column.

Explanations of the Standard Teletext menu functions:

Character set

Teletext character set can be switched to other lan-

guages (Russian, Greek, Polish and Turkish).

Call DR+ streaming settings

The DR+ settings are called (see previous page).

 Mark DR+ Streaming,

 go to next column.

 Mark desired setting,

 go to next column.

 Make settings,

OK confirm setting.

Explanation of the setting options for DR+ streaming

Share DR+

archive with

other

devices

Specify here whether recorded broadcasts within

your TV set’s DR+ archive are to be accessible for

viewing from other TV sets (server function).

Enabled programmes can also be played on other

UPnP-AV clients in the same network.

Also use

other

archives.

Setting yes enables you, via the archive, to also view

recordings from other TV sets that have accessible

movies within the home network (client function).

Notify

started

„Follow me“

recording

Your TV set can issue a message if a follow-me

recording has been started on another TV set, which

you can view on this TV set.

DR+ device

group name

Give a name for your TV set group.

Using different group names enables you to group

your TV sets as required. Only TV sets under the

same group name can exchange data.

IP port

number

IP port numbers are preset ex-factory. Under normal

circumstances they do not require amending.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

114



System settings

Control

HbbTV

Here you can do all settings for the HbbTV mode.

Call HbbTV settings

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark more ...,

 call other settings.

 Mark HbbTV,

 go to next column.

 Mark desired setting,

 go to next column.

 Make settings,

OK confirm setting.

Explanation of the setting options for HbbTV

HbbTV mode

When the HbbTV mode is active (factory setting),

additional services and further information (e.g., also

from the Internet) can be viewed if these are offered

by the current channel.

Start

behaviour of

HbbTV-

stations

If HbbTV mode – on has been selected, you can

specify if an available HbbTV application should be

loaded automatically after the channel has been

changed or if this should only occur manually after

the red key has been pressed once.

The startup behaviour can be set for TV and radio

channels.

After loading the HbbTV application, an on screen

message is displayed (depending on the channel

that is being viewed).

Function of

the TEXT

key

With the setting Standard Teletext first (factory

setting), the standard Teletext is opened when the

TEXT key is pressed for the first time. Pressing the

TEXT key for a second time will then display the

MediaText. Pressing the TEXT key for a third time

will bring you back to the TV picture. If MediaText

first is selected, the TEXT key will do the exact

opposite.

Depending on the programme provider, the direct

Call of MediaText may not be possible. MediaText

must then be opened by means of the HbbTV

application.

Asterisk key function

You can assign the asterisk key on the remote control unit a particular

function (App Gallery, picture/sound menu, sound mode, etc.).

The selected function is then called directly at a long keypress (ap-

prox. 2 sec.).

The assignment of the star key with Save object as favorite for the

short keypress remains unaffected.

Call Asterisk key settings

Default setting: Call App Gallery

HOME: Call Home view.

 Select System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Select Control,

 go to next column.

 Select more ...,

 call other settings.

 Select

key function,

 go to next column.

 Select function,

OK Adopt.

Loewe bild

User handbook

115

Rotate TV

Here you can set the turning range for a Loewe motorised rotary foot

and set the switched off position of your TV set.

To connect a motorized rotary foot, you need the Motor unit con-

nection. This is found at the rear of your TV set

Menu item Rotate TV appears only if you have an installation with

motorized stand.

Setting the range of rotation (rotation wizard)

By means of the rotation wizard you can define the rotation range of

the TV set (maximum +/- 45 degrees) by setting the maximum right

and left stop position.

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark more ...,

 call other settings.

 Mark Rotate TV,

 go to next column.

Select Basic adjustments,

 call Basic adjustment.

Basic adjustments (to the right)

Rotate your TV set to the right as far as the

installation site allows.

This will be the maximum right rotation position

in future.

proceed.

Basic adjustments (to the left)

Turn your TV set to the left as far as the installation

site of your set allows.

This will be the maximum left rotation position in

future.

End of wizard.

Specifying the switch-off position

This is where you specify the position that the TV will take when it is

switched off. In order for the TV set to return to the determined switchoff

position when switching it off, this must be activated (see below).

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark more ...,

 call other settings.

 Mark Rotate TV,

 go to next column.

 Select Set switch-off position,

 call Set switch-off position.

 Call dialogue for setting the new switch-off

position.

 Set desired switch-off position.

The switch off position can only be defined within

the set rotation range (see left column).

End of wizard.

Activating the switch-off position

If the TV set is switched off with the on/off key on the remote control or

at the control panel then it will turn to the defined switch-off position.

When it is switched back on, it returns to the position last set.

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark more ...,

 call other settings.

 Mark Rotate TV,

 go to next column.

 Select Activate switch-off position,

go to the next menu line below.

Select yes,

OK adopt.



System settings

Control

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

116

Set switch-on position

Here you can specify the period of time in which your TV set turns to

a specific switch-on position. The suggested times and the position

can be changed individually.

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark more ...,

 call other settings.

 Mark Rotate TV,

 go to next column.

Mark Specify switch-on position,

 Call specify switch-on position.

 Select the desired setting and make changes.

OKAccept settings.

End of wizard.

Adjust 0 position

Here you can set the 0-position of the TV set.

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark more ...,

 call other settings.

 Mark Rotate TV,



go to next column.

Mark Adjust 0 position,

 Call adjust 0 position.

Set desired 0-Position .

End of wizard.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).



System settings

Control

Display kinematics

Only for set types bild 9 and bild 7.

The Loewe TV sets types bild 9 and bild 7 are equipped with a kinema-

tics that moves the TV set upwards or downwards when switching it

on and off, whereby the speaker cover is visible or is hidden.

Please make sure that there is no externally applied force opposing the

movement. You have the option to fix the position of the kinematics

from the menu, or disable the function.

Call Display kinematics settings

HOME: Call Home view.

 Select System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Select Control,

 go to next column.

 Select more ...,

 call other settings.

Select Display kinematics,

OKCall.

 Select the desired setting,

OK confirm selection.

off, speaker

visible

off, speaker

hidden

Determine here whether the screen should move

after each switching on and off or remain in a fixed

position.

Transport

Before you transport the TV set, in the Screen cinematics menu

(see above), set the speaker to be visible after switching off the

TV set. The screen is now in the top position. Secure the monitor

into this position with the transport fixing bolt. The screen is now

in the top position. Secure the monitor into this position with the

transport fixing bolt.

Also, attach the original stabilizer parts to prevent damage. Your

dealer will provide you with all packaging materials if necessary.

Loewe bild

User handbook

117



System settings

Control

Hard disks

Checking the hard disk

You should launch a check of the integrated hard disk once a year or

if problems arise when starting recordings (e.g. when transferring to

time-shift playback).

Call hard disk settings

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark more ...,

 call other settings.

 Mark Hard disks,

 go to next column.

Mark Check integrated one,

OKCall.

A warning note will be displayed.

OKPress at least for three seconds to start the

checking.

Or:

BACK: Cancel procedure.

Checking the hard disk (check disk) may take up to

20 min. Never ever switch off the TV set during a

check disk process.

After the check, a message will appear on the screen

showing the results of the check and tips on how to

resolve any problems that are present, should there

be any.

After checking of the hard disk the TV set must be

switched off and on again.

Formatting the hard disk

If problems were detected when the hard disk was being tested (see

left column), re-formatting may be able to remedy the problem.

Additionally, you can re-format the hard disk in order to quickly and

easily delete all the data stored on it.

Warning!

Formatting the hard disk will erase all data stored on it!

The station logos stored on the internal

hard disk are deleted and

only reloaded when the internet connection is established.

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark more ...,

 call other settings.

 Mark Hard disks,

 go to next column.

 Mark Format integrated one or Format exter-

nal one,

OKCall.

A warning note will be displayed.

OKPress at least for three seconds to start format-

ting.

Or:

BACK: Cancel procedure

Never ever switch off the TV set during a formatting

process.

After the formatting, a message will appear on the

screen showing the results of the formatting and tips

on how to resolve any problems that exist, should there

be any.

After the formatting the TV set must be switched

off and on again.

Note on formatting external USB disks:

The TV set supports the two hard disk file systems FAT 32 and NTFS.

External hard disks are formatted by the TV in the FAT32 file system

to full capacity.

With FAT32, the maximum size of a file is 4 GB.

For a parallel use of TV and PC, we recommend that you reformat

the hard disk on a PC to NTFS.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

118

Export log file

To resolve problems, a log file can be provided for the service. The log

file can be exported to a USB storage device or manually or automa-

tically transferred via the Internet.

The log file can be transferred via the Internet only when an online

connection exists.

The transferred data is anonymous and purely of technical nature

without reference to person, location or IP address. Browser history

or login details are not stored or transferred.

Only if the user actively reports to the Loewe service with the refe-

rence number (see right column) and specifies the time and error

will a targeted processing result.

Call export of the log file

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Control,

 go to next column.

 Mark more ...,

 call other settings.

 Mark Export log file,

 go to next column.

 Select I agree, if you accept the privacy

policies,

OK Confirm selection.

 Select Via Internet, Via USB or Settings.

When selecting Via Internet:

 Mark Export log files now,

OK confirm selection.

This transfers all stored log files to the Loewe

server.

After successful transmission, a reference

number will be displayed that you can specify as

a reference when making inquiries.

When selecting Via USB:

 Select a target if several USB storage media

are available.

 Select the size of the log file. You can choose

between Normal and extensive.

 Mark Export,

OK confirm selection.

Before you remove the USB storage again, you need

to safely disconnect it with Unmount from the TV

set to prevent data loss.

When selecting Settings:

 Mark the desired setting.

Autom.

Export

Herewith you enable/disable the automatic export

of the problem file as soon as a problem situation

has occurred.

When set to on, the file is automatically transferred

to the Loewe server and stored as soon as a problem

situation has occurred.



System settings

Control

Loewe bild

User handbook

119



System settings

Multimedia / Network

Multimedia/Network

Under the Multimedia/Network item, you can make all multimedia

and network settings for your TV set.

Select Multimedia/Network

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Multimedia/Network,

 go to next column.

 Select desired menu item,

 go to next column.

Explanation of the setting options in the

Multimedia/Network

Network

settings

Under Network settings make the settings for your

network adapters.

For more information, see chapter System settings,

section Multimedia/Network – Network

settings.

Multimedia

settings

Here you can make multimedia settings.

For more information, see chapter System settings,

section Multimedia/Network – Multimedia

settings.

Home

Automation

Here you can make settings for a home control server

if this exists

For more information, see chapter System

settings, section Multimedia/Network – Home

Automation.

Renderer

You can allow external devices here and access your

television (renderer) via an app to play content there.

For more information, see chapter System settings,

section Multimedia/Network – Renderer.

Mobile

Recording

With this function, you can program recordings on

your TV set from outside your home network.

For more information, see chapter System

settings, section Multimedia/Network – Mobile

Recording.

Bluetooth

Here you can activate the Bluetooth function of your

TV set. This allows other Bluetooth devices to use

your TV set as a playback device. You can also use

a Bluetooth headset as a TV sound playback device.

For more information, see chapter System set-

tings, section Multimedia/Network – Bluetooth.

TIDAL login

TIDAL is a subscription-based music streaming

service that has over 40 million tracks. Register at

TIDAL.com.

Streaming

server

standby

Enter the time period that your television should

remain ready for further streaming after the last

active streaming (DR +, DLNA).

The time period always starts again after the last use

by other devices.

Loewe bild

User handbook

120

Network settings

Under Network settings make the settings for your network ad-

apters.

Call network settings

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Multimedia / Network,

 go to next column.

 Mark Network settings,

 go to next column.

 Select desired menu item,

 go to next column.

Explanations of the setting options in the network menu:

Networking

Here, the network wizard starts that guides you

through all necessary settings to your network (see

right hand column).

Host name

Give your TV set a name so that it can be uniquely

identified in the network.

Proxy server

Do the settings for using a proxy server. The proxy

server wizard will be called.

See chapter System settings, section Multimedia

/ Network – Proxy server for further information.

Wake on

LAN/WiFi

Here you can specify whether it is permitted to

access your TV set by LAN/WLAN in standby mode.

This allows you to switch on your TV, for example.

Please note that the TV set consequently uses more

power in standby mode.

After switching off the TV set into standby mode,

it takes minimum 30 seconds for the TV set to

be ready for reception of a signal (Wake on LAN/

WLAN) to power on via LAN/WLAN.

If you want to switch on your TV set via the Loewe

app by Wake on WLAN, you have to configure in

your router‘s encryption permanently on WPA2.

Setting WPA / WPA2 may not be used.

Network

The network wizard guides you through all the necessary settings

relevant to your network

At the beginning you see the current network status.

 Proceed to next step.

 Select network mode.

Select how you want to connect your TV set to

your network.

OK Confirm selection.

Off

Deactivates all existing network adaptors of your

TV set.

On, wired

only

Access to the network only via a network cable.

The wireless access is deactivated.

On, wireless

only

Access to the network only via WLAN.

The access via a network cable is deactivated.

Depending on which type of network (wireless or wired)

was selected, the appropriate settings appear below.

Network

status

Security hint

Network

mode



System settings

Multimedia / Network

Loewe bild

User handbook

121



System settings

Multimedia / Network

Configuration of the built-in LAN adaptor

As network operation was selected On, wired only.

 Select type of IP configuration.

automatic

Automatic configuration of the IP address via DHCP

server or via multiple protocols according to UPnP

specification (including DHCP).

After selecting IP configuration – automatic

proceed to the network status.

manual

Enter your fixed IP addresses manually.

If manual has been selected under IP configuration:

 Enter IP, Subnet mask, Gateway and DNS server

addresses in succession with the numerical keys

on the remote control.

 Proceed to network status.

You see the current network status again.

BACK: End of wizard.

configuration

Manual IP-

configuration

Network

status

Configuration of the built-in WLAN bridge adaptor

As network operation was selected On, wireless only.

The TV set now searches for wireless routers.

After the end of the search:

 Select a base channel to which the TV shall be

connected.

OK Confirm selection and proceed to the entry of the

Wi-Fi password.

If the desired access point is not found:

 Mark Search again,

OK repeat search for wireless routers.

Or:

 Mark Enter access point manually,

enter manually the SSID of the desired access

point, e.g., when the SSID of the access point is

not transferred

The TV set automatically detects the type of encryption

used and informs you. You will find the supported

encryption types in chapter Technical data.

If your wireless network is not encrypted: Proceed to

IP configuration.

 Proceed to password entry.

Enter WLAN password.

In case of an unknown WLAN key, contact your

network administrator.

For WEP encryption

 Select the WEP index,

OK proceed to IP configuration.

 Select type of IP configuration.

For the further workflow of the network wizard

see left column under IP configuration.

Access point

selection

WPA

passphrase

Loewe bild

User handbook

122



System settings

Multimedia / Network

Explanation of the settings in the network status:

Network

shows the current type of connection (wireless or

wired).

configuration

The current assignment method for the IP address

of your TV set (automatic or manual).

IP address

Your current IP address.

Subnet mask

Your current subnet-mask IP address.

Gateway

The IP address of your gateway.

DNS server 1

Your current first DNS server IP address.

DNS server 2

Your current second DNS server IP address.

Network

SSID

(for wireless connection only)

The name of your network.

MAC address

(TV)

(for wired connection only)

Indicates the MAC address that is built into the hard-

ware of your TV set’s wired network adaptor (LAN).

MAC address

(WLAN)

(for wireless connection only)

Indicates the MAC address that is built into the

hardware of your TV set’s wireless network adaptor

(WLAN).

Connection

status

Gives you information about the current status of

your wireless connection (save settings, connecting,

connection established).

Link

quality

Specifies the signal strength as a percentage.

Proxy server

In the proxy server wizard you make arrangements for your TV set for

a connection with a home network with proxy server.

A proxy server is not necessary for most home networks.

Contact your home network administrator if you are unclear about

the proxy server settings.

Specify if a Proxy server is used in your home network.

 Mark Use or Don’t use,

The following settings will only be requested after

the selection of Use.

 Proceed to next step.

 Proceed to entry of the proxy server name.

Specify the name or IP address of the proxy server

used.

 Proceed to next step.

 Proceed to entry of the proxy port number.

Specify the network port number of the proxy server.

 Proceed to next step.

Specify whether your proxy server requires a special

 Mark No login or Login necessary,

 Proceed to next step.

Enter your login data for the proxy server.

User name and password are requested only after

selecting Proxy server login.

Use proxy

server

Proxy server

name

Proxy port

number

Proxy server

Loewe bild

User handbook

123



System settings

Multimedia / Network

Multimedia settings

Under this menu item you find further settings for Audio, Video and

Photo.

Calling the Multimedia settings menu

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Multimedia / Network,

 go to next column.

 Mark Multimedia settings,

 go to next column.

 Select desired settings.

Explanations of the setting options in the Multimedia settings

menu:

Auto return

to music

player

The music player will reappear whenever another

dialogue, e.g., music selection is called during

playback, and no keys are pressed for the set time

period.

You can specify if and after which time the music

player reappears (selection options are No, After

1 min, After 5 min).

Renderer

Here you can allow external devices to access your TV set (renderer)

via app to render (play back) contents there.

Call up renderer menu

Default setting: on

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Multimedia / Network,

 go to next column.

 Mark Renderer,

 go to next column.

 Select the setting on or off.

OK Confirm selection.

Home Automation

Under this menu item, you can send an ID to your Home Automation

Server.

Call up home automation menu

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Multimedia / Network,

 go to next column.

 Mark Home Automation,

 go to next column.

Explanation of the setting options in the Home Automation

menu:

Send SDDP-

identification

Here you can assign an ID to the SDDP (Sim-

ple Device Discovery Protocol) in your Home

Network. By doing this your TV set can be

displayed in the device list of your Home Au-

tomation Server.

Loewe bild

User handbook

124

Mobile Recording

Mobile recording enables you to program recordings on your TV from

far away.

Basically, the function is based on a simple e-mail correspondence. If

the mobile recording function is activated and set, the TV set scans

an e-mail account at regular intervals.

If a record command is sent by the Loewe app, this command reaches

a connecting server.

From here, a short text email is sent to the appropriate email account.

The TV set can receive this information and program / start a recording

accordingly.

You can download the Loewe app for free for iOS and Android in

the appropriate app store.

The TV set must not be switched off using the power switch,

otherwise the email mailbox can not be scanned.

The TV set must be connected to the Internet.

The programmed timer recordings of the Mobile Recording function

are handled by the TV set with highest priority.

If at this time other recordings are programmed for the same

recording period, they will be overwritten by the new recording or

parts of the recording cut off.

Open settings for Mobile Recording

HOME: Call Home view.

 Select System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Select Multimedia / Network,

 go to next column.

 Select Mobile Recording,

OK call.

The Mobile Recording wizard is started.

 Select yes for Function enabled.

 Select Configure email account

ט

Auto-

matic / Manual.

When selecting Configure email account טManual,

enter your own settings for personal mailbox account

(see right column).

When selecting Configure email account טAuto-

matic, the system mailbox will be used. In the next step,

the TV set displays the email address and the security

PIN of the system mailbox.

 Continue until the setting of scanning times.

 Carry out settings.

Settings of scanning times

When the TV set is in standby mode, you can determine the times at

which the TV automatically checks the defined mailbox for remote

programming.

If the TV set is switched on or in the Quick Start mode, a fixed

inspection interval of 10 minutes applies permanently.

Scanning

period

Here you can specify the period during which the TV

set checks the email account.

Inspection

interval

Here you can specify the time interval at which the

TV set checks the email account in the specified

period.

Start/end of

the scanning

period

Here, the start and end times are displayed

depending on the scanning period.

If you wish to enter start / end of the scanning

period individually, you must select user defined

for scanning period.

In the last step it is checked whether the email account is accessible

with the set data.

On successful test the configuration is completed.

Settings of personal email account

If the mailbox defined by the system was selected as the default email

account, the account is automatically created on the server. You do

not need to make further settings.

When selecting Configure email account טManual you need to

adjust the factory defaults and enter the settings of your existing

personal email account.

You will find the necessary parameters in the menu dialogues Settings/

Options of your email programme you are using (e.g. Outlook,

Thunderbird) or from the relevant provider of your email accounts.

Default settings page 1:

Email address: tv-xxxxxxxxxxx@loewe-dialogue.com

Account type: POP3 or (IMAP)

Incoming mail server: mail.loewe-dialogue.com

Outgoing mail server (SMTP): mail.loewe-dialogue.com

Username: tv-xxxxxxxxxxx@loewe-dialogue.com

Password: **************

Secure PIN: xxxx

Default settings page 2:

Incoming mail server port: 995 (POP3),0 993 (IMAP)

Incoming encryption: ‘no‘ , ‘SSL’ , ‘StartTSL’

Server equires authentification: ‘no‘

Outgoing mail server port:

‘25’ (no), ‘587’ (StartTSL), ‘465’ (SSL)

Outgoing encryption: ‘no‘ , ‘SSL’ , ‘StartTSL’

Delete mail from server: ‘no‘

Email account settings Reset

Remote programming via any email client

In case of a manual e-mail account, you can perform the remote

programming of recordings by means of any e-mail client.

The subject line of the email must include the defined four-digit

secure pin, the broadcasting time and the channel:

PIN BROADCASTING TIME OF CHANNEL

Example: 1234 20:45 Das Erste HD

1234 8.45 pm Das Erste HD

Timer programming of a broadcast, which runs on the current day

around 20:45 on the tv channel Das Erste HD. An exact specifica-

tion of start and end time of the programme is not required.

The channel name must not be 100% accurate, the name is

compared by means of a certain algorithm. It is advisable, however,

to store the channel name as a note in the smartphone.

If the recording time is more than 24 hours in the future, the date

must also be specified in the subject line:

1234 04/09/2014 20:45 Das Erste HD

1234 09/04/2014 8.45 pm Das Erste HD

You will get an e-mail response as confirmation from the TV set to

the address of the manual e-mail account with the current list of

programmed timer recordings.



System settings

Multimedia / Network

Mobile Recording

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

125

Bluetooth

With the Bluetooth functionality, you can use a wireless connection

between your TV set and a Bluetooth-enabled audio source, such

as smartphone, tablet, etc. and use the TV set as a playback device

(Bluetooth music player).

When pairing a Bluetooth keyboard you can comfortably enter your

characters, e.g. to search for your favourite artists.

The TV set can be connected to several Bluetooth devices. However,

only one active link is possible at the same time.

The distance between your TV set and the Bluetooth device should

not exceed 10 m (line of sight).

Your Bluetooth audio source must support the A2DP standard.

Your Bluetooth Keyboard must support the HID standard.

Calling the Bluetooth function

HOME: Call Home view.

 Select System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Select Multimedia / Network,

 go to next column.

Select Bluetooth,

OKcall.

Enable

function

Here you enable the Bluetooth function of your TV

set. Then, the TV set is visible to other Bluetooth

devices.

Default setting: yes.

The search for Bluetooth devices in the nearby area

starts automatically for 2 min.

If Bluetooth devices are available, they are displayed

in a list.

Coupling starting from the TV set

Select required device.

OK Connect the device. Before the connected device

a check mark ۪is set.

In the event that a code is needed, the TV set will

generate a connection PIN. This one must be

entered on the Bluetooth device and confirmed

if required.

Proceed to Bluetooth music player, see right column.

Coupling starting from the Bluetooth device

Enable the Bluetooth function of your audio source.

If necessary, get help from the instruction manual of

your audio source.

If necessary, use the Bluetooth search function of the

audio source. Now, Bluetooth devices will be searched

near the audio source.

Select loewetv_x (device name ex-factory, where x is

a character string).

The device name appearing in Bluetooth search can

be set in the System settings under Multimedia /

NetworkטNetwork settings טHost name.

Proceed to Bluetooth music player, see below.

Confirm the code specified for the coupling. The

Bluetooth device is connected to the TV set.

Proceed to Bluetooth music player, see below

Bluetooth Music Player

To use the TV set as a playback device for audio streaming, your

smartphone, tablet (audio source) must be paired with the TV set.

After successful coupling of your audio source, you can start the audio

playback on your audio source.

The sound is played back on the TV set.

For some audio sources, the link must be explicitly enabled before

music playback can be heard from the TV set.

Volume setting on the Bluetooth music player

With the keys V+/V- on the remote control the volume

can be adjusted for the TV set as usual.

According to manufacturer/type of your Bluetooth

device, the volume can be adjusted directly on the

playback device.

If you listen to your music during the Bluetooth

playback with volume 60, then this volume generally

applies also to your TV sound.

It is recommended to set the volume of the audio

source to high values and to adjust the actual volume

of the TV set by means of the remote control unit.

Sending the sound from the TV set to a Bluetooth headset

Your end device must support the A2DP standard.

According to manufacturer/type of your Bluetooth device, the

volume can be adjusted directly on the playback device.

The coupling of the Bluetooth headset is carried out

as described in the left column.

After successful pairing, you will hear the TV sound on

your Bluetooth headset via the wireless connection.

The volume of TV speakers and headphones can be

controlled independently.



System settings

Multimedia / Network

Bluetooth

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

126

Bluetooth Keyboard

To use a Bluetooth keyboard as an input device, it must be coupled

to the TV set.

Bluetooth function menu opened.

Select required device.

OK Connect the device. Before the connected device

a check mark ۪is set.

In the event that a code is needed, the TV set will

generate a connection PIN.

If your Bluetooth

device uses the PIN code 0000, there will be an

automatic connection. If your Bluetooth device

uses a different code,

this must be entered on the

Bluetooth device and also confirmed, if necessary.

After successful pairing, you can simply type all the

characters that can be entered using the on-screen

keyboard or the remote control unit independently

with your Bluetooth keyboard.

Most remote control key functions can be accessed

using the keyboard. An overview of the key assignments

is shown in the table.

Key assignment

No. Remote control Keyboard

1 Sound On/Off key -----

2 TV key Alt + F

3 STB key -----

4 DR+ key Alt + W

5 Favourites key Alt + Z

6 EPG key Alt + E

7 TEXT key Alt + T

8 MENU key Alt + M

9 V+ key -----

10 OK key Enter

11 V– key -----

12 Green key -----

13 Red key -----

ܓkey -----

15 RECORD key F5

16 PAUSE key -----

17 STOP key -----

ܒkey -----

19 PLAY key -----

20 Blue key F4

21 Yellow key F3

22 Directional keys

 Arrow button

23 P+ key -----

24 BACK key Alt + ESC

25 INFO key Alt + I

26 PIP key -----

27 HOME key Alt + A

28 Number keys 0 ... 9

29 Source key/Sources Alt + H

30 VIDEO key -----

31 AUDIO key Alt + R

32 On/Off key -----



System settings

Multimedia / Network

Loewe bild

User handbook

127



System settings

Multimedia / Network

Amazon Alexa login

It is possible to connect your Loewe TV set to the Amazon Alexa

loudspeaker and to operate the TV set via voice. For this function,

use the Loewe TV for Smart Home skill (supported from TV software

version 4.4.64 and up) in the Amazon Alexa app.

The Loewe TV for Smart Home skill is currently available with langua-

ge options German and English in Germany, Austria, Switzerland

and the United Kingdom.

The Loewe TV and Amazon Alexa must be in the same network

and installed.

So that Amazon Alexa can switch on the Loewe TV on its own, the

quick start mode must be activated (System settings טControl

טQuick start mode).

When the TV set is connected to Amazon Alexa, there is a data

exchange between the TV set and Amazon. More terms of use for

Alexa and Alexa devices can be found on Amazon.com.

Loewe guarantees insofar that no use of personal data is made.

However, a statistical analysis of anonymised data sets is possible.

Call Amazon Alexa login

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Multimedia/Network,

 go to next column.

Mark Amazon Alexa login,

OKCall.

 Mark Accept,

OK Call.

Connect TV set with Amazon Alexa

Start the Amazon Alexa app on your smartphone.

Select Skills in the Amazon Alexa app.

Find and install the Loewe TV for Smart Home skill.

Enter the code displayed on the TV into the Loewe TV

for Smart Home skill. The TV is then connected to

Amazon Alexa.

Controlling the TV with Amazon Alexa

Your Loewe TV will be integrated into the Alexa Smart Home Standard.

With the Loewe TV for Smart Home skill, you can connect up to three

Loewe TV sets in your household simultaneously with Amazon Alexa.

The devices are managed in the Alexa app.

You can choose your own name for the individual TV set (default: TV).

To be able to execute the commands, the TV set must be selected

once with the command Alexa, activate TV.

The TV set can be controlled using the signal word of the Alexa louds-

peaker in combination with the following commands:

“Alexa, ...

Power

... turn on / off.”

... power on / off.”

Volume

... mute / unmute.”

... volume 20.”

... turn up volume.”

... turn down volume.”

Channel

... next channel.”

... previous channel.”

... channel fourteen.”

... change channel to seven.”

Sources

... switch Input to H.D.M.I. 1.”

A current list of commands for controlling your Loewe

TV set with Amazon Alexa can be found on the Loewe

website at:

https://www.loewe.tv/int/plus/alexa

Loewe bild

User handbook

128



System settings

Connections

Settings for the connection of external appliances are made in this

menu.

The menu item Connections is not available while a timer record-

ing is active.

Calling the connections menu

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Connections,

 go to next column.

 Select desired settings.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the Connections menu:

Sound

components

The sound components wizard helps you to configure

the components that are used to reproduce the TV

sound.

See chapter System settings, section Connections

– Sound components for further information.

Antenna DVB

Here you can adjust the parameters of the terrestrial

and satellite antenna with the antenna assistant, as

well as select the server at SAT> IP.

See chapter System settings, section Connections

– Antenna DVB for further information.

connecting

settings

In the AV connecting settings the parameters for the

AV connection socket can be adapted.

See chapter System settings, section Connections

– AV connecting settings for further information.

Digital Link

All settings for Digital Link are made here.

See chapter System settings, section Connections

– Digital Link for further information.

HDMI

Here you can set the modes for the individual HDMI

connections. Here you will also find the gaming mode.

See chapter System settings, section Connec-

tions – Gaming mode for further information.

Loewe bild

User handbook

129



System settings

Connections

Sound components

The sound components wizard helps you to configure the components

that are used to reproduce the TV sound.

The DAL device variants are equipped with an integrated digital multi-

channel audio decoder. Sound signals with up to six channels (5.1

surround sound) can be emitted through the DIGITAL AUDIO LINK

interface, irrespective of whether the sound signal comes from an

external device (DVD player, Blu-ray player) or from a DVB channel.

For sound formats supported by the digital audio decoder, see chapter

Technical data.

Calling the sound components wizard

For information on navigation within the wizard, see chapter General

information on menu operation.

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Select Connections,

 go to next column.

 Select Sound components,

 go to next column.

 Select Sound component.

For selectable items see right hand column.

OK Confirm selection.

 Proceed to next step.

Sound playback via ...

Some sound components can only be selected when the respective

device is connected to the TV set.

speakers

Sound reproduction via the built-in TV speakers

(factory setting).

With the selection of TV speakers the wizard will end.

Speaker

system

(AUDIO OUT)

Sound reproduction via a loudspeaker system or

active loudspeakers (connection to AUDIO OUT).

How to connect a speaker system to AUDIO OUT,

see chapter External devices, section Connecting

the speaker system (AUDIO OUT).

How to configure a speaker system at AUDIO OUT,

see chapter System settings, section Connctions

– Adjusting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT).

If a speaker system is connected to AUDIO OUT

and you want to return to selecting TV speakers,

switch the subwoofer of the speaker system off

before you select the TV speakers. At the AUDIO

OUT connection, the audio signal is output with

maximum volume setting in the TV speaker

selection.

Speaker

system

(DIGITAL

AUDIO LINK)

(1

Sound reproduction via a loudspeaker system or

active loudspeakers (connection to DIGITAL AUDIO

LINK).

How to connect a speaker system to DIGITAL AUDIO

LINK, see chapter External devices, section

Connecting the speaker system (DAL).

How to connect active speakers to DIGITAL AUDIO

LINK, see chapter External devices, section

Connecting active loudspeakers (DAL).

How to configure a speaker system at DIGITAL AUDIO

LINK

, see chapter System settings, section

Connections – Adjusting the speaker system

(DAL).

HiFi/AV

amplifier

Sound reproduction via an external analogue or

digital audio amplifier.

How you connect a HiFi/AV amplifier see chapter

External devices, section Connecting the HiFi/

AV amplifier.

How you configure a HiFi/AV amplifier see chapter

System settings, section Connections –

Adjusting the HiFi/AV amplifier.

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

130

Adjusting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT)

Sound playback via ... – Speaker system (AUDIO OUT)

Enter here that you want to hear the TV sound via a speaker system

connected to AUDIO OUT.

For information on navigation within the wizard, see chapter General

information on menu operation.

Speaker system (AUDIO OUT) was selected in the Sound

components wizard. Afterwards you can switch on the power switch

of the subwoofer.

 Select TV speakers + Subwoofer or Subwoofer

+ ext. front speakers.

OK Confirm selection.

Specify here whether you want to operate the

speakers of the TV set with an additional

subwoofer or a subwoofer with external front

speakers at the AUDIO OUT socket of the TV set.

 Continue with the appropriate selection.

TV speakers + Subwoofer

Adjust the volume for the subwoofer.

 Finish wizard.

This ends the sound components wizard for connecting

and setting up a speakers system.

Connect

speakers

Adjust

subwoofer

level

Subwoofer + ext. front speakers

 Here select yes, if the built-in TV loudspeakers

should work in addition to the external loudspeak-

ers.

If you here select no, no sound is output from the

TV loudspeakers.

OK Confirm selection.

 Proceed to

Adjust ext. Speakers level

Adjust the volume of the ext. sound system

optimally to the TV volume.

An audio broadband signal is transmitted via

the AUDIO OUT jack. Therefore, the level of the

front speakers and the subwoofer varies

uniformly with the volume setting.

 Finish wizard.

This ends the sound components wizard for connecting

and setting up a speakers system.

loudspeakers

as centre

speaker

Adjust ext.

Speakers

level



System settings

Connections

Loewe bild

User handbook

131



System settings

Connections

continued on the next page

Adjusting the speaker system (DAL)

Sound playback via ... – Speaker system (DIGITAL AUDIO LINK)

Enter here that you want to hear the TV sound via a speaker system

connected to Digital Audio Link. If you connect active speakers, please

use the setting Speaker system (DIGITAL AUDIO LINK).

For information on navigation within the wizard see chapter General

information on menu operation.

When setting up the speaker system for the first time, the

configuration starts with the step

Connect front speakers

Speaker system (DIGITAL AUDIO LINK) was selected in the Sound

components wizard.

If you want to set up or change a speaker system:

 Select Configuration/modification.

If nothing has been set yet, the factory settings

or otherwise the last set values are displayed.

OK Confirm selection.

 Select Complete.

OK Confirm selection.

 Proceed

to connect and set the front speakers.

 Select External speakers or TV speakers.

OK Confirm selection.

For External speaker go to the frequency bar

below and

set the lower limit frequency of the external

front speakers in steps of 10 Hz.

Configuration/

modification

Configuration/

modification

Connect

front

speakers

Select the start value of the frequency response of

the speakers for the correct setting (e.g., 50Hz for

the specification “Frequency response

50-20,000Hz”). See the technical data of the speak-

ers for the value.

You can replace the external front speakers by the

TV speakers if necessary. In this case, TV speakers.

Then, the TV speakers transmit the sound of the

front speakers.

 Proceed to connect and set the surround speakers.

 Select yes or no for the external surround speakers.

OK Confirm selection.

In case, external speakers were chosen as surround

speakers:

 Select frequency bar

set the lower limit frequency of the surround

speakers in 10 Hz steps.

Select the start value of the frequency response of

the speakers for the correct setting.

 Proceed to

connect and set the centre speaker.

 Select whether the TV speakers or an External

speaker is to reproduce the centre sound or no

if no centre speaker is connected.

OK Confirm selection.

If no centre speaker is connected, the front speakers

also transmit the centre sound parts additionally.

For External speaker go to the frequency bar

below and

set the Lower Limit Frequency of the external

front speakers in steps of 10 Hz.

Select the start value of the frequency response of

the speakers for the correct setting.

 Proceed to

connect the Subwoofer.

Connect

surround

speakers

Connect

centre

speaker

Only for set types with built-in DAL connection (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

132



System settings

Connections

 Select yes or no for Subwoofer.

OK Confirm selection.

If no subwoofer is connected, the front speakers

additionally transmit the sound parts intended for

the subwoofer as far as possible.

 Proceed to Distance to left hand front speaker.

Set the distance between the left front speaker

and your listening position in 10 cm steps.

Measure the distances from your listening position

to the front, surround, and centre speakers

respectively. The digital audio decoder calculates

delay times from this for the loudspeaker signals,

so that these reach the listener simultaneously.

 Proceed to the respective other speakers (right

front speaker, left surround speaker, right

surround speaker, centre speaker and subwoofer)

and also

 The selected speaker will be coloured blue.

After setting the distance to the subwoofer.

Proceed to Adjust speaker level.

Connect

subwoofer

Distance to

left front

speaker

Adjust the volume for the speaker.

 Proceed to next speaker or

 select speakers manually.

For balanced audio reproduction all speakers should

be set to the same volume level. A noise signal will

be reproduced automatically on each speaker in

succession. Adjust every speaker to equal perceived

volume from your listening position. The selected

speaker will be coloured blue.

After adjustment of the last speaker.

 Proceed to Subwoofer phase.

Switch a channel or a DVD player playing music to

music playback.

 Test both values (0º and 180º) and select the one

with which you get a clearer bass reproduction

from your listening position.

OK Confirm selection.

 Finish wizard.

This ends the sound components wizard for connecting

and setting up a speakers system.

Adjust

speaker level

Subwoofer

phase

Loewe bild

User handbook

133



System settings

Connections

Adjusting the HiFi/AV amplifier

Sound playback via ... - HiFi/AV amplifier

The sound components wizard permits configuration of different audio

amplifiers (stereo amplifiers, surround amplifiers, analogue or digital)

with different digital audio formats (Dolby Digital, MPEG, and stereo/

PCM). See the user guide of the audio amplifier for more information.

For information on navigation within the wizard see

chapter General information on menu operation.

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Select Connections,

 go to next column.

 Select Sound components,

 Call sound components wizard.

Mark HiFi/AV amplifier,

OK Confirm selection.

 Proceed to next step.

 Select whether the sound is to be transmitted

digitally or analogue to the the amplifier (see right

hand column):

OK Confirm selection.

digital: Proceed to Sound formats.

analogue: proceed to Type of amplifier.

Sound

reproduction

via ...

Type of sound

transmission

Select sound formats which can be decoded with

the digital amplifier (see operating manual of the

used amplifier).

OK adopt sound formats.

 Proceed to next step.

 Select which amplifier you have connected,

OK Confirm selection.

 Finish wizard.

Sound

formats

Amplifer Type

Loewe bild

User handbook

134



System settings

Connections

Antenna DVB

Here you can make settings for the DVB-T antenna and call the antenna

wizard for the DVB-S antenna.

Call Antenna DVB

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Connections,

 go to next column.

 Mark Antenna DVB,

 go to next column.

 Select the desired setting,

 call.

Explanations of the setting options in the antenna DVB menu:

Terrestrial

(DVB-T/T2)

Here you can set whether your DVB-T antenna needs

a supply voltage.

Antennas with an integrated amplifier need a supply

voltage on the antenna line. In this case, select

Supply voltage 5V and confirm with OK.

Otherwise, select No supply voltage and confirm

also with OK.

Satellite

(DVB-S/S2)

Here the antenna wizard starts guiding you through

all the settings relevant to the DVB-S antenna. The

settings of the DVB-S antenna wizard are explained

in the procedure of initial installation.

SAT>IP

Here you can select from which servers you wish to

receive your channels.

Positioning/aligning DVB-T antenna

If you are receiving one or more DVB-T channels with picture and

sound interference then you should change the installation location

and alignment of the antenna. Find out online which channels are

broadcasting the DVB-T channels in your region.

A DVB-T channel is received and selected.

Calling manual search (see chapter System settings, section Chan-

nels – Manual TV/Radio scan).

Due to the preset channels, the signal source is already selected as

DVB-T. Position and align the antenna so that maximum C/N values

and levels are reached.

Search for DVB-T channels one after the other and compare values

for C/N and Level. Then position/align the antenna to the weakest

channel so that maximum values for C/N and Level are obtained.

The value for BER should be as low as possible.

Thereafter, perform an automatic search for all DVB-T channels.

AV connection settings

In the AV connection settings menu the parameters for the AV

connection socket can be adapted.

Calling the connections menu

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Connections,

 go to next column.

 Mark AV connecting settings,

 go to next column.

 Select the desired setting,

 call.

Explanations of setting possibilities in the AV connecting settings

menu:

Device at

connection

Indicate here whether a set and, if yes, which one is

connected to the AV socket.

Signal type

You set the signal type of the device connected to AV

here. You can find out more from your dealer.

Allow

switching

voltage

If this function is activated, the video and audio of an

external unit connected to the AV connector (not at

AVS) will immediately be reproduced on all TV broad-

cast sites when playback is started up, provided that

the external unit supplies a switching voltage.

Loewe bild

User handbook

135



System settings

Connections

Digital Link

In the digital link menu you make further setting for comfortably linking

external devices to the TV set.

Call Digital Recorder Link menu

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Connections,

 go to next column.

 Mark Digital Link,

OK call Digital Link.

 Select the desired setting,

 call.

Explanations of the setting options in the Digital Link menu:

Digital Link

functionality

Herewith you can allow or forbid the automatic

communication between the TV set and linked

external devices (e.g., BluRay player). Among other

things, it's role is that these devices switch mutually

on and off.

Remote

switch on of

the TV set

Here you can select whether the TV set is to switch

on automatically from Standby mode, if Digital Link

HD or Digital Link Plus capable devices connected

to an HDMI or to AV inputs start playback or display

a screen menu.

Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD -

Functionality ט on has been selected.

Shutdown of

the ext.

device via TV

button

You can select here whether the external Digital Link

HD device that is currently playing back should be

automatically shut down as soon as you switch back

to the TV or another AV channel.

Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD -

Functionality ט on has been selected.

HDMI

In the HDMI menu, you can make additional settings for the HDMI

connections.

Call HDMI menu

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Connections,

 go to next column.

 Mark HDMI,

OK call HDMI.

 Select the desired setting,

 call.

Explanations of the setting options in the HDMI menu:

Gaming

mode

For the inputs of your TV set on which game consoles,

PC applications or even Karaoke machines are

operated, we recommend you to activate the

Gaming mode.

Your activities are then displayed quicker on the

screen by reducing the complex picture improving

techniques.

This mode can be set separately for every input of

your TV set.

You can recognise AV connections with set Gaming

mode by the symbol

after the connection name.

A dice icon

is shown in the extended channel list

behind the corresponding AV input when filtering on

the AV list.

Compatible

mode

In this menu item you can activate the “compatible

mode”. It optimizes communication with older HDMI

devices. For the use of the latest generation of HDMI

devices, please deactivate the mode.

In SL4xx sets, the compatible mode for HDMI 1-3

ports is set by default.

HDMI1-ARC

Sound format

Here, you can set whether the TV audio signal is

always available as a PCM (2-channel) or in the best

possible sound format (optimal) for the connected

device at the HDMI 1 socket.

Device

assignment

Here set the modes for the individual HDMI connec-

tions for special devices.

Loewe bild

User handbook

136

Extras

Extras contains additional functions and settings (e.g., Integrated

features, Repeat initial installation, CA module settings).

Call Extras

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Extras,

 go to next column.

 Select the desired setting,

 call.

Explanation of the subitems of Extras

DR+

Streaming

Switch off the TV set to be in an advanced standby

mode (server function, see column on right hand

side).

Integrated

features

Call information on the integrated features of the TV

set (see next page).

Repeat initial

installation

You can repeat the Initial installation again at any

time. You are guided through the various menus

where i.a. an automatic TV/radio channel search is

automatically carried out.

Caution: All stored channels and all created

personal lists will be deleted by this!

If a parental lock is activated, the access code must

be entered before repeating initial installation.

Reset to

factory

settings

Resetting various settings to their factory defaults

(see next page).

CA module

[Name]

Make settings for your CA modules.

This menu item appears only it at least one CA

module is plugged in.

The exact designation of the menu item and

available subitems depends on your CA module(s).

See chapter System settings, section Extras – CA

module for further information.

Dealer mode

Here activate/deactivate the dealer mode.

See chapter System settings, section Extras –

Dealer mode for further information.

Legal

matters

Here you can find the Terms of Use, the License

Agreement and the Data Protection Statement for

your Loewe TV set.

DR+ Streaming

By switching off an accessible TV set ends access to its DR+ archive

in the network.

You can, however, switch your TV set to an advanced standby mode

to enable access to the DR+ archive even when the TV set is switched

off (server function).

Call DR+ Streaming

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Extras,

 go to next column.

 Mark DR+ Streaming,

OK confirm.

The TV set switches after a short time into the exten-

ded standby mode.

The DR+ archive will now be accessible within the

network for the period set in the DR+ Streaming -

Settings.

You find the setting of the period under System

settings ט Multimedia/Network ט Streaming

server standby.

After the preset time has elapsed, the TV set switches

to „normal“ standby mode.

DR+ Streaming



System settings

Extras

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

137

Integrated features

Here you can obtain information on the integrated features of the

TV set.

See the rating plate on the rear of the set for the precise product

designation.

Call Integrated features

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Extras,

 go to next column.

 Mark Integrated features,

OK call Integrated features

 Select category (e.g. hardware, software,

etc.),

 If necessary, scroll content up/down.

Hardware Under the Hardware item, you can find the article

and serial number of your TV set, the MAC address

and the chassis type with all existing hardware

components.

Software Under the item software, the current software ver-

sion and the installed software features of your TV

set are displayed.

Upgrade Under the item Upgrade you can find the installed

software features with their respective status.

Activated: software feature is installed and can be

used.

Not active: software feature is installed, but can not

be used.

Activate

package

Under the Activate package item, you can enter

an acquired unlock code to enable new features, if

available.

After entering the activation code with the numeric

keys, you must confirm the code with OK.

Reset to factory settings

Here you can reset some of the settings to the factory default values.

Call Reset to factory settings

HOME: Calling the Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Extras,

 go to next column.

 Mark Reset to factory settings,

OK call.

 Select a category you want to reset,

OK call.

 Select Start reset,

OK call.

Entire TV Set

This resets the entire TV set to factory defaults.

By resetting the entire TV set to the factory default

state, all the settings you made and all stored

channels will be deleted.

Saved recordings in the DR archive are not deleted.

Thereafter, an initial installation of the TV set is

carried out again (see chapter Initial installation).

Picture/

sound

The current image and sound parameters of your TV

set will be deleted and reset to the factory defaults.

Network

The current network settings of your TV set will be

deleted and reset to the factory defaults.

HDMI

The HDMI setting is reset to the factory settings.

Browser

The current browser settings of your TV set will be

deleted and reset to the factory defaults.

All data stored in the course of use are deleted.

Media data

base

Your current media database is deleted because

the database is reinitialised. The information from

the removable media (USB) and possibly the DR+

archive are then re-read.

The system then automatically performs a system

reset.



System settings

Extras

The screen graphic displayed is only an example. Depending on the device type, the available hardware/software components may be different.

Loewe bild

User handbook

138

Dealer mode

Here you can activate a dealer mode which automatically plays a

presentation from the USB stick or a hard drive.

Call Dealer mode

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Extras,

 go to next column.

 Mark Dealer mode,

OK call.

 Select on or off.

OK call.

When this setting is on the following functions are

available:

After the mains switch is turned on, the TV set starts

automatically.

If a USB stick containing a presentation is inserted,

this will start automatically in a continuous loop after

5 minutes of non-use.

If this is not the case, the system looks for a hard drive

with a presentation and if one is found, this is played

in a continuous loop.

After 5 minutes all settings are set to the defaults in

Dealer mode.

Pressing any key on the remote control pauses the

presentation.

The presentation resumes after 5 minutes of inactivity.

This mode is designed for use by dealers.



System settings

Extras

Playing back presentations from the built-in hard drive (depending on the set type) is possible with a later software update.

Legal matters

Calling up legal questions

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Extras,

 go to next column.

 Mark Legal matters,

OK call.

 Choose category,

OK call.

Here you can find the Terms of Use, the License Agree-

ment and the Privacy Statement for your Loewe TV set.

Loewe bild

User handbook

139

Conditional Access module (CA module)

In order to receive coded digital channels, a Conditional Access

module (CA module) and a Smart Card must be inserted in the CI

slot of your TV set.

The CA module and the Smart Card are not part of the set of

equipment supplied with the TV set. They are usually available from

your dealer. Loewe does not provide any guarantee for the functioning

of the CA module.

The TV set must first recognise and set up the CA module during initial

operation. Therefore, it can take up to a minute until decoding starts

during initial operation.

Inserting the Smart Card into the CA module

Push the Smart Card into the CA module as far as it will go. The side

of the card with the gold chip on it should be pointing towards the

thicker side of the insertion slot (see illustration). Note the direction

of the arrow printed on the Smart Card.

Inserting the CA module into the TV set’s CI slot

Switch off TV set using the mains switch.

Remove the cover from the rear of the set.

Insert the CA module carefully into one of the two

CI slots, ensuring

that the contact side goes in first. Do not use force. Make sure the

module is not twisted in the process. Push the CA module in as far as

it will go.

Finally, close the side cover.

Troubleshooting (CA module)

The following information can help, if problems should occur when

running a CA module:

Switch the TV set off to the standby mode. Remove the CA-module

from the TV set. Switch the TV set off completely. Wait a few seconds.

Reinsert the CA module. Switch the TV set on again.

Should errors continue to occur, you will get further information

resulting from the two-digit error code (only with CI Plus capable

CA modules). You will find the table with the error codes in chapter

Miscellaneous, section CA module error codes. If in doubt, contact

your dealer.

Smart Card

CA module

Contact side

Common Interface (CI/CI Plus)

Common Interface, also called CI, is a interface in the TV set, into which

a Conditional Access Module (CA module, see right column) can be

plugged. The CA module and the smartcard from a corresponding Pay

TV supplier enable reception of encrypted channels.

CI Plus is an advanced development of the DVB Common Interface

Standard. CI Plus slots are in principle downward compatible to the

previous CI standard, i.e. CA modules and Smart Cards according to

the past CI standard can continue to be used in CI Plus slots, as far as

the programme provider permits this.

Programme providers who use the CI Plus standard can assign

different rights for their broadcast programmes.

For instance, the programme provider can restrict or completely

prevent recording or later watching of an encoded programme.

If there are such regulations, these also apply to timeshift television

accordingly.

A screen message informs you of this fact, if you would like to record

such a programme. Recording is carried out in such a case (an

appropriate entry is displayed in the DR+ archive), later watching of the

programme,it is then, however, depending on the program provider,

no longer possible or only for a limited time.

It is then, however, depending on the program provider, no longer

possible or only for a limited time.

A possible time limitation of the playback will also appear in the

corresponding entry in the DR+ archive.

All restrictions mentioned here are the responsibilities of the

broadcaster. The TV simply values the signalling set by the

broadcaster as neutral.

Furthermore, the programme provider can prevent external copying

of protected programmes.

It could be necessary to enter the youth protection PIN of the CA

module when programming the data, if you want to record a CI Plus

protected programme, which has been protected against viewing by

minors.

The Parental lock PIN can also be stored in the TV set. The access code

of the TV set is required for watching the programme later.

Software update for CI Plus capable CA modules

From time to time, there will be new system software for your CA

module software. There are two software update types.

Recommended update:

Information on an available update is displayed. You can either run this

or cancel the procedure. If you do not install the update, the information

will reappear in regular intervals until the update has been installed.

Forced update:

Information on an available update is displayed. The module does no

longer decode until the update has been successfully implemented.



System settings

Extras

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

140

Searching for scrambled channels

If no search for encrypted channels was performed during initial

startup, this can be done later using the search wizard.

HOME: Call Home view.

 Select System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Channels,

 go to next column.

Automatic scan TV+Radio,

 go to next column.

Select Change search settings,

OKwizard guides you through the search settings.

Under scrambled channels you have to select yes.

Next select Start search/update,

OK start updating the channel list.

Calling CA module information

This menu is only available when a CA module is

plugged in.

HOME: Call Home view.

 Mark System settings,

OK call System settings.

 Mark Extras,

 go to next column.

 Select desired CA module.

The indicated name depends on the inserted

CA module.

 go to next column.

 Select Module menu,

OK call information.

The content of this menu depends on the provider of

the CA module.

Smartcard rights

If two

CA modules are used in parallel to decode channels, you specify

here the rights of both smartcards.

 Mark Smartcard rights

 go to next column.

 Select Same rights or Different rights.

If you select Same rights, the TV set assumes that

both smartcards have the same rights and can be used

for Dual Recording in parallel. In this case, the Channel

mapping function is not available.

When selecting Different rights, you can assign the

channels to be decoded to the respective CA module.

Channel mapping

If two

CA modules are both used for the decoding of channels, you

decide here which channel shall be decoded by which CA module.

The channel mapping settings will only be taken into account, if two

CA modules are plugged.

This menu item is only available if under Smartcard rights the

item Different rights was selected.

This statement refers explicitly to the CI slots of the TV set and not

to the modules plugged into it! When the modules are exchanged,

the mapping must be repeated.

 Mark Channel Mapping,

 call channel list.

 Select CA module for mapping.

 Mark channel,

OK map channel to the selected CA module /

cancel mapping.

Behind the assigned channel is the number of the

corresponding CI slot.

Storage the PIN for recordings

Store the programme provider PIN belonging to your CA module in

order to decode CI plus programmes with parental lock for recording.

The menu option is available only if the plugged CA module supports

storing the parental lock PIN.

 Mark Storage of PIN for recordings,

 call PIN entry box.

 Mark the desired CA module in the headline.

 Go to the PIN input line, use the numerical keys

to enter the programme provider PIN.

Or:

 Mark figure,

OK adopt figure to input line.

To conclude the entry:

 Mark Adopt,

OK save PIN.

Removing the CA module

Switch off TV set using the mains switch.

Remove the cover from the rear of the set.

Pull the CA module out of the CI slot.

Replace the cover.



System settings

Extras

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

141

Devices to the HDMI connections

The HDMI connections (High Definition Multimedia Interface) allow

the transmission of digital video and audio signals from a player (e.g.

DVD player, Blu-ray player, game console, camcorder, set-top box)

via a single cable.

The digital video and audio data are transmitted without data compres-

sion digitally and therefore lose none of their quality.

A maximum of five devices can be connected in cascade to every HDMI

socket. The devices are arranged in the AV list and in the channel list

below the appropriate HDMI socket. If the respective device sends

its own device name, this appears in place of the connection name.

Connecting the device

Switch off all devices before connecting them.

Connect the device by an HDMI cable (Type A, 19-pole) to one of the

HDMI sockets of the TV set.

An HDMI device is connected to the side HDMI socket (e.g. camcorder)

in the same way as shown in the figure.

If you use HDMI sources providing UHD content, they should be con-

nected to the HDMI 4

port.

Please note that not all signals may be represented on any HDMI

socket (see chapter Technical Data, section Signals via AV (PC

IN) / HDMI)

Connection example of an HDMI device (e.g. Blu-ray Player)

HDMI

HDMI1

Blu-ray player

TV set

Playback from the device

If the set supports on HDMI the functionality Digital Link HD, if selec-

ted in the settings, the TV automatically switches to the corresponding

HDMI input after starting playback on the HDMI device.

For further information on Digital Link HD, see chapter External

devices, section Digital Link HD.

The HDMI input can also be called up manually:

In normal TV mode, without other displays:

Call Sources.

Select HDMI socket.

With Digital Link HD-capable devices the

device name may possibly appear in place

of the connection name.

OK switch over.

Start playback on the connected HDMI device. The

best possible format for the picture is detected and

set automatically.

Renaming the HDMI port designation

The port designation of the HDMI jacks can be renamed manually.

Call Sources

Select desired HDMI socket.

OK switch over.

MENU: Call menu options.

 Select Rename,

OK call.

Enter new name (information on how to enter

characters, see also section General information on

operation, section Entering characters with

on-screen keyboard).

 Select adopt,

OK New name for the HDMI jack is adopted.



External devices

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

142



External devices

Digital Link HD

Operation of Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC) enabled devices

The Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC) function allows Loewe television sets

to transmit the remote control signals via the HDMI connection of the

TV set to compatible HDMI devices (such as Loewe BluTechVison 3D).

You can therefore set up and use a concealed CEC capable HDMI

device.

Thus, you can install a concealed CEC-enabled HDMI device and

operate it easily.

You can select and operate the CEC-capable HDMI device in two

different ways. On the one hand, by using a device key (STB, VIDEO

or AUDIO) to switch to the operation of the HDMI device. On the

other hand, by using the TV key to switch between HDMI device and

the TV set.

For third-party devices, the description (Digital Link HD / HDMI

CEC) for control over the HDMI connection may vary depending on

the manufacturer

Even if this control is available, a reliable function in conjunction with

the Loewe TV set cannot be guaranteed.

Switching between operation of TV set and HDMI device using

a device key

Assign the HDMI CEC function (code 22) to the desired device key

(STB, VIDEO or AUDIO). The assignment is described in chapter

External devices, section Setting the remote control – Setting

the remote control for other Loewe devices.

Subsequently, the assignment of the HDMI device used to the preset

device key will be done.

The CEC capable HDMI device is connected to one

of the HDMI sockets of the TV set and switched on.

Press required button for 5 seconds.

A selection menu appears on the TV set.

 Select required device from the list.

OK Accept.

The assignment of the device key and the

assignment of the HDMI device are completed.

Press the corresponding device key to switch to the

operation of the HDMI device.

The remote control commands are routed from the TV

set to the HDMI device.

Press the TV key to switch to the operation of the TV

set.

If the Auto off function (see right column) is enabled,

the HDMI device switches off.

Select HDMI device for key

No device

BluTech Vision

Select HDMI device for key Back

Cancel

Switching between operation of TV set and HDMI device

using the TV key

Switching the control via the TV key is only possible when no device

key is assigned to the HDMI device you are using.

Call Quellen.

Select a HDMI socket to which the HDMI device

is connected.

Pressing TV for a longer period: switch remote control

commands between HDMI and TV operation.

A message on the screen informs you about the

currently selected mode.

Pressing briefly TV: Switch to TV mode (back to

previous channel).

Automatically switching off external devices

When returning to TV mode by briefly pressing the TV key the external

device can be switched off.

You can find the settings in the System settings ט Connections ט

Digital Link ט Shutdown of the ext. device via TV button.

Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD - Functionality ט

on has been selected.

Remote switch on of the tv set

You can select whether the TV set is to switch on automatically from

Standby mode if a disc is played or a screen menu displayed on a

Digital Link HD-enabled device.

You can find the settings in the System settings ט Connections ט

Digital Link ט Remote switch on of the tv set.

Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD - Functionality ט

on has been selected.

Switching off the TV set and connected devices (system standby)

The operation of the TV set must be enabled (see

above).

Press the key briefly: TV set and all CEC-enabled de-

vices connected to the HDMI ports will be switched

off to standby (system standby).

Loewe bild

User handbook

143

Connecting a DVD player to the TV set

A DVD player has been selected in the System settings ט AV

connecting settings ט Device at connection AV.

Switch off all devices before connecting them.

Connect the Scart output of the DVD player to the TV set’s AV socket

using the Scart adaptor

Use a fully equipped Scart cable (available from your dealer) for this.

Playback from AV device

If the device at AV supports the Digital Link Plus functionality or if in

the System settings ט Connections ט AV connecting settingsט

Allow switching voltage ט yes, the TV set will automatically switch

to the corresponding AV input after starting the replay at the AV device.

The AV input can also be called manually, however.

Call Sources.

Select AV,

OK switch over.

Start playback on the connected device.

Connection example of a DVD player



External devices

Adaptor is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).

Devices on AV

The AV connection socket offers the possibility to connect e.g. a DVD

player, video/DVD recorder or PC via two different adapters.

The required adapters (Scart or VGA adapter) are available as an

accessory from your Loewe dealer (see chapter Accessories).

The AV sockets can process different signal types. Which signal type

your accessory device provides can be found in the operating manual

of the appropriate device.

Owing to the large number of AV devices available on the market, we

can only mention a few examples for the connection of accessory

equipment to the AV socket here.

Remote TV switch on via Digital Link

You can select whether the TV set is to switch on automatically from

Standby mode if a disc is played or a screen menu displayed on a

Digital Link Plus-enabled device connected to AV.

You can find the settings in the System settings ט Connections ט

Digital Link ט Remote switch on of the TV set.

DVD player

TV set

Loewe bild

User handbook

144



External devices

Adaptor is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).

Connecting a DVD recorder to the TV set

A DVD recorder has been selected in the System settings ט

Connections ט AV connecting settings ט Device at connec-

tion AV.

Switch off all devices before connecting them.

Connect the Scart output of the DVD player to the TV set’s AV socket

using the Scart adaptor

. Use a fully equipped Scart cable (available

from your dealer) for this.

If you want to receive and record analogue channels with the receiver

(tuner) built into the recorder, the recorder must be looped into the

aerial cable.

Connect the DVD recorder as shown in the connection example below.

Playback from AV device

Call Sources.

Select AV,

OK switch over.

Start playback on the connected device.

Connection example of a DVD recorder

Connecting PC / Set-top box

You can connect a PC and thus use the TV screen as a monitor.

When connecting a PC or auxiliary device to the AV socket of the

TV set, adjust the output signal on your PC first so that it matches

one of the signals in the table in chapter Technical data, section

Signals via AV (PC IN) / HDMI.

Switch off all devices before connecting them.

Connect the device to the TV set’s AV socket with a VGA cable and

the VGA adaptor

Connect the analogue audio signal of the PC to the VGA adaptor via

the jack plug socket.

Playback from the device

Call Sources.

Select PC IN,

OK switch over.

Adjusting the geometry of the PC picture

You can set the position (vertical, horizontal) and the phase position of

your PC. The settings you find under System settings ט Pictureט

more ... ט PC IN - Display.

Connecting devices with component connection (YPbPr / YUV)

External units with component connection YPbPr (often informally

referred to as YUV; see also Glossary) can be connected to the AV

socket of the TV set using two adaptors. In addition to the VGA adaptor,

a component VGA adaptor is required (available from your dealer).

The other units are connected as described in the left column.

Connection example of a PC

VGAAUDIO

TV set

ANT IN

ANT OUT

ANT

DVD recorder

TV set

Loewe bild

User handbook

145



External devices

Connecting the speaker system (DAL)

You can easily connect a Loewe speaker system using the DIGITAL

AUDIO LINK interface (DAL) of your TV set.

Switch off all devices before connecting the speaker system.

The subwoofer is connected to the TV set via the DIGITAL AUDIO

LINK interface. Plug a network cable (Category 5e or higher) to the

DIGITAL AUDIO LINK port of the TV set.

If you are using a subwoofer with DIGITAL AUDIO LINK interface

(for example klang 1 subwoofer or klang 5 subwoofer), connect the

network cable directly to the subwoofer.

For subwoofers with AUDIO LINK interface (see picture below),

connect the Ethernet cable to the RJ45 jack of the optionally available

Digital Audiolink / Audiolink converter.

Connect the converter to the AUDIO LINK socket of the Subwoofer.

Further information on the wiring of the speakers you find in the

instruction manual of the subwoofer or the speakers.

Configuration of the speaker system (DAL)

When configuring the sound system in the Sound Component Wizard,

you can eg enter the distances of each speaker corresponding to your

listening position or adjust the level of each speaker individually.

This guarantees a natural spatial image of the sound (see chapter

System settings, section Connections – Sound components).

Connecting the speaker system (DAL)

Example of connecting a speaker system

(Subwoofer with AUDIO LINK) to your TV set

DIGITAL

AUDIO

LINK

TV set

Subwoofer

Converter

Digital Audiolink / Audiolink

Ethernet cable

(Cat. 5e or higher)

Front

left

Front

right

Surround

left

Surround

right

Center

Connecting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT)

You can easily connect a speaker system using the AUDIO OUT

interface of your TV set.

Switch off all devices before connecting the speaker system.

The subwoofer is connected to the TV set via the AUDIO OUT

interface.

Connect the analogue audio output AUDIO OUT of the TV set with a

stereo cinch/jack adapter cable to the Line IN audio inputs left/right

of the subwoofer.

Further information on the wiring of the speakers you find in the

instruction manual of the subwoofer or the speakers.

Only turn in the power switch of the subwoofer after having selected

the menu item Speaker system (AUDIO OUT) in the Sound

Component Wizard. Otherwise, the sound system will operate with

maximum volume.

Configuration of the speaker system (AUDIO OUT)

When configuring the sound system in the sound components wizard

enter if you want to use e.g. external front speakers or how the TV

speaker is used (see chapter System settings, section Connections

– Sound components).

Only turn in the power switch of the subwoofer after having selected

the menu item Speaker system (AUDIO OUT) in the Sound

Component Wizard. Otherwise, the sound system will operate with

maximum volume.

Example of connecting a speaker system to your TV set

AUDIO

OUT

TV set

Subwoofer

Line IN

left

Line IN

right

Front

left

Front

right

Only for set types with built-in DAL connection (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

146

Connecting active loudspeakers

If you want to use active speakers, you can connect them with an

adapter cable to the TV set.

Plug a network cable (Category 5e or higher) to the AUDIO LINK

port of the TV set. Connect the Ethernet cable to the RJ45 socket

of the Digital Audiolink / Audiolink converter available as ac-

cessory. To the other end of the convertor you connect the adaptor

cable Audiolink / 30cm / 9pin + 5.1 Out + Center In. Connect

the cinch connectors of the adaptor cable to the cinch connectors of

the speakers / subwoofer.

The cinch connections of the adaptor cable are labelled:

R for Front right SR for Surround right

L for Front left SL for Surround left

C for Centre SUB for Subwoofer

The connections for the adaptor cable are pre-amplifier

outputs. Therefore, only active loudspeakers / active

subwoofers may be connected directly to the adaptor cable.

Sound reproduction via the speaker system

The settings for sound reproduction via active speakers you find in the

sound components wizard (see chapter System settings, section

Connections – Sound components).

Connecting active loudspeakers

DIGITAL

AUDIO

LINK

SUB

CENTER

SUB

Front

left Center

Front

right

Surround

left

Adapter cable

Surround

right

TV set

Subwoofer

Ethernet cable

(Cat. 5e or higher)

Converter

Digital Audiolink / Audiolink

Connection of active speakers to the TV set



External devices

Connecting the HiFi/AV amplifier

Connecting digital HiFi/AV amplifiers

Connect the digital audio output of the TV set SPDIF OUT to the digital

audio input of the amplifier via a cinch cable:

Connect digital audio (pre) amplifier via audio return channel

(HDMI ARC)

Connect the HDMI1 socket of the TV using an HDMI cable with the

HDMI socket of the ARC-compatible audio (pre) amplifier. It is not

necessary to log-in the amplifier separately with the TV set.

Connecting analogue HiFi/AV amplifiers

Use a stereo cinch/jack adaptor cable to connect the analogue audio

output AUDIO OUT to the analogue audio input of the amplifier:

Reproducing sound via an HiFi/AV amplifier

The sound reproduction via connected HiFi/AV amplifiers can be

adjusted in the sound components wizard (see chapter System set-

tings, section Connections – Sound components).

DIGITAL IN

SPDIF

OUT

Digital amplifier

TV set

AUDIO

OUT

AUDIO IN

Analogue amplifier

TV set

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

147



External devices

Adaptor available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).

Availability varies by device type (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

IR-Link

The IR Link function allows the operation of concealed additional

devices made by other manufacturers via the Loewe TV set.

The remote control commands are passed from the IR receiver of

the TV set via an externally connected infrared transmitter to the

additional device.

The code system for remote control commands that control the

additional device is RC5.

The control of the additional device is only possible when the TV set

is switched on.

The infrared transmitter required is available as an accessory from

your dealer (see chapter Accessories).

Connecting the infrared transmitter to the TV set

Insert the connector plug of the infrared transmitter into the RS-232C

socket of the TV set.

Lay the cable of the infrared transmitter to the front area of the ad-

ditional device used.

Installing the infrared transmitter on the additional device

Find the right position on the desired device (optical connection

between transmitter diode and IR receiver of the concealed device).

Remove the protective film from the adhesive surface of the infrared

transmitter.

Attach the infrared transmitter at this position.

RS-232C

TV set

Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12)

You can connect a home network system of different manufacturers to

your TV set via the RS-232C (RJ12) interface.

As to the configuration of the RS-232C (RJ12) interface and for further

information on the various home networking systems contact your

dealer please.

Audio playback from external devices

Connect external AV devices (e.g., MP3 player) for sound reproduction

to the AV inputs of the TV set.

Connecting an external appliance (e.g. MP3 player)

Connect the output (jack socket) of the MP3 player via the VGA

adaptor

to the AV socket of the TV set.

Select AV input

The selection of the AV input for a device at the AV socket

(connection as described above) is describe here as an example.

The procedure is similar to the selection of the other AV inputs.

Call Sources.

Mark desired AV source,

OK switch to AV source.

Start playback on the external device after selecting

the AV input.

Only playback of the audio signal from the AV source (screen

is off)

To play only the sound of a connected media player (e.g. MP3 player),

the AV sources can be selected so that the screen goes blank.

Switching off the screen reduces the power consumption of the

TV set.

Switching off the screen is possible for the AV sources HDMI1, HDM2,

HDM3 and HDMI 4

via the menu options.

Call up the AV list.

Select desired connection,

OK press at least for two seconds.

Green key: Press the green key to switch the the

screen on and off again.

Connection example of an MP3 player

MP3 player TV set

Loewe bild

User handbook

148



External devices

Setting the remote control

Using the remote control for the TV mode of the TV set

Press the TV key, the LED above it will light for approx.

5 seconds.

Using the remote control for a Loewe recorder

Press the STB key, the LED above it will light for approx.

5 seconds.

Using the remote control for a Loewe player

Press the VIDEO key, the LED above it will light for

approx. 5 seconds.

Using the remote control for the radio mode of the TV set

Press the AUDIO key, the display above it will light for

approx. 5 seconds.

As long as a key is pressed, the LED for the selected operating mode

lights up (TV – STB – VIDEO – AUDIO). This allows you to check

which operating mode the remote control is set to every time you

press a button.

The factory setting of the keys is described above (see also table in

right hand column). The assignment of the buttons can be changed

to suit the existing accessory devices (see right hand column).

Set unit for sound control function on the remote control

The keys for the sound control functions Volume (

)

and Sound on/off

(

)

are programmed ex-factory to interact with the TV set. The unit to

be operated can be modified.

The device must first be placed on one of the device key of the

remote control (see right column) before the tone-control functions

can be changed to the appropriate device.

Press the TV key and the numerical key simultane-

ously for minimum 5 seconds. The LED above the

selected TV key flashes twice.

Function Buttons Unit

Audio

Functions

TV + 3 Auro/AudioVision/MediaVision 3D

TV + 4 Mediacenter

TV + 5 Loewe TV

TV + 6 Loewe TV with sound projector with-

out system connection

Setting the remote control for other Loewe devices

You can operate various Loewe devices with the remote control. The

device keys STB – VIDEO – AUDIO can be reassigned to operate

different Loewe devices.

Press the required device key and the STOP key

simultaneously for 5 sec. until the corresponding LED

display flashes twice.

Then enter the two-digit device code from the list below.

The corresponding LED indicator light flashes twice.

Unit Code Factory setting

Loewe ViewVision 8106 H 10

Loewe Viewvision, Centros 21x2 12

Loewe ViewVision DR

DVB-T 13

Loewe Auro 2216 PS/8116 DT 14

Loewe BluTech Vision Interactive 15

Loewe Sound Projector 17

Set-Top-Box (STB) data base 18

Loewe TV - Digital radio 19 Audio

Loewe Mediacenter 20

Loewe BluTech Vision 3D 21 VIDEO

HDMI CEC mode 22

Loewe AudioVision 24

Loewe Individual Sound Projector ID 25

Apple IR codes 26

Apple IR codes (Apple TV-2G) 27 STB

Loewe Soundbox 28

Loewe SoundVision 29

Loewe AirSpeaker 30

Loewe Soundport 31

Loewe MediaVision 3D 35

Restore defaults 99

The codes shown here only apply to direct operation of the auxiliary

device device.

The available codes may vary depending on the status of the firm-

ware in the remote control.

The factory setting of the device keys can vary depending on the

firmware version of the remote control

Loewe bild

User handbook

149



Teaching the remote control

By means of key code 18 (Set-Top Box data base) your remote control

Loewe assist may be taught for your Set-Top Box (e.g., decoder, ex-

ternal cable tuner). Thus, you spare yourself the use of several remote

controls.

The following options are available for teach-in:

- Entering a 3-digit code number

- Read-out of the programmed Set-Top Box code

- Teaching individual keys

- Delete learned codes

In the following, the STB key is dealt with as an example. Code 18

may also be assigned to the VIDEO and AUDIO keys; the following

description applies accordingly.

Programming with set button with button code 18

For the use of 2-digit key codes see chapter External devices,

section Setting the remote control.

Press set button STB and at the same time STOP

button for 5 seconds, until the corresponding LED

indicator flashes twice.

Enter set code 18 .

The associated LED indicator flashes twice.

Entering a 3-digit code number

The STB key can be programmed directly by means of a device-

dependent 3-digit code. You find a list of these codes in chapter Code

page at the end of this user handbook.

The STB set button must be programmed with

button code 18.

Keep the STB and OK keys depressed for five seconds.

The LED above the STB key flashes twice.

Enter the 3-digit code from the list. The LED above the

STB key lights up for 1 second.

OK end the programming mode. After a successful

programming the LED flashes twice.

When entering a wrong code number, the LED lights

up for 2 seconds. Do this programming once again.

Read-out of the programmed Set-Top Box code

The code of the currently programmed device on the STB key can be

indicated by the remote control.

The STB set button must be programmed with

button code 18.

Keep the STB and OK keys depressed for five seconds.

The LED above the STB key flashes twice.

Press INFO key.

The LED above the STB key shows the programmed

code by flashing. The figure "0" will be indicated by

flashing 5 times.

Teaching individual keys

All keys (except the TV, STB, VIDEO and AUDIO device keys as well

as the V+/- keys

and ) can be taught for the operation of units

which are not contained in the integrated data base. The functions of

the selected button are then completely or partially overwritten with

the new codes.

Place the TV remote control and the remote control to be replaced

in such a way that the infrared windows face each other at a distance

of 1-5 cm (see sketch).

Preparation:

The STB set button must be programmed with

button code 18.

Keep the STB and the red key simultaneously

depressed for five seconds.

The LED above the STB key lights up permanently.

Learning function:

Press key to be taught on the TV remote control.

The LED above the STB key flashes.

On the original remote control press the button which

is to be taught.

The LED above the selected STB key flashes twice.

If the code is not correctly recognised, the LED above

the STB key flashes ten times.

Then repeat your entry on the original remote

control. If necessary correct the allocation of the two

remote controls.

Continue with the other buttons as described above.

Terminate learning mode:

To end the teaching mode, press the STB key again.

After 10 seconds without an entry the teaching mode

is automatically terminated.

It is possible that not all remote control codes can

be taught.

1-5 cm

Loewe bild

User handbook

150



Teaching the remote control

Deleting individual key functions

You can delete the taught function of an individual button.

The STB set button must be programmed with

button code 18.

Press STB and green key simultaneously for five

seconds. The LED above the STB key lights up perma-

nently.

Press key to be deleted on the TV remote control.

The LED above the STB key flashes twice.

Continue with the deletion of other buttons as

described above.

To end the deletion mode, press the STB key again.

The LED above the STB key flashes once.

Deleting all functions of the key for a device

You can delete all taught functions which you have set on the STB key.

The STB set button must be programmed with

button code 18.

Press STB and yellow key simultaneously for five

seconds. The LED above the STB key flashes twice.

Deleting all functions of the keys for all devices

You can delete all taught functions which you have set on the TV, STB,

VIDEO or AUDIO buttons.

The STB set button must be programmed with

button code 18.

Press STB and blue key simultaneously for five

seconds. The LEDs above the keys for the devices flash

twice.

Loewe bild

User handbook

151

Loewe app

The Loewe app replaces the two existing Smart Assist and Smart

tv2move applications and combines the functionality of both apps.

The Loewe app turns your tablet into a second TV. Completely in-

dependent of your TV set, you can use the app on your tablet to zap

through the TV channels, to program recordings or to watch archive

recordings from the DR + hard disk recorder. Or browse the electronic

program guide (EPG) on your smartphone and find out about the du-

ration and content of the current program. By clicking on the desired

content, it will be displayed on your Loewe TV.

You are completely flexible in terms of space. Whether you are in the

bedroom, in the kitchen or on the terrace - as long as you are con-

nected to your home network via WLAN.

You can download the Loewe app for free in the Playstore or App Store

and install it on your tablet and / or smartphone.

With Loewe Mobile Recording, you can now easily and comfortably

program your desired broadcasts from the road in conjunction with

the Loewe app. All you need is an Internet-enabled smartphone with

the Loewe app.

The Smartphone can be used with the Loewe app as a remote control

for the TV set.

You can download the Loewe app from the Playstore or App Store and

install it on your tablet and / or smartphone.

Once the Loewe app has been linked to the TV set, the features EPG

Search and Premium EPG (preview pictures) are available in the TV

set (chapter TV, section Electronic Programme Guide).

Requirements:

Suitable for tablets and smartphones from Android 5 and Apple

iOS 8.

On the TV side, a chassis from SL2xx with the latest software version

is required.

A personal channel list must be available. If not, create personal

channel list under:

System settingsט Channels ט Channel lists TV ט New per-

sonal list.

Open DR+ archive for other devices:

System settings ט Control ט more ... ט DR+ ט DR+ Streaming

ט Share DR+ archive with other devices ט yes.

Ensure that your tablet and the Loewe TV are registered in the same

logical network.

System settings ט Multimedia / Network ט Network settings.

Select whether the TV is to be connected to the Internet via LAN

(wired) or wireless.

We recommend to connect the TV via LAN to the router / switch.

When connected via WLAN or Powerline, it can not always

be ensured that a sufficiently large data rate is available for

transmission.

The Loewe app provides a convenient means of entering addresses

or search terms.

To show the keypad symbol in the app when an input line in the TV set

is selected, the renderer in the TV set must have been switched on.

System settings ט Multimedia / Network ט Renderer ט on.

Connect TV to app

 Start the Loewe app and agree to the data privacy protection.

 After you select your country, the language settings will be auto-

matically transferred to your smartphone/tablet.

 The application automatically searches for compatible TV sets

in the home network. A list of the Loewe TV devices found in the

home network appears

The name of the TV set can be set under

System settingsט

Multimedia / Network ט Network settings ט Host name.

 Tap the desired list item to select the TV. Then you can select a

personal channel list.

 After selecting the channel list, the charging process begins for all

data (channel list, channel info and program data). This can take a

few minutes. After the end of the charging process of all data, the

app is fully operational.

Overview of the areas: Channel area

In the first section you will find an overview of your channels from the

respective selected channel list. With a tip on the desired program tile,

your connected TV set switches to the respective channel.



Loewe app

Loewe bild

User handbook

152

Overview of the areas: Live area

In the middle section, the transmission information such as title and

progress are available at a glance. It is also possible to switch to the

respective program with a fingertip.

Overview of the areas: TV Guide area

In the third part you will find the TV Guide. As integrated in the TV, it

replaces your program magazine. In addition, the tiles can be opened

in order to start the recording (local and on the way) as well as detailed

information.

Switch channel and stream content

As soon as you tap on a tile and a TV set is selected, this switches to

the respective program. Further information is available at the bottom

of the screen.

You will receive details on the name and progress of the current

program.



Loewe app

Loewe bild

User handbook

153

With a further touching of the displayed information, this increases

and displays additional time information. Use the icon at the bottom

right to start streaming this program onto your tablet or smartphone.

Recording via TV Guide

To record a program or program a recording, select the respective tile

of your desired program with a finger tip.

In addition to the detailed information, a recording button is available.

To use the mobile recording function, it must be activated on the TV

set and the corresponding device with an Internet connection is in

standby mode.

In the last step, you will be asked which TV set to use to start the

recording. To close the timer information, tap OK.



Loewe app

Loewe bild

User handbook

154

DR + archive and source selection

Here you can find stored recordings from your integrated DR + archive.

If you have several TV sets with DR + functionality, you can select the

desired archive from the drop-down box. You can also find your folder

structure in the app.

Under Sources are your available network drives. Here you have direct

access to video files, which are stored on your server or NAS. You can

watch them on the TV or your tablet / smartphone.



Loewe app

Loewe bild

User handbook

155



Technical data

bild 9

Connections rear side of the device (bild 9.65/bild 9.55)

Mains switch

AC IN - Mains connection

Mains socket – 220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz

Transport lock for kinematics (please remove screw)

Slot for Kensington lock

LAN - Network connection

RJ-45 – Ethernet / Fast Ethernet

HDMI 1 ARC - HDMI input 1

(with Audio Return Channel)

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN/OUT

HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

ANT TV - Antenna/cable analogue /

DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C

IEC socket – 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80mA

ANT SAT 1 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

ANT SAT 2 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 2) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

SPDIF OUT - Audio output (digital)

Cinch socket (orange)

USB 3.0 - USB connection

USB type A – USB 3.0 (max. 900mA)

MOTOR UNIT - rotating stand control

DIGITAL AUDIO LINK - Surround audio outputs (digital) – (RJ45)

HEADPHONE - Headphone connection

Jack 3,5 mm – Headphones 32–200 Ohm

HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue) L/R – (

Jack 3,5 mm)

RS-232C - Serial interface

– (RJ12)

AV - Micro AV socket

Audio/Video IN with Scart adapter:

Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)

CVBS (VHS/8 mm)

RGB

L/R

Audio/Video IN with VGA adapter:

PC/STB video signal

Component (YPbPr)

L/R

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 1 (standard V1.3)

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 2 (standard V1.3)

HDMI 4 - HDMI input 4

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

The adaptor is available as an accessory from your dealer.

Before connecting an external device, please note that, the individual HDMI-ports can work with a range of different signals, see chapter Technical data, section bild

(across sets) – Signals via HDMI/AV (PC IN).

Loewe bild

User handbook

156

Technical data (bild 9.65/bild 9.55)

Changes of technical data and design of the equipment reserved.

Loewe device type:

bild 9.65 bild 9.55

Part number: 56441xxx 56440xxx

EU energy efficiency class: see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/support

Screen diagonal: 164 cm / 65 inch 139 cm / 55 inch

Power consumption On-Mode (max.)

(Audio output 1/8 of the maximum value): 450 W 350 W

Power consumption On-Mode (home)

Annual energy consumption

see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/support

Power consumption quick start mode: 80,0 W 80,0 W

Power consumption Standby Mode:

Power consumption when set is switched off:

0,49 W

0 W

0,49 W

0 W

Resolution / Picture format: Ultra HD 3840 x 2160 px / 16:9

Display technology: OLED (WRGB Pixel)

Device dimensions without stand (W x H x D): 145,2 x 83,7

(3A

/ 86,5

(3B

x 5,2 cm 123,0 x 71,4

(3A

/ 74,1

(3B

x 5,2 cm

Weight without stand (approximate): 26,3 kg 23,8 kg

Ambient temperature: 5° C – 35° C

Relative humidity (non-condensing): 20 – 80%

Air pressure: 800 – 1114 hPa (0 – 2000 m above sea level)

Chassis designation: SL420

Power supply: 220 V – 240 V/50–60 Hz

Tuner: terr./cable:

Satellite:

VHF/Hyperband/UHF

4 levels: 13/18V/22kHz / 16 levels: DiSEqC 1.0 / single-cable system: EN 50494

Range: terr./cable:

Satellite:

Terr./cable: 45 MHz up to 860 MHz

Satellite: 950 MHz up to 2150 MHz

Channel storage locations incl. AV and radio: 6000

TV standards: analogue:

digital:

B/G, I, L, D/K, M, N

DVB-T/T2, DVB-C, DVB-S/S2 (UHD via DVB to max. 60 Hz)

Colour standards: SECAM, PAL, NTSC, NTSC-V, PAL-V (60 Hz)

Sound standards: analogue (FM):

analogue (NICAM):

digital (MPEG):

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel, PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital Pulse,

Dolby Virtual Speaker, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby MS11

Audio output power (sine / music): 2 x 30W / 2 x 60W

Acoustic speaker concept: Soundbar

Teletext: TOP / FLOF / HiText (Level 2.5)

Page memory: 2000

LAN: Standards supported: 10 Mbit/sec Ethernet (10Base-T) / 100 Mbit/sec Fast Ethernet (100Base-T)

WLAN: Standards supported:

Power / Frequency range:

Types of encoding that are supported:

IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n, 802.11ac

Power <100 mW at 2400-2483,5 MHz and 5150-5725 MHz

WEP 64 and 128 Bit (ASCII and HEX), WPA PSK, WPA2 AES

Bluetooth: Power / Frequency range:

Bluetooth protocols:

Power <10 mW at 2.4 GHz

A2DP SRC, A2DP SNK, HID

Home networking standard: Universal Plug and Play Audio / Video (UPnP AV)

File formats supported

: Pictures:

Audio:

Video:

JPEG, JPEG progressive (max. resolution 3840x2160), PNG

MP3, M4A (AAC LC), WMA (without lossless), FLAC, WAV (PCM), Ogg Vorbis

AVI (MPEG-1/2, XviD, Dolby Digital, MP3), WMV (WMV9, VC-1, WMA9, WMA Pro),

MP4 (XviD, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC), MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC),

MKV (H.265/HEVC, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Dolby Digital), FLV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.263,

MP3, AAC LC),

MPG (MPEG-1, MPEG Audio), TS/PS (MPEG-2, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG2

Audio, Dolby Digital)

, VOB (MPEG-2, MPEG2 Audio, Dolby Digital)

H.264/MPEG-4 AVC upto Profil High (Level 4.2)

H.264/H.265 compatible to Dolby Vision/HDR 10/HLG

The energy consumption per year is calculated on the basis of a daily four-hour operation of the TV set on 365 days. The actual energy consumption will depend on the

way the TV set is used. On-Mode (home) values less than 100 W must have decimal places (,0).

For the playability of the individual formats no guarantee can be given.

A: Height, speaker concealed. B: Height, speaker visible.



Technical data

bild 9

Loewe bild

User handbook

157



Technical data

bild 9

Equipment features (bild 9.65/bild 9.55)

Changes to the equipment features and the set design reserved.

Loewe set type:

bild 9.65 bild 9.55

Image+ (Image)

Ultra HD Super Resolution Scaling / Image+ Active / 24 p motion picture display

z / z / zz / z / z

3D technology / Active Glasses 3D

— / — — / —

Auto-Dimming Video (VDB+) / Auto-Dimming Raum (OPC) / Home Mode:

— /

z / z

— /

z / z

Digital+ (Television Standards)

DVB-T2

/ DVB-C / DVB-S2 / Multistandard (analogue) / Dual Channel

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / z

MPEG / MPEG2 / MPEG4 (H.264) / HEVC (H.265) / integrated HDTV reception

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / z

DVB radio / Unicable (acc. EN 50494)

z / zz / z

Sound+ (Audio)

Integrated 5.1 AV-Receiver / Digital audio link

z / zz / z

Dolby Digital / Dolby Digital Plus / DTS

z / z /

—

z / z /

—

Individual bass and treble control / Loudness

z / zz / z

Automatic Volume Control (AVC)

Audio out available: variable / fixed / Subwoofer

z / z / zz / z / z

Assist

(Operation)

Loewe os / Home Screen (incl. favorites)

z / zz / z

HDR (Dolby Vision / HDR 10 / HLG)

z / z / zz / z / z

Electronic Program Guide (SI-data)

MediaText (HbbTV) / Video text (Level 2.5)

z / zz / z

Menu languages

/ Context Related Help

z / zz / z

Parental Lock / Automatic turn-off / Timer

z / z / zz / z / z

Instant Channel Zapping / Quick Start Mode

z / zz / z

Digital Link HD (CEC)

PIP (AV)

/ Full PIP / Split screen TV : Video text

z / z / zz / z / z

MediaUpdate (via USB / Internet)

z / zz / z

Hotel Mode

Media

(Multimedia functions)

DR+ / storage capacity in GB / USB archive

z / 1.000 / zz / 1.000 / z

DR+ Streaming server / client / Follow-Me

z / z / zz / z / z

Multi Recording / Mobile Recording

z / zz / z

Multiroom Streaming

z z

Photo player / Music player / Video player (via Home network and USB incl. Ultra HD)

z / z / zz / z / z

Digital Media Renderer (incl. Ultra HD) / Bluetooth Music Player

z / zz / z

Internet Apps (MediaNet) / Internet Browser / Internet Radio (incl. search function)

z / z / zz / z / z

Connectivity

(Connectors)

HDMI with HDCP 2.2

4 (1 x 2.0a, 1 x ARC) 4 (1 x 2.0a, 1 x ARC)

LAN network connection / integrated WLAN

z / zz / z

Common Interface / CI Plus 1.3 certified

2 / z 2 / z

Home Control Interface IP / Home Control Interface RS232 / IR-Link

/ Motor control

z / z / z / zz / z / z / z

Digital Audiolink (DAL)

/ Digital Audio-Out (coaxial)

z / zz / z

Analog Audio-Out (L/R) / Headphone (jack 3.5 mm)

z / zz / z

Micro-AV

(Component / Scart / VGA)

z / z / zz / z / z

USB / Bluetooth Connection

3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z

VESA mounting points

——

z= included/installed {= upgradeable/optional

The reception of DVB-T2 programs is possible in selected countries.

Reception of digital channels may be limited by individual regulations from the respective

broadcaster/provider. UK models are Freeview HD compliant.

D-GB-F-I-E-NL-CZ-GR-PL-H-FIN-SLO-SK-TR-S-DK-P-RUS-N.

AV-PIP is only available in combination with DVB-T/C/S.

CI Plus is backwards compatible with CI. Functionality is dependent on module availability

from the supplier.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter and selected devices (RC5, 36 kHz), to be

ordered separately.

Loewe System 5.1 Out, Stereo Out, Subwoofer Out.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter, to be ordered separately.

Loewe bild

User handbook

158



Technical data

bild 7

Connections rear side of the device (bild 7.77/bild 7.65/bild 7.55)

Mains switch

AC IN - Mains connection

Mains socket – 220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz

Transport lock for kinematics (please remove screw)

Slot for Kensington lock

LAN - Network connection

RJ-45 – Ethernet / Fast Ethernet

HDMI 1 ARC - HDMI input 1

(with Audio Return Channel)

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN/OUT

HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

ANT TV - Antenna/cable analogue /

DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C

IEC socket – 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80mA

ANT SAT 1 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

ANT SAT 2 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 2) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

SPDIF OUT - Audio output (digital)

Cinch socket (orange)

USB 3.0 - USB connection

USB type A – USB 3.0 (max. 900mA)

MOTOR UNIT - rotating stand control

DIGITAL AUDIO LINK - Surround audio outputs (digital) – (RJ45)

HEADPHONE - Headphone connection

Jack 3,5 mm – Headphones 32–200 Ohm

HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue) L/R – (

Jack 3,5 mm)

RS-232C - Serial interface

– (RJ12)

AV - Micro AV socket

Audio/Video IN with Scart adapter:

Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)

CVBS (VHS/8 mm)

RGB

L/R

Audio/Video IN with VGA adapter:

PC/STB video signal

Component (YPbPr)

L/R

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 1 (standard V1.3)

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 2 (standard V1.3)

HDMI 4 - HDMI input 4

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

The adaptor is available as an accessory from your dealer.

Before connecting an external device, please note that, the individual HDMI-ports can work with a range of different signals, see chapter Technical data, section bild

(across sets) – Signals via HDMI/AV (PC IN).

Loewe bild

User handbook

159



Technical data

bild 7

Technical data (bild 7.77/bild 7.65/bild 7.55)

Changes of technical data and design of the equipment reserved.

Loewe device type:

bild 7.77 bild 7.65 bild 7.55

Part number: 56437xxx 56436xxx 56435xxx

EU energy efficiency class: see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/support

Screen diagonal: 195 cm / 77 inch 164 cm / 65 inch 139 cm / 55 inch

Power consumption On-Mode (max.)

(Audio output 1/8 of the maximum value): 590 W 450 W 350 W

Power consumption On-Mode (home)

Annual energy consumption

see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/support

Power consumption quick start mode: 85,0 W 80,0 W 80,0 W

Power consumption Standby Mode:

Power consumption when set is switched off:

0,42 W

0 W

0,49 W

0 W

0,49 W

0 W

Resolution / Picture format: Ultra HD 3840 x 2160 px / 16:9

Display technology: OLED (WRGB Pixel)

Device dimensions without stand (W x H x D): 172,3 x 102,4 x 5,5 cm 145,2 x 86,4 x 5,2 cm 123,0 x 74,1 x 5,2 cm

Weight without stand (approximate): 37,0 kg 26,3 kg 23,8 kg

Ambient temperature: 5° C – 35° C

Relative humidity (non-condensing): 20 – 80%

Air pressure: 800 – 1114 hPa (0 – 2000 m above sea level)

Chassis designation: SL420

Power supply: 220 V – 240 V/50–60 Hz

Tuner: terr./cable:

Satellite:

VHF/Hyperband/UHF

4 levels: 13/18V/22kHz / 16 levels: DiSEqC 1.0 / single-cable system: EN 50494

Range: terr./cable:

Satellite:

Terr./cable: 45 MHz up to 860 MHz

Satellite: 950 MHz up to 2150 MHz

Channel storage locations incl. AV and radio: 6000

TV standards: analogue:

digital:

B/G, I, L, D/K, M, N

DVB-T/T2, DVB-C, DVB-S/S2 (UHD via DVB to max. 60 Hz)

Colour standards: SECAM, PAL, NTSC, NTSC-V, PAL-V (60 Hz)

Sound standards: analogue (FM):

analogue (NICAM):

digital (MPEG):

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel, PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital Pulse, Dolby

Virtual Speaker, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby MS11

Audio output power (sine / music): 2 x 30W / 2 x 60W

Acoustic speaker concept: Soundbar

Teletext: TOP / FLOF / HiText (Level 2.5)

Page memory: 2000

LAN: Standards supported: 10 Mbit/sec Ethernet (10Base-T) / 100 Mbit/sec Fast Ethernet (100Base-T)

WLAN: Standards supported:

Power / Frequency range:

Types of encoding that are supported:

IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n, 802.11ac

Power <100 mW at 2400-2483,5 MHz and 5150-5725 MHz

WEP 64 and 128 Bit (ASCII and HEX), WPA PSK, WPA2 AES

Bluetooth: Power / Frequency range:

Bluetooth protocols:

Power <10 mW at 2.4 GHz

A2DP SRC, A2DP SNK, HID

Home networking standard: Universal Plug and Play Audio / Video (UPnP AV)

File formats supported

: Pictures:

Audio:

Video:

JPEG, JPEG progressive (max. resolution 3840x2160), PNG

MP3, M4A (AAC LC), WMA (without lossless), FLAC, WAV (PCM), Ogg Vorbis

AVI (MPEG-1/2, XviD, Dolby Digital, MP3), WMV (WMV9, VC-1, WMA9, WMA Pro),

MP4 (XviD, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC), MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC),

MKV (H.265/HEVC, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Dolby Digital), FLV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.263,

MP3, AAC LC),

MPG (MPEG-1, MPEG Audio), TS/PS (MPEG-2, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG2

Audio, Dolby Digital)

, VOB (MPEG-2, MPEG2 Audio, Dolby Digital)

H.264/MPEG-4 AVC upto Profil High (Level 4.2)

H.264/H.265 compatible to Dolby Vision/HDR 10/HLG

The energy consumption per year is calculated on the basis of a daily four-hour operation of the TV set on 365 days. The actual energy consumption will depend on the

way the TV set is used. On-Mode (home) values less than 100 W must have decimal places (,0).

For the playability of the individual formats no guarantee can be given.

Loewe bild

User handbook

160



Technical data

bild 7

Equipment features (bild 7.77/bild 7.65/bild 7.55)

Changes to the equipment features and the set design reserved.

Loewe set type:

bild 7.77 bild 7.65 bild 7.55

Image

(Image)

Ultra HD Super Resolution Scaling / Image+ Active / 24 p motion picture display

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

3D technology / Active Glasses 3D

— / — — / — — / —

Auto-Dimming Video (VDB+) / Auto-Dimming Raum (OPC) / Home Mode:

— /

z / z

— /

z / z

— /

z / z

Digital

(Television Standards)

DVB-T2

/ DVB-C / DVB-S2 / Multistandard (analogue) / Dual Channel

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / z

MPEG / MPEG2 / MPEG4 (H.264) / HEVC (H.265) / integrated HDTV reception

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / z

DVB radio / Unicable (acc. EN 50494)

z / zz / zz / z

Sound

(Audio)

Integrated 5.1 AV-Receiver / Digital audio link

z / zz / zz / z

Dolby Digital / Dolby Digital Plus / DTS

z / z /

—

z / z /

—

z / z /

—

Individual bass and treble control / Loudness

z / zz / zz / z

Automatic Volume Control (AVC)

zzz

Audio out available: variable / fixed / Subwoofer

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Assist

(Operation)

Loewe os / Home Screen (incl. favorites)

z / zz / zz / z

HDR (Dolby Vision / HDR 10 / HLG)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Electronic Program Guide (SI-data)

zzz

MediaText (HbbTV) / Video text (Level 2.5)

z / zz / zz / z

Menu languages

/ Context Related Help

z / zz / zz / z

Parental Lock / Automatic turn-off / Timer

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Instant Channel Zapping / Quick Start Mode

z / zz / zz / z

Digital Link HD (CEC)

zzz

PIP (AV)

/ Full PIP / Split screen TV : Video text

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

MediaUpdate (via USB / Internet)

z / zz / zz / z

Hotel Mode

zzz

Media

(Multimedia functions)

DR+ / storage capacity in GB / USB archive

z / 1.000 / zz / 1.000 / zz / 1.000 / z

DR+ Streaming server / client / Follow-Me

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Multi Recording / Mobile Recording

z / zz / zz / z

Multiroom Streaming

zzz

Photo player / Music player / Video player (via Home network and USB incl. Ultra HD)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Digital Media Renderer (incl. Ultra HD) / Bluetooth Music Player

z / zz / zz / z

Internet Apps (MediaNet) / Internet Browser / Internet Radio (incl. search function)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Connectivity

(Connectors)

HDMI with HDCP 2.2

4 (1 x 2.0a, 1 x ARC) 4 (1 x 2.0a, 1 x ARC) 4 (1 x 2.0a, 1 x ARC)

LAN network connection / integrated WLAN

z / zz / zz / z

Common Interface / CI Plus 1.3 certified

2 / z 2 / z 2 / z

Home Control Interface IP / Home Control Interface RS232 / IR-Link

/ Motor control

z / z / z / zz / z / z / zz / z / z / z

Digital Audiolink (DAL)

/ Digital Audio-Out (coaxial)

z / zz / zz / z

Analog Audio-Out (L/R) / Headphone (jack 3.5 mm)

z / zz / zz / z

Micro-AV

(Component / Scart / VGA)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

USB / Bluetooth Music Player

3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z

VESA mounting points

———

z= included/installed {= upgradeable/optional

The reception of DVB-T2 programs is possible in selected countries.

Reception of digital channels may be limited by individual regulations from the respective

broadcaster/provider. UK models are Freeview HD compliant.

D-GB-F-I-E-NL-CZ-GR-PL-H-FIN-SLO-SK-TR-S-DK-P-RUS-N.

AV-PIP is only available in combination with DVB-T/C/S.

CI Plus is backwards compatible with CI. Functionality is dependent on module availability

from the supplier.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter and selected devices (RC5, 36 kHz), to be

ordered separately.

Loewe System 5.1 Out, Stereo Out, Subwoofer Out.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter, to be ordered separately.

Loewe bild

User handbook

161



Technical data

bild 5 oled

2 1

3 4

Connections rear side of the device (bild 5.65 oled/bild 5.55 oled)

Mains switch

Slot for Kensington lock

DIGITAL AUDIO LINK - Surround audio outputs (digital) – (RJ45)

AC IN - Mains connection

Mains socket – 220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz

LAN - Network connection

RJ-45 – Ethernet / Fast Ethernet

HDMI 1 ARC - HDMI input 1

(with Audio Return Channel)

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN/OUT

HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

ANT TV - Antenna/cable analogue /

DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C

IEC socket – 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80mA

ANT SAT 1 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

ANT SAT 2 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 2) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

SPDIF OUT - Audio output (digital)

Cinch socket (orange)

USB 3.0 - USB connection

USB type A – USB 3.0 (max. 900mA)

HEADPHONE - Headphone connection

Jack 3,5 mm – Headphones 32–200 Ohm

HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue) L/R – (

Jack 3,5 mm)

RS-232C - Serial interface

– (RJ12)

AV - Micro AV socket

Audio/Video IN with Scart adapter:

Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)

CVBS (VHS/8 mm)

RGB

L/R

Audio/Video IN with VGA adapter:

PC/STB video signal

PC formats (RGB, H, V)

Component (YPbPr)

L/R

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 1 (standard V1.3)

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 2 (standard V1.3)

HDMI 4 - HDMI input 4

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

The adaptor is available as an accessory from your dealer.

Before connecting an external device, please note that, the individual HDMI-ports can work with a range of different signals, see chapter Technical data, section bild

(across sets) – Signals via HDMI/AV (PC IN).

Loewe bild

User handbook

162



Technical data

bild 5 oled

Technical data (bild 5.65 oled/bild 5.55 oled)

Changes of technical data and design of the equipment reserved.

Loewe device type:

bild 5.65 set bild 5.55 set bild 5.65 oled bild 5.55 oled

Part number: 57440x00 / x01 57441x00 / x01 57440x50 / x51 57441x50 / x51

EU energy efficiency class: see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/support

Screen diagonal: 164 cm / 65 inch 139 cm / 55 inch 164 cm / 65 inch 139 cm / 55 inch

Power consumption On-Mode (max.)

(Audio output 1/8 of the maximum value): 450 W 350 W 450 W 350 W

Power consumption On-Mode (home)

Annual energy consumption

see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/support

Power consumption quick start mode: 80,0 W 80,0 W 80,0 W 80,0 W

Power consumption Standby Mode:

Power consumption when set is switched off:

0,49 W

(3a

/ 0,42 W

(3b

0 W

0,49 W

(3a

/ 0,41 W

(3b

0 W

0,49 W

(3c

/ 0,42 W

(3d

0 W

0,49 W

(3c

/ 0,41 W

(3d

0 W

Resolution / Picture format: Ultra HD 3840 x 2160 px / 16:9

Display technology: OLED (WRGB Pixel)

Device dimensions without stand (W x H x D):

145,3 x 88,5 x 6,4 cm

(3a

144,9 x 88,3 x 6,4 cm

(3b

123,0 x 76,2 x 6,4 cm

(3a

122,8 x 75,9 x 6,4 cm

(3b

145,3 x 86,5 x 5,6 cm

(3c

144,9 x 86,4 x 5,6 cm

(3d

123,0 x 74,2 x 5,6 cm

(3c

122,8 x 74,0 x 5,6 cm

(3d

Weight without stand (approximate): 26,7 kg

(3a

/ 32,2 kg

(3b

21,4 kg

(3a

/ 26,2 kg

(3b

25,7 kg

(3c

/ 31,2 kg

(3d

20,4 kg

(3c

/ 25,2 kg

(3d

Ambient temperature: 5° C – 35° C

Relative humidity (non-condensing): 20 – 80%

Air pressure: 800 – 1114 hPa (0 – 2000 m above sea level)

Chassis designation: SL420

Power supply: 220 V – 240 V/50–60 Hz

Tuner: terr./cable:

Satellite:

VHF/Hyperband/UHF

4 levels: 13/18V/22kHz / 16 levels: DiSEqC 1.0 / single-cable system: EN 50494

Range: terr./cable:

Satellite:

Terr./cable: 45 MHz up to 860 MHz

Satellite: 950 MHz up to 2150 MHz

Channel storage locations incl. AV and radio: 6000

TV standards: analogue:

digital:

B/G, I, L, D/K, M, N

DVB-T/T2, DVB-C, DVB-S/S2 (UHD via DVB to max. 60 Hz)

Colour standards: SECAM, PAL, NTSC, NTSC-V, PAL-V (60 Hz)

Sound standards: analogue (FM):

analogue (NICAM):

digital (MPEG):

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel, PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital Pulse, Dolby

Virtual Speaker, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby MS11

Audio output power (sine / music): 2 x 20W / 2 x40W

Acoustic speaker concept: Soundbar --- ---

Teletext: TOP / FLOF / HiText (Level 2.5)

Page memory: 2000

LAN: Standards supported: 10 Mbit/sec Ethernet (10Base-T) / 100 Mbit/sec Fast Ethernet (100Base-T)

WLAN: Standards supported:

Frequency range used:

Types of encoding that are supported:

IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n, 802.11ac

Power <100 mW at 2400-2483,5 MHz and 5150-5725 MHz

WEP 64 and 128 Bit (ASCII and HEX), WPA PSK, WPA2 AES

Bluetooth: Power / Frequency range:

Bluetooth protocols:

Power <10 mW at 2.4 GHz

A2DP SRC, A2DP SNK, HID

Home networking standard: Universal Plug and Play Audio / Video (UPnP AV)

File formats supported

: Pictures:

Audio:

Video:

JPEG, JPEG progressive (max. resolution 3840x2160), PNG

MP3, M4A (AAC LC), WMA (without lossless), FLAC, WAV (PCM), Ogg Vorbis

AVI (MPEG-1/2, XviD, Dolby Digital, MP3), WMV (WMV9, VC-1, WMA9, WMA Pro),

MP4 (XviD, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC), MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC),

MKV (H.265/HEVC, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Dolby Digital), FLV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.263,

MP3, AAC LC),

MPG (MPEG-1, MPEG Audio), TS/PS (MPEG-2, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG2

Audio, Dolby Digital)

, VOB (MPEG-2, MPEG2 Audio, Dolby Digital)

H.264/MPEG-4 AVC upto Profil High (Level 4.2)

H.264/H.265 compatible to Dolby Vision/HDR 10/HLG

The energy consumption per year is calculated on the basis of a daily four-hour operation of the TV set on 365 days. The actual energy consumption will depend on the

way the TV set is used. On-Mode (home) values less than 100 W must have decimal places (,0).

For the playability of the individual formats no guarantee can be given.

a: version x00; b: version x01; c: version x50; d: version x51.

Loewe bild

User handbook

163



Technical data

bild 5 oled

Equipment features (bild 5.65 oled/bild 5.55 oled)

Changes to the equipment features and the set design reserved.

Loewe set type:

bild 5.65 oled bild 5.55 oled

Image

(Image)

Ultra HD Super Resolution Scaling / Image+ Active / 24 p motion picture display

z / z / zz / z / z

3D technology / Active Glasses 3D

— / — — / —

Auto-Dimming Video (VDB+) / Auto-Dimming Raum (OPC) / Home Mode:

— /

z / z

— /

z / z

Digital

(Television Standards)

DVB-T2

/ DVB-C / DVB-S2 / Multistandard (analogue) / Dual Channel

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / z

MPEG / MPEG2 / MPEG4 (H.264) / HEVC (H.265) / integrated HDTV reception

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / z

DVB radio / Unicable (acc. EN 50494)

z / zz / z

Sound

(Audio)

Integrated 5.1 AV-Receiver / Digital audio link

z / zz / z

Dolby Digital / Dolby Digital Plus / DTS

z / z /

—

z / z /

—

Individual bass and treble control / Loudness

z / zz / z

Automatic Volume Control (AVC)

Audio out available: variable / fixed / Subwoofer

z / z / zz / z / z

Assist

(Operation)

Loewe os / Home Screen (incl. favorites)

z / zz / z

HDR (Dolby Vision / HDR 10 / HLG)

z / z / zz / z / z

Electronic Program Guide (SI-data)

MediaText (HbbTV) / Video text (Level 2.5)

z / zz / z

Menu languages

/ Context Related Help

z / zz / z

Parental Lock / Automatic turn-off / Timer

z / z / zz / z / z

Instant Channel Zapping / Quick Start Mode

z / zz / z

Digital Link HD (CEC)

PIP (AV)

/ Full PIP / Split screen TV : Video text

z / z / zz / z / z

MediaUpdate (via USB / Internet)

z / zz / z

Hotel Mode

Media

(Multimedia functions)

DR+ / storage capacity in GB / USB archive

z / 1.000 / zz / 1.000 / z

DR+ Streaming server / client / Follow-Me

z / z / zz / z / z

Multi Recording / Mobile Recording

z / zz / z

Multiroom Streaming

Photo player / Music player / Video player (via Home network and USB incl. Ultra HD)

z / z / zz / z / z

Digital Media Renderer (incl. Ultra HD) / Bluetooth Music Player

z / zz / z

Internet Apps (MediaNet) / Internet Browser / Internet Radio (incl. search function)

z / z / zz / z / z

Connectivity

(Connectors)

HDMI with HDCP 2.2

4 (4x UHD, 1x ARC) 4 (4x UHD, 1x ARC)

LAN network connection / integrated WLAN

z / zz / z

Common Interface / CI Plus 1.3 certified

2 / z 2 / z

Home Control Interface IP / Home Control Interface RS232 / IR-Link

/ Motor control

z / z / z /

—

z / z / z /

—

Digital Audiolink (DAL)

/ Digital Audio-Out (coaxial)

z / zz / z

Analog Audio-Out (L/R) / Headphone (jack 3.5 mm)

z / zz / z

Micro-AV

(Component / Scart / VGA)

z / z / zz / z / z

USB / Bluetooth Connection

3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z

VESA mounting points

z= included/installed {= upgradeable/optional

The reception of DVB-T2 programs is possible in selected countries.

Reception of digital channels may be limited by individual regulations from the respective

broadcaster/provider. UK models are Freeview HD compliant.

D-GB-F-I-E-NL-CZ-GR-PL-H-FIN-SLO-SK-TR-S-DK-P-RUS-N.

AV-PIP is only available in combination with DVB-T/C/S.

CI Plus is backwards compatible with CI. Functionality is dependent on module availability

from the supplier.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter and selected devices (RC5, 36 kHz), to be

ordered separately.

Loewe System 5.1 Out, Stereo Out, Subwoofer Out.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter, to be ordered separately.

Loewe bild

User handbook

164



Technical data

bild 5

Slot for Kensington lock

AC IN - Mains connection

Mains socket – 220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz

LAN - Network connection

RJ-45 – Ethernet / Fast Ethernet

HDMI 1 ARC - HDMI input 1

(with Audio Return Channel)

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN/OUT

HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

ANT TV - Antenna/cable analogue /

DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C

IEC socket – 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80mA

ANT SAT 1 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

ANT SAT 2 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 2) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

SPDIF OUT - Audio output (digital)

Cinch socket (orange)

USB 3.0 - USB connection

USB type A – USB 3.0 (max. 900mA)

FEATURE KIT - optional

(1A

MOTOR UNIT - rotating stand control

(1B

DIGITAL AUDIO LINK - Surround audio outputs (digital) – (RJ45)

HEADPHONE - Headphone connection

Jack 3,5 mm – Headphones 32–200 Ohm

HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue) L/R – (

Jack 3,5 mm)

RS-232C - Serial interface

– (RJ12)

AV - Micro AV socket

Audio/Video IN with Scart adapter:

Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)

CVBS (VHS/8 mm)

RGB

L/R

Audio/Video IN with VGA adapter:

PC/STB video signal

Component (YPbPr)

L/R

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 1 (standard V1.3)

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 2 (standard V1.3)

HDMI 4 - HDMI input 4

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

Connections rear side of the device (bild 5.55/bild 5.48/bild 5.40)

A: in case of bild 5.55 (56428x50) / bild 5.48 (56430x50) / bild 5.40 (56427x50). Optional connection for individual country-specific variants of the TV set.

B: in case of bild 5.55 (56428x51). Connection for a motorized swivel stand.

AThe adaptor is available as an accessory from your dealer.

Before connecting an external device, please note that, the individual HDMI-ports can work with a range of different signals, see chapter Technical data, section bild (across

sets) – Signals via HDMI/AV (PC IN).

(1B(1A

Loewe bild

User handbook

165



Technical data

bild 5

Slot for Kensington lock

AC IN - Mains connection

Mains socket – 220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz

DIGITAL AUDIO LINK - Surround audio outputs (digital) – (RJ45)

Mains switch

LAN - Network connection

RJ-45 – Ethernet / Fast Ethernet

HDMI 1 ARC - HDMI input 1

(with Audio Return Channel)

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN/OUT

HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

ANT TV - Antenna/cable analogue /

DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C

IEC socket – 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80mA

ANT SAT 1 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

ANT SAT 2 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 2) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

SPDIF OUT - Audio output (digital)

Cinch socket (orange)

USB 3.0 - USB connection

USB type A – USB 3.0 (max. 900mA)

HEADPHONE - Headphone connection

Jack 3,5 mm – Headphones 32–200 Ohm

HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue) L/R – (

Jack 3,5 mm)

RS-232C - Serial interface

– (RJ12)

AV - Micro AV socket

Audio/Video IN with Scart adapter:

Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)

CVBS (VHS/8 mm)

RGB

L/R

Audio/Video IN with VGA adapter:

PC/STB video signal

Component (YPbPr)

L/R

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 1 (standard V1.3)

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 2 (standard V1.3)

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

Connections rear side of the device (bild 5.32 dr+/bild 5.32)

5 4

2 3

For device type bild 5.32: No connection available.

The adaptor is available as an accessory from your dealer.

Before connecting an external device, please note that, the individual HDMI-ports can work with a range of different signals, see chapter Technical data, section bild (across

sets) – Signals via HDMI/AV (PC IN).

Loewe bild

User handbook

166



Technical data

bild 5

Technical data (bild 5.55/bild 5.48/bild 5.40/bild 5.32)

Changes of technical data and design of the equipment reserved.

Loewe device type:

bild 5.55 bild 5.48 bild 5.40 bild 5.32

Part number:

56428xxx 56430xxx 56427xxx 56426xxx

EU energy efficiency class:

see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/support

Screen diagonal:

140 cm / 55 inch 122 cm / 48 inch 102 cm / 40 inch 81 cm / 32 inch

Power consumption On-Mode (max.)

(Audio output 1/8 of the maximum value):

228 W 164 W 125 W 75,0 W

(4A

/ 73,0 W

(4B

Power consumption On-Mode (home)

Annual energy consumption

see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/support

Power consumption quick start mode:

80,0 W 55,0 W 55,0 W

30,0 W

(4A

/ 25,0 W

(4B

Power consumption Standby Mode:

Power consumption when set is switched off:

0,38 W

0 W

0,38 W

0 W

0,38 W

0 W

0,40 W

0 W

Resolution: Ultra HD 3840 x 2160 px

Full HD 1920 x 1080 px

Display technology / Picture format: LCD with Edge-LED-Backlight / 16:9

Device dimensions without stand (W x H x D):

Device dimensions with stand

(W x H x D):

122,9 x 75,1 x 5,5 cm

122,9 x 75,1 x 6,8 cm

107,8 x 66,8 x 5,5 cm

107,8 x 69,9 x 25,7 cm

90,9 x 57,4 x 5,5 cm

90,9 x 60,4 x 25,7 cm

72,9 x 47,7 x 5,3 cm

72,9 x 50,8 x 21,3 cm

Weight without stand (approximate):

Weight with stand

(approximate):

27,6 kg

29,1 kg

18,8 kg

21.3 kg

15,5 kg

18,1 kg

9,7 kg

11,7 kg

Ambient temperature: 5° C – 35° C

Relative humidity (non-condensing): 20 – 80%

Air pressure: 800 – 1114 hPa (0 – 2000 m above sea level)

Chassis designation: SL 420

SL320F

(4A

/ SL310F

(4B

Power supply: 220 V – 240 V/50–60 Hz

Tuner: terr./cable:

Satellite:

VHF/Hyperband/UHF

4 levels: 13/18V/22kHz / 16 levels: DiSEqC 1.0 / single-cable system: EN 50494

Range: terr./cable:

Satellite:

Terr./cable: 45 MHz up to 860 MHz

Satellite: 950 MHz up to 2150 MHz

Channel storage locations incl. AV and radio: 6000

TV standards: analogue:

digital:

B/G, I, L, D/K, M, N

DVB-T/T2, DVB-C, DVB-S/S2 (UHD via DVB to max. 60 Hz)

Colour standards: SECAM, PAL, NTSC, NTSC-V, PAL-V (60 Hz)

Sound formats: analogue (FM):

analogue (NICAM):

digital (MPEG):

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel, PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Pulse, Dolby MS11

(Dolby Virtual Speaker, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby TrueHD)

Audio output power (sine / music): 2 x 20W / 2 x 40W

Acoustic speaker concept: Speaker Box

Teletext: TOP / FLOF / HiText (Level 2.5)

Page memory: 2000

LAN: Standards supported: 10 Mbit/sec Ethernet (10Base-T) / 100 Mbit/sec Fast Ethernet (100Base-T)

WLAN: Standards supported:

Power/Frequency range:

Types of encoding that are supported:

IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n, 802.11ac

Power <100 mW at 2400-2483,5 MHz and 5150-5725 MHz

WEP 64 and 128 Bit (ASCII and HEX), WPA PSK, WPA2 AES

Bluetooth: Power/Frequency range:

Bluetooth protocols:

Power <10 mW at 2.4 GHz

A2DP SRC, A2DP SNK, HID

Home networking standard: Universal Plug and Play Audio / Video (UPnP AV)

File formats supported

: Pictures:

Audio:

Video:

JPEG, JPEG progressive (max. resolution 3840x2160), PNG

MP3, M4A (AAC LC), WMA (without lossless), FLAC, WAV (PCM), Ogg Vorbis

AVI (MPEG-1/2, XviD, Dolby Digital, MP3), WMV (WMV9, VC-1, WMA9, WMA Pro),

MP4 (XviD, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC), MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC),

MKV (H.265/HEVC, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Dolby Digital), FLV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.263,

MP3, AAC LC),

MPG (MPEG-1, MPEG Audio), TS/PS (MPEG-2, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG2 Audio,

Dolby Digital

)

, VOB (MPEG-2, MPEG2 Audio, Dolby Digital)

H.264/MPEG-4 AVC upto Profil High (Level 4.2)

H.264/H.265 compatible to HDR10/HLG for SL4xx TV sets

The energy consumption per year is calculated on the basis of a daily four-hour operation of

the TV set on 365 days. The actual energy consumption will depend on the way the TV set is

used. On-Mode (home) values less than 100 W must have decimal places (,0).

Supplied mounting option: WM67 (bild 5.55), Table Stand bild 5.40/48 (bild 5.40/48), Table

Stand bild 5.32 (bild 5.32).

For the playability of the individual formats no guarantee can be given.

A: Device type bild 5.32 DR+ (56246x55). B: Device type bild 5.32 (56246x85).

Not available for bild 5.32 (56426x85)

Loewe bild

User handbook

167



Technical data

bild 5

Equipment features (bild 5.55/bild 5.48/bild 5.40/bild 5.32)

Changes to the equipment features and the set design reserved.

Loewe set type:

bild 5.55 bild 5.48 bild 5.40 bild 5.32 DR+ bild 5.32

Image

(Image)

Ultra HD Super Resolution Scaling / Image+ Active /

24 p motion picture display

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

—

/ z / z

—

/ z / z

3D technology / Active Glasses 3D

{

— / — — / — — / — — / —

Auto-Dimming Video (VDB+) /

Auto-Dimming Raum (OPC) / Home Mode:

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

—

/ z / z

—

/ z / z

Digital

(Television Standards)

DVB-T2

/ DVB-C / DVB-S2 /

Multistandard (analogue) / Dual Channel

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / z

PEG / MPEG2 / MPEG4 (H.264) /

HEVC (H.265) / integrated HDTV reception

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / z

DVB radio / Unicable (acc. EN 50494)

z / zz / zz / zz / zz / z

Sound

(Audio)

Integrated 5.1 AV-Receiver / Digital audio link

z / zz / zz / zz / z

— / —

Dolby Digital / Dolby Digital Plus / DTS

z / z /

—

z / z /

—

z / z /

—

z / z /

—

/ — / —

Individual bass and treble control / Loudness

z / zz / zz / zz / zz / z

Automatic Volume Control (AVC)

zzzz z

Audio out available: variable / fixed / Subwoofer

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Assist

(Operation)

Loewe os / Home Screen (incl. favorites)

z / zz / zz / zz / zz / z

HDR (Dolby Vision / HDR 10 / HLG)

—

/ z / z

—

/ z / z

—

/ z / z

— / — / — — / — / —

Electronic Program Guide (SI-data)

zzzz z

MediaText (HbbTV) / Video text (Level 2.5)

z / zz / zz / zz / zz / z

Menu languages

/ Context Related Help

z / zz / zz / zz / zz / z

Parental Lock / Automatic turn-off / Timer

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Instant Channel Zapping / Quick Start Mode

z / zz / zz / zz / zz / z

Digital Link HD (CEC)

zzzz z

PIP (AV)

/ Full PIP / Split screen TV : Video text

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

MediaUpdate (via USB / Internet)

z / zz / zz / zz / zz / z

Hotel Mode

zzzz z

Media

(Multimedia functions)

DR+ / storage capacity in GB / USB recording (with DR+: USB-Archives)

z / 1.000 / zz / 1.000 / zz / 1.000 / zz / 1.000 / z

— / —

/ z

DR+ Streaming server / client / Follow-Me

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

— /

z / z

Multi Recording

/ Mobile Recording

z / zz / zz / zz / z{

{

Multiroom Streaming

{{{{ {

Photo player / Music player / Video player (via Home network

and USB incl. Ultra HD)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Digital Media Renderer (incl. Ultra HD) / Bluetooth Music Player

z / {z / {z / {z / {z / {

Internet Apps (MediaNet) / Internet Browser / Internet Radio

(incl. search function)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Connectivity

(Connectors)

HDMI with HDCP 2.2

4 (4x UHD, 1x ARC) 4 (4x UHD, 1x ARC) 4 (4x UHD, 1x ARC)

3 (1x ARC) 3 (1x ARC)

LAN network connection / integrated WLAN

z / zz / zz / zz / zz / z

Common Interface / CI Plus 1.3 certified

2 / z 2 / z 2 / z 2 / z 2 / z

Home Control Interface IP / Home Control Interface RS232 /

IR-Link

/ Motor control

z / z / z / zz / z / z /

—

z / z / z /

—

z / z / z /

—

z / z / z /

—

Digital Audiolink (DAL)

/ Digital Audio-Out (coaxial)

z / zz / zz / zz / z

—

/ z

Analog Audio-Out (L/R) / Headphone (jack 3.5 mm)

z / zz / zz / zz / zz / z

Micro-AV

(Component / Scart / VGA)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

USB / Bluetooth Connection

3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z

VESA mounting points

zzzz z

z= included/installed {= upgradeable/optional

The reception of DVB-T2 programs is possible in selected countries.

Reception of digital channels may be limited by individual regulations from the respective

broadcaster/provider. UK models are Freeview HD compliant.

D-GB-F-I-E-NL-CZ-GR-PL-H-FIN-SLO-SK-TR-S-DK-P-RUS-N.

AV-PIP is only available in combination with DVB-T/C/S.

CI Plus is backwards compatible with CI. Functionality is dependent on module availability

from the supplier.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter and selected devices (RC5, 36 kHz), to be

ordered separately.

Loewe System 5.1 Out, Stereo Out, Subwoofer Out.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter, to be ordered separately.

Available via optional upgrade feature.

Loewe bild

User handbook

168



Technical data

bild 4

2 1

3 4

Connections rear side of the device (bild 4.55)

Mains switch

Slot for Kensington lock

DIGITAL AUDIO LINK - Surround audio outputs (digital) – (RJ45)

AC IN - Mains connection

Mains socket – 220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz

LAN - Network connection

RJ-45 – Ethernet / Fast Ethernet

HDMI 1 ARC - HDMI input 1

(with Audio Return Channel)

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN/OUT

HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

ANT TV - Antenna/cable analogue /

DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C

IEC socket – 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80mA

ANT SAT 1 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

ANT SAT 2 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 2) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

SPDIF OUT - Audio output (digital)

Cinch socket (orange)

USB 3.0 - USB connection

USB type A – USB 3.0 (max. 900mA)

HEADPHONE - Headphone connection

Jack 3,5 mm – Headphones 32–200 Ohm

HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue) L/R – (

Jack 3,5 mm)

RS-232C - Serial interface

– (RJ12)

AV - Micro AV socket

Audio/Video IN with Scart adapter:

Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)

CVBS (VHS/8 mm)

RGB

L/R

Audio/Video IN with VGA adapter:

PC/STB video signal

PC formats (RGB, H, V)

Component (YPbPr)

L/R

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 1 (standard V1.3)

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 2 (standard V1.3)

HDMI 4 - HDMI input 4

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

The adaptor is available as an accessory from your dealer.

Before connecting an external device, please note that, the individual HDMI-ports can work with a range of different signals, see chapter Technical data, section bild

(across sets) – Signals via HDMI/AV (PC IN).

Loewe bild

User handbook

169



Technical data

bild 4

Technical data (bild 4.55)

Changes of technical data and design of the equipment reserved.

Loewe device type:

bild 4.55 bild 4.55

Part number: 57441W90 57441W91

EU energy efficiency class:

see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/support

Screen diagonal: 139 cm / 55 inch

Power consumption On-Mode (max.)

(Audio output 1/8 of the maximum value):

348 W

Power consumption On-Mode (home)

Annual energy consumption

see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/support

Power consumption quick start mode:

80,0 W

Power consumption Standby Mode:

Power consumption when set is switched off:

0,49 W

0 W

Resolution / Picture format: Ultra HD 3840 x 2160 px / 16:9

Display technology: OLED (WRGB Pixel)

Device dimensions without stand (W x H x D):

123,0 x 76,2 x 6,4 cm

122,8 x 75,9 x 6,4 cm

Weight without stand (approximate):

21,3 kg

24,8 kg

Ambient temperature: 5° C – 35° C

Relative humidity (non-condensing): 20 – 80%

Air pressure: 800 – 1114 hPa (0 – 2000 m above sea level)

Chassis designation: SL415

Power supply: 220 V – 240 V/50–60 Hz

Tuner: terr./cable:

Satellite:

VHF/Hyperband/UHF

4 levels: 13/18V/22kHz / 16 levels: DiSEqC 1.0 / single-cable system: EN 50494

Range: terr./cable:

Satellite:

Terr./cable: 45 MHz up to 860 MHz

Satellite: 950 MHz up to 2150 MHz

Channel storage locations incl. AV and radio: 6000

TV standards: analogue:

digital:

B/G, I, L, D/K, M, N

DVB-T/T2, DVB-C, DVB-S/S2 (UHD via DVB to max. 60 Hz)

Colour standards: SECAM, PAL, NTSC, NTSC-V, PAL-V (60 Hz)

Sound standards: analogue (FM):

analogue (NICAM):

digital (MPEG):

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel, PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital Pulse,

Dolby Virtual Speaker, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby MS11

Audio output power (sine / music): 2 x 20W / 2 x40W

Acoustic speaker concept: Soundbar

Teletext: TOP / FLOF / HiText (Level 2.5)

Page memory: 2000

LAN: Standards supported: 10 Mbit/sec Ethernet (10Base-T) / 100 Mbit/sec Fast Ethernet (100Base-T)

WLAN: Standards supported:

Frequency range used:

Types of encoding that are supported:

IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n, 802.11ac

Power <100 mW at 2400-2483,5 MHz and 5150-5725 MHz

WEP 64 and 128 Bit (ASCII and HEX), WPA PSK, WPA2 AES

Bluetooth: Power / Frequency range:

Bluetooth protocols:

Power <10 mW at 2.4 GHz

A2DP SRC, A2DP SNK, HID

Home networking standard: Universal Plug and Play Audio / Video (UPnP AV)

File formats supported

: Pictures:

Audio:

Video:

JPEG, JPEG progressive (max. resolution 3840x2160), PNG

MP3, M4A (AAC LC), WMA (without lossless), FLAC, WAV (PCM), Ogg Vorbis

AVI (MPEG-1/2, XviD, Dolby Digital, MP3), WMV (WMV9, VC-1, WMA9, WMA Pro),

MP4 (XviD, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC), MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC),

MKV (H.265/HEVC, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Dolby Digital), FLV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.263,

MP3, AAC LC),

MPG (MPEG-1, MPEG Audio), TS/PS (MPEG-2, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG2

Audio, Dolby Digital)

, VOB (MPEG-2, MPEG2 Audio, Dolby Digital)

H.264/MPEG-4 AVC upto Profil High (Level 4.2)

H.264/H.265

compatible to

Dolby Vision/HDR 10/HLG

The energy consumption per year is calculated on the basis of a daily four-hour operation of the TV set on 365 days. The actual energy consumption will depend on

the way the TV set is used. On-Mode (home) values less than 100 W must have decimal places (,0).

For the playability of the individual formats no guarantee can be given.

Loewe bild

User handbook

170



Technical data

bild 4

Equipment features (bild 4.55)

Changes to the equipment features and the set design reserved.

Loewe set type:

bild 4.55

Image

(Image)

Ultra HD Super Resolution Scaling / Image+ Active / 24 p motion picture display

z / z / z

3D technology / Active Glasses 3D

— / —

Auto-Dimming Video (VDB+) / Auto-Dimming Raum (OPC) / Home Mode:

— /

z / z

Digital

(Television Standards)

DVB-T2

/ DVB-C / DVB-S2 /Multistandard (analogue) / Dual Channel

z / z / z / z / z

PEG / MPEG2 / MPEG4 (H.264) / HEVC (H.265) / integrated HDTV reception

z / z / z / z / z

DVB radio / Unicable (acc. EN 50494)

z / z

Sound

(Audio)

Integrated 5.1 AV-Receiver / Digital audio link

z / z

Dolby Digital / Dolby Digital Plus / DTS

z / z /

—

Individual bass and treble control / Loudness

z / z

Automatic Volume Control (AVC)

Audio out available: variable / fixed / Subwoofer

z / z / z

Assist

(Operation)

Loewe os / Home Screen (incl. favorites)

z / z

HDR (Dolby Vision / HDR 10 / HLG)

z / z / z

Electronic Program Guide (SI-data)

MediaText (HbbTV) / Video text (Level 2.5)

z / z

Menu languages

/ Context Related Help

z / z

Parental Lock / Automatic turn-off / Timer

z / z / z

Instant Channel Zapping / Quick Start Mode

z / z

Digital Link HD (CEC)

PIP (AV)

/ Full PIP / Split screen TV : Video text

z / z / z

MediaUpdate (via USB / Internet)

z / z

Hotel Mode

Media

(Multimedia functions)

DR+ / storage capacity in GB / USB recording

— / —

/ z

DR+ Streaming server / client / Follow-Me

—

/ z / z

Multi Recording / Mobile Recording

z / z

Multiroom Streaming

Photo player / Music player / Video player (via Home network and USB incl. Ultra HD)

z / z / z

Digital Media Renderer (incl. Ultra HD) / Bluetooth Music Player

z / z

Internet Apps (MediaNet) / Internet Browser / Internet Radio (incl. search function)

z / z / z

Connectivity

(Connectors)

HDMI with HDCP 2.2

4 (1 x 2.0a, 1 x ARC)

LAN network connection / integrated WLAN

z / z

Common Interface / CI Plus 1.3 certified

2 / z

Home Control Interface IP / Home Control Interface RS232 / IR-Link

/ Motor control

z / z / z /

—

Digital Audiolink (DAL)

/ Digital Audio-Out (coaxial)

z / z

Analog Audio-Out (L/R) / Headphone (jack 3.5 mm)

z / z

Micro-AV

(Component / Scart / VGA)

z / z / z

USB / Bluetooth Connection

3 (1 x 3.0) / z

VESA mounting points

z= included/installed {= upgradeable/optional

The reception of DVB-T2 programs is possible in selected countries.

Reception of digital channels may be limited by individual regulations from the respective

broadcaster/provider. UK models are Freeview HD compliant.

D-GB-F-I-E-NL-CZ-GR-PL-H-FIN-SLO-SK-TR-S-DK-P-RUS-N.

AV-PIP is only available in combination with DVB-T/C/S.

CI Plus is backwards compatible with CI. Functionality is dependent on module availability

from the supplier.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter and selected devices (RC5, 36 kHz), to be

ordered separately.

Loewe System 5.1 Out, Stereo Out, Subwoofer Out.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter, to be ordered separately.

Loewe bild

User handbook

171



Technical data

bild 3 (2017)

Connections rear side of the device (bild 3.65 oled/bild 3.55 oled)

Mains switch

Slot for Kensington lock

AC IN - Mains connection

Mains socket – 220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz

LAN - Network connection

RJ-45 – Ethernet / Fast Ethernet

HDMI 1 ARC - HDMI input 1

(with Audio Return Channel)

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN/OUT

HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

ANT TV - Antenna/cable analogue /

DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C

IEC socket – 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80mA

ANT SAT 1 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

ANT SAT 2 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 2) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

SPDIF OUT - Audio output (digital)

Cinch socket (orange)

USB 3.0 - USB connection

USB type A – USB 3.0 (max. 900mA)

HEADPHONE - Headphone connection

Jack 3,5 mm – Headphones 32–200 Ohm

HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue) L/R – (

Jack 3,5 mm)

RS-232C - Serial interface

– (RJ12)

AV - Micro AV socket

Audio/Video IN with Scart adapter:

Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)

CVBS (VHS/8 mm)

RGB

L/R

Audio/Video IN with VGA adapter:

PC/STB video signal

PC formats (RGB, H, V)

Component (YPbPr)

L/R

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 1 (standard V1.3)

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 2 (standard V1.3)

HDMI 4 - HDMI input 4

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

The adaptor is available as an accessory from your dealer.

Before connecting an external device, please note that, the individual HDMI-ports can work with a range of different signals, see chapter Technical data, section bild

(across sets) – Signals via HDMI/AV (PC IN).

2 1

Loewe bild

User handbook

172



Technical data

bild 3 (2017)

Connections rear side of the device (bild 3.49/bild 3.43)

Mains switch

AC IN - Mains connection

Mains socket – 220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz

Slot for Kensington lock

LAN - Network connection

RJ-45 – Ethernet / Fast Ethernet

HDMI 1 ARC - HDMI input 1

(with Audio Return Channel)

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN/OUT

HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

ANT TV - Antenna/cable analogue /

DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C

IEC socket – 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80mA

ANT SAT 1 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

ANT SAT 2 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 2) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

SPDIF OUT - Audio output (digital)

Cinch socket (orange)

USB 3.0 - USB connection

USB type A – USB 3.0 (max. 900mA)

DIGITAL AUDIO LINK - Surround audio outputs (digital) – (RJ45)

HEADPHONE - Headphone connection

Jack 3,5 mm – Headphones 32–200 Ohm

HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue) L/R – (

Jack 3,5 mm)

RS-232C - Serial interface

– (RJ12)

AV - Micro AV socket

Audio/Video IN with Scart adapter:

Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)

CVBS (VHS/8 mm)

RGB

L/R

Audio/Video IN with VGA adapter:

PC/STB video signal

PC formats (RGB, H, V)

Component (YPbPr)

L/R

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 1 (standard V1.3)

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 2 (standard V1.3)

HDMI 4 - HDMI input 4

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

Only available for device type bild 3.49 DR+ (57419x50)/bild 3.43 DR+ (57420x50).

The adaptor is available as an accessory from your dealer.

Before connecting an external device, please note that, the individual HDMI-ports can work with a range of different signals, see chapter Technical data, section bild

(across sets) – Signals via HDMI/AV (PC IN).

3 2

Loewe bild

User handbook

173

Technical data (bild 3.65 oled/bild 3.55 oled/bild 3.49/bild 3.43)

Changes of technical data and design of the equipment reserved.

Loewe device type: bild 3.65 oled bild 3.55 oled

bild 3.49 dr+ bild 3.49

bild 3.43 dr+

bild 3.43

Part number: 57460x81

57461x80

57461x81

57419x50

57419x51

57419x80

57419x81

57420x50

57420x51

57420x80

57420x81

EU energy efficiency class: see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/support

Screen diagonal: 164 cm/65 inch 139 cm/55 inch 126 cm/49 inch 108 cm/43 inch

Power consumption On-Mode (max.)

(Audio output 1/8 of the maximum value):

448 W

350 W

(5a

348 W

(5b

175 W

(5c

187 W

(5d

173 W

(5a

185 W

(5b

144 W

(5c

151 W

(5d

142 W

(5a

149 W

(5b

Power consumption On-Mode (home)

Annual energy consumption

see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/support

Power consumption quick start mode: 80,0 W 70,0 W

50,0 W

(5c

55,0 W

(5d

50,0 W

(5a

55,0 W

(5b

50,0 W

(5c

55,0 W

(5d

50,0 W

(5a

55,0 W

(5b

Power consumption Standby Mode: 0,42 W

0,49 W

(5a

0,41 W

(5b

0,31 W 0,31 W

0,43 W

(5c

0,37 W

(5d

0,43 W

(5a

0,37 W

(5b

Power consumption when set is switched off: 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W

Picture format / Resolution: 16:9 / Ultra HD 3840 x 2160 px

Display technology: OLED (WRGB Pixel) LCD with Edge-LED-Backlight

Device dimensions without stand (W

x H x D):

144,9 x 86,3 x 6,7

123,0 x 74,2 x 6,7

(5a

122,8 x 73,9 x 6,7

(5b

111,9 x 68,1 x 7,3 cm 96,3 x 59,4 x 7,3 cm

Device dimensions with stand

x H x D):

144,9 x 91,4 x 29,0

123,0 x 79,2 x 27,0

(5a

122,8 x 78,9 x 27,0

(5b

111,9 x 70,4 x 25,0 cm 96,3 x 61,7 x 25,0 cm

Weight without stand (approximate): 30,8 kg

20,6 kg

(5a

23,5 kg

(5b

20,4 kg

(5c

20,8 kg

(5d

20,2 kg

(5a

20,6 kg

(5b

15,6 kg

(5c

15,8 kg

(5d

15,4 kg

(5a

15,6 kg

(5b

Weight with stand

(approximate): 38,3 kg

25,4 kg

(5a

28,2 kg

(5b

23,6 kg

(5c

24,0 kg

(5d

23,4 kg

(5a

23,8 kg

(5b

18,8 kg

(5c

19,0 kg

(5d

18,6 kg

(5a

18,8 kg

(5b

Ambient temperature: 5° C – 35° C

Relative humidity (non-condensing): 20 – 80%

Air pressure: 800 – 1114 hPa (0 – 2000 m above sea level)

Chassis designation: SL410 SL410 SL420 SL410 SL420 SL410

Power supply: 220 V – 240 V/50–60 Hz

Tuner: terr./cable:

Satellite:

VHF/Hyperband/UHF

4 levels: 13/18V/22kHz / 16 levels: DiSEqC 1.0 / single-cable system: EN 50494

Range: terr./cable:

Satellite:

Terr./cable: 45 MHz up to 860 MHz

Satellite: 950 MHz up to 2150 MHz

Channel storage locations incl. AV and radio: 6000

TV standards: analogue:

digital:

B/G, I, L, D/K, M, N

DVB-T/T2, DVB-C, DVB-S/S2 (UHD via DVB to max. 60 Hz)

Colour standards: SECAM, PAL, NTSC, NTSC-V, PAL-V (60 Hz)

Sound formats: analogue (FM):

analogue (NICAM):

digital (MPEG):

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel, PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital Pulse, Dolby MS11

(Dolby Virtual Speaker, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby TrueHD)

Audio output power (sine / music): 2 x 20W / 2 x 40W

Acoustic speaker concept: Speaker Box

Teletext: TOP / FLOF / HiText (Level 2.5)

Page memory: 2000

LAN: Standards supported: 10 Mbit/sec Ethernet (10Base-T) / 100 Mbit/sec Fast Ethernet (100Base-T)

WLAN: Standards supported:

Power/Frequency range:

Types of encoding that are supported:

IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n, 802.11ac

Maximum power <100 mW at 2400-2483,5 MHz and 5150-5725 MHz

WEP 64 and 128 Bit (ASCII and HEX), WPA PSK, WPA2 AES

Bluetooth: Power/Frequency range:

Bluetooth protocols

Maximum power <10 mW at 2,4 GHz

A2DP SRC, A2DP SNK, HID

Home networking standard: Universal Plug and Play Audio / Video (UPnP AV)

File formats supported

: Pictures:

Audio:

Video:

JPEG, JPEG progressive (max. resolution 3840x2160), PNG

MP3, M4A (AAC LC), WMA (without lossless), FLAC, WAV (PCM), Ogg Vorbis

AVI (MPEG-1/2, XviD, Dolby Digital, MP3), WMV (WMV9, VC-1, WMA9, WMA Pro),

MP4 (XviD, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC), MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC),

MKV (H.265/HEVC, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Dolby Digital), FLV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.263, MP3,

AAC LC),

MPG (MPEG-1, MPEG Audio), TS/PS (MPEG-2, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG2 Audio,

Dolby

Digital

)

, VOB (MPEG-2, MPEG2 Audio, Dolby Digital)

H.264/MPEG-4 AVC upto Profil High (Level 4.2)

H.264/H.265 compatible to Dolby Vision/HDR10/HLG (bild 3.65 oled/bild 3.55 oled)

H.264/H.265 compatible to HDR10/HLG (bild 3.49 DR+/bild 3.49/bild 3.43 DR+/bild 3.43)

The energy consumption per year is calculated on the basis of a daily four-hour operation

of the TV set on 365 days. The actual energy consumption will depend on the way the

TV set is used. On-Mode (home) values less than 100 W must have decimal places (,0).

Supplied mounting option: Table Stand.

For the playability of the individual formats no guarantee can be given.



Technical data

bild 3 (2017)

Only for device type bild 3.49 DR+ / bild 3.43 DR+.

a: version x80; b: version x81; c: version x50; d: version x51.

The width of the TV set can be increased by up to 4mm depending on the type of TV

set in the area of the side-mounted Loewe clip.

Loewe bild

User handbook

174

Equipment features (bild 3.65 oled/bild 3.55 oled)

Changes to the equipment features and the set design reserved.

Loewe set type: bild 3.65 oled bild 3.55 oled

Image

(Image)

Ultra HD Super Resolution Scaling / Image+ Active /

24 p motion picture display

z / z / zz / z / z

3D technology / Active Glasses 3D

— / — — / —

Auto-Dimming Video (VDB+) /

Auto-Dimming Raum (OPC) / Home Mode:

—

/ z / z

—

/ z / z

Digital

(Television Standards)

DVB-T2

/ DVB-C / DVB-S2 /

Multistandard (analogue) / Dual Channel

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / z

PEG / MPEG2 / MPEG4 (H.264) /

HEVC (H.265) / integrated HDTV reception

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / z

DVB radio / Unicable (acc. EN 50494)

z / zz / z

Sound

(Audio)

Integrated 5.1 AV-Receiver / Digital audio link

— / — — / —

Dolby Digital / Dolby Digital Plus / DTS

z /

— / —

z /

— / —

Individual bass and treble control / Loudness

z / zz / z

Automatic Volume Control (AVC)

Audio out available: variable / fixed / Subwoofer

z / z / zz / z / z

Assist

(Operation)

Loewe os / Home Screen (incl. favorites)

z / zz / z

HDR (Dolby Vision / HDR 10 / HLG)

z / z / zz / z / z

Electronic Program Guide (SI-data)

MediaText (HbbTV) / Video text (Level 2.5)

z / zz / z

Menu languages

/ Context Related Help

z / zz / z

Parental Lock / Automatic turn-off / Timer

z / z / zz / z / z

Instant Channel Zapping / Quick Start Mode

z / zz / z

Digital Link HD (CEC)

PIP (AV)

/ Full PIP / Split screen TV : Video text

z / z / zz / z / z

MediaUpdate (via USB / Internet)

z / zz / z

Hotel Mode

Media

(Multimedia functions)

DR+ / Speicherkapazität in GB / USB-Recording (bei DR+: USB-Archive)

— / —

/ z

— / —

/ z

DR+ Streaming Server / Client / Follow-Me

— /

z / z

— /

z / z

Multi Recording / Mobile Recording / Multiroom-Streaming

z / z / zz / z / z

Fotoplayer / Musikplayer / Videoplayer (über Heimnetzwerk und USB, inkl. Ultra HD)

z / z / zz / z / z

Digital Media Renderer (inkl. Ultra HD) / Bluetooth Music Player

z / zz / z

Internetapps (MediaNet) / Internetbrowser / Internetradio (inkl. Suchfunktion)

z / z / zz / z / z

Connectivity

(Connectors)

HDMI with HDCP 2.2

4 (1 x 2.0a, 1 x ARC) 4 (1 x 2.0a, 1 x ARC)

LAN network connection / integrated WLAN

z / zz / z

Common Interface / CI Plus 1.3 certified

2 / z 2 / z

Home Control Interface IP / Home Control Interface RS232 / IR-Link

/ Motor control

z / z /

—

z / z /

—

Digital Audiolink (DAL)

/ Digital Audio-Out (coaxial)

—

/ z

—

/ z

Analog Audio-Out (L/R) / Headphone (jack 3.5 mm)

z / zz / z

Micro-AV

(Component / Scart / VGA)

z / z / zz / z / z

USB / Bluetooth Connection

3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z

VESA mounting points

z= included/installed {= upgradeable/optional

The reception of DVB-T2 programs is possible in selected countries.

Reception of digital channels may be limited by individual regulations from the respective

broadcaster/provider. UK models are Freeview HD compliant.

D-GB-F-I-E-NL-CZ-GR-PL-H-FIN-SLO-SK-TR-S-DK-P-RUS-N.

AV-PIP is only available in combination with DVB-T/C/S.

CI Plus is backwards compatible with CI. Functionality is dependent on module availability

from the supplier.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter and selected devices (RC5, 36 kHz), to be

ordered separately.

Loewe System 5.1 Out, Stereo Out, Subwoofer Out.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter, to be ordered separately.



Technical data

bild 3 (2017)

Loewe bild

User handbook

175



Technical data

bild 3 (2017)

Equipment features (bild 3.49/bild 3.43)

Changes to the equipment features and the set design reserved.

Loewe set type:

bild 3.49 dr+

bild 3.49

bild 3.43 dr+

bild 3.43

Image

(Image)

Ultra HD Super Resolution Scaling / Image+ Active /

24 p motion picture display

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

3D technology / Active Glasses 3D

— / — — / — — / — — / —

Auto-Dimming Video (VDB+) /

Auto-Dimming Raum (OPC) / Home Mode:

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Digital

(Television Standards)

DVB-T2

/ DVB-C / DVB-S2 /

Multistandard (analogue) / Dual Channel

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / z

PEG / MPEG2 / MPEG4 (H.264) /

HEVC (H.265) / integrated HDTV reception

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / z

DVB radio / Unicable (acc. EN 50494)

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Sound

(Audio)

Integrated 5.1 AV-Receiver / Digital audio link

z / z

— / —

z / z

— / —

Dolby Digital / Dolby Digital Plus / DTS

z / z /

—

z /

— / —

z / z /

—

z /

— / —

Individual bass and treble control / Loudness

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Automatic Volume Control (AVC)

zzzz

Audio out available: variable / fixed / Subwoofer

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Assist

(Operation)

Loewe os / Home Screen (incl. favorites)

z / zz / zz / zz / z

HDR (Dolby Vision / HDR 10 / HLG)

—

/ z / z

—

/ z / z

—

/ z / z

—

/ z / z

Electronic Program Guide (SI-data)

zzzz

MediaText (HbbTV) / Video text (Level 2.5)

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Menu languages

/ Context Related Help

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Parental Lock / Automatic turn-off / Timer

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Instant Channel Zapping / Quick Start Mode

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Digital Link HD (CEC)

zzzz

PIP (AV)

/ Full PIP / Split screen TV : Video text

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

MediaUpdate (via USB / Internet)

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Hotel Mode

zzzz

Media

(Multimedia functions)

DR+ / Speicherkapazität in GB / USB-Recording (bei DR+: USB-Archive)

z / 1.000 / z

— / —

/ zz / 1.000 / z

— / —

/ z

DR+ Streaming Server / Client / Follow-Me

z / z / z

— /

z / zz / z / z

—

/ z / z

Multi Recording / Mobile Recording / Multiroom-Streaming

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Fotoplayer / Musikplayer / Videoplayer (über Heimnetzwerk und

USB, inkl. Ultra HD)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Digital Media Renderer (inkl. Ultra HD) / Bluetooth Music Player

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Internetapps (MediaNet) / Internetbrowser / Internetradio (inkl.

Suchfunktion)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Connectivity

(Connectors)

HDMI with HDCP 2.2

4 (4 x UHD, 1 x ARC)

LAN network connection / integrated WLAN

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Common Interface / CI Plus 1.3 certified

2 / z 2 / z 2 / z 2 / z

Home Control Interface IP / Home Control Interface RS232 /

IR-Link

/ Motor control

z / z / z /

—

z / z / z /

—

z / z / z /

—

z / z / z /

—

Digital Audiolink (DAL)

/ Digital Audio-Out (coaxial)

z / z

—

/ zz / z

—

/ z

Analog Audio-Out (L/R) / Headphone (jack 3.5 mm)

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Micro-AV

(Component / Scart / VGA)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

USB / Bluetooth Connection

3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z

VESA mounting points

zzzz

z= included/installed {= upgradeable/optional

The reception of DVB-T2 programs is possible in selected countries.

Reception of digital channels may be limited by individual regulations from the respective

broadcaster/provider. UK models are Freeview HD compliant.

D-GB-F-I-E-NL-CZ-GR-PL-H-FIN-SLO-SK-TR-S-DK-P-RUS-N.

AV-PIP is only available in combination with DVB-T/C/S.

CI Plus is backwards compatible with CI. Functionality is dependent on module availability

from the supplier.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter and selected devices (RC5, 36 kHz), to be

ordered separately.

Loewe System 5.1 Out, Stereo Out, Subwoofer Out.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter, to be ordered separately.

Loewe bild

User handbook

176

Slot for Kensington lock

AC IN - Mains connection

Mains socket – 220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz

LAN - Network connection

RJ-45 – Ethernet / Fast Ethernet

HDMI 1 ARC - HDMI input 1

(with Audio Return Channel)

HDMI – Digital Video IN, Audio IN/OUT

HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2

HDMI – Digital Video IN, Audio IN

ANT TV - Antenna/cable analogue /

DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C

IEC socket – 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80mA

ANT SAT 1 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

ANT SAT 2 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 2) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

SPDIF OUT - Audio output (digital)

Cinch socket (orange)

USB 3.0 - USB connection

USB type A – USB 3.0 (max. 900mA)

DIGITAL AUDIO LINK - Surround audio outputs (digital) – (RJ45)

HEADPHONE - Headphone connection

Jack 3,5 mm – Headphones 32–200 Ohm

HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3

HDMI – Digital Video IN, Audio IN

AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue) L/R – (

Jack 3,5 mm)

RS-232C - Serial interface

– (RJ12)

AV - Micro AV socket

Audio/Video IN with Scart adapter:

Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)

CVBS (VHS/8 mm)

RGB

L/R

Audio/Video IN with VGA adapter:

PC/STB video signal

Component (YPbPr)

L/R

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 1 (standard V1.3)

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 2 (standard V1.3)

HDMI 4 - HDMI input 4

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

Connections rear side of the device (bild 3.55/bild 3.48/bild 3.40)

Availability varies based on the device type (see Chapter Technical data - Equipment features for your TV-set).

The adaptor is available as an accessory from your dealer.

Before connecting an external device, please note that, the individual HDMI-ports can work with a range of different signals, see chapter Technical data, section bild

(across sets) – Signals via HDMI/AV (PC IN).



Technical data

bild 3

Loewe bild

User handbook

177

Technical data (bild 3.55/bild 3.48/bild 3.40/bild 3.40 FHD)

Changes of technical data and design of the equipment reserved.

Loewe device type: bild 3.55 bild 3.48 bild 3.40 bild 3.40

Part number: 56460xxx 56459xxx 56458xxx 56455xxx

EU energy efficiency class: see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/support

Screen diagonal: 140 cm / 55 inch 122 cm / 48 inch 102 cm / 40 inch 102 cm / 40 inch

Power consumption On-Mode (max.)

(Audio output 1/8 of the maximum value): 226 W 162 W

123 W 102 W

Power consumption On-Mode (home)

Annual energy consumption

see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/support

Power consumption quick start mode: 70,0 W 50,0 W 50,0 W 50,0 W

Power consumption Standby Mode:

Power consumption when set is switched off:

0,38 W

0 W

0,38 W

0 W

0,38 W

0 W

0,38 W

0 W

Resolution: Ultra HD 3840 x 2160 px

Full HD 1920 x 1080 px

Display technology / Picture format: LCD with Edge-LED-Backlight / 16:9

Device dimensions without stand (W x H x D):

Device dimensions with stand

(W x H x D):

123,0 x 75,4 x 5,5 cm

123,0 x 78,1 x 32,0 cm

107,8 x 67,0 x 5,5 cm

107,8 x 69,8 x 25,0 cm

91,0 x 57,6 x 5,5 cm

91,0 x 60,4 x 25,0 cm

91,0 x 57,4 x 5,5 cm

91,0 x 60,4 x 25,0 cm

Weight without stand (approximate):

Weight with stand

(approximate):

27,2 kg

30,6 kg

19,0 kg

21,3 kg

15,2 kg

17,5 kg

15,1 kg

17,4 kg

Ambient temperature: 5° C – 35° C

Relative humidity (non-condensing): 20 – 80%

Air pressure: 800 – 1114 hPa (0 – 2000 m above sea level)

Chassis designation: SL410 / SL415

SL 310F

Power supply: 220 V – 240 V/50–60 Hz

Tuner: terr./cable:

Satellite:

VHF/Hyperband/UHF

4 levels: 13/18V/22kHz / 16 levels: DiSEqC 1.0 / single-cable system: EN 50494

Range: terr./cable:

Satellite:

Terr./cable: 45 MHz up to 860 MHz

Satellite: 950 MHz up to 2150 MHz

Channel storage locations incl. AV and radio: 6000

TV standards: analogue:

digital:

B/G, I, L, D/K, M, N

DVB-T/T2, DVB-C, DVB-S/S2 (UHD via DVB to max. 60 Hz)

B/G, I, L, D/K, M, N

DVB-T/T2/C/S/S2

Colour standards: SECAM, PAL, NTSC, NTSC-V, PAL-V (60 Hz)

Sound formats: analogue (FM):

analogue (NICAM):

digital (MPEG):

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel, PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital Pulse, Dolby MS11

(Dolby Virtual Speaker, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby TrueHD)

Audio output power (sine / music): 2 x 20W / 2 x 40W 2 x 10W / 2 x 20W

Acoustic speaker concept: Speaker Box

Teletext: TOP / FLOF / HiText (Level 2.5)

Page memory: 2000

LAN: Standards supported: 10 Mbit/sec Ethernet (10Base-T) / 100 Mbit/sec Fast Ethernet (100Base-T)

WLAN: Standards supported:

Power/Frequency range:

Types of encoding that are supported:

IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n, 802.11ac

Maximum power <100 mW at 2400-2483,5 MHz and 5150-5725 MHz

WEP 64 and 128 Bit (ASCII and HEX), WPA PSK, WPA2 AES

Bluetooth: Power/Frequency range:

Bluetooth protocols

Maximum power <10 mW at 2,4 GHz

A2DP SRC, A2DP SNK, HID

Home networking standard: Universal Plug and Play Audio / Video (UPnP AV)

File formats supported

: Pictures:

Audio:

Video:

JPEG, JPEG progressive (max. resolution 3840x2160), PNG

MP3, M4A (AAC LC), WMA (without lossless), FLAC, WAV (PCM), Ogg Vorbis

AVI (MPEG-1/2, XviD, Dolby Digital, MP3), WMV (WMV9, VC-1, WMA9, WMA Pro),

MP4 (XviD, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC), MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC),

MKV (H.265/HEVC, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Dolby Digital), FLV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.263,

MP3, AAC LC),

MPG (MPEG-1, MPEG Audio), TS/PS (MPEG-2, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG2

Audio,

Dolby Digital

)

, VOB (MPEG-2, MPEG2 Audio, Dolby Digital)

H.264/MPEG-4 AVC upto Profil High (Level 4.2)

H.264/H.265 compatible with HDR10/HLG for SL4xx TV sets

The energy consumption per year is calculated on the basis of a daily four-hour operation of the TV set on 365 days. The actual energy consumption will depend on the way the TV

set is used. On-Mode (home) values less than 100 W must have decimal places (,0).

Supplied mounting option: Table Stand.

For the playability of the individual formats no guarantee can be given.

Only for device type bild 3.55 dal / bild 3.48 dal / bild 3.40 dal.



Technical data

bild 3

Loewe bild

User handbook

178



Technical data

bild 3

Equipment features (bild 3.55 dal/bild 3.48 dal/bild 3.40 dal)

Changes to the equipment features and the set design reserved.

Loewe set type: bild 3.55 dal

bild 3.48 dal

bild 3.40 dal

Image

(Image)

Ultra HD Super Resolution Scaling / Image+ Active /

24 p motion picture display

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

3D technology / Active Glasses 3D

{

— / — — / —

Auto-Dimming Video (VDB+) / Auto-Dimming Raum (OPC) / Home Mode:

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Digital

(Television Standards)

DVB-T2

/ DVB-C / DVB-S2 / Multistandard (analogue) / Dual Channel

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / z

PEG / MPEG2 / MPEG4 (H.264) /

HEVC (H.265) / integrated HDTV reception

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / z

DVB radio / Unicable (acc. EN 50494)

z / zz / zz / z

Sound

(Audio)

Integrated 5.1 AV-Receiver / Digital audio link

z / zz / zz / z

Dolby Digital / Dolby Digital Plus / DTS

z / z /

—

z / z /

—

z / z /

—

Individual bass and treble control / Loudness

z / zz / zz / z

Automatic Volume Control (AVC)

zzz

Audio out available: variable / fixed / Subwoofer

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Assist

(Operation)

Loewe os / Home Screen (incl. favorites)

z / zz / zz / z

HDR (Dolby Vision / HDR 10 / HLG)

—

/ z / z

—

/ z / z

—

/ z / z

Electronic Program Guide (SI-data)

zzz

MediaText (HbbTV) / Video text (Level 2.5)

z / zz / zz / z

Menu languages

/ Context Related Help

z / zz / zz / z

Parental Lock / Automatic turn-off / Timer

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Instant Channel Zapping / Quick Start Mode

z / zz / zz / z

Digital Link HD (CEC)

zzz

PIP (AV)

/ Full PIP / Split screen TV : Video text

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

MediaUpdate (via USB / Internet)

z / zz / zz / z

Hotel Mode

zzz

Media

(Multimedia functions)

DR+ / storage capacity in GB / USB recording

— / —

/ z

— / —

/ z

— / —

/ z

DR+ Streaming server / client / Follow-Me

— /

z / z

— /

z / z

— /

z / z

Multi Recording

/ Mobile Recording

{

{{

{

Multiroom Streaming

{{{

Photo player / Music player / Video player (via Home network and USB incl.

Ultra HD)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Digital Media Renderer (incl. Ultra HD) / Bluetooth Music Player

z / {z / {z / {

Internet Apps (MediaNet) / Internet Browser / Internet Radio (incl. search

function)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Connectivity

(Connectors)

HDMI with HDCP 2.2

4 (4x UHD, 1x ARC) 4 (4x UHD, 1x ARC) 4 (4x UHD, 1x ARC)

LAN network connection / integrated WLAN

z / zz / zz / z

Common Interface / CI Plus 1.3 certified

2 / z 2 / z 2 / z

Home Control Interface IP / Home Control Interface RS232 /

IR-Link

/ Motor control

z / z / z /

—

z / z / z /

—

z / z / z /

—

Digital Audiolink (DAL)

/ Digital Audio-Out (coaxial)

z / zz / zz / z

Analog Audio-Out (L/R) / Headphone (jack 3.5 mm)

z / zz / zz / z

Micro-AV

(Component / Scart / VGA)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

USB / Bluetooth Connection

3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z

VESA mounting points

zzz

z= included/installed {= upgradeable/optional

The reception of DVB-T2 programs is possible in selected countries.

Reception of digital channels may be limited by individual regulations from the respective

broadcaster/provider. UK models are Freeview HD compliant.

D-GB-F-I-E-NL-CZ-GR-PL-H-FIN-SLO-SK-TR-S-DK-P-RUS-N.

AV-PIP is only available in combination with DVB-T/C/S.

CI Plus is backwards compatible with CI. Functionality is dependent on module availability

from the supplier.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter and selected devices (RC5, 36 kHz), to be

ordered separately.

Loewe System 5.1 Out, Stereo Out, Subwoofer Out.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter, to be ordered separately.

Available via optional upgrade feature.

Loewe bild

User handbook

179

Equipment features (bild 3.55/bild 3.48/bild 3.40/bild 3.40 FHD)

Changes to the equipment features and the set design reserved.

Loewe set type: bild 3.55

bild 3.48

bild 3.40

bild 3.40 FHD

Image

(Image)

Ultra HD Super Resolution Scaling / Image+ Active /

24 p motion picture display

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

—

/ z / z

3D technology / Active Glasses 3D

{

— / — — / — — / —

Auto-Dimming Video (VDB+) /

Auto-Dimming Raum (OPC) / Home Mode:

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

—

/ z / z

Digital

(Television Standards)

DVB-T2

/ DVB-C / DVB-S2 /

Multistandard (analogue) / Dual Channel

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / z

PEG / MPEG2 / MPEG4 (H.264) /

HEVC (H.265) / integrated HDTV reception

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / z

DVB radio / Unicable (acc. EN 50494)

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Sound

(Audio)

Integrated 5.1 AV-Receiver / Digital audio link

— / — — / — — / — — / —

Dolby Digital / Dolby Digital Plus / DTS

z /

— / —

z /

— / —

z /

— / —

/ — / —

Individual bass and treble control / Loudness

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Automatic Volume Control (AVC)

zzzz

Audio out available: variable / fixed / Subwoofer

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Assist

(Operation)

Loewe os / Home Screen (incl. favorites)

z / zz / zz / zz / z

HDR (Dolby Vision / HDR 10 / HLG)

—

/ z / z

—

/ z / z

—

/ z / z

— / — / —

Electronic Program Guide (SI-data)

zzzz

MediaText (HbbTV) / Video text (Level 2.5)

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Menu languages

/ Context Related Help

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Parental Lock / Automatic turn-off / Timer

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Instant Channel Zapping / Quick Start Mode

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Digital Link HD (CEC)

zzzz

PIP (AV)

/ Full PIP / Split screen TV : Video text

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

MediaUpdate (via USB / Internet)

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Hotel Mode

zzzz

Media

(Multimedia functions)

DR+ / storage capacity in GB / USB recording

— / —

/ z

— / —

/ z

— / —

/ z

— / —

/ z

DR+ Streaming server / client / Follow-Me

— /

z / z

— /

z / z

— /

z / z

— /

z / z

Multi Recording

/ Mobile Recording

{

{{

{

Multiroom Streaming

{{{{

Photo player / Music player / Video player (via Home network

and USB incl. Ultra HD)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Digital Media Renderer (incl. Ultra HD) / Bluetooth Music Player

z / {z / {z / {z / {

Internet Apps (MediaNet) / Internet Browser / Internet Radio

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Connectivity

(Connectors)

HDMI with HDCP 2.2

4 (4x UHD, 1x ARC) 4 (4x UHD, 1x ARC) 4 (4x UHD, 1x ARC) 3 (1x ARC)

LAN network connection / integrated WLAN

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Common Interface / CI Plus 1.3 certified

2 / z 2 / z 2 / z 2 / z

Home Control Interface IP / Home Control Interface RS232 /

IR-Link

/ Motor control

z / z / z /

—

z / z / z /

—

z / z / z /

—

z / z / z /

—

Digital Audiolink (DAL)

/ Digital Audio-Out (coaxial)

— /

—

/ z

Analog Audio-Out (L/R) / Headphone (jack 3.5 mm)

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Micro-AV

(Component / Scart / VGA)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

USB / Bluetooth Connection

3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z

VESA mounting points

zzzz

z= included/installed {= upgradeable/optional

The reception of DVB-T2 programs is possible in selected countries.

Reception of digital channels may be limited by individual regulations from the respective

broadcaster/provider. UK models are Freeview HD compliant.

D-GB-F-I-E-NL-CZ-GR-PL-H-FIN-SLO-SK-TR-S-DK-P-RUS-N.

AV-PIP is only available in combination with DVB-T/C/S.

CI Plus is backwards compatible with CI. Functionality is dependent on module availability

from the supplier.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter and selected devices (RC5, 36 kHz), to be

ordered separately.

Loewe System 5.1 Out, Stereo Out, Subwoofer Out.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter, to be ordered separately.

Available via optional upgrade feature.



Technical data

bild 3

Loewe bild

User handbook

180

Position and function of the connections (bild 2.55 oled)

Mains switch

Slot for Kensington lock

AC IN - Mains connection

Mains socket – 220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz

LAN - Network connection

RJ-45 – Ethernet / Fast Ethernet

HDMI 1 ARC - HDMI input 1

(with Audio Return Channel)

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN/OUT

HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

ANT TV - Antenna/cable analogue /

DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C

IEC socket – 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80mA

ANT SAT 1 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

Without function

SPDIF OUT - Audio output (digital)

Cinch socket (orange)

USB 3.0 - USB connection

USB type A – USB 3.0 (max. 900mA)

HEADPHONE - Headphone connection

Jack 3,5 mm – Headphones 32–200 Ohm

HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue) L/R – (

Jack 3,5 mm)

RS-232C - Serial interface

– (RJ12)

AV - Micro AV socket

Audio/Video IN with Scart adapter:

Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)

CVBS (VHS/8 mm)

RGB

L/R

Audio/Video IN with VGA adapter:

PC/STB video signal

PC formats (RGB, H, V)

Component (YPbPr)

L/R

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 1 (standard V1.3)

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 2 (standard V1.3)

HDMI 4 - HDMI input 4

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

The adaptor is available as an accessory from your dealer.

Before connecting an external device, please note that, the individual HDMI-ports can work with a range of different signals, see chapter Technical data, section bild

(across sets) – Signals via HDMI/AV (PC IN).

2 1



Technical data

bild 3

Loewe bild

User handbook

181



Technical data

bild 2

Position and function of the connections (

bild 2.49 / bild 2.43

)

Mains switch

AC IN - Mains connection

Mains socket – 220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz

Slot for Kensington lock

LAN - Network connection

RJ-45 – Ethernet / Fast Ethernet

HDMI 1 ARC - HDMI input 1

(with Audio Return Channel)

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN/OUT

HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

ANT TV - Antenna/cable analogue /

DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C

IEC socket – 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80mA

ANT SAT 1 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

Without function

SPDIF OUT - Audio output (digital)

Cinch socket (orange)

USB 3.0 - USB connection

USB type A – USB 3.0 (max. 900mA)

HEADPHONE - Headphone connection

Jack 3,5 mm – Headphones 32–200 Ohm

HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue) L/R – (

Jack 3,5 mm)

RS-232C - Serial interface

– (RJ12)

AV - Micro AV socket

Audio/Video IN with Scart adapter:

Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)

CVBS (VHS/8 mm)

RGB

L/R

Audio/Video IN with VGA adapter:

PC/STB video signal

PC formats (RGB, H, V)

Component (YPbPr)

L/R

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 1 (standard V1.3)

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 2 (standard V1.3)

HDMI 4 - HDMI input 4

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

The adaptor is available as an accessory from your dealer.

Before connecting an external device, please note that, the individual HDMI-ports can work with a range of different signals, see chapter Technical data, section bild

(across sets) – Signals via HDMI/AV (PC IN).

3 2

Loewe bild

User handbook

182



Technical data

bild 2

Technical data (bild 2.55 oled/bild 2.49/bild 2.43)

Changes of technical data and design of the equipment reserved.

Loewe device type: bild 2.55 oled

bild 2.49

bild 2.43

Part number: 57461x71 57419x71 57420x71

EU energy efficiency class: see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/support

Screen diagonal: 139 cm/55 inch 126 cm/49 inch 108 cm/43 inch

Power consumption On-Mode (max.)

(Audio output 1/8 of the maximum value):

348 W 185 W 149 W

Power consumption On-Mode (home)

Annual energy consumption

see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/support

Power consumption quick start mode: 70,0 W 55,0 W 55,0 W

Power consumption Standby Mode: 0,41 W 0,31 W 0,37 W

Power consumption when set is switched off: 0 W 0 W 0 W

Picture format / Resolution: 16:9 / Ultra HD 3840 x 2160 px

Display technology: OLED (WRGB Pixel) LCD with Edge-LED-Backlight

Device dimensions without stand (W

x H x D):

122,8 x 73,9 x 6,7 cm 111,9 x 68,1 x 7,9 cm 96,3 x 59,4 x 7,9 cm

Device dimensions with stand

x H x D):

122,8 x 78,8 x 27,0 cm 111,9 x 70,4 x 25,0 cm 96,3 x 61,6 x 25,0 cm

Weight without stand (approximate):

23,2 kg 20,5 kg 15,5 kg

Weight with stand

(approximate):

27,9 kg 23,8 kg 18,7 kg

Ambient temperature: 5° C – 35° C

Relative humidity (non-condensing): 20 – 80%

Air pressure: 800 – 1114 hPa (0 – 2000 m above sea level)

Chassis designation: SL402 SL402 SL402

Power supply: 220 V – 240 V/50–60 Hz

Tuner: terr./cable:

Satellite:

VHF/Hyperband/UHF

4 levels: 13/18V/22kHz / 16 levels: DiSEqC 1.0 / single-cable system: EN 50494

Range: terr./cable:

Satellite:

Terr./cable: 45 MHz up to 860 MHz

Satellite: 950 MHz up to 2150 MHz

Channel storage locations incl. AV and radio: 6000

TV standards: analogue:

digital:

B/G, I, L, D/K, M, N

DVB-T/T2, DVB-C, DVB-S/S2 (UHD via DVB to max. 60 Hz)

Colour standards: SECAM, PAL, NTSC, NTSC-V, PAL-V (60 Hz)

Sound formats: analogue (FM):

analogue (NICAM):

digital (MPEG):

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel, PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital Pulse, Dolby MS11

Audio output power (sine / music): 2 x 10W / 2 x 20W

Acoustic speaker concept: Speaker Box

Teletext: TOP / FLOF / HiText (Level 2.5)

Page memory: 2000

LAN: Standards supported: 10 Mbit/sec Ethernet (10Base-T) / 100 Mbit/sec Fast Ethernet (100Base-T)

WLAN: Standards supported:

Power/Frequency range:

Types of encoding that are supported:

IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n, 802.11ac

Maximum power <100 mW at 2400-2483,5 MHz and 5150-5725 MHz

WEP 64 and 128 Bit (ASCII and HEX), WPA PSK, WPA2 AES

Bluetooth: Power/Frequency range:

Bluetooth protocols

Maximum power <10 mW at 2,4 GHz

A2DP SRC, A2DP SNK, HID

Home networking standard: Universal Plug and Play Audio / Video (UPnP AV)

File formats supported

: Pictures:

Audio:

Video:

JPEG, JPEG progressive (max. resolution 3840x2160), PNG

MP3, M4A (AAC LC), WMA (without lossless), FLAC, WAV (PCM), Ogg Vorbis

AVI (MPEG-1/2, XviD, Dolby Digital, MP3), WMV (WMV9, VC-1, WMA9, WMA Pro),

MP4 (XviD, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC), MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC),

MKV (H.265/HEVC, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Dolby Digital), FLV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.263, MP3,

AAC LC),

MPG (MPEG-1, MPEG Audio), TS/PS (MPEG-2, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG2 Audio,

Dolby

Digital

)

, VOB (MPEG-2, MPEG2 Audio, Dolby Digital)

H.264/MPEG-4 AVC upto Profil High (Level 4.2)

H.264/H.265 compatible to Dolby Vision/HDR10/HLG (bild 2.55 oled)

H.264/H.265 compatible to HDR10/HLG (bild 2.49/bild 2.43)

The energy consumption per year is calculated on the basis of a daily four-hour operation

of the TV set on 365 days. The actual energy consumption will depend on the way the

TV set is used. On-Mode (home) values less than 100 W must have decimal places (,0).

Supplied mounting option: Table Stand.

For the playability of the individual formats no guarantee can be given.

The width of the TV set can be increased by up to 4mm depending on the type of TV

set in the area of the side-mounted Loewe clip.

Loewe bild

User handbook

183



Technical data

bild 2

Equipment features (bild 2.55 oled/bild 2.49/bild 2.43)

Changes to the equipment features and the set design reserved.

Loewe set type: bild 2.55 oled bild 2.49 bild 2.43

Image

(Image)

Ultra HD Super Resolution Scaling / Image+ Active /

24 p motion picture display

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

3D technology / Active Glasses 3D

— / — — / — — / —

Auto-Dimming Video (VDB+) /

Auto-Dimming Raum (OPC) / Home Mode:

—

/ z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Digital

(Television Standards)

DVB-T2

/ DVB-C / DVB-S2 /

Multistandard (analogue) / Dual Channel

z / z / z / z /

—

z / z / z / z /

—

z / z / z / z /

—

PEG / MPEG2 / MPEG4 (H.264) /

HEVC (H.265) / integrated HDTV reception

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / z

DVB radio / Unicable (acc. EN 50494)

z / zz / zz / z

Sound

(Audio)

Integrated 5.1 AV-Receiver / Digital audio link

— / — — / — — / —

Dolby Digital / Dolby Digital Plus / DTS

z /

— / —

z /

— / —

z /

— / —

Individual bass and treble control / Loudness

z / zz / zz / z

Automatic Volume Control (AVC)

zzz

Audio out available: variable / fixed / Subwoofer

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Assist

(Operation)

Loewe os / Home Screen (incl. favorites)

z / zz / zz / z

HDR (Dolby Vision / HDR 10 / HLG)

z / z / z

—

/ z / z

—

/ z / z

Electronic Program Guide (SI-data)

zzz

MediaText (HbbTV) / Video text (Level 2.5)

z / zz / zz / z

Menu languages

/ Context Related Help

z / zz / zz / z

Parental Lock / Automatic turn-off / Timer

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Instant Channel Zapping / Quick Start Mode

—

/ z

—

/ z

—

/ z

Digital Link HD (CEC)

zzz

PIP (AV)

/ Full PIP / Split screen TV : Video text

z /

—

/ zz /

—

/ zz /

—

/ z

MediaUpdate (via USB / Internet)

z / zz / zz / z

Hotel Mode

zzz

Media

(Multimedia functions)

DR+ / Speicherkapazität in GB / USB-Recording

— / —

/ z

— / —

/ z

— / —

/ z

DR+ Streaming Server / Client / Follow-Me

— /

z / z

— /

z / z

—

/ z / z

Multi Recording / Mobile Recording / Multiroom-Streaming

—

/ z / z

—

/ z / z

—

/ z / z

Fotoplayer / Musikplayer / Videoplayer (über Heimnetzwerk und USB, inkl. Ultra HD)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Digital Media Renderer (inkl. Ultra HD) / Bluetooth Music Player

z / zz / zz / z

Internetapps (MediaNet) / Internetbrowser / Internetradio (inkl. Suchfunktion)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Connectivity

(Connectors)

HDMI with HDCP 2.2

4 (1 x 2.0a, 1 x ARC)

4 (4 x UHD, 1 x ARC)

LAN network connection / integrated WLAN

z / zz / zz / z

Common Interface / CI Plus 1.3 certified

2 / z 2 / z 2 / z

Home Control Interface IP / Home Control Interface RS232 / IR-Link

/ Motor control

z / z / z /

—

z / z / z /

—

z / z / z /

—

Digital Audiolink (DAL)

/ Digital Audio-Out (coaxial)

—

/ z

—

/ z

—

/ z

Analog Audio-Out (L/R) / Headphone (jack 3.5 mm)

z / zz / zz / z

Micro-AV

(Component / Scart / VGA)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

USB / Bluetooth Connection

3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z

VESA mounting points

zzz

z= included/installed {= upgradeable/optional

The reception of DVB-T2 programs is possible in selected countries.

Reception of digital channels may be limited by individual regulations from the respective

broadcaster/provider. UK models are Freeview HD compliant.

D-GB-F-I-E-NL-CZ-GR-PL-H-FIN-SLO-SK-TR-S-DK-P-RUS-N.

AV-PIP is only available in combination with DVB-T/C/S.

CI Plus is backwards compatible with CI. Functionality is dependent on module availability

from the supplier.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter and selected devices (RC5, 36 kHz), to be

ordered separately.

Loewe System 5.1 Out, Stereo Out, Subwoofer Out.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter, to be ordered separately.

Loewe bild

User handbook

184

Only available for device type bild 1.65.

The adaptor is available as an accessory from your dealer.

Before connecting an external device, please note that, the individual HDMI-ports can work with a range of different signals, see chapter Technical data, section bild

(across sets) – Signals via HDMI/AV (PC IN).

Mains connection

Power plug – 220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz

LAN - Network connection

RJ-45 – Ethernet / Fast Ethernet

HDMI 1 (ARC) - HDMI input 1

(with Audio Return Channel)

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN/OUT

HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

ANT TV - Antenna/cable analogue /

DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C

IEC socket – 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80mA

ANT SAT 1 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

ANT SAT 2 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 2) DVB-S/S2

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

SPDIF OUT - Audio output (digital)

Cinch socket (orange)

USB 3.0 - USB connection

USB type A – USB 3.0 (max. 1000mA)

Slot for Kensington lock

HEADPHONE - Headphone connection

Jack 3,5 mm – Headphones 32–200 Ohm

HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue) L/R – (Jack 3,5 mm)

RS-232C - Serial interface

– (RJ12)

AV INPUT - Micro AV socket

Audio/Video IN with Scart adapter:

Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)

CVBS (VHS/8 mm)

RGB

L/R

Audio/Video IN with VGA adapter:

PC/STB video signal

Component (YPbPr)

L/R

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 1 (standard V1.3)

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 2 (standard V1.3)

HDMI 4 - HDMI input 4

HDMI – Digital Video IN/Audio IN

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

Connections rear side of the device (bild 1.65/55)



Technical data

bild 1

Loewe bild

User handbook

185

Connections rear side of the device (bild 1.40/32)

AC IN - Mains connection

Mains socket – 220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz

LAN - Network connection

RJ-45 – Ethernet / Fast Ethernet

ANT SAT - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner) DVB-S

F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA

ANT TV - Antenna/cable analogue /

DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C

IEC socket – 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80mA

HDMI 1 (ARC) - HDMI input 1

(with Audio Return Channel)

HDMI – Digital Video IN, Audio IN/OUT

HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2

HDMI – Digital Video IN, Audio IN

SPDIF OUT - Audio output (digital)

Cinch socket (orange)

USB - USB connection

USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)

Slot for Kensington lock

HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3

HDMI – Digital Video IN, Audio IN

USB 3.0 - USB connection

USB type A – USB 3.0 (max. 1000mA)

AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue) L/R – (Jack 3,5 mm)

Headphone connection Jack 3,5 mm – Headphones 32–200 Ohm

RS-232C - Serial interface

– (RJ12)

AV INPUT - Micro AV socket

Audio/Video IN with Scart adapter:

Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)

CVBS (VHS/8 mm)

RGB

L/R

Audio/Video IN with VGA adapter:

PC/STB video signal

Component (YPbPr)

L/R

COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot (standard V1.3)

The adaptor is available as an accessory from your dealer.

Before connecting an external device, please note that, the individual HDMI-ports can work with a range of different signals, see chapter Technical data, section bild

(across sets) – Signals via HDMI/AV (PC IN).

2 1



Technical data

bild 1

Loewe bild

User handbook

186



Technical data

bild 1

Technical data (bild 1.65/bild 1.55/bild 1.40/bild 1.32)

Changes of technical data and design of the equipment reserved.

Loewe device type: bild 1.65 bild 1.55 bild 1.40 bild 1.32

Part number: 56407xxx 56402xxx 56404xxx 56405xxx

EU energy efficiency class: see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/support

Screen diagonal: 165 cm / 65 inch 140 cm / 55 inch 102 cm / 40 inch 81 cm / 32 inch

Power consumption On-Mode (max.)

(Audio output 1/8 of the maximum value): 239W 200 W 98 W 69 W

Power consumption On-Mode (home)

Annual energy consumption

see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/support

Power consumption quick start mode: 70,0 W 65,0 W 25,0 W 25,0 W

Power consumption Standby Mode:

Power consumption when set is switched off:

0,38 W

0 W

0,40 W

0 W

0,38 W

0 W

0,40 W

0 W

Resolution: Ultra HD 3840 x 2160 px Full HD 1920 x 1080 px

Display technology / Picture format: LCD with Edge-LED-Backlight / 16:9

Device dimensions without stand (W x H x D):

Device dimensions with stand

(W x H x D):

145,1 x 87,0 x 6,4 cm

145,1 x 88,6 x 29,0 cm

123,5 x 74,5 x 4,9 cm

123,5 x 75,4 x 27,0 cm

91,4 x 56,5 x 5,4 cm

91,4 x 57,5 x 25,0 cm

73,4 x 46,3 x 5,4 cm

73,4 x 47,4 x 20,0 cm

Weight without stand (approximate):

Weight with stand

(approximate):

32,4 kg

40,3 kg

23,6 kg

28,5 kg

12,9 kg

16,4 kg

7,3 kg

10,5 kg

Ambient temperature: 5° C – 35° C

Relative humidity (non-condensing): 20 – 80%

Air pressure: 800 – 1114 hPa (0 – 2000 m above sea level)

Chassis designation: SL410 SL412 SL302 SL302

Power supply: 220 V – 240 V/50–60 Hz

Tuner: terr./cable:

Satellite:

VHF/Hyperband/UHF

4 levels: 13/18V/22kHz / 16 levels: DiSEqC 1.0 / single-cable system: EN 50494

Range: terr./cable:

Satellite:

Terr./cable: 45 MHz up to 860 MHz

Satellite: 950 MHz up to 2150 MHz

Channel storage locations incl. AV and radio: 6000

TV standards: analogue:

digital:

B/G, I, L, D/K, M, N

DVB-T/T2, DVB-C, DVB-S/S2

(UHD via DVB to max. 60 Hz)

B/G, I, L, D/K, M, N

DVB-T/T2, DVB-C, DVB-S

Colour standards: SECAM, PAL, NTSC, NTSC-V, PAL-V (60 Hz)

Sound formats: analogue (FM):

analogue (NICAM):

digital (MPEG):

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel

Mono, Stereo, Dual channel, PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Pulse, Dolby MS11

Audio output power (sine / music): 2 x 10W / 2 x 20W

Acoustic speaker concept: 2-Way bass reflex

Teletext: TOP / FLOF / HiText (Level 2.5)

Page memory: 2000

LAN: Standards supported: 10 Mbit/sec Ethernet (10Base-T) / 100 Mbit/sec Fast Ethernet (100Base-T)

WLAN: Standards supported:

Power/Frequency range:

Types of encoding that are supported:

IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n, 802.11ac

Maximum power <100 mW at 2400-2483,5 MHz and 5150-5725 MHz

WEP 64 and 128 Bit (ASCII and HEX), WPA PSK, WPA2 AES

Bluetooth: Power/Frequency range:

Bluetooth protocols

Maximum power <10 mW at 2,4 GHz

A2DP SRC, A2DP SNK, HID

File formats supported

: Pictures:

Audio:

Video:

JPEG, JPEG progressive (max. resolution 3840x2160), PNG

MP3, M4A (AAC LC), WMA (without lossless), FLAC, WAV (PCM), Ogg Vorbis

AVI (MPEG-1/2, XviD, Dolby Digital, MP3), WMV (WMV9, VC-1, WMA9, WMA Pro),

MP4 (XviD, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC), MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC),

MKV (H.265/HEVC, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Dolby Digital), FLV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.263,

MP3, AAC LC),

MPG (MPEG-1, MPEG Audio), TS/PS (MPEG-2, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG2

Audio,

Dolby Digital

)

, VOB (MPEG-2, MPEG2 Audio, Dolby Digital)

H.264/MPEG-4 AVC upto Profil High (Level 4.2)

H.264/H.265 compatible with HDR10/HLG for SL4xx TV sets

The energy consumption per year is calculated on the basis of a daily four-hour operation of the TV set on 365 days. The actual energy consumption will depend on the way the TV

set is used. On-Mode (home) values less than 100 W must have decimal places (,0).

Supplied mounting option: Table Stand bild 1.

For the playability of the individual formats no guarantee can be given.

Loewe bild

User handbook

187

Equipment features (bild 1.65/bild 1.55/bild 1.40/bild 1.32)

Changes to the equipment features and the set design reserved.

Loewe set type:

bild 1.65 bild 1.55 bild 1.40 bild 1.32

Image

(Image)

Ultra HD Super Resolution Scaling / Image+ Active / 24 p motion picture display

z / z / zz / z / z

—

/ z / z

—

/ z / z

3D technology / Active Glasses 3D

/ {

— / — — / — — / —

Auto-Dimming Video (VDB+) / Auto-Dimming Raum (OPC) / Home Mode:

z / z / zz /

—

/ z

—

/ z / z

—

/ z / z

Digital

(Television Standards)

DVB-T2

/ DVB-C / DVB-S2 /Multistandard (analogue) / Dual Channel

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z /

—

z / z / z / z /

—

MPEG / MPEG2 / MPEG4 (H.264) / HEVC (H.265) / integrated HDTV reception

z / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / zz / z / z / z / z

DVB radio / Unicable (acc. EN 50494)

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Sound

(Audio)

Integrated 5.1 AV-Receiver / Digital audio link

— / — — / — — / — — / —

Dolby Digital / Dolby Digital Plus / DTS

z /

— / —

z /

— / —

z /

— / —

z /

— / —

Individual bass and treble control / Loudness

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Automatic Volume Control (AVC)

zzzz

Audio out available: variable / fixed / Subwoofer

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Assist

(Operation)

Loewe os / Home Screen (incl. favorites)

z / zz / zz / zz / z

HDR (Dolby Vision / HDR 10 / HLG)

—

——

—

——

—

——

—

Electronic Program Guide (SI-data)

zzzz

MediaText (HbbTV) / Video text (Level 2.5)

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Menu languages

/ Context Related Help

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Parental Lock / Automatic turn-off / Timer

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Instant Channel Zapping / Quick Start Mode

z / zz / z

—

/ z

—

/ z

Digital Link HD (CEC)

zzzz

PIP (AV)

/ Full PIP / Split screen TV : Video text

z / z / zz / z / zz /

—

/ zz /

—

/ z

MediaUpdate (via USB / Internet)

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Hotel Mode

—

Media

(Multimedia functions)

DR+ / storage capacity in GB / USB recording

— / —

/ z

— / —

/ z

— / —

/ z

— / —

/ z

DR+ Streaming server / client / Follow-Me

— /

z / z

— /

z / z

— /

z / z

— /

z / z

Multi Recording

/ Mobile Recording

{

{{

{ —

{

Multiroom Streaming

{{{{

Photo player / Music player / Video player (via Home network and USB incl. Ultra HD)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Digital Media Renderer (incl. Ultra HD) / Bluetooth Music Player

z /

{

z /

{

z /

{

z /

{

Internet Apps (MediaNet) / Internet Browser / Internet Radio (incl. search function)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

Connectivity

(Connectors)

HDMI with HDCP 2.2

4 (4x UHD / 1x ARC) 4 (4x UHD / 1x ARC) 3 (1x ARC) 3 (1x ARC)

LAN network connection / integrated WLAN

z / zz / zz / zz / z

Common Interface / CI Plus 1.3 certified

2 / z 2 / z 1 / z 1 / z

Home Control Interface IP / Home Control Interface RS232 / IR-Link

/ Motor control

z / z / z /

—

z /

— / —

—

z / z / z /

—

z / z / z /

—

Digital Audiolink (DAL)

/ Digital Audio-Out (coaxial)

—

/ z

—

/ z

—

/ z

—

/ z

Analog Audio-Out (L/R) / Headphone (jack 3.5 mm)

z / zz / zz /

—

z /

—

Micro-AV

(Component / Scart / VGA)

z / z / zz / z / zz / z / zz / z / z

USB / Bluetooth Connection

3 (1 x 3.0) / z 3 (1 x 3.0) / z 2 (1x 3.0) / z 2 (1x 3.0) / z

VESA mounting points

zzzz

z= included/installed {= upgradeable/optional

The reception of DVB-T2 programs is possible in selected countries.

Reception of digital channels may be limited by individual regulations from the respective

broadcaster/provider. UK models are Freeview HD compliant.

D-GB-F-I-E-NL-CZ-GR-PL-H-FIN-SLO-SK-TR-S-DK-P-RUS-N.

AV-PIP is only available in combination with DVB-T/C/S.

CI Plus is backwards compatible with CI. Functionality is dependent on module availability

from the supplier.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter and selected devices (RC5, 36 kHz), to be

ordered separately.

Loewe System 5.1 Out, Stereo Out, Subwoofer Out.

Only in conjunction with a corresponding adapter, to be ordered separately.

Available via optional upgrade feature.



Technical data

bild 1

Loewe bild

User handbook

188

Availability varies according to set type (see Technical data - equipment features chapter for your TV set).

On device types with Full-HD-Display (1920x1080 pixels) , UHD-signals (3840x2160 pixels) cannot be displayed.

When displaying UHD signals and HDR at the same time (with colour subsampling 4:4:4) the maximum image repeat frequency on these ports decreases to 30 Hz.

A colour depth is considered Deep Color from a colour depth of 10 bits.

Signals via HDMI/AV (PC IN)

The following tables shows the compatible signals your TV set can display via the HDMI ports (HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4

) or using

an appropriate adapter in the AV (PC IN) port.

Configure the output signal of the device connected to the TV so that it matches one of the signals in the table.

Note that not all signals can be shown on each HDMI socket/AV (PC IN). On TV-set models with Full-HD-Display (1920x1080 Pixels) , UHD-

signals (3840x2160 Pixels) cannot be displayed.

In SL4xx-units, the compatible mode for the HDMI 1-3 port is enabled by default. In HDR-enabled TV-sets, the compatible mode must be

switched off to use HDR (System settings - Connections - HDMI - Compatible mode), also see Chapter System settings, Section

Connections - HDMI.

HDMI 1

LCD-TV-sets

(Chassis SL3xx)

LCD-TV-sets

(Chassis SL4xx)

OLED-TV-sets

(Chassis SL4xx)

Resolution: Image frequency:

640x480 60Hz

zzz

720x480p 60Hz

zzz

720x576p 50Hz

zzz

1280x720p 50 / 60Hz

zzz

1920x1080i 25 / 30Hz

zzz

1920x1080p 24 / 25 / 30Hz

zzz

1920x1080p 50 / 60Hz

zzz

3840x2160p 24 / 25 / 30Hz z

3840x2160p 50 / 60Hz z

Bandwidth: 300Mhz 450Mhz 450Mhz

Resolution/ Image frequency: Sampling rate: Colour depth:

Colour depth:

3840x2160p @ 24 / 25 / 30Hz 4:4:4 8bit 8bit / 10bit / 12 bit 8bit / 10bit / 12 bit

3840x2160p @ 24 / 25 / 30Hz 4:2:2 8bit 8bit 8bit

3840x2160p @ 50 / 60Hz 4:4:4

———

3840x2160p @ 50 / 60Hz 4:2:2

———

3840x2160p @ 50 / 60Hz 4:2:0 8bit 8bit / 10bit / 12 bit 8bit / 10bit / 12 bit

HLG / HDR 10 / Dolby Vision:

—

— / —

/ z

/ —

/ z

/ —

ARC:

zzz

HDMI 2

LCD-TV-sets

(Chassis SL3xx)

LCD-TV-sets

(Chassis SL4xx)

OLED-TV-sets

(Chassis SL4xx)

Resolution: Image frequency:

640x480 60Hz

zzz

720x480p 60Hz

zzz

720x576p 50Hz

zzz

1280x720p 50 / 60Hz

zzz

1920x1080i 25 / 30Hz

zzz

1920x1080p 24 / 25 / 30Hz

zzz

1920x1080p 50 / 60Hz

zzz

3840x2160p 24 / 25 / 30Hz z

3840x2160p 50 / 60Hz z

Bandwidth: 300Mhz 450Mhz 450Mhz

Resolution/ Image frequency: Sampling rate: Colour depth:

Colour depth:

3840x2160p @ 24 / 25 / 30Hz 4:4:4 8bit 8bit / 10bit / 12 bit 8bit / 10bit / 12 bit

3840x2160p @ 24 / 25 / 30Hz 4:2:2 8bit 8bit 8bit

3840x2160p @ 50 / 60Hz 4:4:4

———

3840x2160p @ 50 / 60Hz 4:2:2

———

3840x2160p @ 50 / 60Hz 4:2:0 8bit 8bit / 10bit / 12 bit 8bit / 10bit / 12 bit

HLG / HDR 10 / Dolby Vision:

—

— / —

/ z

/ —

/ z

/ —

ARC:

———



Technical data

bild (across sets)

Loewe bild

User handbook

189

HDMI 3

LCD-TV-sets

(Chassis SL3xx)

LCD-TV-sets

(Chassis SL4xx)

OLED-TV-sets

(Chassis SL4xx)

Resolution: Image frequency:

640x480 60Hz

zzz

720x480p 60Hz

zzz

720x576p 50Hz

zzz

1280x720p 50 / 60Hz

zzz

1920x1080i 25 / 30Hz

zzz

1920x1080p 24 / 25 / 30Hz

zzz

1920x1080p 50 / 60Hz

zzz

3840x2160p 24 / 25 / 30Hz z

3840x2160p 50 / 60Hz z

Bandwidth: 300Mhz 300Mhz 300Mhz

Resolution/ Image frequency: Sampling rate: Colour depth:

Colour depth:

3840x2160p @ 24 / 25 / 30Hz 4:4:4 8bit 8bit 8bit

3840x2160p @ 24 / 25 / 30Hz 4:2:2 8bit 8bit 8bit

3840x2160p @ 50 / 60Hz 4:4:4

———

3840x2160p @ 50 / 60Hz 4:2:2

———

3840x2160p @ 50 / 60Hz 4:2:0 8bit 8bit 8bit

HLG / HDR 10 / Dolby Vision:

—

— / — —

— / —

ARC:

———

HDMI 4

LCD-TV-sets

(Chassis SL3xx)

LCD-TV-sets

(Chassis SL4xx)

OLED-TV-sets

(Chassis SL4xx)

Resolution: Image frequency:

640x480 60Hz

zzz

720x480p 60Hz

zzz

720x576p 50Hz

zzz

1280x720p 50 / 60Hz

zzz

1920x1080i 25 / 30Hz

zzz

1920x1080p 24 / 25 / 30Hz

zzz

1920x1080p 50 / 60Hz

zzz

3840x2160p 24 / 25 / 30Hz z

3840x2160p 50 / 60Hz z

Bandwidth: 300Mhz 300Mhz 600Mhz

Resolution/ Image frequency: Sampling rate: Colour depth:

Colour depth:

3840x2160p @ 24 / 25 / 30Hz 4:4:4 8bit 8bit 8bit / 10bit / 12 bit

3840x2160p @ 24 / 25 / 30Hz 4:2:2 8bit 8bit 8bit

3840x2160p @ 50 / 60Hz 4:4:4

——

8bit

3840x2160p @ 50 / 60Hz 4:2:2

——

8bit

3840x2160p @ 50 / 60Hz 4:2:0 8bit 8bit 8bit / 10bit / 12 bit

HLG / HDR 10 / Dolby Vision:

—

— / — —

— / —

/ z

ARC:

———



Technical data

bild (across sets)

Availability varies according to set type (see Technical data - equipment features chapter for your TV set).

On device types with Full-HD-Display (1920x1080 pixels) , UHD-signals (3840x2160 pixels) cannot be displayed.

When displaying UHD signals and HDR at the same time (with colour subsampling 4:4:4) the maximum image repeat frequency on these ports decreases to 30 Hz.

A colour depth is considered Deep Color from a colour depth of 10 bits.

Loewe bild

User handbook

190

HDMI 1-4 Compatible mode

LCD-TV-sets

(Chassis SL3xx)

LCD-TV-sets

(Chassis SL4xx)

OLED-TV-sets

(Chassis SL4xx)

Resolution: Image frequency:

640x480 60Hz

—

720x480p 60Hz

—

720x576p 50Hz

—

1280x720p 50 / 60Hz

—

1920x1080i 25 / 30Hz

—

1920x1080p 24 / 25 / 30Hz

—

1920x1080p 50 / 60Hz

—

3840x2160p 24 / 25 / 30Hz

—

3840x2160p 50 / 60Hz

———

Bandwidth:

—

300Mhz 300Mhz

Resolution/ Image frequency: Sampling rate: Colour depth:

Colour depth:

3840x2160p @ 24 / 25 / 30Hz 4:4:4

—

8bit 8bit

3840x2160p @ 24 / 25 / 30Hz 4:2:2

—

8bit 8bit

3840x2160p @ 50 / 60Hz 4:4:4

———

3840x2160p @ 50 / 60Hz 4:2:2

——

—

3840x2160p @ 50 / 60Hz 4:2:0

———

HLG / HDR 10 / Dolby Vision:

—

— / — —

— / —

AV (PC IN)

LCD-TV-sets

(Chassis SL3xx)

LCD-TV-sets

(Chassis SL4xx)

OLED-TV-sets

(Chassis SL4xx)

Resolution: Image frequency:

640x480 60Hz

zzz

800x600 60Hz

zzz

1024x768 60Hz

zzz

1280x1024 60Hz

zzz

720x480i 60Hz

zzz

720x480p 60Hz

zzz

720x576i 50Hz

zzz

720x576p 50Hz

zzz

1360x768p 60Hz

zzz

1280x720p 50 / 60Hz

zzz

1920x1080i 50 / 60Hz

zzz

1920x1080p 24 / 25 / 30Hz

zzz

1920x1080p 50 / 60Hz

zzz



Technical data

bild (across sets)

No Compatible mode possible

With VGA-Adapter to AV connection.

Availability varies according to set type (see Technical data - equipment features chapter for your TV set).

A colour depth is considered Deep Color from a colour depth of 10 bits.

Loewe bild

User handbook

191

Signal input groups

In your TV set the signals are sorted in various signal input groups according to their source. In addition to the source, the type of signal is

also distinguished.

For each signal input group, there are individual values for the picture settings.

Signal group name

Signal source/Signal type

SD Analog

Cable analogue, interfaces AV, AVS, PC IN

(SD)

SD Digital

DVB (SD), DR+ (SD), MPEG-Encoder

SD Media Player

Full screen display of SD videos via USB, Network, VOD and media centre (incl. HbbTV media centre)

SD HDMI

Playback of SD video via HDMI, e.g., DVD player

HD Analog

PC IN

(HD)

HD Digital

DVB (HD), DR+ (HD)

HD Media Player

Full screen display of HD videos via USB, Network, VOD and media centre (incl. HbbTV media centre)

HD HDMI

Playback of HD videos via HDMI, e.g., Blu-Ray player

3D HD

3D playback of HD videos (analogue or digital)

3D SD

3D playback of SD videos (analogue or digital)

3D Media Player

Full screen display of 3D videos (SD/HD) via USB, Network, VOD and media centre (incl. HbbTV media centre)

3D HDMI

Playback of 3D videos via HDMI, e.g., 3D Blu-Ray player

Photo Player

Playback of Photos via USB and network

Browser

Display of Web sites in the Browser (incl. Media apps)

VGA

PC IN

(PC) or HDMI (PC)



Technical data

bild (across sets)

With VGA-Adapter to AV connection.

Availability varies according to set type (see Technical data - equipment features chapter for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

192



Accessories

The following accessories are obtainable from your Loewe dealer.

Mounting options:

A variety of options for mounting your TV set on the floor, table, and

wall are available.

An overview of the available placement options can be found in the

chapter accessories, section placement options.

Loewe Sound systems:

You can perfectly combine your TV set with the Loewe sound com-

ponents.

There are numerous loudspeaker combination options from sub-

woofer, floor-standing loudspeakers and satellite loudspeakers which

are feasible.

Loewe bild 7 cover and Loewe bild 7 Cover Kit (Art.Nr. 72588D80

und 72705S00):

A foldable back cover is available for the Loewe bild 7. The Loewe

bild 7 cover.

By replacing the loudspeaker screen and the cover you can individual-

ize your bild 7 device. The cover kits are available in different colors.

Loewe 3D glasses:

Loewe TV sets with 3D-technology

make it possible for you with the

matching Loewe 3D glasses to have a pure enjoyment of 3D

According to set type

use either the Loewe 3D shutter glasses Active

Glasses 3D (Item number 71133082) or the Passive Glasses 3D

(Item number 71914081).

Loewe Vesa adapter bolts:

The mounting of a Loewe TV set with VESA mounting points

(1

to the

holder according to VESA-Standard obliges the use of the Loewe Vesa

adapter bolts.

The Loewe Vesa adapter bolts must also be used when mounting the

TV set to the motorised Vogel‘s MotionMount wall mount.

If the Loewe Vesa adapter bolts are not used, the TV set may be

damaged.

Please use the matching Vesa adapter bolts for your TV set:

M6x22 (Item number 90473938) Loewe bild 5.32, Loewe bild 1.32

M6x32 (Item number 90473988) all further Loewe bild sets with Vesa

screw points

For further information, see chapter Accessories, section VESA

standard.

Upgrade kits / conversion kits / cables

USB extension (part no. 70167080):

To ensure the accessibility of the USB connections or to be able to

insert USB sticks with a large housing, a USB extension can be con-

nected to the TV set. You can purchase the USB extension (length 50

cm) via your Loewe dealer.

Converter Digital Audiolink/Audiolink (part no. 71600080):

The digital Audiolink/Audiolink convertor allows you to connect your

TV set to audio devices with a 25-pole AUDIO LINK socket.

To connect the convertor you require additionally an Ethernet cable

with RJ45 plugs, category 5e or higher with a length of at least 1m

and maximum 15m.

Adapter Micro-AV / 25cm / Scart (part no. 72150080) set of 3:

The Loewe scart adaptor allows you to extend your TV set by adding

an AV socket to connect, e.g., DVD players or DVD recorders.

Adapter Micro-AV / 25cm / VGA (part no. 72155080) set of 3:

The VGA adaptor enables the connection of a PC monitor or a Set-

top box.

Additionally to the video inputs, the adaptor for VGA is equipped with

a 3.5 mm stereo jack socket for analogue sound.

Converter RJ12 / 5m / IR (part no. 70533082) set of 3:

Converter of RJ12 to an IR transmitter to operate concealed additional

devices of other manufacturers via the Loewe TV set.

Adapter RJ12 / 2,5m / RS232 (part no. 70499082) set of 3:

RJ12 to 9-pin Sub-D connector adaptor cable for the integration of

the TV set in professional home automation systems, such as GIRA,

CRESTRON, AMX.

Feature Upgrade Stick SL3xx/SL4xx (part no. 72341080):

By means of the feature upgrade stick you can expand the functionality

of your Loewe TV set. After any necessary software updates and plug-

ging in the feature upgrade stick, the new features such as Bluetooth

music player (audio streaming), Bluetooth keyboard, etc. are available.

DR+ Feature Disk (part no. 72462W00):

Like the Feature Upgrade Stick SL3xx/SL4xx the DR+ Feature Disk

also expands the functionality of your Loewe TV set. After any neces-

sary software updates and plugging in the DR+ Feature Disk, the new

features are available.

The DR+ Feature Disk represents a recording medium for your TV set.

Just quickly record and view.

All accessories are subject to availability.

Availability varies according to device type (see Technical data - equipment features chapter for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

193

Mounting options (bild 9.65/bild 9.55)



Accessories

TS 9

bild 9.65: 72880x00

bild 9.55: 72885x00

WM 9

bild 9.65: 72870x00

bild 9.55: 72875x00

bild 9.65: 72890x00

bild 9.55: 72895x00

FS 9

Loewe bild

User handbook

194

Mounting options (bild 7.77/bild 7.65/bild 7.55)



Accessories

Loewe Spectral Rack

TS 7

bild 7.77: 72655D00

bild 7.65: 72655D00

bild 7.55: 72630D00

bild 7.77: 72600W00

bild 7.65: 72600W00

bild 7.55: 72600W00

Wall Mount: WMF 7

Wall Mount: WM 7

bild 7.65: 72715D00

bild 7.55: 72710D00

bild 7.77: 72925D00

bild 7.65: 72665D00

bild 7.55: 72620D00

Different versions, sizes and colours

available to match Loewe TV, sound system

and equipment

TSM 7 (motor rotateable)

FSM 7 (motor rotateable)

bild 7.77: included in delivery

bild 7.65: included in delivery

bild 7.55: included in delivery

Loewe bild

User handbook

195

Mounting options (bild 5.65 oled/bild 5.55 oled)

With separate adapter WM Slim / VESA Size 300.



Accessories

Loewe Spectral Rack

TS Plate

bild 5.65: 72660S00

bild 5.55: 72660S00

FS Plate 55_65

bild 5.65: 72835W00

bild 5.65: 72835H00

bild 5.55: 72855W00

bild 5.55: 72855H00

FS 5.65 / FS 5.55

bild 5.65: 72115W80

bild 5.55: 72115W80

Wall Mount WM 67

Wall Mount Isoflex 32-55

bild 5.65: 71391T20

bild 5.55: 71391T20

bild 5.55: 71363B00

Wall Mount Slim / Vesa Size 300

bild 5.65: 72815D00

bild 5.55: 72815D00

Different versions, sizes and colours

available to match Loewe TV, sound system

and equipment

Loewe bild

User handbook

196

Mounting options (bild 5.55/bild 5.48/bild 5.40/bild 5.32)



Accessories

Only in conjunction with appropriate adaptor to be ordered separately.

Only in conjunction with VESA Size 400 adapter.

Only in conjunction with VESA Size 300 adapter.

Only in conjunction with VESA Size 200 adapter.

Only in conjunction with VESA Size 100 adapter.

Loewe Spectral Rack

bild 5.55: 72670S00

bild 5.48: 72660S00

bild 5.40: 72660S00

bild 5.32: 72660S00

FS Plate 55_65

FS Plate 32_49

FS 32_43

bild 5.40: 72435Q00

bild 5.32: 72435Q00

bild 5.55: 71363B00

bild 5.48: 71363B00

bild 5.40: 71363B00

bild 5.32: 71363B00

Wall Mount Isoflex 32-55

Wall Mount WM 67 / WM 68

bild 5.55: 71361T20 (Vesa Size 400)

bild 5.48: 71391T20 (Vesa Size 300)

bild 5.40: 71389T20 (Vesa Size 200)

bild 5.32: 71388T20 (Vesa Size 100)

Wall Mount Slim/

Vesa Size 100/200/300/400

bild 5.55: 72179B80

bild 5.48: 72178B00

bild 5.40: 72178B00

TS Connect 55

TS Connect 40/48 / TS Connect 32

TS Art 55

TS Art 40/48

Different versions, sizes and colours

available to match Loewe TV, sound system

and equipment

bild 5.55: 72111Q80

bild 5.48: included in delivery

bild 5.40: included in delivery

bild 5.32: included in delivery

bild 5.55: included in delivery (WM 67)

bild 5.48: 72115W80 (WM67)

bild 5.40: 72115W80 (WM 67)

bild 5.32: 72345W00 (WM 68)

Loewe bild

User handbook

197



Accessories

Mounting options (bild 4.55)

With separate adapter WM Slim / VESA Size 300.

Loewe Spectral Rack

TS Plate

bild 4.55 oled: 72670S00

FS Plate 55_65

bild 4.55: 72115W80

Wall Mount WM 67

Wall Mount Isoflex 32-55

bild 4.55: 71391T20

bild 4.55: 71363B00

Wall Mount Slim / Vesa Size 300

Different versions, sizes and colours

available to match Loewe TV, sound system

and equipment

bild 4.55: included in delivery (black)

bild 4.55: 72815D00 (dark grey)

Loewe bild

User handbook

198

Mounting options (bild 3.65 oled/bild 3.55 oled/bild 3.49/bild 3.43)



Accessories

Only in connection with VESA size 300 adaptor.

Only in connection with VESA size 200 adaptor.

Loewe Spectral Rack

TS Plate 3.65 oled/3.55 oled

TS Plate 3.43/3.49

bild 3.65 oled: 72670S00

bild 3.55 oled: 72670S00

bild 3.49: 72660S00

bild 3.43: 72660S00

FS Plate 55_65

FS Plate 32_49

FS 32_43

bild 3.43: 72435Q00

bild 3.65 oled: 72115W80

bild 3.55 oled: 72115W80

bild 3.49: 72115W80

bild 3.43: 72115W80

Wall Mount WM 67

Wall Mount Isoflex 32-55

bild 3.65 oled: 71391T20 (Vesa Size 300)

bild 3.55 oled: 71391T20 (Vesa Size 300)

bild 3.49: 71389T20 (Vesa Size 200)

bild 3.43: 71389T20 (Vesa Size 200)

bild 3.55 oled: 71363B00

bild 3.49: 71363B00

bild 3.43: 71363B00

Wall Mount Slim/Vesa Size 200/300

Different versions, sizes and colours

available to match Loewe TV, sound system

and equipment

bild 3.65 oled: included in delivery

bild 3.55 oled: included in delivery

bild 3.49: included in delivery

bild 3.43: included in delivery

Loewe bild

User handbook

199

Mounting options (bild 3.55/bild 3.48/bild 3.40)



Accessories

Only in conjunction with VESA Size 400 adapter.

Only in conjunction with VESA Size 300 adapter.

Only in conjunction with VESA Size 200 adapter.

Loewe Spectral Rack

bild 3.55: 71363B00

bild 3.48: 71363B00

bild 3.40: 71363B00

Wall Mount Isoflex 32-55

Wall Mount WM 67

bild 3.55: 71361T20 (Vesa Size 400)

bild 3.48: 71391T20 (Vesa Size 300)

bild 3.40: 71389T20 (Vesa Size 200)

Table Stand Art 55

Table Stand Art 40/48

bild 3.55: 72115W80

bild 3.48: 72115W80

bild 3.40: 72115W80

Wall Mount Slim/Vesa Size 200/300/400

bild 3.55: 72670S00

bild 3.48: 72660S00

bild 3.40: 72660S00

FS Plate 55_65

FS Plate 32_49

FS 32_43

bild 3.40: 72435Q00

Table Stand Connect 55

Table Stand Connect 40/48

bild 3.55: 72111Q80

bild 3.48: 72101Q80

bild 3.40: 72101Q80

Different versions, sizes and colours

available to match Loewe TV, sound system

and equipment

bild 3.55: included in delivery

bild 3.48: included in delivery

bild 3.40: included in delivery

Loewe bild

User handbook

200



Accessories

Mounting options (bild 2.55 oled/bild 2.49/bild 2.43)

Only in connection with VESA size 300 adaptor.

Only in connection with VESA size 200 adaptor.

Loewe Spectral Rack

TS Plate 3.65 oled/3.55 oled

TS Plate 3.43/3.49

bild 3.65 oled: 72670S00

bild 3.55 oled: 72670S00

bild 3.49: 72660S00

bild 3.43: 72660S00

FS Plate 55_65

FS Plate 32_49

FS 32_43

bild 3.43: 72435Q00

bild 3.65 oled: 72115W80

bild 3.55 oled: 72115W80

bild 3.49: 72115W80

bild 3.43: 72115W80

Wall Mount WM 67

Wall Mount Isoflex 32-55

bild 3.65 oled: 71391T20 (Vesa Size 300)

bild 3.55 oled: 71391T20 (Vesa Size 300)

bild 3.49: 71389T20 (Vesa Size 200)

bild 3.43: 71389T20 (Vesa Size 200)

bild 3.55 oled: 71363B00

bild 3.49: 71363B00

bild 3.43: 71363B00

Wall Mount Slim/Vesa Size 200/300

Different versions, sizes and colours

available to match Loewe TV, sound system

and equipment

bild 3.65 oled: included in delivery

bild 3.55 oled: included in delivery

bild 3.49: included in delivery

bild 3.43: included in delivery

Loewe bild

User handbook

201

Mounting options (bild 1.65/bild 1.55/bild 1.40/bild 1.32)



Accessories

Only in conjunction with appropriate adaptor to be ordered separately.

Only in conjunction with VESA Size 400 adapter.

Only in conjunction with VESA Size 200 adapter.

bild 1.55: 71363B00

bild 1.40: 71363B00

Wall Mount Isoflex 32-55

Wall Mount WM 67

Wall Mount WM 68

Loewe Spectral Rack

FS 32_43

bild 1.40: 72435Q00

bild 1.32: 72435Q00

bild 1.65: 71361T20 (Vesa Size 400)

bild 1.55: 71361T20 (Vesa Size 400)

bild 1.40: 71389T20 (Vesa Size 200)

Table Stand bild

bild 1.65: 72115W80 (WM 67)

bild 1.55: 72115W80 (WM 67)

bild 1.40: 72115W80 (WM 67)

bild 1.32: 72345W00 (WM 68)

Wall Mount Slim/Vesa Size 200/400

bild 1.65: 72670S00

bild 1.55: 72670S00

bild 1.40: 72660S00

bild 1.32: 72660S00

FS Plate 55_65

FS Plate 32_49

bild 1.65: included in delivery

bild 1.55: included in delivery

bild 1.40: included in delivery

bild 1.32: included in delivery

Different versions, sizes and colours

available to match Loewe TV, sound system

and equipment

Loewe bild

User handbook

202

VESA standard

Instructions on using third-party mounting options according

to the VESA standard

Loewe flat screen TV sets are specified for Loewe accessories. When

using third-party mounting options according to the VESA standard,

the manufacturer‘s instructions on the mounting options must be

observed.

Loewe accepts no liability for the use of mounting options from other

manufacturers.

On the rear wall of the TV set, there are four points of screw connections

to receive the VESA adapter bolts.

Mounting a Loewe flat screen TV set to a holder according to the VESA

standard necessarily requires the use of Loewe VESA adaptor bolts.

Otherwise, the TV set may be damaged.

Screw the Loewe VESA adapter bolts with a torque of approx. 4 Nm

into the screwing points of the TV rear panel (see Fig. 1).

First, possibly existing screws in the four screwing points must be

removed.

The Loewe VESA adaptor bolts are used to ensure stability and the

necessary minimum distance of 5 mm between rear wall of the TV

set and VESA holder (see Fig. 2). The VESA holder must not rest on

the rear panel.

When mounting the TV set, always check that all four Loewe VESA

adaptor bolts are used. For each mounting point, only one VESA

adapter bolt may be used. It is inadmissible to screw several VESA

adapter bolts or extend individual adapter bolts.

Measure the hole distance between the screwing points of your TV

set. A hole distance of 400 x 400 mm on the rear of the TV set means

VESA 400 standard.

Thus, a suitable mount bracket must also correspond to the VESA 400

standard. If the VESA standard of your TV set fits the standard of the

desired bracket, the bracket has also to be approved for the weight

and size of the TV set (for weight and TV set size refer to chapter

Technical Data).

Loewe is not responsible for the permissible load-carrying capacity

and the professional fixing of the holder.

Please observe additionally and definitely the points described in the

chapter on safety instructions.

If you use a Vesa mounting options from other manufacturers, you

can order the Vesa adapter bolts M6x32 (No. 90473.988) at your

authorized dealer of Loewe.

VESA standard



Accessories

Only for device types with VESA mounting points (see chapter Technical data - equipment features for your TV set).

Loewe bild

User handbook

203

Environmental

Power consumption

Your TV set is equipped with an eco-standby power supply. In the

standby mode, the power consumption drops to low power (see

chapter Technical data). If you want to save even more energy then

switch the device off with the mains switch. Please also note that

the EPG data (Electronic Programme Guide) is lost under certain

circumstances and possibly programmed timer recordings cannot

be carried out by the TV set.

The TV set will be completely separated from mains only when you

unplug the mains cable.

The power consumed by the TV set during operation depends on the

energy efficiency preset in the initial installation or on the setting in

the system settings.

If you activate the automatic dimming, your TV picture will adapt to

the ambient brightness. This reduces the power consumption of the

TV set.

Automatic shutdown

If the TV is not operated for 4 hours (adjustment of volume,

programme change, etc.) the TV will automatically switch to stand-by

mode to save energy. A prompt to terminate this shutdown process

appears one minute before expiry of the 4 hours.

By default, the automatic shut-off is active in the energy efficiency

mode home mode/personal mode, premium mode.

Automatic shutdown does not occur when using the radio without

screen display (screen off).

Disposal

You have chosen a very high-value and durable product.

Packaging and cardboard

The disposal of the packaging will be gladly handled for you by your

specialist dealer. If you dispose of the packaging yourself, dispose

of the packaging in sorted waste disposal and according to the local

disposal regulations. Place cardboard and paper in the waste paper,

foils and polystyrene in the recyclable waste collection.

The set

Your Loewe product is made with quality materials and

components that are recyclable and reusable.

This symbol means that electrical and electronic

equipment must be disposed of separately from

household waste at the end of their service life.

You can return your old set for free at designated

recycling centres, or at your dealer, if you buy a similar new device.

Additional details about returns (even for non-EU countries) are also

available from your local government. They make an important con-

tribution to the protection of our environment.

The batteries

The original equipment batteries do not contain harm-

ful substances such as cadmium, lead or mercury.

Used batteries should not be disposed of in household

waste. Dispose of used batteries free of charge in the

collection containers set up at the dealer or at the

public collection points.

Licences

Label 1:

Dolby Audio and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.

72765.001

Dolby Audio and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Confidential unpublished works.

bild 1.65 / bild 1.55 / bild 1.40 / bild 1.32

bild 3.55 / bild 3.48 / bild 3.40 / bild 3.40 FHD

bild 2.49 / bild 2.43

bild 3.49 / bild 3.43

bild 3.65 oled / bild 3.55 oled

bild 2.55 oled

bild 5.32

Label 2:

Dolby Audio and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com.

72765.101

Dolby Audio and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Confidential unpublished works.

bild 3.55 dal / bild 3.48 dal /bild 3.40 dal

bild 3.49 dr+ / bild 3.43 dr+

bild 5.55, bild 5.48, bild 5.40, bild 5.32 dr+

Label 3:

Dolby Audio, Dolby Vision, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license from Dolby Labo-

ratories. Confidential unpublished works.

bild 9.65 / bild 9.55

bild 7.77 / bild 7.65 / bild 7.55

bild 5.65 oled / bild 5.55 oled

bild 4.55



Environment / Legal information

Loewe bild

User handbook

204

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under

license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, &

DTS or DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks

of DTS, Inc.

This set contains a software which is partly based on the work of the

Independent JPEG Group.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for

use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/).

This software is provided by the OpenSSL project “as is“ and any

expressed or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the

implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular

purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the OpenSSL project

or its contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental,

special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including,

but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss

of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused

and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or

tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the

use of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young

(eay@cryptsoft.com).

This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.

com).

This product contains software which was developed by third parties

and / or software which is subject to GNU General Public License (GPL)

and/or GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). You can pass on

and modify them in accordance with Version 2 of the GNU General

Public License or optionally every later version which is published by

the Free Software Foundation.

The publication of this programme by Loewe is carried out WITHOUT

ANY GUARANTEE OR SUPPORT, particularly without an implicit

guarantee concerning MARKET MATURITY or the USABILITY FOR A

SPECIFIC PURPOSE. Details can be found in the GNU General Public

License. You can obtain the software via the Loewe customer service

department.

The GNU General Public License can be downloaded from:

http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.



Environment / Legal information

Loewe bild

User handbook

205

The explanations in the following FAQ list are based on the assumption that you have brought all devices in the current software version. This

applies not only to the TV set but also to any peripheral devices or CA modules.

Problem Possible Cause Remedy/notes

The TV set switches off automatically. The automatic switch off switches off the

TV set on energy saving grounds after 4 hours

without operation, as soon as at least a signal

input group on the Home Mode, Premium

Mode or Personal Mode energy efficiency

mode is set.

The use of the automatic switch-off is recom-

mended for energy saving and safety reasons.

From software version 4.3.x or higher, the

automatic switch off can be deactivated in the

menu (System settings ט Control ט

Energy efficiency ט 4h switch-off timer).

The TV set will turn off after about 5 minutes. a) No input signal is present.

b) In radio mode, the screen has been

switched off and the sound volume has

been reduced to 0 or muted because the

sound is played back via an audio-system.

a) If the input signal is missing, the TV set

automatically switches off after 5 minutes

for safety reasons.

b) Report your audio system in the sound

component wizard. This deactivates the TV

speakers and the sound is reproduced

through your audio-system.

All menus appear in the wrong language. The menu language was inadvertently set

incorrectly.

Set menu language:

Press HOME button. Select bottom left menu

item (

)

. In the following list, highlight the

fourth point from the top and change to the

right in the next column. With OK select first

list point. Select language and confirm with OK.

Individual picture and sound settings are not

saved after the set switched to standby.

The TV set has been put into operation in the

Shop Mode energy efficiency mode. This

mode is specifically designed for the presen-

tation in the shop and therefore all settings

are reset at restart.

Change the energy efficiency mode for all

signal input groups to Home Mode or

Premium Mode.

In the menu under System settings ט

Control ט Energy efficiency.

What do the different colours of the LED

display mean?

The meaning of the different colours of the

LED display is described in the chapter

Operating controls on the TV set or

Switching the TV set ON/OFF.

The white LED on the TV set will always turn

on and off (3 seconds on, 1 second off).

This blinking rhythm is an indication of a

hardware defect.

Contact your specialist dealer.

The TV set does not respond to the remote

control any more.

a) You may have accidentally pressed one of

the "other” set buttons (STB, VIDEO,

AUDIO).

b) The remote control is blocked and no

longer sends infra-red codes.

a) Press the TV button on the remote control.

The red LED above the TV button lights up.

b) Remove the batteries from the remote

control and press a few buttons until the

LED via the set button is no longer lit. Wait

about 10 minutes and replace the batteries.

Pay attention to the correct polarity of + and

- when inserting the batteries.

If this is not

successful, contact your specialist dealer.

The buttons on the remote control do not

function as usual or as described.

HbbTV of the respective station uses these

buttons and blocks them.

Deactivate HbbTV mode or set the start-up

behaviour of HbbTV to manual start (System

settings ט Control ט HbbTV).



Troubleshooting

Loewe bild

User handbook

206



Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause Remedy/notes

In the home view, some stations do not dis-

play a station logo but only the standard logo.

Depending on the features of your set, the

station logos for Astra 19.2 ° and Hotbird are

already pre-stored with sets with an inte-

grated hard disk.

With sets without an integrated hard disk, the

station logos are only available for Astra 19.2 °

due to the lower memory space. For other

networks, these must be downloaded from

our service provider from the Gracenote

company via the Internet. For the identifica-

tion of a station, data is used in the DVB data

stream, if these are not unique, the logging of

the logos fails with Gracenote as well as when

the internet connection fails.

Establish an Internet connection with the TV

set to load missing station logos

The station logos are then loaded succes-

sively for the selected TV station list or sta-

tions, which are located as favourites on the

homescreen.

We recommend to permanently connect the

set to the Internet as the logos are thus also

updated at regular intervals.

No sound can be heard on the TV set. a) The TV set has been muted or the sound

volume turned down too far.

A non-existing or deactivated audio device is

registered under System settings



Connections



ט Sound components (for

example HiFi/AV Amplifier).

a) Increase the sound volume by a long press

of the V+ button on your remote control.

This also eliminates any mute switching.

b) Connect the audio device and switch it on.

Change in Sound component wizard back

to TV speakers.

During a feature film, some stations have too

short sound drop-outs.

Some stations will change the transmitted

sound format during the broadcast, for ex-

ample, during an advertising break.

Due to the change in the sound format, short

sound drop-outs occur shortly before the

start and end of an advertising break.

In the case of a TV set, there are occasional

picture and/or sound drop-outs.

Due to small errors at the reception, which

the TV cannot compensate for, there may be

picture drop-outs.

These are, dependent on the strength of the

disturbance, also accompanied by sound

drop-outs.

Occasionally, there is also an asynchrony

between picture and sound, which can be

corrected by a program change.

Interferences in reception are by far the most

frequent cause of picture drop-outs. It is not

always the reception itself is disturbed, such

as, for example, in case of heavy rain in con-

nection with satellite reception.

Also interferences that can affect poorly

shielded antenna cables or antenna sockets

are also part of this.

Also the reception of DVB-T/DVB-T2 contains

many sources of interference.

Your TV set provides a display of signal

strength and signal quality.

To do so, open the menu System settings

ט Stations ט Manual search (incl. an-

tenna status).

There you find three-colour bars for the cur-

rently set station, which provide an indication

of the signal quality for signal-to-noise ratio

(C/N), level (level) and bit error rate (BER).

The respective indicators should all be found

in the green area in order to have sufficient

reserves even in case of weather-related de-

terioration of the reception.

Short-term disturbances are possibly not

registered by these displays and nevertheless

lead to visible effects.

Loewe bild

User handbook

207

Problem Possible Cause Remedy/notes

In the case of TV sets with an integrated hard

disk, this is sometimes not recognized when

switched on

Data errors on the hard disk can lead to this

being not recognized correctly when the TV

set is started. As a rule, the TV performs a

test of the internal hard disk itself.

To prevent damage to the hard disk, always

switch the TV set to standby first, before

disconnecting it from the power supply with

the mains switch or a switched socket strip.

The check of the hard disk can be started

manually via the menu (System settings ט

Control טmore… טHard disksטCheck

integrated one.

If this is not successful, you can via the menu

item Format integrated one completely

delete the internal hard disk.

ATTENTION: Thus all data are lost. A data

recovery is not possible in this case.

Observe the point of the data backup in the

Chapter Recordings, section Digital

Recorder – Delete manager.

General problems on connecting External

devices via an AV Input.

The signal type is set incorrectly. Set the signal type correctly (System set-

tings ט Connections ט AV connecting

settings ט Signal type).

If the Signal Type is set to “Automatic” this

can lead to error recognitions in the case of

non-standardised signals. Then the standard

and signal must be adjusted according to the

specifications in the manual of the external

device.

With Teletext different characters are dis-

played incorrectly.

The wrong character set is set in the System

settings .

Set the correct character set: System set-

tings ט Control ט more ... ט Standard

Teletext ט Character set ט Standard

the corresponding character set.

There are errors on the operation of a CA

module.

Switch the TV set off. Remove the CA module

from the TV set. Wait a few seconds. Reinsert

the CA module. Turn the TV set back on.

The TV set does not accept CI + modules,

although these are detected in another set.

Check whether in the menu System settings

ט Extras ט Integrated features under the

menu item Hardware, PRODUCTION is

listed with CIPlus.

Contact your specialist dealer.

I have two CA modules in the set but never-

theless cannot simultaneously record and

view another program.

The setting for the rights of both CA modules

is incorrect.

Select for the CA modules in the menu

System settings ט Extras ט <Name of

the CA Modules> ט Smartcard Rights the

option Same Rights.

The option must be selected for both CA

modules.

When the set is switched on, a message from

the CA module appears every time that it is

authenticated.

CI+ modules must be authenticated in the TV

set. Both sets thereby exchange the safety

information.

When using a CA module for the first time,

this authentication may take some time de-

pending on the module.

A shorter version of the authentication is

performed at each switch on. This is depend-

ent on the module speed and is hidden by the

start process of the TV device or possibly

leads to a message which can not be pre-

vented.



Troubleshooting

Loewe bild

User handbook

208

Problem Possible Cause Remedy/notes

My TV shows error messages on the use of

CA modules

There are basically two different types of error

messages when operating CA modules:

1) Messages in the centre of the screen:

These messages are determined by the CA

module, the TV making available only one

menu window. The content comes from the

CA module itself and may even be displayed

in a foreign language.

With any questions regarding these mes-

sages, please contact the provider of the CA

module or the network operator.

2) Messages in the upper right corner of the

screen:

These messages are generated by the TV and

generally refer to the reception, for example,

signal quality at the antenna input or to the

communication with the module.

In the case of errors in the communication, a

fault code is usually displayed which helps

your specialist dealer in error identification.

No sound external digital audio Audio-

amplifier.

a) The external digital audio amplifier does

not support the selected sound format

(Dolby Digital, MPEG).

b) TV set and external digital audio amplifier

are not connected to each other.

c) ARC does not work due to missing CEC

communication, or a socket other than

HDMI 1 is used.

a) Set PCM stereo in the sound selection on

the DVD player. For DVB stations on the TV

set, switch the Speech/sound to stereo.

b) Connect

SPDIF OUT from the TV set to a

Digital input of the external digital audio

amplifier and select on this the correspond-

ing input.

Ensure that CEC is activated on the external

device and that the HDMI cable also sup-

ports CEC. Check in the menu System

settings

Connections

Digital Link

Digital Link HD functionality whether

this is also activated. ARC is fundamentally

supported only on HDMI 1.

No sound via ARC from an external digital

audio amplifier.

The external amplifier cannot handle the sup-

plied sound format.

Change the setting to Stereo (PCM) in the

menu System settings ט Connections ט

HDMI ט HDMI1-ARC Sound format.

A programmed Recording has not been ex-

ecuted.

The broadcast was erased by the provider

from the EPG data, for example, on the basis

of a program change.

The station that has been recorded does not

support Automatic time management

(Accurate Recording) .

Only the broadcasters are responsible for

transmitting the data for the Automatic time

management . The availability of the corre-

sponding data cannot be guaranteed.

Program recordings, in cases of doubt, with-

out the automatic time management.

The beginning or end of a programmed re-

cording is missing even though the Automatic

time management (Accurate Recording)

was used.

The broadcasting time of the broadcast has

been shifted and the station from which it was

recorded has not updated the data.

Only the broadcasters are responsible for

transmitting the data for the Automatic time

management. The availability of the corre-

sponding data cannot be guaranteed.



Troubleshooting

Loewe bild

User handbook

209

Problem Possible Cause Remedy/notes

The title of a recorded broadcast in the archive

does not match the actual program.

The title of a broadcast is registered after the

beginning of the broadcast. Relevant for this

is the beginning of the recording. If the record-

ing start is changed manually, the name of the

previous broadcast for the archive is perhaps

used.

If you want to make sure that the recording is

complete, you can set in the menu System

settings ט Control ט more ... ט DR+ ט

Recording the desired Pre- and Post-run

Times each in the range of 0 - 15 minutes.

This time is automatically added before and

after each recording in order to fully receive

the broadcast

Thereby, the broadcast start (20:15) is re-

tained and the title is transferred correctly in

the archive.

The recordings are no longer displayed Recordings according to the CI+ standard can

only be played on the sets on which they were

recorded.

If, for example, because of an error, the hard

disk is no longer detected or is damaged, the

recordings located on it are lost.

A data recovery by specialist companies does

not appear to be cost-effective for this data.

The data backup is the responsibility of the

customer.

A data recovery or a copy service is not of-

fered by Loewe.

Observe the point of the data backup in the

Chapter Recordings, section Digital

Recorder – Delete manager.

Digital Link HD (CEC) does not work. The interfaces HDMI 1, 2 and 3 are set to

compatible mode In the delivery state ex

works.

Change the option of each HDMI connection

according to the parameters of the external

device (System settings ט Connections

ט HDMI ט Compatible Mode).

An amplifier connected to HDMI does not

switch on or off via CEC.

The HDMI cable used does not support CEC

or is too long.

Use an alternative, possibly shorter HDMI

cable.

An external source does not provide the ex-

pected picture quality to HDMI.

Use the HDMI 4 connector to connect HDR

enabled players as this makes available the

widest possible bandwidth for the HDMI sig-

nal.

Device does not work on HDMI port or does

not work properly.

Reset the settings for the HDMI connections

in the menu (System settings ט Extras ט

Reset to factory settings ט HDMI).

Your TV set does not, for the desired IP as-

signment type, Automatic assign an IP ad-

dress or only a Link Local IP address

No DHCP server works in your network and

the set assigns itself a randomly generated,

so called, Zero Conf IP or Link Local IP address

in the range 169.254.1.0 to 169.254.254.255.

Set up a DHCP server.

Assign the IP addresses for the TV set

Manual.

A displayed media file cannot be played. The format of the file is not supported (see

also Restrictions in Chapter Technical data

– File formats supported).

No remedial action.

The WLAN key of the wireless router can be

entered, but no connection can be estab-

lished.

The set does not support all special charac-

ters for the WLAN key.

Change the WLAN key of the router and do

not use country-specific special characters

such as ä, ö, ü and ß.

No device is found when searching for wire-

less routers.

a) The router is not ready for wireless com-

munication.

b) The SSID of the router is sent hidden.

a) Check your wireless router. Attempt the

re-establishment of the connection a few

minutes later.

b) Change the setting on the router or enter

the SSID of the bass station manually.



Troubleshooting

Loewe bild

User handbook

210

Problem Possible Cause Remedy/notes

The connection of the TV set to the wireless

router is established but the connection qual-

ity is poor.

Interferences on the WLAN connection may

occur depending on the position of the router,.

Interferences of the WLAN can occur for dif-

ferent reasons but also external sources for

this cannot be excluded.

- Observe the instructions for positioning in

the manual of the router.

- Avoid other radio sources in the neighbour-

hood of the router, for example, DECT base

stations. Microwave devices are also poten-

tial sources of interference for the WLAN.

- Possibly the WLAN is braked by an older

slower device, as it does not support at least

the N-standard.

Use a LAN cable or a Powerline adapter for

testing if WLAN reception is problematic.

The streaming provider used does not provide

the expected resolution/picture quality.

As a rule, providers of video streaming ser-

vices use the "Adaptive Streaming" option.

At the same time, a video is first viewed in a

lower resolution and, in the case of a stable

connection, with a sufficient data rate, is in-

creased in resolution and possibly also in

picture quality.

The same applies, of course, to the reverse

case when not enough bandwidth is available,

reducing the resolution and/or quality.

The available bandwidth for video streaming

is not determined solely by the bandwidth of

the particular Internet connection.

The specifications on the data rate are as a

rule maximum specifications.

Depending on the network load, the main end

times can lead to lower data rates on your own

Internet connection, or even through the

provider.

A detailed statement as to why at a certain

time a lower resolution was available can only

be made by the provider.

DR+ streaming with other devices or with the

Loewe app does not function.

For TV sets with a built-in hard disk, the ac-

cess to the DR+ archive is not enabled.

Activate in the menu System settings ט

Control ט more … ט DR+ ט DR+ Streaming

the option Share DR+ archive with other

devices.

Please note that LOEWE. is set as DR+ de-

vice group name and 17123 as IP port

number (standard setting from factory).

No further program is possible with multi-

recording.

With two simultaneous recordings, a further

program from one of the two channels can

also be viewed but this is subject to certain

restrictions.

Example combinations see Chapter

Recordings Section Digital-Recorder –

Multi-Recording.

WLAN or Bluetooth not available.

In the menu System settings ט Extras ט

Integrated features under the menu item

Hardware you can see the integrated com-

ponents,

If a previously available equipment feature is

not displayed, please contact your specialist

dealer.



Troubleshooting

Loewe bild

User handbook

211

Problem Possible Cause Remedy/notes

The TV set displays various error functions. All software parts were not correctly loaded

during a software update.

Open the menu System settings ט Extras

ט Integrated features and select the menu

item Software.

The currently installed package software is

displayed.

If we see a * behind the software version, this

indicates an incomplete update.

Move the cursor down 1x down and press OK.

Now all detail software versions are displayed,

the faulty software version being marked with

an asterisk.

Restart the software update, either via USB

or Internet (System settings ט Control ט

Software update).The device automatically

loads the missing parts automatically.

Please contact your specialist dealer If you

still see an asterisk.

The volume of the TV set can no longer be

adjusted.

The operating level of the remote control was

accidentally adjusted.

Press the TV key on the remote control and

at the same time the numeric key 5 for at

least 5 seconds.

The LED over the TV key on the remote con-

trol blinks twice.

Now the volume should be adjustable again.

Your TV set no longer operates with remote

control in spite of the batteries being charged.

a) The operating level of the remote control

was accidentally adjusted.

b) The remote control is blocked and no

longer sends infra-red codes.

a) Press the MUTE key on the remote control

and at the same time the numeric key 0

for at least 5 seconds.

The LED over the TV key on the remote

control blinks twice.

Now you should be able to operate your TV

set.

b) Remove the batteries from the remote

control and press a few buttons until the

LED via the set button is no longer lit.

Wait about 10 minutes and replace the bat-

teries. Pay attention to the correct polarity

of + and - when inserting the batteries. Do

not be guided by the battery contacts

(springs), but by the illustration at the bot-

tom of the battery compartment.

If this is not successful, please contact your

specialist dealer

You can also find useful tips and hints in the Loewe Community at: www.loewe-friends.de



Troubleshooting

Loewe bild

User handbook

212

CA module error codes

In case of problems with a CA module, error codes are displayed by TV set. The following table from the CI specification shows the meaning

of the error codes.

Error

Code +

Error condition Error detec-

ted by

Host action CI Plus Module action Comments

N/A None None

CICAM CICAM goes to pass - through mode

CICAM - CICAM goes to pass-through mode

- a revocation notification message is displayed.

CICAM/Host - If EMI>0 CICAM goes to pass-through mode, otherwise

switches to DVB CI mode

- a response error notification message is displayed.

The service operator and CAS may

choose under what conditions to

descramble when operating in DVB

CI mode.

CICAM/Host - If EMI>0 CICAM goes to pass-through mode, otherwise

switches to DVB CI mode

- a response error notification message is displayed.

The service operator and CAS may

choose under what conditions to

descramble when operating in DVB

CI mode.

CICAM None Recommended:

- CICAM retries the download 2 times

- a response error notification message is displayed.

CICAM None Recommended:

- CICAM retries the download 2 times

- a response error notification message is displayed.

CICAM None Recommended:

- CICAM retries the download 2 times

- a response error notification message is displayed.

CICAM None CICAM goes to pass - through mode

CICAM/Host Host stops the CICAM. CICAM goes to pass - through mode

Host Host stops the CICAM. None

Host Host goes to DVB-CI

mode

None

Host Host stops the CICAM. None

CICAM None - CICAM goes to pass- through mode

- a response error notification message is displayed.

CICAM None - CICAM goes to DVB-CI mode

- a response error notification message is displayed.

CICAM None - CICAM goes to pass- through mode

- a response error notification message is displayed.

CICAM None - CICAM goes to DVB-CI mode

- a response error notification message is displayed.

CICAM None - CICAM goes to DVB-CI mode

- a response error notification message is displayed.

CICAM None - CICAM goes to DVB-CI mode

- a response error notification message is displayed.

CICAM Requires

Update

CICAM None - CICAM goes to pass- through mode

- a response error notification message is displayed.

23-127

Reserved for CI

Plus

CICAM None - a response error notification message is displayed.

128-255

Private Use for

Service Operator

CICAM None - a response error notification message is displayed.

The CICAM relays the transport stream unaltered and does not descramble any services (CI Plus or DVB).

The Host behaves like a DVB - CI compliant Host.

The CICAM descrambles only services that require no CI Plus prote ction (DVB-CI fallback mode).



Troubleshooting

Loewe bild

User handbook

213

0-9

24p motion picture display: Movies released on Blu-ray Disc sup-

port the 24p motion picture display. The Blu-ray player transfers the

original film format to the television with 24 frames per second. The

DMM (DigitalMovieMode) set in the factory calculates and inserts

additional intermediate pictures, which suppress film jerking typical

for the cinema, thereby providing for a smooth motion sequence.

Accurate Recording: See Automatic time control.

Administrator: Person who administers the network, i.e. takes care of

setting up and maintaining all components belonging to the network.

Active antenna: An antenna with its own power supply or amplification

which can improve the reception in areas with a poor coverage.

ARC: Abbreviation for Audio Return Channel.

Audio Return Channel: The audio return channel which was introduced

with the HDMI Standard 1.4 is used when an audio system with audio

(pre) amplifier, e.g. Loewe MediaVision 3D, is connected to a TV set via

HDMI. The digital audio signal of the TV set (e.g. the sound of the cur-

rent TV program) can be transferred to the audio amplifier via the audio

return channel of the HDMI cable. Thus the same cable which is normally

responsible for transferring image data from a connected media player to

the TV set transfers the audio data in the opposite direction. In this way, the

audio return channel makes the cinch cable, which has previously been

required in addition to the HDMI cable, redundant.

Automatic time control: Also called Accurate Recording. Similar to

VPS for analogue stations the automatic time control monitors the start

and end times of programmes from DVB stations. If these times deviate

from the data programmed in the timer data, the running time of the

recording is adapted automatically. The automatic time control is not

supported by all DVB stations.

AV socket: Socket for audio and video signals.

AV sources: Audio/Video source.

AVI: Abbreviation for Audio Video Interleave, a video container file for-

mat developed by Microsoft. A single AVI video file can contain several

audio, video and text data streams (thus the name container format).

Band: Name for a transmission range.

Blu-ray Disc: The follow-up format of DVD. The contents of about

five DVDs fit onto one Blu-ray Disc (abbreviated BD). Therefore, the

Blu-ray disc provides enough space for high-resolution images and

multi-channel sound formats.

BMP: Abbreviation for Bitmap, a grid graphics format designed for

Microsoft Windows and OS/2 that is wide spread and therefore sup-

ported by almost every popular graphics software package without

any problems.

CA Module: The Conditional Access module contains the cod-

ing system and compares the transmitted code with the one on the

Smart Card. If they match, the appropriate stations or programmes

are decoded.

CEC: Abbreviation for Consumer Electronics Control. CEC provides uni-

versal component control functions for entertainment electronics devices

(e.g. System standby, One Touch Play). CEC is referred to by Loewe as

Digital Link HD.

Channel (WLAN): Devices that want to communicate with each other

have to use the same WiFi channel. In Europe the WiFi frequency band

is currently divided into 13 channels.

Cinch cable: Cable for transmitting sound or pictures.

CI slot: See Common Interface.

Client: Also called network client, describes an end device such as

your TV set that is connected to the network and gets data from a

(media) server to make it accessible to the user.

Common Interface: The Common Interface (CI slot) is a standard-

ised interface. By inserting suitable decoding modules (CA modules)

and a Smart Card coded digital programmes can be used.

Common Interface Plus: CI Plus is an advancement of the Common

Interface standard. CI Plus slots are in principle downward compatible

to the previous CI standard, i.e. CA modules and Smart Cards accord-

ing to the past CI standard can continue to be used in CI Plus slots,

as far as the programme provider permits this. Additionally, extended

regulations apply however to CI Plus.

Component: See Component connection.

Component connection: Also referred to as Component. Connec-

tion where the video signal is transferred via three separate (Cinch)

connections. It comprises the brightness signal Y as well as the colour

difference signals Pb (blue component) and Pr (red component).

Conditional Access module: See CA module.

DAL: Abbreviation for Digital Audio Link Integrated, digital 5.1 audio

decoder for the direct connection of Loewe klang products to the

extension to the home entertainment system.

DHCP: Abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. DHCP

allows automatic assignment of IP addresses with the aid of a DHCP

server.

DHCP server: Network service which takes care of automatic assign-

ment of IP addresses to clients.

Digital Link HD: System for controlling units via the HDMI connection

of the Loewe TV set when they have been set up in a covered position.

DMM: Abbreviation for Digital Movie Mode. Whether a studio record-

ing, live broadcast, or feature film – the broadcast images are always

displayed optimally. Still images are reproduced in all their sharpness

and tranquillity. By creating intermediate images, DMM enables perfect

studio quality, even with quick movements.

DNC: Abbreviation for “Digital Noise Control”. Weak TV signals (ana-

logue) can generate disruptive picture noise. DNC adjusts the effect

of digital noise reduction to the picture contents.

DNS: Abbreviation for Domain Name System. Readable names (e.g.

www.loewe-int.de) are assigned to numerical IP addresses. DNS

servers are responsible for the resolution of readable addresses into

the corresponding IP addresses.

Dolby Digital: Digital multi-channel sound. The digital standard for

high quality home movie systems. The individual channels are broad-

cast separately in this standard. The three front channels right, left

and centre, the two surround channels right and left and the external

subwoofer channels are called a 5.1 signal.

Dolby Pro Logic: Analogue multi-channel sound. Converts a Dolby-

coded stereo signal into a surround sound. This usually contains four

channels (front left, centre, front right, surround channel). A special

subwoofer channel is not generated in this method.

Dolby Pro Logic II: Analogue multi-channel sound. Dolby Pro Logic II

is a further development of Dolby Pro Logic. This method generates

a 6-channel spatial sound from a stereo or Pro-Logic signal (front left,

centre, front right, surround left, surround right, subwoofer).

Dolby Surround: An analogue surround sound system which uses a

matrix coding to fit four sound channels into two sound tracks.

Dolby Virtual Speaker: The Dolby Virtual Speaker technology

simulates the surround playback of a real 5.1 channel playback with

only two speakers.



Glossary

Loewe bild

User handbook

214



Glossary

D (continued)

Dolby Vision: Dolby Vision is currently the most demanding format

in the HDR area and guarantees particularly intense and high-contrast

picture. By the processing of the dynamic metadata, the continuous

optimization of the picture data is made possible - image by image

by image. The intelligent algorithm calculates with the respective set

data the best possible representation of the contents on the TV, as

soon as Dolby Vision video formats are recognized.

DRM: Digital Rights Management. Processes to control copyright

protected data. To be used correctly, DRM protected contents require

not only a DRM capable device but also the possession of a license

issued by the provider (to be paid for).

DTS: Digital Theatre Systems; Digital multi-channel audio.

DVB-C/-S/-T: Digital Video Broadcasting stands for digital television.

Technical DVB is the standardised process for transmitting digital

content (television, radio, multi-channel audio, room sound, EPG,

Teletext, and other supplemental services) through digital technology.

CST for terrestrial or antenna distribution.

DVD: Abbreviation for Digital Video Disc and later Digital Versatile Disc.

DVD preceiver: Combi device of DVD player and radio without inte-

grated amplifier.

Dynamic contrast ratio: Here the light intensity of the display is

adapted in case of a high black content in the picture. The so-called

backlights are dimmed automatically and the contrast ratio increases

temporarily, i.e. dynamically.

Electronic Programme Guide: See EPG.

EPG: Electronic Programme Guide is the electronic variant of a printed

TV guide. Using the EPG you can watch the TV programme of the TV

station, transfer the appropriate data. The list of programmes contains

the title, beginning and end and duration of the programme. In addition

brief descriptions of the content of the programmes are also displayed.

Ethernet: Cable linked data net technology for local networks (LANs).

Also covers standards for e.g. plug connectors and transfer speeds.

Euro AV socket: Interface for connecting video devices to a TV set.

This socket is also referred to as Scart socket.

Exif: Standard format for additional data with modern digital cameras,

e.g. date and time, aperture, light sensitivity, alignment of the camera

(portrait/landscape).

FLOF: Full Level One Facilities. Teletext system in which names and

numbers of the jump destinations are transmitted in the bottom line

on every page. This guides the reader to related topics for example. An

information about which pages exist and which pages have sub-pages

is not available in FLOF.

Gateway: Transition to another network; in this case connection from

the home network to the Internet.

The network device that establishes this connection is normally used

as a standard gateway. As a rule, the DSL router also represents the

Internet gateway.

HbbTV: HbbTV (Hybrid broadcast broadband television) is an industry

standard that offers an open platform for technology that is not depend-

ent on manufacturers. HbbTV combines TV programmes with online

services seamlessly over broadband Internet (DSL).

HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection. Coding system

provided for the DVI and HDMI interfaces for secure transmission of

audio and video data.

HDMI: High Definition Multimedia Interface, represents a newly de-

veloped interface for the fully digital transfer of audio and video data.

HDR: HDR is the abbreviation for High Dynamic Range. This means that

HDR videos possess a larger dynamic / contrast range than standard

videos (SDR).

HDR 10: HDR 10 is an HDR format that uses the static metadata for a

complete video sequence. HDR 10 is also supported by UHD Blu-ray

players.

HD Ready: A quality seal that is awarded to products that are capable

of displaying high-definition television (HDTV).

HDTV (HD): High Definition Television is a collective term, designating

a series of high-resolution television standards.

High and low band: Transmission ranges for satellites.

HLG: HLG is an HDR format that manages without metadata and thus

saves transmission capacities. HLG is used for DVB transmissions on

this basis.

Host: Computer that the server services are provided from, i.e. that

makes data available. Refer also to media server.

ID3 tags: Additional information for MP3 and WMA audio files. Infor-

mation about the singer, title, album and album cover can be saved

here among other things. This data is then processed by the PC using

an ID3 tag editor.

IP address: IP addresses (Internet Protocol Addresses) are used to

identify devices in an Internet Protocol (IP) network. IP addresses are

made up of four groups of numbers of three digits each.

IR-Link: The IR Link function allows the operation of accessory de-

vices with concealed installation made by other manufacturers via the

Loewe TV set. The infrared sensor required for this is available as an ac-

cessory and can be connected to the IR-Link connection of the TV set.

JPEG/JPG: Joint Photographic Experts Group is a committee, which

has developed a standardised method for the compression of digital

images. This method JPEG (JPG for short), named after the commit-

tee, is a commonly used graphic format for photos.

LAN: Abbreviation for Local Area Network. Mainly used as a name for

networks with cabling (Ethernet).

LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.

LCN: Logical Channel Numbers. In stations with LCN, the channel

location number belonging to the station is also transmitted by the

provider. The stations are sorted according to these channel location

numbers.

LNB/LNC: The crucial electronic component of a satellite antenna

is referred to as an LNB (Low Noise Block Converter). It is mounted

in the focal point of a parabolic antenna. The designation LNC (Low

Noise Converter) indicates that conversion to a lower intermediate

frequency takes place. The supplemental block in the LNB refers to the

fact that a whole frequency range (a block) is converted in each case.

Loewe bild

User handbook

215



Glossary

MAC address: Hardware address of a network adaptor, e.g., he net-

work card in the PC. It is issued permanently by the manufacturer and

is used to uniquely identify devices in networks.

Mbit/sec: Information about the transfer rate in networks in mega-

bits, i.e. millions of characters per second. With WLAN the maximum

speed is 11 (IEEE 802.11b), 54 (IEEE 802.11g), 300 (IEEE 802.11n) or

1300 (IEEE 802.11ac) Mbit/sec, in wired networks 10 Mbit/sec, 100

Mbit/sec (Fast Ethernet) or 1000-Mbit/s-Ethernet (Gigabit Ethernet).

Media Server: Stands for the device on which multimedia content

is stored, but is also the name for the service provided by the device

that makes this data available to the network.

Modulator: Transmitter in the video or DVD recorder so that the

devices can receive signals via the tuner of the TV device.

Mono: Single channel sound.

MP3: Data format for compressed audio files.

MPEG: Digital compression method for video.

Multimedia content: Videos, music files and photos are grouped

together under this term.

NAS: The term describes a hard disk which is independently linked

to the network (i.e. without a PC).

Network ID: NID refers to the so-called programme ID number, also

known as network ID – a number between 0 and 8191. This specifica-

tion is necessary in specific cable networks of some countries. Then

only DVB signals of this station network are searched for.

NICAM: Audio standard. Is used in Denmark, England, France, Swe-

den, and Spain.

NTSC: American colour standard, stands for National Television

Standards Committee.

OLED: Abbreviation for Organic Light Emitting Diode. OLED is a further

development of the light emitting diode (LED) for display technology. In

contrast to LEDs, the coloured self-luminous OLEDs consist of organic

semiconductors that emit light in an electric field.

Page Catching: For teletext, refers to marking and calling a page

number.

PAL: European colour standard, stands for phase alternation line.

PCM: Pulse Code Modulation for digital sound.

Picture in Picture: See PIP.

PIP: Picture in Picture; a function which displays two pictures on the

screen.

Pixel: Also called picture element or pel. Denotes both the smallest

unit of a digital graphic grid and its display on a screen with grid control.

Pixel error: A pixel error is a defective pixel, usually on an LCD. Pixel

errors may be caused by production errors. They are expressed for

example by a constantly lit pixel or a constantly black pixel. Single

defective pixels however are excluded from a guarantee.

PNG: Abbreviation for Portable Network Graphics, a freely available

grid graphics format for loss-free compression.

Port: It allows assignment of data packages to various services which

are running on one device under the same network address.

Powerline: Powerline designates a type of wired network connection

in which data is transferred via the domestic electricity network using

optionally available adaptors.

Progressive JPEG: Progressive JPEGs are built up gradually. The qual-

ity of the picture increases progressively during the loading process.

Proxy server: Proxy means authorized representative or deputy. Proxy

servers provide indirect access to the network for systems that do not

have direct access to the Internet.

ProScan/Progressive Scan: Progressive Scan (abbr. PS) or full

picture method is a technique in the picture build-up of monitors, TV

sets, beamers, and other display devices in which the output device is

not sent line interlaced half pictures – unlike in the interlace technique

– but real full pictures.

PSK: Clients that wish to connect to a wireless network secured with

PSK must know this key.

RGB: Colour signals Red, Green and Blue.

Router: Device for connecting several networks, e.g., home network

and Internet.

Satellite tuner: Receiver for satellite programmes.

SDTV: Standard Definition TeleVision.

SECAM: French colour standard, stands for Séquentiel à mémoire.

Set-top box: Set-top box (STB for short) refers to a device in enter-

tainment electronics which is connected to another device, usually a

TV set, and offers the user additional functional options.

Signal input group: Depending on the applied signal, the signal

sources are divided into different groups.

Signal strength: Strength of the received antenna signal.

Signal quality: Quality of the incoming antenna signal.

Smart Card: The Smart Card is an electronic chip card issued by the

respective programme provider or by the certification free Pay TV

operators. It contains the code which is decoded by the CA module.

Static contrast ratio: Describes the relationship between the lightest

and darkest image display.

Stereo: Dual channel sound.

Switch: Device for connecting several computers to a network.

Switching voltage: Video devices supply this voltage to switch the

TV set to playback.

Symbol rate: Specifies the transmission speed for data transmission.

Terrestrial: In data transmission a wireless transmission that does

not use satellites as intermediate station is referred to as terrestrial.

TFT: Thin Film Transistor. One widely distributed application is control

of liquid crystal flat screens, for which a signal transistor is used for

each pixel. This design of display is also referred to as active matrix,

however it is frequently also referred to as TFT display.

Tuner: English for receiver. A tuner is a receiving component in TV

sets or radios. Stations transmit TV or radio signals simultaneously

but at different frequencies. The tuner is connected downstream of

the antenna input and selected, that is, it filters out the desired signal.

Ultra HD: Ultra HD (abbr. for Ultra High Definition) is a digital high-

definition video format, which is about four times the resolution of

HDTV.

USB: Universal Serial Bus. Serial bus system for connecting external

devices (USB card reader, USB stick).

UPnP AV Is used to control network devices from all manufacturers.

Has become a widespread standard for home networking.

Loewe bild

User handbook

216



Glossary

VGA: PC interface for connecting a monitor.

Wake on LAN: Wake on LAN (WOL for short) is a standard released in

1995 by AMD in association with Hewlett-Packard to launch switched

off devices which support this standard through the built-in network

interface.

WEP: Abbreviation for Wired Equivalent Privacy. Former standard

process in the WiFi encryption, now outdated.

Wired network: see LAN.

Wireless network: see WLAN.

WLAN: Abbreviation for Wireless Local Area Network. Also abbrevi-

ated as wireless network.

WMA: Abbreviation for Windows Media Audio, Microsoft own audio

data format. As with MP3 files, the content is compressed here as well.

WMV: Abbreviation for Windows Media Video, proprietary Microsoft

video data format.

WOL: Abbreviation for Wake on LAN

WPA: Abbreviation for Wi-Fi Protected Access. Replaced WEP as

standard encryption for wireless networks.

Ycc/Ypp: Colour standards for Set-top boxes..

YCbCr: Digital colour model, informally also incorrect designation

for signals in standard resolution (SDTV). The YCbCr colour model,

in which, e.g., DVDs are coded, has been developed from the YUV

colour model used in analogue television technology. With YCbCr, the

data is transferred via digital interfaces such as DVI or HDMI without

being converted.

YPbPr: Analogue colour model, see also Component connection.

The analogue YPbPr signal is generated from the YCbCr signal by a

converter in the source player and then output at the 3 component

outputs of the source player.

YUV: The YUV colour model is used for analogue television in accord-

ance with the standards PAL and NTSC. YUV is often informally re-

ferred to when YPbPr (for analogue connections/cables) or YCbCr (in

digital applications) is actually meant. YUV only occurs in quadrature

modulation during PAL or NTSC transfer and is not otherwise used.

Loewe bild

User handbook

217



EC Declaration of Conformity

Ɍɨɡɢɭɪɟɞɨɬɝɨɜɚɪɹ ɧɚ ɨɫɧɨɜɧɢɬɟ ɢɡɢɫɤɜɚɧɢɹ ɢ ɪɚɡɲɢɪɟɧɢɬɟɫɴɨɬɜɟɬɧɢ ɩɪɟɞɩɨɫɬɚɜɤɢȾɢɪɟɤɬɢɜɚ ȿ8 ȼɴɜ

Ɏɪɚɧɰɢɹɢɂɬɚɥɢɹɢɡɩɨɥɡɜɚɧɟɬɨɦɭɟɪɚɡɪɟɲɟɧɨɫɚɦɨɜɡɚɬɜɨɪɟɧɢɩɨɦɟɳɟɧɢɹ.

7RWR ]DĜt]HQt MH Y VRXODGX VH ]iNODGQtPL SRåDGDYN\ D RVWDWQtPL RGSRYtGDMtFtPL XVWDQRYHQtPL 6PČUQLFH (8.9H

)UDQFLLDY,WDOLLMHSRXåLWtSĜtVWURMHGRYROHQpMHQRPYLQWHULpUX.

Dieses Gerät entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprechenden Vorgaben der Richtlinie

2014/53/EU. In Frankreich und Italien ist die Nutzung nur in Innenräumen zulässig.

Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de væsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Direktiv 2014/53/EU. I

Frankrig og Italien er det kun tilladt at anvende det indendørs.

Este equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales así como con otras disposiciones de la Directiva 2014/53/EU. En Francia

e Italia, su uso está permitido únicamente en espacios interiores.

Tämä laite täyttää direktiivin 2014/53/EU olennaiset vaatimukset ja on siinä asetettujen muiden laitetta koskevien määräys-

ten mukainen. Ranskassa ja Italiassa laitetta saa käyttää vain sisätiloissa.

Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la 2014/53/EU. En France et

en Italie l‘utilisation est autorisée uniquement dans des espaces fermés.

This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. In

France and Italy it may only be used indoors.

ǹȣĲȩȢȠİȟȠʌȜȚıȩȢİȓȞĮȚıİıȣȩȡĳȦıȘİĲȚȢȠȣıȚȫįİȚȢĮʌĮȚĲȒıİȚȢțĮȚȐȜȜİȢıȤİĲȚțȑȢįȚĮĲȐȟİȚȢĲȘȢȅįȘȖȓĮȢ(8.

ȈĲȘȞīĮȜȜȓĮțĮȚıĲȘȞǿĲĮȜȓĮİʌȚĲȡȑʌİĲĮȚȘȤȡȒıȘȝȩȞȠıİİıȦĲİȡȚțȠȪȢȤȫȡȠȣȢ.

Questo apparato é conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 2014/53/EU. In Francia e in

Italia è consentito l‘uso solo in ambienti chiusi.

Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-direktiv 2014/53/EU

. I

Frankrike og Italia er kun innendørs bruk tillatt.

Dit apparaat voldoet aan de essentiele eisen en andere van toepassing zijnde bepalingen van de Richtlijn 2014/53/EU. In

Frankrijk en Italië is het gebruik slechts binnenshuis toegestaan.

Este aparelho está em conformidade com os requisitos fundamentais e todas as restantes disposições da Diretiva 2014/53/

EU. Em França e Itália a sua utilização apenas é permitida em espaços interiores.

Denna utrustning är i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestämmelser i Direktiv 2014/53/EU.

I Frankrike och Italien får apparaten användas endast inomhus.

Loewe bild

User handbook

218



Index

0-9

3D ..................................................................................................... 84

3D function ...................................................................................... 86

Access code ...................................................................................103

Adding stations to personal list ...................................................... 99

Additional functions for DR+ archive playback .............................. 71

Adjusting the HiFi/AV amplifier .....................................................133

Adjusting the sound ........................................................................ 89

Adjust size of the PIP image ...........................................................111

Allow switching voltage ..................................................................134

Amazon Alexa login ......................................................................... 84

Amazon Video ..................................................................................78

Antenna DVB ................................................................... 84, 128, 134

App Gallery .......................................................................................78

Apps ........................................................................................... 34, 78

ARC .................................................................................................146

Archive recording ............................................................................ 54

Asterisk key function ...................................................................... 84

Audio commentary .........................................................................111

AUDIO key ......................................................................................148

Audio playback .................................................................................74

Audio playback from external devices ..........................................147

Audio return channel .....................................................................146

Auto dimming .................................................................................. 84

Auto dimming - Room ..............................................................85, 86

Auto dimming - Video (VBD+) ....................................................... 86

Automatic aspect ratio ................................................................... 85

Automatic HDMI hint ..................................................................... 110

Automatic menu info ...............................................................20, 110

Automatic scan TV+Radio .......................................................84, 94

Automatic time control ................................................................... 64

Auto speech detection ................................................................... 84

Auto volume .................................................................................... 84

AV connecting settings ................................................... 84, 128, 134

AV list ............................................................................................... 66

AV output signal .............................................................................. 84

Balance ......................................................................................84, 90

Beginning of daylight-saving time ................................................ 110

Bluetooth ................................................................................. 84, 125

Blu-ray player ................................................................................. 141

Bookmarks

Delete ............................................................................................72

Delete individual ones ..................................................................72

Jump ............................................................................................. 71

Set ...........................................................................................54, 71

Brightness .................................................................................84, 85

Browser ............................................................................................80

Cable fixing ....................................................................................... 13

Camcorder ..................................................................................... 141

CA modul ........................................................................................139

Changeover summer time / winter time ..................................... 110

Change title of an archive recording ...............................................57

Changing the station list ................................................................. 36

Channel lists Radio ............................................................ 84, 94, 98

Channel lists TV ................................................................. 84, 94, 98

Channels ....................................................................................84, 94

Channel search ............................................................................... 82

Character table ................................................................................19

CI slot ..............................................................................................139

Cleaning and care ..............................................................................8

Clear data base ..............................................................................102

Clock display ................................................................................... 20

Code number .................................................................................103

Coloured keys .................................................................................. 46

Colour intensity .........................................................................84, 85

Colour temperature ..................................................................84, 85

Common Interface Plus .................................................................139

Compatible mode ..........................................................................135

Component connection ................................................................144

Connecting active loudspeakers ..................................................146

Connecting antennas ...................................................................... 14

Connecting HiFi/AV amplifier ........................................................146

Connecting home network ..............................................................14

Connecting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT) ...........................145

Connecting the speaker system (DAL) ........................................145

Connecting the TV set .....................................................................14

Connections .................................................................................... 84

Contrast .....................................................................................84, 85

Control ............................................................................................. 84

Create new personal list ................................................................. 99

Data capture ...........................................................................102, 110

Dealer mode ...........................................................................136, 138

Dealer Mode .................................................................................... 84

Deblocking filter ........................................................................84,

Deezer ...............................................................................................78

Delete

Bookmarks ...................................................................................72

individual bookmarks ...................................................................72

Recording ..................................................................................... 58

Delete manager ............................................................................... 60

Set delete protection for timer recording .................................. 64

Setting/cancelling delete protection .......................................... 60

Delete personal list ......................................................................... 99

Deleting blocks ................................................................................ 98

Deleting stations from the personal list ........................................ 99

Device assignment ........................................................................135

Devices on AV .................................................................................143

Digital Link ....................................................................... 84, 128, 135

Loewe bild

User handbook

219



Index

Digital Link HD ................................................................................142

Digital Link HD functionality ..........................................................135

Digital Noise Control (DNC) .....................................................84, 85

Direct recording .............................................................................. 54

Display kinematics ...................................................................84, 116

Display time .................................................................................... 110

Disposal .........................................................................................203

Dolby PLII mode .............................................................................. 89

DR+ .................................................................................................. 84

DR+ archive ..................................................................................... 56

DR+ Streaming .................................................................. 61, 84, 136

Notify started „Follow me“ recording ....................................... 113

DR+ Streaming settings ................................................................ 112

Also use other archives .............................................................. 113

DR+ device group name ............................................................ 113

IP port number ........................................................................... 113

Share DR+ archive with other devices ...................................... 113

DVB character set ...........................................................................111

DVB radio ..........................................................................................81

DVB radio recording .........................................................................81

DVB radio time shift .........................................................................81

DVB settings ............................................................................. 84, 111

DVD player ...................................................................................... 141

Dynamic SPDIF sync ................................................................84, 90

Edit new personal list ...................................................................... 99

Edit personal list .............................................................................. 99

End of daylight-saving time ........................................................... 110

Energy efficiency ............................................................... 21, 84, 104

EPG ............................................................................................40, 84

EPG search ...................................................................................... 34

Explanation of keys ......................................................................... 20

Explanation of symbols .................................................................. 20

Export archive entries ..................................................................... 59

Export log file ............................................................................84, 118

Extras ....................................................................................... 84, 136

Favourites ........................................................................................ 35

Film quality improvement (DMM) ...........................................84, 85

FLOF ................................................................................................. 46

Follow-me function ................................................................... 61, 68

Functionality ....................................................................................111

Function of the connections ............................................................ 12

Function of the TEXT key ............................................................... 114

Game console ........................................................................ 135, 141

Gaming mode .................................................................................135

Gamma brightness correction .................................................84, 85

General information on menu operation ........................................ 17

Hard disks ................................................................................. 84, 117

Checking ......................................................................................117

Formatting ...................................................................................117

HbbTV ................................................................................ 48, 84, 114

HbbTV text ...................................................................................... 48

HDMI ............................................................................... 128, 135, 141

HDMI1-ARC Sound format ............................................................135

HDMI CEC .......................................................................................142

Headphone volume ........................................................................ 39

History ..............................................................................................37

Home ............................................................................................... 34

Home Automation .........................................................................123

Home networking systems ...........................................................147

Home view ....................................................................................... 34

Host name ......................................................................................120

Image+ Active ...........................................................................84, 85

Important information .......................................................................9

Initial installation ..............................................................................21

Initial installation wizard ..................................................................21

Installing the TV set .........................................................................13

Instant Channel Zapping ................................................................ 36

Instant recording ............................................................................. 54

Integrated features .......................................................... 84, 136, 137

Intensity ............................................................................................91

Internet radio ................................................................................... 82

Interval functions .............................................................................72

Displaying a hidden interval .........................................................72

Intervall-Funktionen .........................................................................72

iPIP ............................................................................................ 49, 111

IPTV .................................................................................................. 22

Jump ................................................................................................ 69

Jump distance ................................................................................ 112

Jumping to Bookmarks ................................................................... 71

Key explanation .............................................................................. 110

Kinematics ..........................................................................................9

Language .................................................................. 21, 84, 102, 205

Legal matters .......................................................................... 84, 136

Licence agreement ..................................................................21, 138

LNC/LNB ............................................................................ 27, 29, 30

Loewe App ...................................................................................... 151

Loewe TV for Smart Home skill ....................................................127

Loudness ...................................................................................84, 89

Lumas ...............................................................................................78

Loewe bild

User handbook

220



Index

Mains switch ......................................................................................11

Manage preferences ....................................................................... 52

Manual scan TV ............................................................................... 94

Manuell scan (incl. antenna status) ............................................... 84

Maximum switch on volume .......................................................... 84

Maximum volume .....................................................................84, 90

MediaNet

Browse ..........................................................................................79

Exit .................................................................................................78

Settings .........................................................................................79

Menu options .................................................................................. 39

Mimi Defined

....................................................... 38, 78, 84, 89, 91

Mobile phone keyboard ...................................................................19

Mobile Recording .................................................................... 84, 124

Move block ...................................................................................... 98

Move picture up/down ..............................................................84, 85

Move stations in the personal list .................................................. 99

Moving of archive entries ............................................................... 58

Multimedia / Network .................................................................... 84

Multimedia settings ................................................................ 84, 123

Multi recording ................................................................................ 55

Multiroom ........................................................................................ 62

Multi select ...................................................................................... 58

Music playback

End ................................................................................................75

Repeat ...........................................................................................75

Shuffle playback ...........................................................................75

Winding .........................................................................................74

Netflix ................................................................................................78

Network selection ..................................................................... 24, 25

Network selection (IPTV) ............................................................... 23

Network settings ..................................................................... 84, 120

New group ........................................................................................91

New person ......................................................................................91

„No Signal“ notification ................................................................. 110

Notify hidden sections ................................................................... 112

Number of satellite antenna cables ............................................... 26

Numerical keys ...........................................................................17, 36

OLED ...................................................................................................9

OLED calibration .........................................................................9, 84

OLED-Schutz ................................................................................... 85

One touch recording ....................................................................... 54

On/Off button ....................................................................................11

On-screen displays ..................................................................84, 110

Page selection ................................................................................. 46

Parental lock ..................................................................... 60, 84, 103

PC ....................................................................................................143

PC IN - Display ................................................................................. 85

Permanent clock display .........................................................20, 110

Personal list ......................................................................................37

Add station .................................................................................. 99

Create new list ............................................................................. 99

Delete list ..................................................................................... 99

Delete station .............................................................................. 99

Move station ................................................................................ 99

Rename list .................................................................................. 99

Photo

Exit .................................................................................................77

Full-screen mode ..........................................................................76

Rotate photo .................................................................................76

Slide show .....................................................................................77

Picture .............................................................................................. 84

Picture adjustment .............................................................84, 85, 87

Picture format .................................................................... 84, 85, 88

4:3 ................................................................................................ 88

16:9 ............................................................................................... 88

PALplus ........................................................................................ 88

Panorama .................................................................................... 88

Zoom ............................................................................................ 88

Picture settings ............................................................................... 85

PIP ..............................................................................................49, 84

PIP functionality .............................................................................. 49

PIP-Funktionalität ............................................................................ 49

PIP Settings .....................................................................................111

Positioning/aligning the DVB-T antenna ......................................134

Post-record time ............................................................................ 112

Power switch ....................................................................................16

Pre-record time .............................................................................. 112

Privacy Statement .........................................................................138

Profile ................................................................................................91

Proxy server ............................................................................120, 122

Quick start mode .................................................................... 84, 104

Record conflict ................................................................................ 64

Recording .................................................................................43, 112

Recording DVB radio .......................................................................81

Recordings ...................................................................................... 34

Remote control ..................................................................10, 15, 148

Remote TV switch on of the TV set ..............................................135

Renaming the HDMI port designation .......................................... 141

Renaming the personal list ............................................................. 99

Renderer .................................................................................. 84, 123

Repeat initial installation ................................................... 21, 84, 136

Reset to factory settings ................................................ 84, 136, 137

Loewe bild

User handbook

221

Restore stations .............................................................................. 98

Rotate TV ..................................................................................84, 115

Rotating the TV set ......................................................................... 50

Safety ..................................................................................................6

Satellite (DVB-S/S2) ......................................................................134

Satellite selection .........................................................27, 28, 29, 30

Satellite system ............................................................................... 26

SAT>IP ............................................................................................134

Scrambled channels .............................................24, 25, 31, 95, 140

Screen Mirroring ....................................................................... 78, 83

Search .............................................................................................. 39

Search for artists ............................................................................ 82

Search mode ................................................................................... 43

Select channel ................................................................................. 36

using the numerical keys ............................................................ 36

via personal lists ...........................................................................37

with P+/P- ................................................................................... 36

Selecting a channel out of the channel list .................................... 36

Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12) ................................................... 147

Serial recording tolerance ............................................................. 112

Service ........................................................................................... 222

Set covers ......................................................................................... 13

Setting the volume .......................................................................... 36

Set-top box ..................................................................................... 141

Sharpness .................................................................................84, 85

Shutdown of the ext. device via TV button ...................................135

Side by side ..................................................................................... 86

signal type ......................................................................................134

Skin tone ....................................................................................84, 85

Smart Card .....................................................................................139

Smart jump ..............................................................................69, 112

Software ........................................................................................... 84

Software download ........................................................................105

Software update

Automatic update via the internet ............................................109

Manually via Antenna .................................................................107

Via Antenna ................................................................................108

Via USB memory medium ........................................................106

Sorting ............................................................................................. 39

Sound .........................................................................................84, 89

Sound adjustment ....................................................................84, 89

Sound components ................................................ 84, 128, 129, 145

Sound mode ..............................................................................84, 89

Sound picture synchronisation ................................................84, 89

Sound via ......................................................................................... 84

Sources ............................................................................................ 34

Standard PIP ............................................................................ 49, 111

Standard Teletext ............................................................................ 84

Standby mode ..................................................................................16

Start behaviour of HbbTV-stations .............................................. 114

Status display .................................................................................. 38

STB key ...........................................................................................148



Index

Stop recording early ....................................................................... 55

Streaming server standby .............................................................. 84

Subtitle ........................................................................55, 73, 111, 112

Supply voltage 5V ..........................................................................134

Surround modus .......................................................................89, 90

Switching off the TV set during recording ..................................... 55

Switch off ..........................................................................................16

Switch off curtain ........................................................................... 110

Switch on ..........................................................................................16

Switch-on volume ...........................................................................90

Switch to live picture ....................................................................... 53

System settings ........................................................................34, 84

Teletext ............................................................................................ 46

Terrestrial (DVB-T/T2) ...................................................................134

Tidal ...................................................................................................78

Time and date ..........................................................................84, 110

Time display .................................................................................... 20

Timer ................................................................................................ 63

Timer Services ............................................................................ 65

Timer data ....................................................................................... 63

Automatic time control ............................................................... 64

Beginning ..................................................................................... 63

Date .............................................................................................. 63

Delete protection ......................................................................... 64

End ............................................................................................... 63

Favourite ...................................................................................... 64

Folder ........................................................................................... 63

Lock recording ............................................................................. 64

Recording subtitles ..................................................................... 64

Recording type ............................................................................ 63

Station .......................................................................................... 63

Timer list .......................................................................................... 63

Timer Services ................................................................................ 63

Time shift DVB radio operation .......................................................81

Time shift operation ........................................................................ 53

Time zone ....................................................................................... 110

TOP .................................................................................................. 46

Top/bottom ..................................................................................... 86

Transfer all station lists ................................................................... 94

TV ...............................................................................................34, 36

TV key .......................................................................................15, 148

TV on when memorised ................................................................102

TV viewing with time shift ........................................................53, 54

Update station list automatically .............................................84, 94

UPnP ................................................................................................. 14

Upper info display .......................................................................... 110

USB stick ........................................................................................105

Loewe bild

User handbook

222

Value-added service ................................................................. 10, 48

VESA standard ..............................................................................202

VIDEO key .......................................................................................148

Video playback

Change picture format ................................................................. 71

Playback ....................................................................................... 68

Repeat .......................................................................................... 70

Selecting language/sound .......................................................... 70

Winding ........................................................................................ 70

Viewing a locked movie .................................................................. 60

Viewing another movie from the archive during archive recording

.54

Vogels Motion Mount .......................................................................51

Volume adjustment ..................................................................84, 89

Volume display ............................................................................... 110

Wake on LAN/WiFi .........................................................................120

Watching other stations during archive recording ....................... 54

YouTube ............................................................................................78

YPbPr ..............................................................................................144

YUV .................................................................................................144



Index

Loewe bild

User handbook

223



Service

INDI IMPORTS PTY LTD.

P.O. BOX 9184

Brighton

Victoria 3186

Australia

Tel +61 3 94 16 70 37

E-Mail: info@indimports.com

Loewe Opta Benelux NV/SA

Uilenbaan 84

2160 Wommelgem, België

Tel +32 - 3 - 2 70 99 30

Fax +32 - 3 - 235 48 37

E-Mail: ccc@loewe.be

Telion AG

Rütistrasse 26

8952 Schlieren, Schweiz

Tel +41 - 44 732 15 11

Fax +41 - 44 732 15 02

E-Mail: infoKD@telion.ch

GuoGuang Electric Co., Ltd.

No. 8 Jinghu Road, Xinya St, Huadu Reg.

GZ, PRC

Tel +86-(0)20-22675744

Fax +86-(0)20-22675744

E-Mail:service@loewe-chn.com

Hadjikyriakos & Sons Ltd.

121 Prodromos Str., P.O Box 21587

1511 Nicosia, Cyprus

Tel +357 - 77 77 70 07

Fax +357 - 22 66 33 91

E-Mail: service@hadjikyriakos.com.cy

ELVIA s.r.o.

Poděbradská

188/51

198 00 Prague 9

Tel +420220311190

Fax +420220311195

E-Mail: servis@elvia.cz

TS NOVA

Na Spojce 5

702 00 Ostrava

Tel +420 596 122 446

E-Mail: servis@tsnova.cz

Loewe Technologies GmbH,

Customer Care Center

Industriestraße 11

96317 Kronach, Deutschland

Tel +49 9261 99-500

Fax +49 9261 99-515

E-Mail: ccc@loewe.de

www.loewe-friends.de

EET Europarts

Loewe Denmark

Bregnerødvej 133 D

3460 Birkerød, Denmark

Tel +45 45 82 19 19

E-Mail: info@eeteuroparts.dk

Gaplasa S.A.

Conde de Torroja, 25

28022 Madrid, España

Tel +34 - 917 48 29 60

Fax +34 - 913 29 16 75

E-Mail: loewe@maygap.com

Loewe France SAS

Rue du Dépôt,

13 Parc de l l‘Europe, BP 10010

67014 Strasbourg Cédex, France

Tel +33 - 3- 88 79 72 50

Fax +33 - 3- 88 79 72 59

E-Mail: loewe.france@loewe-fr.com

EET Europarts

Loewe Finland

Metsänneidonkuja 12

02130 Espoo, Finland

Tel +358 9 47 850 900

www.eeteuroparts.fi

Loewe UK Limited

EK Business Centre

14 Stroud Road

Glasgow, G75 0YA, UK

Tel +44 (0) 141 370 9666

E-Mail: enquiries@loewe-uk.com

Issagogiki Emboriki Ellados S.A.

321 Mesogion Av.

152 31 Chalandri-Athens, Hellas

Tel +30 - 210 672 12 00

Fax +30 - 210 674 02 04

E-Mail: christina_argyropoulou@

isembel.gr

Plug&Play Ltd.

Bednjanska 8, 10000 Zagreb

Hrvatska (Kroatia)

Tel +385 1 4929 683

Fax +385 1 4929 682

E-Mail: info@loewe.hr

Loewe Italiana S.r.L.

Via Monte Baldo 14/P

37069 Dossobuono di Villafranca di

Verona

Tel +39 - 045 82 51 611

Fax +39 - 045 82 51 622

E-Mail: info@loewe.it

Exit Electronics Ltd.

47 Kibbutz Galuyot St.

Tel Aviv 6655033

Israel

Tel +972 – 3 – 6826500

Fax +972 – 3 – 6826400

E-Mail: info@exit-trade.co.il

Nonplus Ultra Home Automation Pvt Ltd

First Floor, No. 615, Second Main Road

Indiranagar Stage I, Indiranagar

Bangalore 560038

India

Tel +91 80 41114599

E-Mail: info@nplusultra.in

Pars Royal Taramesh

LOEWE

No.166, between Ansari & Soltani St.,

Nelson Mandella Blv,

PO Box: 1967736333

Tehran, Iran

Tel +98 21 96 86 17 17

Tel +98 21 26 20 83 75

E-Mail: info@tarameshgroup.com

JOR

LOEWE Gallery

Abdali Mall, B1

ACCU-TECH Solutions Co.

1-Kharija Al-Ashja‘i Street

Jabal Al-Weibdeh

P.O. Box 9668

Amman 11191

Jordan

Tel +962-79-540-7870

Fax +962-6-465-0119

E-Mail: info@accutech-solutions.net

LOEWE Show Room

Olaya Street,

Near Kingdom Center Riyadh,

Saudi Arabia

P.O Box 92831, Riyadh 11663

Tel + 966-11-4640927

Fax +966-11-4640759

E-Mail: hagop@sas-se.com

Mr. Hagop Julmekian

Dominterior SIA

Brīvības gatve 332

Rīga, LV-1006, Latvia

Tel +371 67 31 05 67

E-Mail: Maksims@dom332.lv

A Cappella Ltd.

Ausros Vartu 5, Pasazo skg.

01129 Vilnius, Lithuania

Tel +370 - 52 12 22 96

Fax +370 - 52 62 66 81

E-Mail: info@acappella.lt

EET Europarts AS

Olaf Helsetsvei 6 (Vekstsenteret)

0694 Oslo, Norge

Tel +47 - 22919500

E-Mail: salg@eeteuroparts.no

Gaplasa S.A.

Parque Suécia

Avda. do Forte, 3

Edificio Suécia I piso 1-2.07

2790-073 CARNAXIDE, Portugal

Tel +351 - 21 942 78 30

Fax +351 - 21 940 00 78

E-Mail: geral.loewe@mayro.pt

AV Spot Sp. z o.o.

Ul. Zakopianska 153

30-435 Krakow

Tel +48 - 12 640 20 00

Fax +48 - 12 640 20 01

www.avspot.pl

V2 Indonesia

5th Intiland tower

Jl. Jenderal Sudirman 32

Jakarta 10220, INDONESIA

Tel +62-21 57853547

E-Mail: service@v2indonesia.com

I Control SAL

Gemmaizeh, Rmeil.

Building 328 1st Floor Beirut, Lebanon

Tel +961 1 446777 / 1 587446

Fax +961 1 582446

E-Mail: info@icontrol-leb.com

COSTEL Co.,LTD

COSTEL Bldg 4F,

13 Sagimakgol-ro 90 beon-kil, Jungwon-

gu,

Sungnam-si, Gyeonggi-do,

South Korea (P.O.Box 13207)

Tel: +82-31-777-4540

Fax: +82-31-777-2033

E-Mail: costelce@costel.com

Service Center Loewe

Aptekarsky per.4 podjezd 5A

105005 Moscow, Russia

Tel +7 - 499 940 42 32 ( ext. 454 )

Fax +7 - 495 730 78 01

E-Mail: service@loewe-cis.ru

EET Europarts AB

Loewe Sweden

Box 4124

SE-131 04, Nacka, Sverige

Tel +46 - 8 507 510 00

E-Mail: Kundservice@eeteuroparts.se

Atlas Care Centre

11 changi south street 3

#03-01 builders centre

Singapore 486122

Tel +65 - 6745 2028

Fax +65 - 6546 7861

E-Mail: service@atlas-sv.com

BIS audio, s.r.o.

Na Štepnici 9657/1, 960 01 Zvolen

Tel +45 54 00 703

E-Mail: bisaudio@bisaudio.sk

E-Mail: servis@bisaudio.sk

www.bisaudio.sk

ENKAY GROUP

SERVISPLUS MUSTERI HIZMETLERI

Alemdag Cad. Site Yolu No:18

Umraniye, Istanbul, TÜRKIYE

Tel 444 4 784

E-Mail: info@servisplus.com.tr

Volco Enterprises Close Corporation

Unit 8

7 on Mastiff (Road)

Longlake Ext 1, Lingbro Business Park

2165 Johannesburg

Tel +27 11 608 1228

Fax +27 11 608 1740

E-Mail: service@volco.co.za

Loewe bild

User handbook

224

STB

ABSAT 166, 169

AEGIR 179

AIWA 141

AKAI 033, 104

ALBA 060, 017, 067, 104,

111, 126, 180, 201

ALCATEL 336

ALDES 133, 168, 179, 201

ALLSAT 033, 048, 059, 077, 201

ALLSONIC 133, 168, 226

ALLTECH 060, 137, 225

ALPHA 033

ALTAI 047

AMITRONICA 060

AMPERE 047, 186, 207

AMSTRAD 060, 006, 047, 071, 097,

132, 165, 174, 175, 186,

212, 216, 217, 227, 228

ANGLO 060

ANKARO 060, 051, 133,

161, 162, 168, 226

ANTTRON 017, 077, 180

APOLLO 017

ARCON 025, 051, 079, 132, 136, 161

ARMSTRONG 033, 175

ARTHUR MARTIN 130

ASA 009

ASAT 025, 033

ASLF 060

AST 127, 194

ASTACOM 171, 172

ASTON 032, 095

ASTRA 013, 021, 025, 098, 099

164, 175, 178, 190, 222, 223

ASTRO 006, 091, 094, 176,

177, 179, 180, 181

AUDIOTON 059, 180

AUSTAR 212, 332

AVALON 047

AXIS 054, 210, 223, 226

BARCOM 021, 051

BEKO 067

BEST 051, 226

BIRMINGHAM CABLE 343

BLAUPUNKT 090, 176

BLUE SKY 060, 217

BOCA 163, 169, 175, 186,

199, 207, 222

BRAIN WAVE 094, 161

BRANDT 069

BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 050, 227

BRITISH TELECOM 341

BROADCAST 013

BROCO 060, 223

BRUNS 133

BSKYB 227

BT 104, 171, 172, 229, 335

BT SATELLITE 171

BUBU SAT 060

BUSH 048, 077, 106, 126

BVV 161

CABLETIME 308, 311, 312, 333, 334

CAMBRIDGE 006, 104, 199

CANAL 019

CANAL DIGITAL 128

CANAL PLUS 128, 019, 320, 321

CANAL SATELLITE 128, 191, 211

CANARY 137

CARAT.SOM 054

CHAPARRAL 012, 134

CHESS 197

CITYCOM 135, 164, 203, 204, 230

CLARK 180

CLATRONIC 094

CLEMENS KAMPHUS 133, 210

CLYDE CABLE VISION 317

CNT 179

COMCAST 004

COMCRYPT 320, 321

COMMANDER 161, 162

COMMLINK 168

COMMUNICADO 054

COMTEC 054, 168

CONDOR 164, 226

CONNEXIONS 047, 096, 226, 231

CONRAD 006, 010, 164, 169, 226, 230

CONTEC 054, 135, 169

COSAT 059

CROWN 175

CRYPTOVISION 067, 315

CYBERMAXX 116

CYRUS 037

DAERYUNG 047

DAEWOO 060, 017, 025

DANSAT 048, 077

DAUMLING 163

D-BOX 045, 214

DECCA 038

DECSAT 310

DECSAT CANAL 310

DELFA 212

DEUTSCHE TELEKOM 056

DEW 025, 054

DIAMOND 225

DIRECTV 144

DISCOVERER 197

DISEQC 171, 172

DISK EXPRESS 051

DISMOND 225

DISTRATEL 119, 146, 147, 149, 185, 217

DISTRISAT 033, 059

DNR 161

DNT 033, 037, 047, 231

DRAKE 029

DST 017

DUAL 025

DUNE 226

DYNASAT 196

ECHOSTAR 060, 021, 047, 086,

088, 128, 211, 213

EIF 014, 198

EINHELL 060, 006, 017, 097, 163,

168, 169, 175, 186, 222

ELEKTA 179

ELSAT 071

ELTA 017, 033, 059, 226

ELTASAT 059

EMANON 017

EMME ESSE 133, 213, 226

ENGEL 060

EP SAT 067

EURIEULT 185, 217

EUROCRYPT 021, 067

EURODEC 110, 232

EUROPA 006, 033, 161,

162, 164, 169, 212

EUROPEAN 163

EUROSAT 175, 225

EUROSKY 164, 175, 186, 226

EUROSTAR 164, 215, 233, 234

EUTRA 137, 203

EXATOR 017, 104, 180

FAGOR 059

FERGUSON 023, 048, 067, 077,

106, 108, 111, 124, 206

FIDELITY 006, 071, 097

FILMNET 318

FINLANDIA 021, 067

FINLUX 009, 010, 021, 067, 220

FINNSAT 110

FLAIR MATE 060

FORCE 068

FOXTEL 235, 022, 319

FRACARRO 017, 087, 196, 213

FRANCE TELECOM 344

FREECOM 017, 193, 201

FREESAT 137

FTE 060, 080, 136, 137, 169,

196, 199, 212, 226

FUBA 010, 014, 017, 021, 047,

051, 088, 135, 176, 220, 226

G SAT 077, 130

GALAXI 051

GALAXIS 054, 059, 133, 161, 168,

209, 210, 211, 212, 223,

226, 236, 237, 238

GALAXISAT 127

GARDINER 204

GEC 317

GENIX 024

GENERAL-INSTRUMENTS 332

GIUCAR RECORD 089

GMI 175

GOLDBOX 128, 191, 211

GOODMANS 067, 111

GRAETZ 088, 099

GRANADA 021, 099

GRANDIN 185, 239

GROTHUSEN 017, 193

GRUNDIG 026, 003, 067, 090, 097,

171, 172, 176, 217, 227,

240, 241, 242, 020, 307, 316

HANSEATIC 197

HANTOR 017, 094

HANURI 179

HARTING UND HELLING 133

HASE & IGEL 161

HELIOCOM 164

HIGH PERFORMANCE 085, 122

HINARI 017, 077

HIRSCHMANCE 090

HIRSCHMANN 006, 009, 010, 047, 081,

113, 133, 171, 172, 176,

196, 203, 216, 219, 243

HISAWA 094

HITACHI 067, 106, 111, 120

HNE 165

HOUSTON 059, 071, 161, 162, 171

HUMAX 212, 236, 244, 005

HUTH 013, 054, 059, 094, 133,

136, 161, 162, 163, 164,

168, 169, 175, 186

HYPERVISION 345

ICX 138

IKUSI ALLSAT 136

IMEX 185

IMPERIAL 126

INGELEN 088, 099

INNOVATION 116

INTERNATIONAL 186

INTERTRONIC 175

INTERVISION 042, 059, 164, 170

INVIDEO 213

ITALTEL 213

ITT 021, 067, 088, 099, 120, 123

ITT NOKIA 009, 010, 021, 067, 088,

099, 120, 123, 214

JEEMON 059

JERROLD 138, 330, 332, 341, 343

JOHANSSON 059, 094

JOK 171, 172, 200, 229

JSR 059

JVC 003, 104

KABELVISION 330

KAMM 060, 215

KATHREIN 060, 033, 037, 080, 081,

090, 091, 094, 096, 112,

114, 135, 166, 176, 180,

196, 204, 218, 245, 246

KEY WEST 163

KOLON 017

KONIG 164

KOSCOM 210

KOSMOS 080, 081, 133, 193

KR 059, 137, 180, 203

KREISELMEYER 176

K-SAT 060

KYOSTAR 017, 180

KYOTO GMI ATLAN 143

L&S ELECTRONIC 226

LASAT 054, 164, 175, 179,

186, 199, 222, 226

LEMON 161, 162, 247

LENCO 060, 017, 025, 079, 161,

162, 164, 193, 221, 223, 226

LENNOX 042, 059

LENSON 006

LEXUS 033

LEYCO 104

LG (GOLDSTAR) 079, 107, 193

LIFESAT 197, 226

LIFETEX 116

LOKIA 088

LORENZEN 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 186

LORRAINE 193

LUPUS 226

LUXOR 006, 010, 021, 088, 097,

099, 120, 123, 130, 214

LYONNAISE 110

M&B1 197

MACAB 225, 232, 248, 329

MAGAI 080

MANATA 060, 171, 172

MANHATTAN 042, 059, 067, 106,

111, 151, 171, 172,

179, 210, 221

MARANTZ 033, 037

MASCOM 081

MASPRO 060, 026, 003, 093, 096,

106, 108, 113, 137, 161,

176, 242

MASTER_S 135

MATSUI 003, 109, 171, 172, 176

MAX 164

MB 197

MEDIABOX 191, 211

MEDIAMARKT 175

MEDIASAT 006, 128, 191, 211, 223

MEDION 060, 226

MEDISON 060

MEGA 033

MELECTRONIC 204

MEMPHIS 054, 134

METRONIC 060, 017, 117, 119, 121,

131, 146, 147, 149, 151,

152, 153, 154, 156, 157,

168, 175, 179, 180, 185,

204, 217

METZ 090, 176

MICRO 164, 180

MICRO ELECTRONIC 060

MICRO MAXX 116

MICRO STAR 116

MICRO TEC 060

MICRO TECHNOLOGY 060, 190, 223

MICRONIK 249

MINERVA 003, 090

MITSUBISHI 067, 090

MITSUMI 222

MNET 320, 321, 342

MORGAN 060, 033, 059, 132, 163,

169, 175, 186, 199, 207,

222, 250

MOVIE TIME 328

MR ZAPP 329

MULTICHOICE 100, 235

MULTISTAR 080

MURATTO 127, 193

MYRYAD 037

MYSAT 060

NAVEX 094

NEC 030, 073

NEIRU 079

NETA P 140

NETWORK 077

NEUHAUS 060, 006, 059, 161,

162, 164, 169, 210, 223,

NEUSAT 060, 161, 210

NEXTWAVE 138

NIKKO 060, 175, 201

NOKIA 009, 010, 021, 045, 067,

088, 099, 105, 120, 123,

211, 214, 242, 251, 346

NOMEX 221

NOOS 329

NORCO 221

NORDMENDE 017, 067, 179, 206

NOVIS 094

NSC 328

NTC 133, 203

NTL CABLETELL 332

OCEANIC 225

OCTAGON 017, 025, 054, 161, 162, 180

OKANO 080, 133, 175

OLYMPIC 133

ONDIGITAL 187, 188, 189

ONO 301

OPTEX 059, 135, 196, 208



Code page

Loewe bild

User handbook

225

OPTIMA 133

OPTUS 332

ORBIT 025, 194

ORBITECH 006, 017, 103, 169, 181, 224

ORIGO 126, 221

OSAT 097

OTTO VERSAND 090

OXFORD 104

PACE 001, 022, 044, 048, 050,

067, 077, 098, 108, 124,

189, 202, 227, 242, 252,

253, 319, 347

PACIFIC 225

PACKSAT 171, 172

PALCOM 092

PALLADIUM 003, 006, 017, 175

PALSAT 006

PANASAT 235, 254

PANASONIC 031, 067, 124, 227

PANDA 021, 048, 067, 164, 176, 210

PATRIOT 104

PHILIPS 026, 003, 033, 037, 051,

067, 077, 124, 128, 144,

156, 161, 162, 169, 171,

172, 176, 180, 187, 188,

191, 204, 211, 218, 229,

242, 313, 323, 329, 345

PHOENIX 054, 077

PHONOTREND 042, 059, 133,

142, 168, 212

PIONEER 128, 191, 211, 302

PIXX 255

PLANET 126, 213

POLSAT 110

POLYTRON 047, 135

PREDKI 017, 094

PREISNER 047, 103, 163, 169,

175, 186, 199, 222

PREMIER 059, 133

PREMIERE 191, 211, 214, 007

PROMAX 067

PROSAT 168, 170

PROSONIC 165

PROTEK 225

PROVISAT 201

PROVISION 179

PVP STEREO VISUAL 330

PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 341

PYE 003

PYXIS 208, 210

QUADRAL 168, 169, 170,

171, 172, 173, 226

QUELLE 090, 097, 164, 165

QUIERO 110

RADIOLA 033, 037

RADIX 047, 137, 216

RAINBOW 137, 180

RC 138

RC-1000 104

RED STAR 226

REDPOINT 223

REDSTAR 226

RFT 033, 037, 161, 162, 168, 224

ROADSTAR 060

ROVER 060, 170

SABA 077, 108, 161, 164,

171, 172, 179, 200,

201, 206, 217, 229

SABRE 067

SAGEM 205, 329

SAKURA 054, 057

SALORA 021, 088, 099, 120, 130, 303

SAMSUNG 017, 080, 127, 132,

211, 243, 302, 324

SAT 006, 071, 127, 194

SAT PARTNER 017, 094, 133,

179, 180, 193, 201

SAT TEAM 060

SATBOX 304

SATCOM 013, 164, 197

SATEC 060, 077, 242

SATECO 017

SATELCO 226

SATFORD 013

SATLINE 170

SATMASTER 013

SATPARTNER 017, 079, 094, 133, 179,

180, 193, 201

SATSTATION 151

SAVA 077, 108, 161, 164, 171,

172, 179, 200, 201, 206, 217

SCHACKE 180

SCHAUB LORENZ 088, 099

SCHNEIDER 171, 172, 218

SCHWAIGER 077, 114, 135, 161, 164,

169, 197, 217, 255

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 305, 306, 325, 326

SEDEA-ELECTRONIQUE 017

SEEMANN 047, 104, 175, 223

SEG 017, 094, 165,

178, 190, 197, 226

SELECO 059, 213

SEPTIMO 146, 151, 154

SERVI SAT 059

SIEMENS 090, 176, 199

SILVA 079, 193

SINTRACK 013

SKANTIN 060

SKARDIN 223

SKINSAT 006

SKR 060

SKY 034, 050, 189, 227, 001

SKY MASTER 060, 133, 168,

170, 197, 215

SKY PLUS 002

SKYLAB 051

SKYMAX 033

SKYSAT 197

SKYVISION 059

SL 161, 165, 175, 186

SM ELECTRONIC 060

SMART 186

SONY 067, 211, 227

SR 222

STARLAND 060

STARRING 094

STARSAT 080

STRONG 017, 025, 179, 180, 186,

196, 211, 226, 235

STS 328

STV 014

STVI 014, 137

SUMIDA 175

SUNNY SOUND 226

SUNSAT 060, 223

SUNSTAR 163, 175, 186, 222, 226

SUPERCABLE 343

SUPERNOVA 189

TAGRA 059

TANDBERG 008

TANDY 085, 122

TANTEC 067, 108

TATUNG 067

TCM 116

TECHNILAND 013, 059

TECHNISAT 006, 028, 033, 047, 102

103, 181, 184, 224, 231

TECHNOWELT 164

TECO 025, 175, 222

TELASAT 164, 197

TELECIEL 180, 201

TELECOM 060

TELEDIREKT 077

TELEFUNKEN 017, 083, 171 , 172

TELEKA 026, 006, 047, 081, 103,

180, 161, 164, 175, 203, 210

TELEMASTER 179

TELEMAX 018

TELEPIU 320, 321

TELE PLUS ONE 320, 321

TELESAT 164, 197

TELESERVICE 311, 314

TELESTAR 006

TELETECH 215

TELEVES 006, 067

TELEWIRE 059

TENSAI 025, 094

TEVION 116

THOMSON 060, 049, 067, 128,

155, 164, 171, 172,

191, 205, 206, 211

THORENS 225

THORN 067

THORN-FERGUSON 023, 048, 067

TIOKO 135, 175

TLEWIRE 059

TOKAI 033

TONNA 060, 006, 013,

059, 067, 171, 210

TOPFIELD 011

TORX 341

TOSHIBA 067, 145

TPS 129, 205

TRENDLINE 222

TRENDPLAIN 222

TRGRA 088

TRIAD 085, 101, 127, 193, 194

TRIASAT 006, 220

TRIAX 060, 006, 033,

047, 211, 220, 230

TRISTAR 025

TUDI 327

TWINNER 115, 119

UNIDEN 058, 071, 080, 148, 208

UNISAT 033, 054, 175

UNITED CABLE 330, 341

UNITOR 051, 094

UNIVERSUM 003, 009, 071,

164, 165, 176

VAIADIGITAL 078

VARIOSAT 176

VARIOSTAT 176

VECTOR 178

VENTANA 033, 037

VESTEL 165

VIASAT 016

VIDEOCRYPT 023

VIDEOTRON 331

VIDEOWAY 331

VIDIO WAY 015

VIPER 054

VIRGIN MEDIA 063

VISIOPASS 309, 313, 329

VISIOSAT 060, 194, 200

VIVA 161, 162

VORTEC 017, 082, 083, 132, 142

VTECH 127, 194, 200, 204

WELA 060, 163, 169, 186

WESTMINSTER 335

WETEKOM 006, 197, 207

WEWA 067

WIBO 175

WINERSAT 094

WINTERGARTEN 168

WISI 006, 047, 067, 088,

123, 127, 164, 169,

176, 194, 200, 210

WITTENBERG 071

WOLSEY 085, 122

WOORISAT 179

WORLD 094

WORLDSAT 171, 172

XCOM 169

XCOM MULTIMEDIA 046

XRYPTON 226

XSAT 060, 046, 166, 169

YES 189

ZAUNKONIG 161

ZEHNDER 051, 080, 114, 127, 135

165, 179, 204, 226, 255

ZENITH 034, 314

ZETA-TECHNOLOGY 033

ZODIAC 180

ZWERGNASE 163, 175



Code page

ik kan de klank niet meer aanzetten, wat kan ik doen Gesteld op 1-6-2024 om 21:25
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
Kan mijn pc niet meer verbinden met mijn tv niettegenstaande deze is verbonden met een nieuwe kabel Gesteld op 30-12-2021 om 12:47
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
Kan geen verbinding krijgen tussen mijn pc en tv die is aangesloten met een kabel Gesteld op 30-12-2021 om 12:36
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
Met de afstandsbediening krijg ik geen contact met t.v. lampje van afstandsbediening knippert wel als ik op een zender druk. batterijen al vervangen. stekker uit de stopcontact gehaald, aan en uit knop boven ook geprobeerd.
Soms denk je even dat de t.v. het signaal oppakt, dan blijft het witte knipperlichtje hangen, maar begint daarna weer vrolijk verder te knipperen. Gesteld op 30-8-2021 om 19:50
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
Als de tv wordt ingeschakeld op kanaal 1 kan niet worden doorgeschakeld naar een andere zender zonder de tv uit te zetten en helemaal opnieuw op te starten Gesteld op 15-8-2021 om 21:45
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
aan en uit knoop knippert kan tv niet aanzetten wat is de reden hiervan Gesteld op 13-2-2021 om 09:19
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

Ik heb nu een andere Wifi modum. Hoe kan ik dit veranderen nu staat er Asus. Ik kan dit nergens weghalen en Ziggo invullen? Gesteld op 11-2-2021 om 17:46
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
mijn TV toestel een Loewe bild 3 is na vier uur automatisch uitgeschakeld
hoe krijg mijn toestel weer ingeschakeld ?? Gesteld op 2-2-2021 om 22:04
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
Hoe kan ik de ondertiteling tijdens een programma aan zetten? Gesteld op 31-1-2021 om 20:16
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
Groen licht brandt nadat ik hem gisteren nochtans uit gedaan heb Gesteld op 25-1-2021 om 10:40
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
kun je een programma opnemen of moet je dan een app erbij hebben? Gesteld op 8-1-2021 om 14:36
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
22/08/2020 bij aankoop TV. Electromic-Helsen in Herentals was geen gebruikershandboek downloaden dat de enz;van mijn loewetoestel beschrijf.Hopelijk komt dat in orde Gesteld op 27-12-2020 om 13:09
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

ik ben in het bezit van een nieuwe TV. zonder handeiding normaal moet die er bij zijn voor het gebruik van
de TV;
Gesteld op 27-12-2020 om 12:46
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
ik kan nadat ik een programma geen ander programma aanzetten zonder de tv uit te zetten en weer helemaal opnieuw te starten.
Gesteld op 1-10-2020 om 19:06
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
Uitschakelen van de functie,na 4 uur het beeldscherm uitschakelen(energieeffiecientiemodus. Gesteld op 22-4-2020 om 08:35
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
- Ik krijg van de dealer geen bevredigend antwoord. Geantwoord op 22-4-2020 om 08:40
  Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden
Hoe kan ik het geluid aanpassen (lees: de bass toon verminderen)? Gesteld op 7-2-2020 om 15:51
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
Uitzending gemist kijken lukt niet. Hij geeft dan aan. De opgevraagde aflevering is niet beschikbaar. Voorheen konden ze wel bekijken.
Wat is de oorzaak Gesteld op 5-3-2019 om 14:01
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
- Wij kunnen ook sinds begin maart geen uitzending gemist meer bekijken. Wij krijgen dezelfde melding dat de opgevraagde aflevering niet beschikbaar is. Geantwoord op 9-3-2019 om 16:29
  Waardeer dit antwoord (5) Misbruik melden

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

lees eerst de handleiding door;
controleer of uw vraag al eerder door iemand anders is gesteld;
probeer uw vraag zo duidelijk mogelijk te stellen;
heeft u een probleem en al geprobeerd om dit op te lossen, vermeld dit erbij aub;
heeft u een oplossing gekregen van een bezoeker dan horen wij dat graag in dit forum;
wilt u een reactie geven op een vraag of antwoord, gebruik dan niet dit formulier maar klik op de knop 'reageer op deze vraag';
uw vraag wordt direct op de website gezet; vermijd daarom persoonlijke gegevens in te vullen;

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Loewe Bild 3 bij:

nieuwe vragen en antwoorden
nieuwe handleidingen

U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Loewe Bild 3 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 10,9 mb groot.

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Loewe Bild 3

Loewe Bild 3 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 224 pagina's

Loewe Bild 3 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 225 pagina's

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.

Loewe Bild 3 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Andere handleiding(en) van Loewe Bild 3

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info

Loewe Bild 3 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Andere handleiding(en) van Loewe Bild 3

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info